AMIconfRef7-1part1

AMI ConfigurationCommands ReferenceManualPart 1MANU0471-06Revision A3-23-2001

Software Version 7.1.x

Marconi Communications

1000 FORE DriveWarrendale, PA 15086-7502

Phone: 724-742-4444FAX: 724-742-7742

http://www.marconi.com

http://www.marconi.com

Legal NoticesCopyright © 1995-2001 FORE Systems, Inc.

All rights reserved.

U.S. Government Restricted Rights. If you are licensing the Software on behalf of the U.S. Government (“Government”),the following provisions apply to you. If the Software is supplied to the Department of Defense (“DoD”), it is classified as“Commercial Computer Software” under paragraph 252.227-7014 of the DoD Supplement to the Federal AcquisitionRegulations (“DFARS”) (or any successor regulations) and the Government is acquiring only the license rights grantedherein (the license rights customarily provided to non-Government users). If the Software is supplied to any unit or agencyof the Government other than DoD, it is classified as “Restricted Computer Software” and the Government’s rights in theSoftware are defined in paragraph 52.227-19 of the Federal Acquisition Regulations (“FAR”) (or any successor regulations)or, in the cases of NASA, in paragraph 18.52.227-86 of the NASA Supplement to the FAR (or any successor regulations).

Restricted and Limited Rights Legend. Use, duplication or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as setforth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013(October 1988) and FAR 52.227-19 (June 1987).

Printed in the USA.

No part of this work may be reproduced in any form.

The software and this publication is provided by FORE Systems, Inc. “as-is” without warranty of any kind, either expressor implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose.FORE Systems, Inc. shall not be liable for any errors or omissions which may occur in the software or this publication, norfor any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary or consequential damages of any kind resulting from the furnishing,performance or use of the software or this publication.

Information published here is current as of the date of publication of this document. Because FORE Systems, Inc. isimproving and adding features to its products continuously, the information in this document is subject to change withoutnotice.

The VxWorks software used in the Mini Loader is licensed from Wind River Systems, Inc., Copyright ©1984-1996.

TRADEMARKSFORE Systems®, ForeRunner®, ForeRunnerLE®, ForeThought®, ForeView®, AVA®, CellPath®, Euristix®, Raceman®, andNetworks of Steel® are registered trademarks of FORE Systems, Inc.

ForeRunnerHE™, CellChain™, CellStarter™, PowerCell™, PowerHub™, ForeMan™, VoicePlus™, FramePlus™,StreamRunner™, EdgeRunner™, ATV™, All Roads Lead To ATM™, ASN™, MSC™, TNX™, Intelligent Infrastructure™,I2™, Netpro™, Zero Hop Routing™, Application Aware™, ASX™, ESX™, NSX™, ForeWare™, ServiceGrid™, DynamicProtection Switching™, Capacity Aware Routing™, Demarc™, ERP Express™, ForeView Foundation™, ForeView Son™,
ServiceOn Management™, Active Switch™, ChannelFore™, UserAware™, Evolution™, AuthentiFirst Agent™,NetResource Guard™, PriorSynch Solutions™, TAM™, and Technical Account Management™ are trademarks of FORESystems, Inc.
Network of Steel® is a registered service mark of FORE Systems, Inc.

CellStarter SM and Networks of Steel SM are service marks of Fore Systems, Inc.

FCC CLASS A NOTICEWARNING: Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance couldvoid this user’s authority to operate this equipment.

NOTE: The ASX™-200WG, the ASX-200BX, the ASX-1000, ASX-1200, the ASX-4000, the TNX™-210, and the TNX-1100have been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated ina commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installedand used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operationof the equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required tocorrect the interference at his own expense.

DOC CLASS A NOTICEThis digital apparatus does not exceed Class A limits for radio noise emission for a digital device as set out in the RadioInterference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications.

Le present appareil numerique n’emet pas de bruits radioelectriques depassant les limites applicables aux appareilsnumeriques de la class A prescrites dans le reglement sur le brouillage radioelectrique edicte par le ministere desCommunications du Canada.

NOTICEMarking by the symbol indicates compliance of this system to the EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) directive of theEuropean Community and compliance to the Low Voltage (Safety) Directive. Such marking is indicative that this systemmeets or exceeds the following technical standards:

• EN 55022 - “Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio Interference Characteristics of InformationTechnology Equipment.”

• EN 50082-1 - “Electromagnetic compatibility - Generic immunity standard Part 1: Residential, commercial,and light industry.”

• IEC 1000-4-2 - “Electromagnetic compatibility for industrial-process measurement and control equipmentPart 2: Electrostatic discharge requirements.”

• IEC 1000-4-3 - “Electromagnetic compatibility for industrial-process measurement and control equipmentPart 3: Radiate electromagnetic field requirements.”

• IEC 1000-4-4 - “Electromagnetic compatibility for industrial-process measurement and control equipmentPart 4: Electrical fast transient/burst requirements.”

VCCI CLASS A NOTICE

This is a Class A product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control Council for Interference by InformationTechnology Equipment (VCCI). If this equipment is used in a domestic environment, radio disturbance may arise. Whensuch trouble occurs, the user may be required to take corrective actions.

AUSTRALIA EMC COMPLIANCEThis product has been tested and found to comply with the Class A electromagnetic compatibility limits specified in AS/NZ 3548.

FCC REQUIREMENTS (Notice to Users of DS1 Service)The following instructions are provided to ensure compliance with the FCC Rules, Part 68.

(1) This device must only be connected to the DS1 network connected behind an FCC Part 68registered channel service unit. Direct connection is not allowed.

(2) Before connecting your unit, you must inform the telephone company of the followinginformation:

(3) If the unit appears to be malfunctioning, it should be disconnected from the telephone linesuntil you learn if your equipment or the telephone line is the source of the trouble. If yourequipment needs repair, it should not be reconnected until it is repaired.

(4) If the telephone company finds that this equipment is exceeding tolerable parameters, thetelephone company can temporarily disconnect service, although they will attempt to giveyou advance notice if possible.

Port ID REN/SOC FIC USOC

All DS1 Network Modules 6.0N 04DU9-BN/DN/1KN/1SN/1ZN RJ48C

(5) Under the FCC Rules, no customer is authorized to repair this equipment. This restrictionapplies regardless of whether the equipment is in or out of warranty.

(6) If the telephone company alters their equipment in a manner that will affect use of thisdevice, they must give you advance warning so as to give you the opportunity foruninterrupted service. You will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.

(7) An affidavit is required to be given to the telephone company to affirm that no encoded ana-log content or billing information is being transmitted.

CANADIAN IC CS-03 COMPLIANCE STATEMENTNOTICE: The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment meetscertain telecommunications network protective, operational and safety requirements. The Industry Canada label does notguarantee the equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction.

Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the localtelecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. In somecases, the company’s inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of a certifiedconnector assembly (telephone extension cord). The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditionsmay not prevent degradation of service in some situations.

Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by thesupplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give thetelecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.

Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines andinternal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important inrural areas.

Caution: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electricinspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.

E1 AND E3 NOTICEThe E1 and E3 network modules that are described in this manual are approved for use in FORE Systems, Inc.’s hostsystems providing that the instructions below are strictly observed. Failure to follow these instructions invalidates theapproval.

Pan European Approval - MarkingPan European approval of the E1 network module was issued by BABT following assessment against CTR12. This meansthat it can be connected to ONP and unstructured PTO-provided private circuits with 120 Ω interfaces in all Europeancountries, according to Telecommunications Terminal Equipment (TTE) Directive 91/263/EEC. Thus, the following CEmark applies:

The E1 and E3 network modules conform to safety standard EN60950 1992 following the provisions of Low VoltageProduct Safety Directive 73/23/EEC and CE Marking Directive 93/68/EEC, and can be marked accordingly with the CE

168X

symbol.

The E1 and E3 network modules conform to EN55022 1994 and EN50082-1 1992 following the provisions of the EMCDirective 89/336/EEC, and can be marked accordingly with the CE symbol.

National Approvals

UK

Required User Guide Statements - UK InstallationThe use of auxiliary products not authorized by FORE Systems, Inc. in FORE Systems, Inc. ATM Switches may cause thepower specification to be exceeded and is a potential safety hazard.

The equipment must be installed such that with the exception of the connections to the host, clearance and creepagedistances shown in the table below are maintained between the network module and any other assemblies which use orgenerate a voltage shown in the table below. The larger distance shown in brackets applies where the local environmentwithin the host is subject to conductive pollution or dry non-conductive pollution which could become conductive due tocondensation. Failure to maintain these minimum distances invalidates the approval.

NOTE: Installing the network modules in the appropriate FORE Systems hosts, according to the installation instructionsprovided, satisfies the requirements listed above.

The following tables show the available ports and their safety status:

NM-8/E1D and NM-4/E1D

Network Module Connects to Approval Number

E1 Structured and unstructuredPTO-provided private circuits

with 75 Ω interfaces

AA60953

E3 PTO-provided private circuitswith 75 Ω interfaces

NS/4387/1/T/605954

Clearance (mm) Creepage (mm)Voltage Used or Generated

by Host or by Network Modules

2.0 2.4 (3.8) Up to 50 Vrms or Vdc2.6 3.0 (4.8) Up to 125 Vrms or Vdc4.0 5.0 (8.0) Up to 250 Vrms or Vdc4.6 6.4 (10.0) Up to 300 Vrms or Vdc

For a host or other expansion card fitted in the host, using or generating voltages greaterthan 300V (rms or dc), advice from a competent telecommunications engineer must beobtained before installation of the relevant equipment.

Above 300 Vrms or Vdc

NM-4/E3D

Ports Safety Status

E1 Ports TNV operating at SELVBus Connector SELV

Ports Safety Status

E3 Ports TNV operating at SELVBus Connector SELV

SAFETY CERTIFICATIONSETL certified to meet Information Technology Equipment safety standards UL 1950, CSA 22.2 No. 950, and EN 60950.

Linux - PAMThe software which is the subject matter of this manual incorporates certain files commonly known as Linux-PAMsoftware (“Linux-PAM”). FORE Systems, Inc. is not in any manner to be construed as the author of the Linux-PAM. Theauthority of FORE Systems, Inc. to distribute the Linux-PAM is derived from the license contained in the following list ofconditions. FORE Systems, Inc. expressly disclaims any and all other right, title or interest in or to the Linux-PAM.

Any distributor of the Linux-PAM is required to reproduce the following copyright notices, list of conditions anddisclaimer in any associated documentation. The following copyright notices, list of conditions and disclaimer areapplicable to the Linux-PAM only.

Copyright © Theodore Ts’o, 1996. All rights reserved.

Copyright © Andrew G. Morgan <[email protected]>, 1996-8.

Copyright © Theodore Ts’o, 1996. All rights reserved.

Copyright © Theodore Ts’o, 1996.

Copyright © Andrew Morgan, 1996-8.

Copyright © Andrew G. Morgan <[email protected]> 1996-8.

Copyright © Andrew G. Morgan <[email protected]> 1996,1997.

Copyright © 1995 by Red Hat Software, Marc Ewing.

Copyright © 1996-8, Andrew G. Morgan [email protected].

Copyright © 1995 by Red Hat Software, Michael K. Johnson.

Copyright © 1998, Andrew G. Morgan [email protected].

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms of Linux-PAM, with or without modification, are permitted providedthat the following conditions are met:

(1) Redistributions of source code must retain any existing copyright notice, and this entirepermission notice in its entirety, including the disclaimer of warranties.

(2) Redistributions in binary form must reproduce all prior and current copyright notices, thislist of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materialsprovided with the distribution.

(3) The name of any author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from thissoftware without their specific prior written permission.

ALTERNATIVELY, this product may be distributed under the terms of the GNU General Public License, in which case theprovisions of the GNU GPL are required INSTEAD OF the above restrictions. (This clause is necessary due to a potentialconflict between the GNU GPL and the restrictions contained in a BSD-style copyright.)

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOTLIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSEARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR(S) BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENTOF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOW-EVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVENIF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

SSL (Secure Socket Layer)The software which is the subject matter of this manual incorporates certain files commonly known as Secure Socket Layersoftware (“SSL”). FORE Systems, Inc. is not in any manner to be construed as the author of the SSL. The authority of FORESystems, Inc. to distribute the SSL is derived from the license contained in the following list of conditions. FORE Systems,Inc. expressly disclaims any and all other right, title or interest in or to the SSL.

Any distributor of the SSL is required to reproduce the following copyright notices, list of conditions and disclaimer in anyassociated documentation. The following copyright notices, list of conditions and disclaimer are applicable to the SSL only.

Copyright © 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected]). All rights reserved.

This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young ([email protected]). The implementation was written so asto conform with Netscape’s SSL.

This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are adhered to. The follow-ing conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code.The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms, except that the holder isTim Hudson ([email protected]).

Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package isused in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in theform of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the follow-ing conditions are met:

(1) Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and thefollowing disclaimer.

(2) Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of condi-tions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials providedwith the distribution.

(3) All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the follow-ing acknowledgement: "This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young([email protected])." The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the routines from the librarybeing used are not cryptographic related.

(4) If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory(application code) you must include an acknowledgement: "This product includes softwarewritten by Tim Hudson ([email protected])."

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR APARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLEFOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUD-
ING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, ORPROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER INCONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAYOUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The license and distribution terms for any publicly available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed (i.e., thiscode cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution license, including the GNU Public License).

Copyright © 1998-2001 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the follow-ing conditions are met:

(1) Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditionsand the following disclaimer.

(2) Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of condi-tions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials providedwith the distribution.

(3) All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the follow-ing acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project foruse in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)."

(4) The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or pro-mote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For writtenpermission, please contact [email protected].

(5) Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL"appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.

(6) Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "Thisproduct includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit(http://www.openssl.org/)."

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRAN-TIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIB-UTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIALDAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OFUSE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABIL-ITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARIS-ING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCHDAMAGE.

This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected]). This product includes softwarewritten by Tim Hudson ([email protected]).

Table of Contents

Preface

Chapter Summaries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iRelated Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiTechnical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiTypographical Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivImportant Information Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vLaser Radiation Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viSafety Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii

Modifications to Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii

CHAPTER 1 AMI Overview

1.1 AMI Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 21.2 AMI Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 4

1.2.1 Implicit Command Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 41.2.2 Context-Sensitive Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 51.2.3 Partial Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 61.2.4 Command Completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 61.2.5 Generic Query Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 71.2.6 Wild Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 81.2.7 Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 81.2.8 Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 91.2.9 List Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 101.2.10 Command Line Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 111.2.11 Command Confirmations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 121.2.12 Canceling an AMI Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 121.2.13 Querying on a Non-Key Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 13

TOC - 1AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual • Part 1

1.3 Logging in to a Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 141.3.1 Login from the Serial Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 14

1.3.1.1 Login from the Serial Port with a Userid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 141.3.1.2 Login from the Serial Port with SecurID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 15

1.3.2 Login from Telnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 161.3.2.1 Using Password Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 161.3.2.2 Using Kerberos Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 171.3.2.3 Using SecurID Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 19

1.4 AMI Commands in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 21

Table of Contents

CHAPTER 2 Root Level Commands

2.1 exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 22.2 top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 22.3 up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 22.4 about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 32.5 connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 42.6 debug. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 42.7 ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 42.8 hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 42.9 history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 52.10 interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 52.11 redo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 52.12 redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 72.13 routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 72.14 rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 72.15 security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 72.16 services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 82.17 signalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 82.18 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 82.19 whereis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 8

CHAPTER 3 Connections Commands

3.1 connections atmifname . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 23.2 connections channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 3

3.2.1 connections channel delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 33.2.2 connections channel ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 4

3.2.2.1 connections channel ethernet delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 43.2.2.2 connections channel ethernet new. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 53.2.2.3 connections channel ethernet pair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 6

TOC - 2 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual • Part 1

3.2.2.4 connections channel ethernet show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 73.2.2.4.1 connections channel ethernet show -all . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 7

3.2.2.5 connections channel ethernet unpair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 83.2.3 connections channel new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 93.2.4 connections channel outputstat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 11

3.2.4.1 connections channel outputstat -advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 123.2.4.2 connections channel outputstat -packets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 13

3.2.5 connections channel qos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 143.2.6 connections channel show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 15

3.2.6.1 connections channel show -advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 163.2.7 connections channel statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 18

Table of Contents

3.3 connections destnsap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 193.4 connections oam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 20

3.4.1 connections oam f5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 213.4.2 connections oam genais. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 213.4.3 connections oam genrdi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 223.4.4 connections oam guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 223.4.5 connections oam received . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 23

3.5 connections path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 243.5.1 connections path term . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 24

3.5.1.1 connections path term delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 243.5.1.2 connections path term modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 253.5.1.3 connections path term new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 263.5.1.4 connections path term show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 30

3.5.1.4.1 connections path term show -advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 313.5.1.4.2 connections path term show -overbooking . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 323.5.1.4.3 connections path term show -qosext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 333.5.1.4.4 connections path term show -stats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 34

3.5.2 connections path through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 353.5.2.1 connections path through delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 363.5.2.2 connections path through new. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 363.5.2.3 connections path through outputstat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 38

3.5.2.3.1 connections path through outputstat -advanced. . . . . . 3 - 393.5.2.3.2 connections path through outputstat -packets . . . . . . . 3 - 40

3.5.2.4 connections path through show. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 413.5.2.4.1 connections path through show -advanced . . . . . . . . . 3 - 42

3.5.2.5 connections path through statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 433.6 connections qos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 44

3.6.1 connections qos delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 443.6.2 connections qos new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 453.6.3 connections qos show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 46

3.7 connections qosext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 47


3.7.1 connections qosext delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 473.7.2 connections qosext modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 473.7.3 connections qosext new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 483.7.4 connections qosext show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 48

3.8 connections spvcc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 493.8.1 connections spvcc parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 493.8.2 connections spvcc pmp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 52

3.8.2.1 connections spvcc pmp destparty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 533.8.2.2 connections spvcc pmp destroot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 543.8.2.3 connections spvcc pmp number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 543.8.2.4 connections spvcc pmp origination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 55

Table of Contents

3.8.2.5 connections spvcc pmp party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 563.8.2.5.1 connections spvcc pmp party delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 563.8.2.5.2 connections spvcc pmp party modify. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 573.8.2.5.3 connections spvcc pmp party new. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 573.8.2.5.4 connections spvcc pmp party reroute . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 593.8.2.5.5 connections spvcc pmp party show. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 60

3.8.2.6 connections spvcc pmp root . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 633.8.2.6.1 connections spvcc pmp root delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 633.8.2.6.2 connections spvcc pmp root modify. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 643.8.2.6.3 connection spvcc pmp root new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 643.8.2.6.4 connection spvcc pmp root show. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 66

3.8.2.7 connections spvcc pmp termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 683.8.3 connections spvcc pp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 69

3.8.3.1 connections spvcc pp delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 693.8.3.2 connections spvcc pp destination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 713.8.3.3 connections spvcc pp modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 723.8.3.4 connections spvcc pp new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 733.8.3.5 connections spvcc pp number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 773.8.3.6 connections spvcc pp show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 77

3.8.4 connections spvcc spans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 823.8.4.1 connections spvcc spans destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 82

3.8.4.1.1 connections spvcc spans destination delete . . . . . . . . .3 - 823.8.4.1.2 connections spvcc spans destination new. . . . . . . . . . .3 - 833.8.4.1.3 connections spvcc spans destination show. . . . . . . . . .3 - 84

3.8.4.2 connections spvcc spans source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 853.8.4.2.1 connections spvcc spans source delete . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 853.8.4.2.2 connections spvcc spans source new . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 863.8.4.2.3 connections spvcc spans source show . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 87

3.9 connections spvpc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 883.9.1 connections spvpc delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 893.9.2 connections spvpc destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 903.9.3 connections spvpc modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 91


3.9.4 connections spvpc new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 923.9.5 connections spvpc number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 953.9.6 connections spvpc parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 953.9.7 connections spvpc show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 97

3.10 connections spvxredundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 1003.10.1 connections spvxredundancy delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 1013.10.2 connections spvxredundancy modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 1013.10.3 connections spvxredundancy new. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 1023.10.4 connections spvxredundancy nsapaddr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 1033.10.5 connections spvxredundancy show. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 1043.10.6 connections spvxredundancy switchover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 105

Table of Contents

3.11 connections upc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1063.11.1 connections upc delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1063.11.2 connections upc fratm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 107

3.11.2.1 connections upc fratm new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1073.11.2.2 connections upc fratm show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 109

3.11.3 connections upc new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1103.11.4 connections upc new-abr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1113.11.5 connections upc new-cbr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1113.11.6 connections upc new-ubr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1123.11.7 connections upc new-vbr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1123.11.8 connections upc show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 117

3.11.8.1 connections upc show -advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1183.11.8.2 connections upc show -flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1203.11.8.3 connections upc show -loadbal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 121

3.11.9 connections upc units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 122

CHAPTER 4 Ethernet Commands

4.1 ethernet bridge — ESX-3000 Platform. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 24.1.1 ethernet bridge fdb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 2

4.1.1.1 ethernet bridge fdb flush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 24.1.1.2 ethernet bridge fdb show. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 3

4.1.2 ethernet bridge modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 44.1.3 ethernet bridge show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 44.1.4 ethernet bridge stp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 5

4.1.4.1 ethernet bridge stp configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 54.1.4.1.1 ethernet bridge stp configuration modify . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 54.1.4.1.2 ethernet bridge stp configuration show. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 6

4.1.4.2 ethernet bridge stp port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 74.1.4.2.1 ethernet bridge stp port configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 7

4.1.4.2.1.1 ethernet bridge stp port configurationmodify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 7

4.1.4.2.1.2 ethernet bridge stp port configuration


show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 84.1.4.2.2 ethernet bridge stp port status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 9

4.1.4.3 ethernet bridge stp status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 104.2 ethernet bridge — ASX-200BX, ASX-1000, ASX-1200, TNX-210, and TNX-1100

Platforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 114.2.1 ethernet bridge fdb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11

4.2.1.1 ethernet bridge fdb dest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 114.2.1.1.1 ethernet bridge fdb dest mcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11

4.2.1.1.1.1 ethernet bridge fdb dest mcast show. . . . . . 4 - 124.2.1.1.2 ethernet bridge fdb dest show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12

Table of Contents

4.2.1.2 ethernet bridge fdb flush. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 134.2.1.3 ethernet bridge fdb show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 14

4.2.2 ethernet bridge modify. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 154.2.3 ethernet bridge show. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 154.2.4 ethernet bridge static. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 16

4.2.4.1 ethernet bridge static delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 164.2.4.2 ethernet bridge static modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 174.2.4.3 ethernet bridge static new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 174.2.4.4 ethernet bridge static show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 18

4.3 ethernet igmp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 194.3.1 ethernet igmp routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 194.3.2 ethernet igmp show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 20

4.4 ethernet lec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 214.4.1 ethernet lec arp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 21

4.4.1.1 ethernet lec arp flush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 214.4.1.2 ethernet lec arp show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 22

4.4.2 ethernet lec show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 234.4.2.1 ethernet lec show -errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 244.4.2.2 ethernet lec show -vcc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 24

4.4.3 ethernet lec statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 254.5 ethernet mpc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 26

4.5.1 ethernet mpc ec. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 264.5.1.1 ethernet mpc ec flush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 264.5.1.2 ethernet mpc ec show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 27

4.5.2 ethernet mpc ic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 274.5.2.1 ethernet mpc ic flush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 274.5.2.2 ethernet mpc ic show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 28

4.5.3 ethernet mpc show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 284.5.4 ethernet mpc statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 30

4.5.4.1 ethernet mpc statistics -errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 314.5.4.2 ethernet mpc statistics -purge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 32


4.6 ethernet system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 334.6.1 ethernet system memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 33

4.6.1.1 ethernet system memory show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 334.6.2 ethernet system panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 34

4.6.2.1 ethernet system panic clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 344.6.2.2 ethernet system panic show. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 35

4.7 ethernet vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 364.7.1 ethernet vlan addports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 364.7.2 ethernet vlan delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 374.7.3 ethernet vlan new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 374.7.4 ethernet vlan removeports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 38

Table of Contents

4.7.5 ethernet vlan rename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 384.7.6 ethernet vlan show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 39

CHAPTER 5 Hardware Commands

5.1 hardware cecplus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 25.1.1 hardware cecplus alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2

5.1.1.1 hardware cecplus alarms modify. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 35.1.1.2 hardware cecplus alarms relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 3

5.1.1.2.1 hardware cecplus alarm relays modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 35.1.1.2.2 hardware cecplus alarm relays show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 4

5.1.1.3 hardware cecplus alarms show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 55.1.1.4 hardware cecplus alarms status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6

5.1.2 hardware cecplus ip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 65.1.2.1 hardware cecplus ip route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 7

5.1.2.1.1 hardware cecplus ip route delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 75.1.2.1.2 hardware cecplus ip route new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 85.1.2.1.3 hardware cecplus ip route show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 9

5.1.2.2 hardware cecplus ip show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 95.1.3 hardware cecplus modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 105.1.4 hardware cecplus rs232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 125.1.5 hardware cecplus show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 135.1.6 hardware cecplus snmptraps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 14

5.1.6.1 hardware cecplus snmptraps delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 145.1.6.2 hardware cecplus snmptraps new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 155.1.6.3 hardware cecplus snmptraps show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 15

5.1.7 hardware cecplus statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 165.1.7.1 hardware cecplus statistics icmp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 175.1.7.2 hardware cecplus statistics if. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 195.1.7.3 hardware cecplus statistics ip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 215.1.7.4 hardware cecplus statistics tcp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 235.1.7.5 hardware cecplus statistics udp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 24

5.1.8 hardware cecplus timing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 25


5.1.8.1 hardware cecplus timing modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 255.1.8.2 hardware cecplus timing references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 28

5.1.8.2.1 hardware cecplus timing references modify . . . . . . . . . 5 - 285.1.8.2.2 hardware cecplus timing references show . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 29

5.1.8.3 hardware cecplus timing show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 305.2 hardware chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 325.3 hardware dualscp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 33

5.3.1 hardware dualscp modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 345.3.2 hardware dualscp show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 365.3.3 hardware dualscp switchover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 385.3.4 hardware dualscp synchronize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 38

Table of Contents

5.4 hardware fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 415.4.1 hardware fabric modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 415.4.2 hardware fabric outputbuffers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 425.4.3 hardware fabric show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 455.4.4 hardware fabric statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 465.4.5 hardware fabric temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 475.4.6 hardware fabric thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 485.4.7 hardware fabric traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 49

5.4.7.1 hardware fabric traffic modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 505.4.7.2 hardware fabric traffic show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 51

5.5 hardware fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 525.6 hardware inputlookuperrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 535.7 hardware netmod. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 54

5.7.1 hardware netmod alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 555.7.1.1 hardware netmod alarms modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 555.7.1.2 hardware netmod alarms show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 56

5.7.2 hardware netmod application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 585.7.2.1 hardware netmod application modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 585.7.2.2 hardware netmod application show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 59

5.7.2.2.1 hardware netmod application show -appversion . . . . . .5 - 605.7.2.2.2 hardware netmod application show -bootversion. . . . . .5 - 605.7.2.2.3 hardware netmod application show -panicaction. . . . . .5 - 61

5.7.2.3 hardware netmod application upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 625.7.3 hardware netmod fram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 64

5.7.3.1 hardware netmod fram modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 645.7.3.2 hardware netmod fram show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 68

5.7.3.2.1 hardware netmod fram show -advanced . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 685.7.4 hardware netmod modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 705.7.5 hardware netmod panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 71

5.7.5.1 hardware netmod panic action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 715.7.5.1.1 hardware netmod panic action modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 71


5.7.5.1.2 hardware netmod panic action show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 725.7.5.2 hardware netmod panic clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 725.7.5.3 hardware netmod panic save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 735.7.5.4 hardware netmod panic show. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 73

5.7.6 hardware netmod reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 745.7.7 hardware netmod reset_pair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 755.7.8 hardware netmod show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 76

5.7.8.1 hardware netmod show -advanced. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 775.7.9 hardware netmod test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 78

5.7.9.1 hardware netmod test modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 785.7.9.2 hardware netmod test show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 80

Table of Contents

5.7.10 hardware netmod traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 815.7.10.1 hardware netmod traffic c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 81

5.7.10.1.1 hardware netmod traffic c models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 825.7.10.1.2 hardware netmod traffic c modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 835.7.10.1.3 hardware netmod traffic c show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 84

5.7.10.1.3.1 hardware netmod traffic c show-statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 85

5.7.10.2 hardware netmod traffic d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 865.7.10.2.1 hardware netmod traffic d channelStats . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 86

5.7.10.2.1.1 hardware netmod traffic d channelStats-loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 87

5.7.10.2.1.2 hardware netmod traffic d channelStats-queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 88

5.7.10.2.2 hardware netmod traffic d models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 895.7.10.2.3 hardware netmod traffic d modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 905.7.10.2.4 hardware netmod traffic d pathStats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 93

5.7.10.2.4.1 hardware netmod traffic d pathStats-loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 93

5.7.10.2.4.2 hardware netmod traffic d pathStats-queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 94

5.7.10.2.5 hardware netmod traffic d show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 955.7.10.2.5.1 hardware netmod traffic d show

-perclass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 965.7.10.2.5.2 hardware netmod traffic d show

-statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 965.7.10.3 hardware netmod traffic e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 97

5.7.10.3.1 hardware netmod traffic e buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 975.7.10.3.1.1 hardware netmod traffic e buffer

assign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 975.7.10.3.1.2 hardware netmod traffic e buffer

delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 995.7.10.3.1.3 hardware netmod traffic e buffer


modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1005.7.10.3.1.4 hardware netmod traffic e buffer

new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1005.7.10.3.1.5 hardware netmod traffic e buffer

show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1015.7.10.3.2 hardware netmod traffic e customBCS . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 101

5.7.10.3.2.1 hardware netmod traffic e customBCSdefault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 102

5.7.10.3.2.2 hardware netmod traffic e customBCSdefaultbcs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 102

Table of Contents

5.7.10.3.2.3 hardware netmod traffic e customBCSdelete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 103

5.7.10.3.2.4 hardware netmod traffic e customBCSmodify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 103

5.7.10.3.2.5 hardware netmod traffic e customBCSnew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 104

5.7.10.3.2.6 hardware netmod traffic e customBCSshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 104

5.7.10.3.3 hardware netmod traffic e modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 1055.7.10.3.4 hardware netmod traffic e show. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 106

5.7.10.3.4.1 hardware netmod traffic e show-aal5CntMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 107

5.7.10.3.4.2 hardware netmod traffic e show-memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 108

5.7.10.3.4.3 hardware netmod traffic e show-stats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 109

5.7.10.4 hardware netmod traffic lc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 1105.7.10.4.1 hardware netmod traffic lc channelStats . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 1105.7.10.4.2 hardware netmod traffic lc models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 1115.7.10.4.3 hardware netmod traffic lc modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 1125.7.10.4.4 hardware netmod traffic lc pathStats . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 1135.7.10.4.5 hardware netmod traffic lc show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 114

5.7.10.4.5.1 hardware netmod traffic lc show-statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 115

5.7.10.5 hardware netmod traffic oc48stats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 1165.7.10.6 hardware netmod traffic le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 117

5.7.10.6.1 hardware netmod traffic le channelStats . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 1175.7.10.6.2 hardware netmod traffic le models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 1185.7.10.6.3 hardware netmod traffic le modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 1195.7.10.6.4 hardware netmod traffic le pathStats . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 1205.7.10.6.5 hardware netmod traffic le show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 121

5.7.10.6.5.1 hardware netmod traffic le show


-statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 1225.7.10.7 hardware netmod traffic sf1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 123

5.7.10.7.1 hardware netmod traffic sf1 modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 1235.7.10.7.2 hardware netmod traffic sf1 show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 124

5.7.10.8 hardware netmod traffic pc1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 1255.7.10.8.1 hardware netmod traffic pc1 channelStats . . . . . . . . .5 - 1265.7.10.8.2 hardware netmod traffic pc1 customBCS . . . . . . . . . .5 - 127

5.7.10.8.2.1 hardware netmod traffic pc1 customBCSdefault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 127

5.7.10.8.2.2 hardware netmod traffic pc1 customBCSdefaultbcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 128

Table of Contents

5.7.10.8.2.3 hardware netmod traffic pc1 customBCSdelete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 128

5.7.10.8.2.4 hardware netmod traffic pc1 customBCSmodify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 129

5.7.10.8.2.5 hardware netmod traffic pc1 customBCSnew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 129

5.7.10.8.2.6 hardware netmod traffic pc1 customBCSshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 130

5.7.10.8.3 hardware netmod traffic pc1 models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1315.7.10.8.4 hardware netmod traffic pc1 modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1325.7.10.8.5 hardware netmod traffic pc1 pathStats . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1335.7.10.8.6 hardware netmod traffic pc1 show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 134

5.7.10.8.6.1 hardware netmod traffic pc1 show-statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 135

5.7.10.9 hardware netmod traffic pc2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1365.7.10.9.1 hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 136

5.7.10.9.1.1 hardware netmod traffic pc2 bufferassign5 - 137

5.7.10.9.1.2 hardware netmod traffic pc2 bufferdelete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 139

5.7.10.9.1.3 hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffermodify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 140

5.7.10.9.1.4 hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffernew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 140

5.7.10.9.1.5 hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffershow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 141

5.7.10.9.2 hardware netmod traffic pc2 customBCS . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1425.7.10.9.2.1 hardware netmod traffic pc2 customBCS

default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1425.7.10.9.2.2 hardware netmod traffic pc2 customBCS

defaultbcs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1435.7.10.9.2.3 hardware netmod traffic pc2 customBCS


delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1435.7.10.9.2.4 hardware netmod traffic pc2 customBCS

modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1445.7.10.9.2.5 hardware netmod traffic pc2 customBCS

new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1445.7.10.9.2.6 hardware netmod traffic pc2 customBCS

show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1455.7.10.9.3 hardware netmod traffic pc2 modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1465.7.10.9.4 hardware netmod traffic pc2 show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 147

5.7.10.9.4.1 hardware netmod traffic pc2 show-aal5CntMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 148

Table of Contents

5.7.10.9.4.2 hardware netmod traffic pc2 show-memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 149

5.7.10.9.4.3 hardware netmod traffic pc2 show-stats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 150

5.8 hardware port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 1515.8.1 hardware port ds1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 152

5.8.1.1 hardware port ds1 errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 1525.8.1.1.1 hardware port ds1 errors modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 1535.8.1.1.2 hardware port ds1 errors show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 154

5.8.1.2 hardware port ds1 modify. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 1555.8.1.3 hardware port ds1 show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 1575.8.1.4 hardware port ds1 statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 158

5.8.2 hardware port ds3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 1605.8.2.1 hardware port ds3 errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 160

5.8.2.1.1 hardware port ds3 errors modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 1615.8.2.1.2 hardware port ds3 errors show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 162

5.8.2.2 hardware port ds3 modify. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 1635.8.2.3 hardware port ds3 show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 1645.8.2.4 hardware port ds3 statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 165

5.8.3 hardware port e1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 1685.8.3.1 hardware port e1 modify. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 1685.8.3.2 hardware port e1 show. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 1705.8.3.3 hardware port e1 statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 171

5.8.4 hardware port e3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 1735.8.4.1 hardware port e3 modify. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 1745.8.4.2 hardware port e3 show. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 1755.8.4.3 hardware port e3 statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 176

5.8.5 hardware port ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 1785.8.5.1 hardware port ethernet auto-negotiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 178

5.8.5.1.1 hardware port ethernet auto-negotiationmodify — ESX-3000 Platforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 178

5.8.5.1.2 hardware port ethernet auto-negotiation


modify — ASX-200BX, ASX-1000, ASX-1200,TNX-210, and TNX-1100 Platforms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 179

5.8.5.1.3 hardware port ethernet auto-negotiation show . . . . . .5 - 1805.8.6 hardware port j2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 181

5.8.6.1 hardware j2 port modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 1815.8.6.2 hardware j2 port show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 1825.8.6.3 hardware j2 port statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 183

5.8.7 hardware port modify. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 1855.8.8 hardware port show. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 186

5.8.8.1 hardware port show -led. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 187

Table of Contents

5.8.9 hardware port sonet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1885.8.9.1 hardware port sonet errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 188

5.8.9.1.1 hardware port sonet errors modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1885.8.9.1.2 hardware port sonet errors show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 190

5.8.9.2 hardware port sonet modify. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1915.8.9.3 hardware port sonet show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 193

5.8.9.3.1 hardware port sonet show -status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1945.8.9.4 hardware port sonet statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 196

5.8.10 hardware port taxi. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1995.8.10.1 hardware port taxi modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1995.8.10.2 hardware port taxi show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 200

5.8.11 hardware port tp25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2015.8.11.1 hardware port tp25 modify. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2015.8.11.2 hardware port tp25 show. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2025.8.11.3 hardware port tp25 statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 203

5.8.12 hardware port traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2045.8.12.1 hardware port traffic c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 204

5.8.12.1.1 hardware port traffic c modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2055.8.12.1.2 hardware port traffic c show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2065.8.12.1.3 hardware port traffic c statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 207

5.8.12.2 hardware port traffic d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2075.8.12.2.1 hardware port traffic d modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2085.8.12.2.2 hardware port traffic d show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 211

5.8.12.2.2.1 hardware port traffic d show-advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 212

5.8.12.2.3 hardware port traffic d statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2135.8.12.2.3.1 hardware port traffic d statistics

-cellslost. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2145.8.12.3 hardware port traffic e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 215

5.8.12.3.1 hardware port traffic e modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2155.8.12.3.2 hardware port traffic e show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 216

5.8.12.3.2.1 hardware port traffic e show -queues . . . . 5 - 217


5.8.12.3.2.2 hardware port traffic e show -stats. . . . . . . 5 - 2185.8.12.4 hardware port traffic lc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 219

5.8.12.4.1 hardware port traffic lc modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2195.8.12.4.2 hardware port traffic lc show. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2205.8.12.4.3 hardware port traffic lc statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 221

5.8.12.5 hardware port traffic sf1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2225.8.12.5.1 hardware port traffic sf1 modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2225.8.12.5.2 hardware port traffic sf1 show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2235.8.12.5.3 hardware port traffic sf1 statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 224

Table of Contents

5.8.12.6 hardware port traffic le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 2255.8.12.6.1 hardware port traffic le modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 2255.8.12.6.2 hardware port traffic le show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 2265.8.12.6.3 hardware port traffic le statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 227

5.8.12.7 hardware port traffic pc1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 2285.8.12.7.1 hardware port traffic pc1 modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 2285.8.12.7.2 hardware port traffic pc1 show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 2295.8.12.7.3 hardware port traffic pc1 statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 230

5.8.12.8 hardware port traffic pc2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 2315.8.12.8.1 hardware port traffic pc2 modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 2315.8.12.8.2 hardware port traffic pc2 show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 232

5.8.12.8.2.1 hardware port traffic pc2 show-queues. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 233

5.8.12.8.2.2 hardware port traffic pc2 show-stats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 234

5.9 hardware portcard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 2355.9.1 hardware portcard reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 2355.9.2 hardware portcard show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 236

5.9.2.1 hardware portcard show -stats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 2365.10 hardware power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 2375.11 hardware scp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 240

5.11.1 hardware scp show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 2405.11.1.1 hardware scp show -prodnum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 242

5.11.2 hardware scp statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 2435.12 hardware tcm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 244

5.12.1 hardware tcm modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 2445.12.2 hardware tcm references. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 247

5.12.2.1 hardware tcm references modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 2475.12.2.2 hardware tcm references show. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 2485.12.2.3 hardware tcm show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 249

5.12.3 hardware tcm txbits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 251


5.12.3.1 hardware tcm txbits modify. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 2515.12.3.2 hardware tcm txbits show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 252

5.13 hardware temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 253

Index

Preface

Preface

Preface

This manual provides the technical information needed to configure the ATM ManagementInterface (AMI) for the ASX™, TNX™, and ESX™-3000 switches. This document was createdfor users with various levels of experience. If you have any questions or problems, pleasecontact the Marconi Technical Assistance Center (TAC).

Chapter Summaries

Chapter 1 - AMI Overview - Provides an overview of AMI features and syntax.

Chapter 2 - Root Level Commands - Contains a text and graphical description of the rootlevel AMI commands.

Chapter 3 - Connections Commands - Contains a text and graphical description of theconnections level AMI commands.

Chapter 4 - Ethernet Commands - Contains a text and graphical description of the Ethernetlevel AMI commands.

Chapter 5 - Hardware Commands - Contains a text and graphical description of thehardware level AMI commands.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual • Part 1 i

Preface

Related Manuals

References are made in this manual to the following manuals:

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual, Part 2 - Describes the interfaces, redundancy,routing, and security level AMI commands and menus.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual, Part 3 - Describes the services, signalling, andsystem level AMI commands and menus.

Multiservice Broadband Switch Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Manual - Describes the debuglevel AMI commands and menus. Also, describes error messages, loopbacks, SCP diagnostics,and ATM Forum PNNI debugging information.

Multiservice Broadband Switch Network Configuration Manual - Discusses topics such as LANEmulation, Classical IP, and ATM Forum PNNI.

These manuals can be found on the Technical Publications CD and can be read and printedusing Acrobat Reader which is also included on the CD. If Acrobat Reader is installed locally,run Acrobat and open the manual from the /DOCS directory of the CD. If Acrobat Reader isnot installed locally, run the Acrobat installer to load Acrobat Reader on your machine. Thenrun the ACROREAD.EXE file in the /DOCS directory of the CD.

ii AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual • Part 1

Preface

Preface

Technical Support

In the U.S.A., customers can reach Marconi’s Technical Assistance Center (TAC) using any oneof the following methods:

1. Go to Marconi’s World Wide Web technical support site:

http://www.marconi.com/tactics/index.cgi

2. Send questions, via e-mail, to:

[email protected]

3. Telephone questions to the TAC at:

1-800-671-3673 or 1-724-742-6999

4. FAX questions to the TAC at:

724-742-7900

Technical support for customers outside the United States should be handled through thelocal distributor or via telephone at the following number:

+1 724-742-6999

No matter which method is used to reach the TAC, customers should be ready to provide thefollowing:

• A support contract ID number

• The serial number of each product in question

• All relevant information describing the problem or question

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual • Part 1 iii

Preface

Typographical Styles

This manual uses different typefaces to represent different types of user input, systemresponses, and GUI objects.

Bold indicates GUI elements, control buttons and keys found on the keyboard. For example:

• Drag the ASX-1000 icon to the MPS container and click OK.

• Press Enter to proceed.

Courier font represents command line interaction and file names and paths. Bold Courierindicates commands and input that is typed by the user, and italic courier representsvariable parameters for which you must supply a value. For example:

• Issue the uname -a command and check that the SunOS version is 5.5.1 or 5.6.

• Enter et1516 in the ELAN Name field.

• From the \fvtop directory, change the current directory to \fvtop\install,and run the fvovlink script.

• You can also display spanning tree information for a specific node by entering thefollowing:

myswitch:routing pnni-> stmap -nodeindex <unsigned>

myswitch:routing pnni-> stmap -nodeindex 1

Menu items are shown in regular typeface, with > characters specifying submenus. Forexample:

• Select File>New>Shortcut.

• Select VLAN>Configure>Devices.

iv AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual • Part 1

Preface

Preface

Important Information Indicators

To call your attention to safety and otherwise important information that must be reviewed toensure correct and complete installation, as well as to avoid damage to the Marconi product orto your system, Marconi utilizes the following WARNING/CAUTION/NOTE indicators.

WARNING statements contain information that is critical to the safety of the operator and/orthe system. Do not proceed beyond a WARNING statement until the indicated conditions arefully understood or met. This information could prevent serious injury to the operator,damage to the Marconi product, the system, or currently loaded software, and is indicated asfollows:

WARNING! Hazardous voltages are present. To reduce therisk of electrical shock and danger to personalhealth, follow the instructions carefully.

CAUTION statements contain information that is important for proper installation/operation. Compliance with CAUTION statements can prevent possible equipment damageand/or loss of data and are indicated as follows:

CAUTION You risk damaging your equipment and/orsoftware if you do not follow these instructions.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual • Part 1 v

NOTE statements contain information that has been found important enough to be called tothe special attention of the operator and is set off from the text as follows:

NOTEIf you change the value of the LECS controlparameters while the LECS process is running,the new values do not take effect until the LECSprocess is stopped, and then restarted.

Preface

Laser Radiation Notice

Class 1 lasers are defined as products which do not permit human access to laser radiation inexcess of the accessible limits of Class 1 for applicable wavelengths and durations. Theselasers are safe under reasonably foreseeable conditions of operation. Do not view beam withoptical instruments.

Every Marconi network module having a single mode fiber optic interface contains a Class 1laser.

NOTEThis Laser Notice section only applies toproducts or components containing Class 1lasers.

Class 1 Laser Product:This product conforms toapplicable requirements of21 CFR 1040 at the date ofmanufacture.

vi AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual • Part 1

Preface

Preface

Safety Precautions

For your protection, observe the following safety precautions when setting up equipment:

• Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the equipment.

• Ensure that the voltage and frequency of your power source matches the voltageand frequency inscribed on the equipment’s electrical rating label.

• Never push objects of any kind through openings in the equipment. Dangerousvoltages may be present. Conductive foreign objects could produce a short circuitthat could cause fire, electric shock, or damage to your equipment.

Modifications to EquipmentDo not make mechanical or electrical modifications to the equipment. Marconi is notresponsible for regulatory compliance of a modified Marconi product.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual • Part 1 vii

Preface

viii AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual • Part 1

AM

IOverview

CHAPTER 1 AMI Overview

ForeThought switch software provides switch and connection management, IP connectivity,and SNMP network management. The Switch Control Software (SCS) resides on the SwitchControl Processor (SCP) and is the “brains” of the switch. The SCS controls the switch fabric(s)and handles connection set-up and tear-down duties. The SCS can also communicate withother Marconi switches to learn network topology and establish connections across multipleswitches. In addition, there is an SNMP agent built into the SCS to allow SNMP managementand control.

The user interface to the SCS is called the ATM Management Interface (AMI). AMI can be runon any Marconi switch running ForeThought switch software version 3.0.1 or later and anyTNX switch running ForeThought switch software version 5.1 or later.

Currently, there are three methods for managing a switch: via AMI, SNMP, or the ElementManager. This chapter contains a description of how to log in and navigate in AMI.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual • Part 1 1 - 1

AMI Overview

1.1 AMI Syntax

AMI is described throughout this chapter using the following conventions:

• All AMI output, including user prompts, is shown in courier font.

• All user input is shown in bold courier font.

• Each submenu is described in a separate section.

• Commands that are submenus are immediately followed by a “>” symbol. The“>” should not be entered as part of the command.

• Parameter values that require a choice are separated by vertical bars and areenclosed in parentheses “( | )” Neither the vertical bar nor the parentheses shouldbe entered as part of the command.

• Flag names are indicated with dashes “-”. The dash must be entered as part of thecommand.

• All port names and ATM interface (AtmIf) names are in BNP (board, networkmodule, port) notation. For example, 1A4 indicates the first switch fabric,network module A, port 4. For more information about port numbering, see theInstallation and Maintenance Manual for your switch.

• AMI commands are not case-sensitive.

• Integers that are input with a leading zero are interpreted as OCTAL numbers.Integers that are input with a leading 0x are interpreted as HEX.

The following is an example of the syntax:

myswitch:connections channel-> new

Usage:

[-iatmif] <AtmIf> Input AtmIf

[-ivpi] <integer> Input VPI

[-ivci] <integer> Input VCI

1 - 2 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual • Part 1

[-oatmif] <AtmIf> Output AtmIf

[-ovpi] <integer> Output VPI

[-ovci] <integer> Output VCI

[[-upc] <UPC Index>] UPC Contract (default: 0)

[[-name] <text>] Name

[[-ctype] <connection_type>] Connection Type

Some parameters are required and some are optional. Any flag or parameter that is enclosedin square brackets “[ ]” is optional. The following is an example:


AM

IOverview

AMI Overview

In this case, you do not have to specify the flag -iatmif, but you must specify the flagargument “<AtmIf>.”

In the following example, both the flag -upc and the flag/parameter pair are enclosed insquare brackets so neither need to be specified:


Commands may be entered in either of the following two ways:

1. You can enter the flags as part of the command. Once you enter an option in thisway, you must enter all subsequent options with the flag name (along with thedash) for each parameter that you are using. The flags may be in any order. Forexample:


Usage:










myswitch:connections channel-> new -iatmif 1a1 -ivpi 0 -ivci 100 -oatmif 1b2

-ovpi 0 -ovci 100 -upc 3

The flags may also be in any order when the flags names are used throughout asfollows:


myswitch:connections channel-> new -ivci 100 -iatmif 1a1 -upc 3 -ivpi 0 -oatmif

1b2 -ovpi 0 -ovci 100

2. You can simply enter the parameter values. However, these values must be enteredin the order shown in the command. For example:

myswitch:connections channel-> new 1a1 0 100 1b2 0 100 3

AMI Overview

1.2 AMI Features

AMI consists of commands placed in a directory hierarchy. AMI assumes an 80-columndisplay with 24 rows, but the number of rows can be adjusted using the rows command. (SeeChapter 2 in Part 1 of this manual for more information.) AMI works with any ANSI-compatible terminal and can be accessed via the serial port or through a telnet session.

1.2.1 Implicit Command PathAMI allows you to configure and to make statistical queries of various hardware and softwareaspects of ASX and TNX switches and network modules by providing a hierarchical directorysystem similar to a UNIX file system. The different levels of this hierarchy are calleddirectories. A single root directory provides a number of commands and subdirectories.

At any given time, the AMI prompt indicates your current location within the AMI hierarchy.The switch name is displayed in the prompt as shown by “myswitch:->” in the examples inthis manual. The prompt can be customized to display something other than the switch nameusing the system prompt command. (See Chapter 4 in Part 3 of this manual for moreinformation.)

You can traverse a directory one level at a time, or can traverse a number of levelssimultaneously if the entire command path is known. When a command is entered, AMIsearches an implicit path in the AMI command hierarchy to find the command. First, itsearches for the command in the current directory. If it cannot find any matches in the currentdirectory, it then searches the entire command hierarchy. For example, if you type r? you getthe commands and directories that begin with r as follows:

myswitch:-> r?

redo Execute a previous command

redundancy> The redundancy directory

routing> The routing directory

rows Show/Set the rows for this AMI session


myswitch:-> r

AM

IOverview

AMI Overview

1.2.2 Context-Sensitive HelpEntering ? provides a context-sensitive help message. If you enter ? at a blank command line,the commands and directories under the current directory are listed, along with a shortdescription of each. The following is an example:

myswitch:-> ?

exit Quit the AMI session

top Go to the top-level directory

up Go up one directory

about Display copyright information

connections> The connections directory

debug> The debug directory

ethernet> The ethernet directory

hardware> The hardware directory

history Show the history of commands for this AMI session

interfaces> The interfaces directory





security> The security directory

services> The services directory

signalling> The signalling directory

system> The system directory

NOTENot all of the above commands and directoriesare displayed on every platform. Theredundancy> directory not displayed on anESX-3000 switch. The ethernet> directory is


only displayed on an ESX-3000 switch.

Entering ? immediately after the command name, displays all of the commands that beginwith those letters.

Typing a command, an extra space after the command (to designate the end of the commandstring), and then typing a ? displays context-sensitive help for that command.

Entering ? does not change the line you are currently typing. When the prompt reappears,anything that you have typed before entering ? also reappears.

AMI Overview

1.2.3 Partial CommandsYou only need to enter the minimum number of letters in a command which would make thecommand unique to that level. For example, you could enter co c sh instead ofconnections channel show. However, the minimum number of letters entered must alsodistinguish the command from root commands, such as up. For example, you would have toenter upc to distinguish upc from the root command up.

You can also abbreviate arguments in a command as long as enough characters are entered todistinguish between arguments. For example, you could enter conn chan new -ia instead ofconn chan new -iatmif.

1.2.4 Command CompletionIf you type the first character of a command and press the <Tab> key, AMI attempts to finishtyping as much of the command at the current cursor position as it can until an ambiguity isencountered. If AMI cannot add any more characters to the command line because it is tooambiguous at that level, AMI lists all the possible choices that can entered at the current cursorposition. When performing command completion, AMI ignores all characters after the currentcursor position. If AMI cannot add characters and cannot provide a completion list, theconsole bell rings.

Here is an example of command completion:

myswitch:-> ro <Tab>routing rows

The <Tab> key does not remove the line you are currently typing, although it may addcharacters to it when it is able to complete a command. At this point, if you type u and hit the<Tab> key once more, AMI completes the command as routing since there is only onepossibility that starts with rou.


myswitch:-> routing

Pressing the <RETURN> key changes the prompt to the routing directory.

myswitch:-> routing <RETURN>

myswitch:routing->

AM

IOverview

AMI Overview

1.2.5 Generic Query MechanismThe generic query mechanism allows you to query on any argument in a command. Forexample, by simply typing the show command, you can display all of the channels.

myswitch:connections channel-> show

Input Output

AtmIf VPI VCI AtmIf VPI VCI ServCat Protocol Name

1A1 0 5 1CTL 0 45 nrtVBR fsig N/A


1A1 0 123 1A1 0 124 UBR pvc N/A


1A2 0 14 1CTL 0 36 UBR spans N/A

1A2 0 15 1CTL 0 35 nrtVBR spans N/A


Press q to quit, any other key to continue... q

You can also display just the channels that have an input VCI of 16 as follows:

myswitch:connections channel-> show -ivci 16

Input Output





NOTEWhen the prompt “Press <return> formore, or ‘q’ to quit...” is displayed,you may type any key to stop the output. Typingq simply stops the output. Typing any other


key(s) stops the output and echoes thosecharacters on the command line so that you maybegin typing a new command.

AMI Overview

1.2.6 Wild CardsAMI interprets an asterisk (*) as a wild card character. An asterisk matches zero or morecharacters. Each field in a query can have several asterisks. For example:

myswitch:security ipfiltering-> show 1*

Addresses being denied:

1.2.3.4

11.22.33.44

myswitch:security ipfiltering-> show *3*


1.2.3.4

11.22.33.44

The following example would delete signalling on all ports with a VPI of 3 or 4.

myswitch:signalling-> delete * -vpi 3|4

NOTEThis type of query can only be used with show,modify, and delete commands.

1.2.7 RangesWhen querying on a range, AMI interprets 2 dots (..) as the range operator. It matches againstany value that is defined as being in the specified range, inclusively. The range cannot containa wild card. The following are some examples:

myswitch:security ipfiltering-> show 1.2.3.4..7.0.0.0



1.2.3.4

6.7.8.9

The following example deletes all the SPVXs from 1 to 10 which have a -callingvpi of 32:

myswitch:connections smartchannel pnni pp-> delete 1..10 -callingvpi 32


AM

IOverview

AMI Overview

1.2.8 ListsAMI interprets a vertical bar as an OR operator. It matches against any of the query values inthe bar-separated list. Each field in a query can have several bar-separated members, each ofwhich can also contain wild cards. The following are some examples:

myswitch:security ipfiltering-> show 1.2.3.4|6.0.0.0..7.0.0.0


1.2.3.4

6.7.8.9

myswitch:security ipfiltering-> show *66*|*3*


1.2.3.4

11.22.33.44

66.77.88.99

The following example would delete signalling on all ports with a VPI of 3 or 4.

myswitch:signalling-> delete * -vpi 3|4

The following example would delete all SPVXs which have a -callingvpi of 32 or 34:

myswitch:connections smartchannel pnni pp-> delete * -callingvpi 32|34



AMI Overview

1.2.9 List TypesSome commands allow you to enter a list of items for one of the arguments on the AMIcommand line. The individual items in the list must be separated either by semicolons, or ifthe entire list is enclosed in either curly braces or double quotes, then the individual itemsmust be separated by white space or by semicolons. For list types that support tab completion,a range may be entered.

For example, the interface ima group new -imalinks <list of Dsx1If> command cantake a list of interfaces as its single argument. The following example shows various validmethods for entering a list:

myswitch:interfaces ima group-> new -imalinks 1a1;1a2;1a3

myswitch:interfaces ima group-> new -imalinks 1a1; 1a2; 1a3

myswitch:interfaces ima group-> new -imalinks 1a1 1a2 1a3

myswitch:interfaces ima group-> new -imalinks 1a1; 1a2; 1a3

myswitch:interfaces ima group-> new -imalinks “1a1 1a2 1a3”

myswitch:interfaces ima group-> new -imalinks “1a1; 1a2; 1a3”

myswitch:interfaces ima group-> new -imalinks 1a1-1a3

NOTEWhen using white space as a separator, you mustuse at least one space. More than one white spaceis also considered a valid separator.

These methods of entering a list apply to those AMI commands that require a “list of” type as


an argument such as interface ima group new -imalinks <list of Dsx1If> orservices lane les new -peerlist <list of NSAP Address>.

AM

IOverview

AMI Overview

1.2.10 Command Line EditingThis feature allows easier configuration of the switch. You scroll through the commandsstored in AMI’s history. Then you can edit the lines by deleting, inserting, and replacingcharacters. This is particularly useful if you need to enter several long command strings thatare similar.

When editing a line, the current cursor position is always in “insert” mode. Cursormovements are controlled using standard ANSI terminal escape sequences. Non-ANSIterminals are not supported.

The following key sequences are supported by this feature:

Key Sequence Description

up and down arrow keys The up and down arrows keys on a standard keyboard let you toggle through the historyof AMI commands. The up arrow displays the previous command in AMI’s history. Thedown arrow displays the following command in AMI’s history.

left and right arrow keys The left and right arrows let you move the cursor over a displayed AMI command. Thedisplayed line is not modified. Only the cursor position is changed.

Control-P This key sequence has the same effect as using the up arrow key.

Control-N This key sequence has the same effect as using the down arrow key.

Control-B This key sequence has the same effect as using the left arrow key.

Control-F This key sequence has the same effect as using the right arrow key.

Control-A This key sequence moves the cursor to the beginning of the line being edited.

Control-E This key sequence moves the cursor to the end of the line being edited.

Control-H This key sequence deletes the character before the current cursor position.

Control-D This key sequence deletes the character under the current cursor position.

Control-K This key sequence deletes everything on the line being edited from the current cursorposition to the end of the line. The deleted characters are saved in a temporary buffer.

Control-U This key sequence deletes all characters on the current line. The deleted characters are


saved in a temporary buffer.

Control-Y This key sequence restores the characters that were deleted by the last Control-K orControl-U sequence. This key sequence has no effect if nothing has been deleted.

Control-J This key sequence returns the current line to AMI to be executed.

Control-L This key sequence clears the terminal screen. The current AMI prompt and the currentAMI command are re-displayed at the top of the screen.

AMI Overview

1.2.11 Command ConfirmationsCertain command actions need to be confirmed. When an action is asked to be confirmed,AMI displays the messages, and then asks the user for confirmation. For example, if theconfirmation message is “This will cause the switch to reboot,” then the AMI session wouldlook similar to the following:

myswitch:-> reboot

WARNING: This will cause the switch to reboot.

Do you wish to continue? (y or n): n

myswitch:->

To abort the command, type n. To continue with the command, type y.

1.2.12 Canceling an AMI CommandTo cancel an AMI command in an AMI console or in a telnet session, use the Control-C keysequence.

• If the Control-C key sequence is entered for a command with multiple tableentries, such as modification of a table via a wild card, AMI finishes processingthe row that it is on at the time that the sequence is entered, and then aborts thecommand. This command is most useful if a long table is displaying and you donot wish to wait for it to complete.

• If the Control-C key sequence is entered for an action command, such as a filetransfer, the file transfer software continues the transfer. However, the interactivequestion and answer session in AMI is aborted, and AMI returns you back to theprompt.

• If the Control-C key sequence is entered while a command is waiting for userinput, AMI returns you back to the prompt.


AM

IOverview

AMI Overview

1.2.13 Querying on a Non-Key FieldForeThought 7.1.x and greater let you query on non-key fields when doing a modify from AMI.For example, if you wanted to change an IfName of an Index, but only knew the InterfaceName and not the Index, in releases prior to ForeThought 7.1.x, you had to first display theinformation as follows:

myswitch:interfaces if-> show -ifname 8C1

Index Name Type Speed Admin Oper Description

1025 8C1 atm 149759768 up down Atm Interface

Then you could modify the IfName of the associated Index as follows:

myswitch:interfaces if-> modify 1025 -alias chicago

However, in ForeThought 7.1.x and greater, you can simply enter the IfName (which is a non-key field) in braces to specify an extended query as follows:

myswitch:interfaces if-> modify -ifname 8C1 -alias chicago

1 entry was modified.


AMI Overview

1.3 Logging in to a Switch

You can log in to a switch in several different ways:

• via the serial port

• via telnet

• via Element Manager

The first two methods are described here. For information about logging in via ElementManager, please see the ForeThought Element Manager Quick Start Guide.

Initially, you must log in to the switch through the serial port.

1.3.1 Login from the Serial PortOn a new switch, there is one default userid: ami. This userid is configured with thepassword authentication method (the user is prompted for a login ID (userid) and apassword) and with an admin profile (meaning you are allowed to use all AMI commands)for http, telnet, and console (serial port) logins. This userid is assigned a null password.

NOTEOlder switches that have been upgraded mayalso have a default userid called asx. This useridis assigned a null password, and configured withthe password authentication method and anadmin profile for http, telnet, and console (serialport) logins.

1.3.1.1 Login from the Serial Port with a UseridWhen configured to log in with a userid, at the login prompt, you must enter your userid andthe password that has been assigned for your userid. For security reasons, the switch does notecho your keystrokes when you enter a password. For example:


login: ami<ENTER>

Password:

After you log in, if your userid has no assigned password, the following message is displayed:

Warning : This userid does not have a local password set.

Please type “security login password ami”

to set the local password.

AM

IOverview

AMI Overview

NOTEIt is highly recommended that you assign apassword to the ami userid and to the asxuserid (on older switches), since these useridshave admin privileges by default. For moreinformation, see the Multiservice BroadbandSwitch Network Configuration Manual and see Part2 of this manual.

NOTEAfter three unsuccessful login attempts, there isa five-second delay before you may attempt tologin again.

1.3.1.2 Login from the Serial Port with SecurIDIf you login with a userid that has been configured for SecurID authentication, you areprompted for a login ID (userid) and a password. For the password, you need to enter thetwo-part SecurID passcode.

The two-part passcode consists of: a secret, memorized personal identification number (PIN)and the current code generated by the user’s assigned SecurID token. After a validation checkis made, an AMI session is started (provided that a local AMI session is not already running).

login: securid_userid<ENTER>

Password: <PIN><Code on SecurID Token><ENTER>

If you enter an incorrect passcode three times in a row, you are prompted to enter the two-partSecurID passcode and the next Tokencode. At the next Tokencode prompt, wait until thedisplay changes on your SecurID token and enter either your PIN number and that next codenumber, or just that next code number.


login: test1

Password:

Login incorrect

login: test1

Password:

Login incorrect

login: test1

Password:

Login incorrect

AMI Overview

login: test1

Password:

next Tokencode:

Once you enter either the correct local password or the correct SecurID passcode, thefollowing is displayed and a session is opened on the SCP:

ATM Management Interface v7.1.0

Copyright (c) 1994-2001 FORE Systems, Inc.

General commands:

'?' to get list of commands at the current level

'up' to go up one menu level

'top' to go to the root menu

'exit' to leave AMI

myswitch::>

NOTEThere are several possible login scenarios. Seethe Multiservice Broadband Switch NetworkConfiguration Manual for your switch for a list ofscenarios and the action the switch takes foreach.

1.3.2 Login from TelnetThree different types of telnet sessions can be requested, depending on the authentication typeyou are assigned:

• password authentication


• Kerberos authentication

• SecurID authentication

1.3.2.1 Using Password AuthenticationTo telnet to the SCP, enter the following parameters at the > prompt on the host:

> telnet <address>

AM

IOverview

AMI Overview

This parameter is defined as follows:

For example, to telnet to an SCP with the IP address 204.95.89.231, enter the following:

> telnet 204.95.89.231

Only one user at a time may telnet to an AMI session on an SCP, although a user may belogged in through the serial port and another may be logged in through telnet at the sametime. If a telnet AMI session is already in use, and you attempt to log in through a telnetsession, you receive a message similar to the following and are prevented from logging intothe switch:

Sorry, this system is engaged.

Connection closed by foreign host.

If no other AMI session is running, something similar to the following is displayed:

Trying 204.95.89.231 ...

Connected to fishtank.

Escape character is '^]'.

S_ForeThought_7.1.0 (1.44214) (asx200bx) (fishtank)

1.3.2.2 Using Kerberos AuthenticationIf a DES encrypted telnet session has been requested and authentication has been successful,

Parameter Description

address The IP address of the SCP.


the following displays:

Trying 169.20.4.21...

Connected to fishtank.


[ Kerberos V5 accepts you as ``[email protected]'' ]

S_ForeThought_7.1.0 (1.44214) (asx200bx) (fishtank)

AMI Overview

If Kerberos authentication has failed, the following displays:

Trying 172.19.4.20...

Connected to magic-lab.


Authentication negotiation has failed, which is required for encryption.

Good bye.

S_ForeThought_7.1.0 (1.44214) indicates the version of software, (asx200bx)indicates what type of switch this is, and (fishtank) indicates the name that has beenassigned to this SCP. If (ATM SWITCH) is displayed for the SCP name, this means that no hostname has been assigned yet.

On a new switch, there is one default userid: ami. This userid is configured with thepassword authentication method (the user is prompted for a login ID (userid) and apassword) and with an admin profile (meaning you are allowed to use all AMI commands)for http, telnet, and console (serial port) logins. This userid is assigned a null password.

NOTEOlder switches that have been upgraded mayalso have a default userid called asx. This useridis assigned a null password, and configured withthe password authentication method and anadmin profile for http, telnet, and console (serialport) logins.

At the login prompt, you must enter your userid. Type your assigned userid for the login andthen enter the assigned password. For example:

login: myuserid<ENTER>

Password: <ENTER>


For security reasons, the switch does not echo your keystrokes when you enter a password.

NOTEAfter three unsuccessful login attempts, thetelnet session is disconnected.

If you do not log in and enter the password within 60 seconds, the telnet session times outwith the following message:

login: Login timed out after 60 seconds

AM

IOverview

AMI Overview

1.3.2.3 Using SecurID AuthenticationIf you login with a userid that has been configured for SecurID authentication, you areprompted for a login ID (userid) and a password. For the password, you need to enter thetwo-part SecurID passcode.

The two-part passcode consists of: a secret, memorized personal identification number (PIN)and the current code generated by the user’s assigned SecurID token. After a validation checkis made, an AMI session is started (provided that a local AMI session is not already running).

login: securid_userid<ENTER>

Password: <PIN><Code on SecurID Token><ENTER>

If you enter an incorrect passcode three times in a row, you are prompted to enter the two-partSecurID passcode and the next Tokencode. At the next Tokencode prompt, wait until thedisplay changes on your SecurID token and enter either your PIN number and that next codenumber, or just that next code number.

login: test1

Password:

Login incorrect

login: test1

Password:

Login incorrect

login: test1

Password:

Login incorrect

login: test1

Password:


next Tokencode:

AMI Overview

Once you enter either the correct local password or the correct SecurID passcode, thefollowing is displayed and a session is opened on the SCP:

ATM Management Interface v7.1.0

Copyright (c) 1994-2001 FORE Systems, Inc.

General commands:

'?' to get list of commands at the current level

'up' to go up one menu level

'top' to go to the root menu

'exit' to leave AMI

myswitch::>

NOTEThere are several different possible loginscenarios. See the Multiservice Broadband SwitchNetwork Configuration Manual for your switch fora list of scenarios and the action the switch takesfor each.


AM

IOverview

AMI Overview

1.4 AMI Commands in This Manual

This manual contains a detailed description of the AMI commands and directories. There areseveral commands and directories available at the root level. Directories are immediatelyfollowed by a “>” symbol.

The main root level directory is shown here.

myswitch:-> ?



















whereis Show old command to new command mapping

Not all of the above commands and directories


NOTE are displayed on every platform. Theredundancy> directory not displayed on anESX-3000 switch. The ethernet> directory isonly displayed on an ESX-3000 switch.

This part of the manual describes the commands and directories from connections> tohardware> and the root level commands. Please see the Multiservice Broadband SwitchDiagnostics and Troubleshooting Manual for a description of the debug> directory. Please seePart 2 of this manual for descriptions of the commands and directories from interfaces> tosecurity>. Please see Part 3 of this manual for descriptions of the commands and directoriesfrom services> to system>.

AMI Overview


Ro

ot

LevelC

om

man

ds

CHAPTER 2 Root Level Commands

This chapter provides a description of the root level AMI commands. By typing a “?” at theroot level prompt, the following list of available commands is shown:

myswitch:-> ?



















whereis Show old command to new command mapping


NOTENot all of the above commands and directories aredisplayed on every platform. The redundancy>directory is only displayed on an ASX-4000 switch.The ethernet> directory is only displayed on anESX-3000 switch.

These commands are described in the following sections in the order in which they display inAMI.

Root Level Commands

2.1 exit

The exit command lets you log out of the main AMI system. When entered, this commandends all open sessions on the switch control processor.

myswitch:-> exit

Goodbye

Connection closed by foreign host.

2.2 top

By entering the top command at any level, you are sent to the root level of AMI. For example,if you are at the debug signalling level and you want to go directly to the root level,simply enter top at the prompt.

myswitch:debug signalling-> top

myswitch:->

2.3 up

The up command allows you to go up one menu level. For example, if you are at the debugsignalling spans level and you want to go one level above that to debug signalling,simply enter up at the prompt.


myswitch:debug signalling spans-> up

myswitch:debug signalling->

Entering the characters .. has the same effect as entering the command up.

myswitch:debug signalling spans-> ..

myswitch:debug signalling->

Ro

ot

LevelC

om

man

ds

Root Level Commands

2.4 about

By entering the about command at the root level prompt, you can display the softwarecopyright information regarding AMI.

myswitch:-> about

Copyright (c) 1996-2000 FORE Systems, Inc., as an unpublished work.

This notice does not imply unrestricted or public access to these

materials which are a trade secret of FORE Systems, Inc. or its

subsidiaries or affiliates (together referred to as “FORE”), and

which may not be reproduced, used, sold or transferred to any third

party without FORE's prior written consent.

All rights reserved.

U.S. Government Restricted Rights.

If you are licensing the Software on behalf of the U.S. Government

(“Government”), the following provisions apply to you. If the

Software is supplied to the Department of Defense (“DoD”), it is

classified as “Commercial Computer Software” under paragraph

252.227-7014 of the DoD Supplement to the Federal Acquisition

Regulations (“DFARS”) (or any successor regulations) and the

Government is acquiring only the license rights granted herein (the

license rights customarily provided to non-Government users). If

the Software is supplied to any unit or agency of the Government

other than DoD, it is classified as “Restricted Computer Software”

and the Government's rights in the Software are defined in

paragraph 52.227-19 of the Federal Acquisition Regulations (“FAR”)

(or any successor regulations) or, in the cases of NASA, in paragraph

18.52.227-86 of the NASA Supplement to the FAR (or any successor


regulations).

VxWorks and FlashLib

Copyright (c) 1984-1998 Wind River Systems, Inc.

All Rights Reserved

Root Level Commands

2.5 connections

By entering connections at the root level, you can access a directory of subcommands thatallow you to configure different types of connections. These subcommands and menus aredescribed in detail in Chapter 3 of this manual.

2.6 debug

By entering debug at the root level, you can access a directory of subcommands that give youmore information which may help you to troubleshoot specific parts of the software. Thesecommands are described in detail in the Multiservice Broadband Switch Diagnostics andTroubleshooting Manual.

2.7 ethernet

By entering ethernet at the root level, you can access a directory of subcommands that letyou configure the Ethernet features supported by the ESX-3000 switch. These commands aredescribed in detail in Chapter 4 of this manual.

2.8 hardware

By entering hardware at the root level, you can access a directory of subcommands that allowyou to configure various aspects of the switch hardware. These subcommands and menus aredescribed in detail in Chapter 5 of this manual.


Ro

ot

LevelC

om

man

ds

Root Level Commands

2.9 history

By entering history at any prompt, you can list up to the last 50 previously typedcommands for that particular session:

1 about

2 history

3 hardware

4 ch

5 power

6 scp

7 show

8 stat

9 history

10 top

11 history

2.10 interfaces

By entering interfaces at the root level, you can access a directory of subcommands thatallow you to configure various aspects of the switch interfaces. These subcommands andmenus are described in detail in Chapter 2 of Part 2 of the AMI Configuration CommandsReference Manual.

2.11 redo

The redo command can be used in conjunction with the history command. It lets you


repeat a command that was given in the same open session. You can access this command byentering redo at any level. To repeat the last command that was performed, enter redo withno additional parameters as follows:

myswitch:-> redo

To repeat a command given within the last 50 commands in the same open session, enter thefollowing parameters:

Root Level Commands

myswitch:-> redo <command-number>


Type history at the prompt to list the last 50 previously typed commands for that particularsession as follows:

myswitch:-> history

1 oper env cpu

2 stat

3 ?

4 module

5 show

6 port

7 spans

8 stat scp tcp

9 udp

10 vcc

11 help

12 history

Then, to repeat a previously given command, type redo and the command number at theprompt. For example, to repeat command number 8, which is listing statistics for tcp, enterthe following:

myswitch:-> redo 8

tcp Counter Value


command-number The command and the number associated with the command that was previouslyperformed by the switch during this same session. Enter the history command to listthe previous commands and their associated numbers as shown in the following example.


------------------------------ --------------------

tcpActiveOpens 1

tcpPassiveOpens 49

tcpAttemptFails 0

tcpEstabResets 1

tcpCurrEstab 1

tcpInSegs 14060

tcpOutSegs 9967

tcpRetransSegs 0

Ro

ot

LevelC

om

man

ds

Root Level Commands

2.12 redundancy

By entering redundancy at the root level, you can access a directory of subcommands that letyou configure redundancy for the ASX-4000 switch based on SONET/SDH automaticprotection switching (APS). These commands are described in detail in Chapter 3 of Part 2 ofthe AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual.

2.13 routing

By entering routing at the root level, you can access a directory of subcommands that allowyou to configure routing. These subcommands and menus are described in detail in Chapter 4of Part 2 of the AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual.

2.14 rows

By entering rows at the root level, you can display/change the number of rows that theterminal displays.

myswitch:-> rows

24

myswitch:-> rows ?

[<integer>] number of rows the screen can display

The parameter is defined as follows:


2.15 security

By entering security at the root level, you can access a directory of subcommands that allowyou to configure security. These subcommands and menus are described in detail in Chapter 5of Part 2 of the AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual.


<integer> The number of terminal rows to be used.

Root Level Commands

2.16 services

By entering services at the root level, you can access a directory of subcommands that allowyou to configure various switch services. These subcommands and menus are described indetail in Chapter 2 of Part 3 of the AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual.

2.17 signalling

By entering signalling at the root level, you can access a directory of subcommands thatallow you to configure signalling. These subcommands and menus are described in detail inChapter 3 of Part 3 of the AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual.

2.18 system

By entering system at the root level, you can access a directory of subcommands that allowyou to configure various aspects of the switch system. These subcommands and menus aredescribed in detail in Chapter 4 of Part 3 of the AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual.

2.19 whereis

The whereis command allows you to map all ForeThought 6.0.x commands to thecorresponding ForeThought 6.1.x commands. To do so, you must enter the command in one oftwo ways:

1. Enter the old or new command as a full command (i.e., no abbreviations) and put


the entire command string in quotes, as follows:

myswitch:-> whereis “operation cdb restore”

OR

2. Enter the old or new command using abbreviations and putting * between thewords without spaces, as follows:

myswitch:-> whereis oper*cdb*rest*

Ro

ot

LevelC

om

man

ds

Root Level Commands

The following illustrates the second method and the associated result:

myswitch:-> whereis oper*cdb*

(system whereis)

Old Command : operation cdb backup

Equivalent New Command : system cdb backup

system batch create

system batch show

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

Old Command : operation cdb init

Equivalent New Command : system cdb init

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

Old Command : operation cdb reset

Equivalent New Command : system cdb reset

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

Old Command : operation cdb restore

Equivalent New Command : system cdb restore

system batch run

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

To query on a specific FT 6.0 command, type the following:

myswitch:-> whereis ?

[[-oldcmd] <text>] Old Command

[[-newcmd] <text>] New Command

NOTEPlease see Appendix A in Part 3 of the AMIConfiguration Commands Reference Manual for acomplete mapping of all FT 6.0.x to FT 6.1.xcommands.


Root Level Commands


Co

nn

ectiC

om

man

CHAPTER 3 Connections Commands

These commands let you configure different types of connections. You can display the list ofavailable subcommands by typing ? at the connections level.

myswitch:connections-> ?

atmifname Display the name for an AtmIf identifier

channel> The vcc/pvc directory

destnsap Compute NSAP address for SPVX with this switch as

destination

oam> The oam directory

path> The vpc/pvp/vpt directory

qos> The qos directory

qosext> The qosext directory

spvcc> The soft pvc directory

spvpc> The soft pvp directory

spvxredundancy> The spvxredundancy directory

upc> The upc directory


on

sd

s

Connections Commands

3.1 connections atmifname

The destination port (ATM interface) of originating PMP/PP SPVCs and PP SPVPs and thesource port (ATM interface) of terminating PMP/PP SPVCs and PP SPVPs is displayed as aport identifier (e.g., 0). If the destination port for an originating PMP/PP SPVC is displayed asthe port identifier x, you can convert this to BNP form by entering this command at thedestination switch with x as the <portidentifier>. For a terminating PMP/PP SPVC,enter this command on the originating switch to convert the source port identifier to its BNPformat.

myswitch:connections-> atmifname

Usage:

[-index] <integer> AtmIf Index



-index <integer> The ATM interface that you want to convert to BNP notation.


Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


3.2 connections channel

These commands let you configure Permanent Virtual Channels (PVCs), which are also calledVirtual Channel Connections (VCCs). In addition, the delete command lets you deleteSwitched Virtual Channels (SVCs). You can display the list of available subcommands bytyping ? at the channel level.

myswitch:connections channel-> ?

delete Remove a virtual channel


new Create a new virtual channel

outputstat Display output connection statistics

show Display virtual channel configuration

statistics Display virtual channel statistics

3.2.1 connections channel deleteThis command allows you to delete an existing PVC or an active SVC. For active SVCs, youcan delete point-to-point or point-to-multipoint SVCs. When using this command for point-to-multipoint SVCs, you can delete all, some, or one of the parties in connection. Enter thefollowing parameters:

NOTEWhen using this command for SVCs, you mayneed to perform other administrative actions toprevent call re-establishment between theaffected parties or to prevent additional partiesfrom being added to a point-to-multipoint call.In addition, depending on the endpointapplication, this action could result in the


on

sd

sendpoint releasing additional SVCs. Forexample, if you disconnect a LAN Emulationcontrol SVC between a LES and LEC, additionalSVCs may be disconnected between the LEC andLAN Emulation services.


myswitch:connections channel-> delete

Usage:







[[-upc] <UPC Index>] UPC Contract


[[-sigprotocol] <chan_sigprotocol>] Protocol


[[-servCat] <ServCat>] Service Category

These parameters are defined in Section 3.2.3.

3.2.2 connections channel ethernetThis command, which is displayed on ASX and TNX switch platforms equipped withEthernet port cards, lets you create and remove Ethernet channels, or display their attributes.You can display the list of available subcommands by typing ? at the ethernet level.

myswitch:connections channel ethernet-> ?

delete Remove an Ethernet channel

new Create a new Ethernet channel

pair Create a VC Pair

show Display Ethernet channel configuration

unpair Undo VC Pair

3.2.2.1 connections channel ethernet deleteThis command lets you delete an existing Ethernet channel. Enter the following parameters:


myswitch:connections channel ethernet-> delete

Usage:

[-iif] <EthernetAtmIf> Input If

[-ivpi] <integer> Input VPI(Required for AtmIf)

[-ivci] <integer> Input VCI(Required for AtmIf)

[-oif] <EthernetAtmIf> Output If

[-ovpi] <integer> Output VPI(Required for AtmIf)

[-ovci] <integer> Output VCI(Required for AtmIf)

[[-index] <integer>] Index used in pairing

[[-partner] <integer>] Index of the VC partner

These parameters are defined in Section 3.2.2.2.

Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


3.2.2.2 connections channel ethernet newThis command lets you create a new Ethernet channel. Enter the following parameters:

myswitch:connections channel ethernet-> new

Usage:

[-iif] <EthernetAtmIf> Input If

[[-ivpi] <integer>] Input VPI(Required for AtmIf)

[[-ivci] <integer>] Input VCI(Required for AtmIf)

[-oif] <EthernetAtmIf> Output If

[[-ovpi] <integer>] Output VPI(Required for AtmIf)

[[-ovci] <integer>] Output VCI(Required for AtmIf)

The parameters for delete and new are defined as follows:


-iif <EthernetAtmIf> The incoming Ethernet/ATM interface number.

-ivpi <integer> The incoming virtual path number. This is a required field if the input interface is ATM; ifthe input interface is Ethernet, however, these values cannot be specified (the switchautomatically allocates these values.)

-ivci <integer> The incoming virtual channel number. This is a required field if the input interface is ATM;if the input interface is Ethernet, however, these values cannot be specified.

-oif <EthernetAtmIf> The outgoing Ethernet/ATM interface number.

-ovpi <integer> The outgoing virtual path number. This is a required field if the output interface is ATM; ifthe output interface is Ethernet, however, these values cannot be specified.

-ovci <integer> The outgoing virtual channel number. This is a required field if the output interface isATM; if the output interface is Ethernet, however, these values cannot be specified (theswitch automatically allocates these values.)


on

sd

s


3.2.2.3 connections channel ethernet pairThis command lets you create a VC pair. Enter the following parameters:

myswitch:connections channel ethernet-> pair

Usage:

[-index1] <integer> Index of first VC

[-index2] <integer> Index of second VC

These parameters are defined as follows:


-index1 <integer> The index that uniquely identifies the first VC in the pair.

-index2 <integer> The index that uniquely identifies the second VC in the pair.


Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


3.2.2.4 connections channel ethernet showThis command allows you to display existing Ethernet channels. Enter the followingparameters:

myswitch:connections channel ethernet-> show

Input Output

If VPI VCI If VPI VCI

2B1 0 200 2D1 0 200

2B1 0 200 2D1 0 401

2B2 0 201 2D1 0 505

2B3 0 202 2D1 0 506

2B4 0 203 2D1 0 507

2C1 0 200 2D1 0 101

2C1 0 200 2D1 0 402

2C2 0 201 2D1 0 400

2D1 0 101 2C1 0 200

2D1 0 200 2B1 0 200

The fields in this display are defined as follows:

3.2.2.4.1 connections channel ethernet show -all

Field Description

Input If The incoming Ethernet/ATM interface number of the virtual channel.

Input VPI The incoming virtual path number.

Input VCI The incoming virtual channel number.

Output If The outgoing Ethernet/ATM interface number of the virtual channel.

Output VPI The outgoing virtual path number.

Output VCI The outgoing virtual channel number.


on

sd

sThis command allows you to display existing Ethernet channels including channel indicesand pairing partners. Enter the following parameters:

myswitch:connections channel ethernet-> show -all

Input Output

Index If VPI VCI If VPI VCI Partner

1 2A1 0 39 2D1 0 101 2

5 2A2 0 41 2D1 0 201 4

2 2D1 0 101 2A1 0 39 1

4 2D1 0 201 2A2 0 40 5


3.2.2.5 connections channel ethernet unpairThis command lets you undo a VC pair. Enter the following parameters:

myswitch:connections channel ethernet-> unpair

Usage:

[-index1] <integer> Index of first VC

[-index2] <integer> Index of second VC



-index1 <integer> The index that uniquely identifies the first VC in the pair.

-index2 <integer> The index that uniquely identifies the second VC in the pair.


Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


3.2.3 connections channel newThis command lets you create a new PVC. Enter the following parameters:


Usage:












-iatmif <AtmIf> The incoming ATM interface number.

-ivpi <integer> The incoming virtual path number.

-ivci <integer> The incoming virtual channel number.

-ivpi <integer> The incoming virtual path number.

-oatmif <AtmIf> The outgoing ATM interface number.

-ovpi <integer> The outgoing virtual path number.

-ovci <integer> The outgoing virtual channel number.

-upc <UPC Index> The integer index that refers to a specific UPC traffic contract. If no index is specified, thenno traffic policing will take place on this VCI. It is assigned a default UPC index of 0, andall traffic on this VCI is treated as UBR traffic.


on

sd

s-name <text> The name you want to assign to this PVC to identify it uniquely. It is useful for billingpurposes so you can identify which PVCs are being used by which customers. Can be upto 32 ASCII characters long.

-sigprotocol<chan_sigprotocol>

Indicates what type of signalling protocol is running on this channel.


-ctype <connection_type> The channel connection type for the incoming channel. For billing purposes, it denotes onwhich switch this PVC is arriving. Valid entries are a combination of the followingparameters (e.g., thru-term-pmp or orig-term-mpp, etc.):

• orig (originating) means that the ingress endpoint of the channel is connected to thesource node which is outside the network.

• thru (through) means that the ingress endpoint of the channel is connected to a nodewithin the network.

• term (terminating) means that the ingress endpoint of the channel is connected to thedestination node which is outside the network.

• pp means this is a point-to-point PVC.

• pmp means this is a point-to-multipoint PVC.

• mpp means this is a multipoint-to-point PVC.

• mpmp means this is a multipoint-to-multipoint PVC.

NOTE: By indicating pp, pmp, mpp, or mpmp, you are only assigning a label for recordkeeping purposes. The switch does not necessarily create the type of PVC you havespecified. If you assign a connection type, but do not assign a pp, pmp, mpp, or mpmp label,the switch assigns a label of pp (point-to-point).



Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


3.2.4 connections channel outputstatYou can show VCC traffic statistics for individual network modules. The fields that aredisplayed vary depending on the type of network module on which the connections areoutput. This command does not apply to Series C network modules.

If the connections are output on a Series D network module, the display varies depending onwhether or not the module packet counter is disabled. If the module packet counter is enabledunder hardware netmod traffic d modify -aal5pktcount, the CLP0 and CLP1 cellsare combined into a single CLP0+1 Tx count. If the module packet counter is disabled underhardware netmod traffic d modify -aal5pktcount (the default setting), the followingis displayed:

myswitch:connections channel-> outputstat

Input Output C e l l s

AtmIf VPI VCI AtmIf VPI VCI Transmitted Lost

1CTL 0 49 1A1 0 5 2 0

1CTL 0 50 1A1 0 16 53208 0

1A1 0 400 1A1 0 400 0 0

1CTL 0 51 1A2 0 5 29267 0

1CTL 0 52 1A2 0 16 144600 0


The fields in these displays are defined as follows:

Field Description

Input AtmIf The incoming ATM interface number.



Output AtmIf The outgoing ATM interface number.


on

sd

s



Cells Transmitted The total number of cells transmitted on this channel.

Cells Lost The total number of cells lost on this channel.


3.2.4.1 connections channel outputstat -advancedYou can display advanced statistics as follows:

myswitch:connections channel-> outputstat -advanced

Input/Output Cells Transmitted C e l l s L o s t

AtmIf VPI VCI C L P 0 C L P 1 Intentional Unintentional

1CTL 0 49

1A1 0 5 2 0 N/A N/A

1CTL 0 50

1A1 0 16 53224 0 N/A N/A

1A1 0 400

1A1 0 400 0 0 N/A N/A

1CTL 0 51

1A2 0 5 29276 0 N/A N/A

1CTL 0 52

1A2 0 16 144638 0 N/A N/A

Press <return> for more, or 'q' to quit...q


Field Description

Input/Output AtmIf The incoming/outgoing ATM interface number.

Input/Output VPI The incoming/outgoing virtual path number.

Input/Output VCI The incoming/outgoing virtual channel number.

Cells Transmitted CLP0 The number of CLP=0 cells transmitted on this channel.

Cells Transmitted CLP1 The number of CLP=1 cells transmitted on this channel.

CellsLost Intentional For AAL5 traffic, counts the first cell of each packet dropped on this channel due to PPD(Partial Packet Discard). For non-AAL5 traffic, this counter is not incremented.

CellsLost Unintentional For AAL5 traffic, counts only the first cell of each packet lost on this channel when output


shared memory is full or when the per-port/per-priority CLP (Cell Loss Priority)thresholds are exceeded. All remaining cells are counted under the CellsLostIntentional counter. For non-AAL5 traffic, counts all cells lost on this channel whenoutput shared memory is full or when the per-port/per-priority CLP (Cell Loss Priority)thresholds are exceeded.

Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


3.2.4.2 connections channel outputstat -packetsYou can display packet statistics as follows:

myswitch:connections channel-> outputstat -packets

Input Output P a c k e t s

AtmIf VPI VCI AtmIf VPI VCI Transmitted Lost

1CTL 0 49 1A1 0 5 N/A 0

1CTL 0 50 1A1 0 16 N/A N/A

1A1 0 400 1A1 0 400 N/A N/A

1CTL 0 51 1A2 0 5 N/A 0

1CTL 0 52 1A2 0 16 N/A N/A

1CTL 0 53 1A3 0 5 N/A 0

1CTL 0 54 1A3 0 16 N/A N/A

1CTL 0 55 1A4 0 5 N/A 0

1CTL 0 56 1A4 0 16 N/A N/A

1CTL 0 65 1C1 0 5 N/A N/A

1CTL 0 66 1C1 0 16 N/A N/A

1CTL 0 67 1C2 0 5 N/A N/A

1CTL 0 68 1C2 0 16 N/A N/A

1CTL 0 69 1C3 0 5 N/A N/A

1CTL 0 70 1C3 0 16 N/A N/A

1CTL 0 71 1C4 0 5 N/A N/A

1CTL 0 72 1C4 0 16 N/A N/A


Field Description





on

sd

sOutput AtmIf The outgoing ATM interface number.



Packets Transmitted The total number of packets transmitted on this channel.

Packets Lost The total number of packets lost on this channel.


3.2.5 connections channel qosThe connections channel qos command enables Quality of Service (QOS) information tobe displayed for all SVCs on the switch.

myswitch:connections channel-> qos

Input ---Policing---

AtmIf VPI VCI Service PCR SCR MBS CDVT AAL5 On? Actn Scheme

1A1 0 100 UBR N/A N/A N/A 250 yes no drop ubr1













Press <return> for more, or 'q' to quit...


Field Description


VPI The incoming virtual path number.

VCI The incoming virtual channel number.

Services The traffic type on the virtual channel. They include: CBR, rtVBR, nrtVBR, ABR, and UBR.


PCR The peak cell rate (PCR), specified in cells/second.

SCR The sustained cell rate (SCR), specified in cells/second. This field also identifies the PCR0value for cbr0 and cbr0tag schemes.

MBS The maximum burst size (MBS), specified in cells.

CDVT The channel cell delay variation tolerance (CDVT), specified in microseconds. This valueindicates the time window in which a cell may be received on a channel and be accepted.A cell received on a channel outside of the CDV window will be dropped or tagged, basedon the Policing Action value. The CDV value overrides the default value of the link.

AAL5 This value indicates whether the connection is AAL 5 or not.

Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


3.2.6 connections channel showThis command allows you to display existing PVCs. To list all of the existing PVCs on anindividual switch fabric, enter the following parameters:

myswitch:connections channel-> show

Input Output














Policing On? This value determines whether or not the connection is policed for traffic violations. yesindicates that the connection is to be policed. This value will override the policing statusof the ATM interface on which the connection is established. no indicates that the connec-tion is not policed.

Policing Action This value determines whether the cell will be tagged (tag) or dropped (drop), if it wasreceived outside of the CDVT window.

Policing Scheme The policing associated with the UPC contract as defined in the ATM Forum 4.0 specifica-tions. They include: cbr1, cbr0, cbr0tag, vbr1, vbr2, vbr3, abr1, ubr1, and ubr2.The schemes specific to Marconi switches are cbr0 and cbr0tag.

Field Description


on

sd

s




3.2.6.1 connections channel show -advancedTo list advanced information about all of the existing PVCs on a switch fabric, enter thefollowing parameters:

myswitch:connections channel-> show -advanced

Input Output

AtmIf VPI VCI AtmIf VPI VCI UPC Protocol ConType

1A1 0 5 1CTL 0 37 N/A fsig N/A

1A1 0 14 1CTL 0 36 N/A spans N/A


1A1 0 16 1CTL 0 38 N/A fsig N/A




Field Description

Input AtmIf The incoming ATM interface number of the virtual channel.



Output AtmIf The outgoing ATM interface number of the virtual channel.



ServCat The traffic type on this virtual channel.

Protocol Indicates what type of signalling protocol is running on this channel. Can be spans, pvc,fsig, spvc, or rcc. rcc is the routing control channel (0, 18) on PNNI links over whichPNNI exchanges routing information. fsig stands for ATM Forum signalling.

Name The unique, user-assigned name for this PVC. If no name is assigned, shows N/A.


1A2 0 16 1CTL 0 42 N/A fsig N/A




1A3 0 16 1CTL 0 46 N/A fsig N/A


Co

nn

ectiC

om

man



Field Description

Input AtmIf The incoming ATM interface number of the virtual channel.



Output AtmIf The outgoing ATM interface number of the virtual channel.



UPC The integer index that refers to the specific UPC traffic contract assigned to this VCI.

Protocol Indicates what type of signalling protocol is running on this channel. Can be spans, pvc,fsig, spvc, or rcc. rcc is the routing control channel (0, 18) on PNNI links over whichPNNI exchanges routing information. fsig stands for ATM Forum signalling.

ConType The connection type for the endpoints of this PVC with respect to a particular network.


on

sd

s


3.2.7 connections channel statisticsYou can display virtual channel statistics as follows:

myswitch:connections channel-> statistics

Input Output Cells Cells

AtmIf VPI VCI AtmIf VPI VCI Uptime Received Rejected

4A1 0 5 4CTL 0 37 19:14 9236 0

4A1 0 14 4CTL 0 36 19:14 248156 0

4A1 0 15 4CTL 0 35 19:14 565063 0

4A1 0 16 4CTL 0 38 19:14 103979 0

4A1 0 18 4CTL 0 111 19:14 30761 0

4A2 0 5 4CTL 0 41 19:14 0 0

4A2 0 14 4CTL 0 40 19:14 0 0

4A2 0 15 4CTL 0 39 19:14 0 0

4A2 0 16 4CTL 0 42 19:14 0 0



Field Description







Uptime The length of time that this virtual channel has been in its current state.

Cells Received The total (aggregate) number of cells that were transferred over this channel.


Cells Rejected The total (aggregate) number of cells over this channel that were rejected (dropped) by thehardware due to a traffic policing violation. This does not include any cells that may havebeen tagged with CLP=1 by the policer, only cells that were discarded.

Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


3.3 connections destnsap

This command is used at the destination switch to obtain the NSAP address to be used as the<destnsap> parameter under the connections spvcc pp new command or <nsap>parameter under the connections spvcc pmp party new command at the source switch.

myswitch:connections-> destnsap ?

[[-domainid] <integer>] Domain ID

[[-atmif] <AtmIf>] AtmIf

[[-nsap] <NSAP Address>] Destination NSAP Address


All of the destination NSAP addresses can be displayed as follows:

myswitch:connections-> destnsap

Domain AtmIf Destination NSAP

1 7A1 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f258.0134.0020480d0180.00

1 7A2 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f258.0134.0020480d0181.00

1 7A3 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f258.0134.0020480d0182.00

1 7A4 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f258.0134.0020480d0183.00

1 7B1 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f258.0134.0020480d0190.00


-domainid <integer> The PNNI domain ID number on the destination switch fabric. The prefix correspondingto that routing domain is used to compute the destination NSAP address. For a list ofvalid domain identifiers, use the routing domain show command.

-atmif <AtmIf> The ATM interface on which the permanent portion of the SPVC needs to terminate on thedestination switch.

-nsap <NSAP Address> The NSAP address of this ATM interface in this domain.


on

sd

s1 7B2 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f258.0134.0020480d0191.00

1 7B3 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f258.0134.0020480d0192.00

1 7B4 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f258.0134.0020480d0193.00

1 CTL 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f258.0134.0020480d0200.00

These fields are defined in the previous example. A specific NSAP address can be displayed asfollows:

myswitch:connections-> destnsap -domain 1 -atmif 7a1

Domain AtmIf Destination NSAP

1 7A1 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f258.0134.0020480d0180.00


3.4 connections oam

When a physical layer fault (loss of carrier, loss of frame, etc.) is detected on a port that hasAIS/RDI (Alarm Indication Signal)/(Remote Defect Indication) enabled, OAM cells aregenerated for all through paths, originating paths, PVCs, and PNNI SPVCs that originate onthat port. If a virtual path AIS condition is indicated (by receipt of F4 AIS cells on aterminating path), OAM cells are generated for only that path and for channels (PVCs andPNNI SPVCs) that originate on that path.

An AIS is sent in the downstream direction (away from the failure). Receiving an AIS cellindicates that a physical layer failure condition is present upstream from the receiver. An RDIcell is sent toward the failure when a physical fault or AIS condition is detected on the virtualpath and channel. Receiving an RDI cell indicates that a fault exists in the transit pathway ofthe virtual connection described by the RDI cell.

NOTECurrently, AIS/RDI OAM cell generation issupported only for point-to-point connections.

These commands let you display OAM statistics. You can display the list of availablesubcommands by typing ? at the oam level.

myswitch:connections oam-> ?

f5 Display oam channel statistics

genais Display oam pathr statistics

genrdi Display oam opath statistics

guard Display guard statistics

received Display oam pathreceived statistics


Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


3.4.1 connections oam f5The F5 cell is an OAM cell that reports alarm conditions which are relevant to virtual channels.You can display F5 statistics as follows:

myswitch:connections oam-> f5

AtmIf VPI VCI TxAIS

1A1 1 100 6233

1A1 1 200 4482

The fields in this display have the following meanings:

3.4.2 connections oam genaisThis command lets you display AIS OAM cell generation statistics at the virtual path level asfollows:

myswitch:connections oam-> genais

Input Output TxAIS

AtmIf VPI AtmIf VPI

3D1 3 7D3 3 130

3D1 4 6B3 4 130

Field Description

AtmIf The ATM interface number.

VPI The virtual path number for this ATM interface.

VCI The virtual channel number for this ATM interface.

TxAIS The number of AIS OAM cells sent on this path, ATM interface, and channel.


on

sd

sThe fields in this display have the following meanings:

Field Description


Input VPI The incoming virtual path number for this ATM interface.


Output VPI The outgoing virtual path number for this ATM interface.

TxAIS The number of AIS OAM cells sent on this path.


3.4.3 connections oam genrdiThis command lets you display RDI OAM cell generation statistics at the virtual path level asfollows:

myswitch:connections oam-> genrdi

AtmIf VPI TxRDI

3A1 0 237495

3D1 0 232514


3.4.4 connections oam guardThis command lets you display the last time an OAM cell was transmitted or received by thefabric as follows:

myswitch:connections oam-> guard

Fabric OAM Guard

0 3010704095


Field Description



TxRDI The number of RDI cells transmitted on this path.

Field Description


Fabric The fabric number.

OAM Guard The timing, in timeticks (one hundredths of a second) since the last time an OAM cell wasgenerated/received on this fabric.

Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


3.4.5 connections oam receivedThis command lets you display OAM cell statistics at the virtual path level as follows:

myswitch:connections oam-> received

AtmIf VPI RxAIS RxRDI

3A1 0 0 0

3D1 0 0 305


Field Description



RxAIS The number of AIS cells received on this path.

RxRDI The number of RDI cells received on this path.


on

sd

s


3.5 connections path

These commands let you configure through paths, originating paths, and terminating paths.You can display the list of available subcommands by typing ? at the path level.

myswitch:connections path-> ?

term> The term directory

through> The through directory

3.5.1 connections path termThese commands let you configure Virtual Path Terminators (VPTs), which are also calledoriginating and terminating paths. You can display the list of available subcommands bytyping ? at the term level.

myswitch:connections path term-> ?

delete Remove a path

modify Modify an existing path configuration

new Create a new path

show Display paths configuration

3.5.1.1 connections path term deleteThis command lets you delete a virtual path terminator. Enter the following parameters:

myswitch:connections path term-> delete

Usage:

[-atmif] <AtmIf> AtmIf

[-vpi] <integer> VPI

[-type] (orig|term) Direction


[[-reservedbw] <Kbps>] Reserved Bandwidth

[[-allocbw] <Kbps>] Allocated Bandwidth

[[-minvci] <integer>] Min VCI

[[-maxvci] <integer>] Max VCI

[[-trafficsvpi] <integer>] Traffic Shape VPI

[[-loopvpi] <integer>] Loop VPI

[[-nrtvbrob] <percent>] nrtVBR Overbooking

[[-nrtvbrbob] <percent>] nrtVBR Buffer Overbooking

[[-rtvbrob] <percent>] rtVBR Overbooking

[[-rtvbrbob] <percent>] rtVBR Buffer Overbooking

[[-numchannels] <integer>] Number of Channels

Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


[[-sigprotocol] <sigprotocol_type>] Signaling Protocol

[[-shaping] (flat|shaped|shaped-roundrobin)] Originating Path Shaping

[[-cells] <Counter>] Received Cells

[[-rejectedcells] <Counter>] Rejected Cells

[[-uptime] <timeticks>] Uptime

[[-cacerrors] <Counter>] CAC Errors

[[-vcierrors] <Counter>] VCI Errors

[[-setuperrors] <Counter>] Setup Errors

[[-cbr] (none|default|qosext_index)] CBR

[[-rtvbr] (none|default|qosext_index)] RtVBR

[[-nrtvbr] (none|default|qosext_index)] NrtVBR

[[-abr] (none|default|qosext_index)] ABR

[[-ubr] (none|default|qosext_index)] UBR

NOTEVirtual Path 0 cannot be deleted on any of theconnections to the inter-fabric ports on an ASX-1000switch, ASX-1200 switch, or TNX-1100 switch.

Virtual Path 0 cannot be deleted on any of theconnections on a Circuit Emulation Services (CES)network module.

Virtual Path 0 cannot be deleted on the control port(CTL) on any switch.


3.5.1.2 connections path term modifyThis command lets you modify an existing virtual path terminator. Enter the following:

myswitch:connections path term-> modify

Usage:


on

sd

s[-atmif] <AtmIf> AtmIf


[-type] (orig|term) Direction


[[-maxvci] <integer>] Max VCI








3.5.1.3 connections path term newThis command lets you create a new virtual path terminator. Enter the following parameters:

myswitch:connections path term-> new

Usage:



[[-type] (orig|term)] Direction


[[-minvci] <integer>] Min VCI (default: 1)

[[-maxvci] <integer>] Max VCI (default: 511)

[[-trafficsvpi] <integer>] Traffic Shape VPI


[[-nrtvbrob] <percent>] nrtVBR Overbooking

[[-nrtvbrbob] <percent>] nrtVBR Buffer Overbooking

[[-rtvbrob] <percent>] rtVBR Overbooking

[[-rtvbrbob] <percent>] rtVBR Buffer Overbooking

[[-shaping] (flat|shaped|shaped-roundrobin)] Originating Path Shaping

(default: flat)








-atmif <AtmIf> The ATM interface number for this vpt.

-vpi <integer> The path number for this vpt.


-type (orig|term) orig specifies that the vpt to be created is an originating path.

term specifies that the vpt to be created is a terminating path.

-reservedbw <Kbps> The amount of bandwidth, in Kbps, that is reserved on this vpt. If this parameter is notused, an elastic path is created. Elastic paths allocate and de-allocate bandwidth for theirchannels from the link. This is the rate to which a path will be shaped on a Series 2 portcard, if the shaping mode is shaped or shaped-roundrobin.

-allocbw <Kbps> The amount of bandwidth, in Kbps, that is being used by the virtual channels using thisvpt.

-minvci <integer> The bottom number for the range of VCIs to be reserved for VCCs on this vpt. The defaultis 1.

Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


-maxvci <integer>1 The top number for the range of VCIs to be reserved for VCCs on this vpt. The default is511. If the maxvci is modified for the control port and SVx call preservation is enabled,then the standby SCP must be rebooted as well. After the master SCP reboots and the CDBis synced, then the standby SCP must be reset for this change to function properly.

-trafficsvpi <integer>2 The output port of a traffic shaping originating vpt. Setting this value configures trafficshaping on the originating path. Cells bound for the network leave the traffic shaping portwith this VPI. When the traffic shaping port is the WAN port, this value equals the inputVPI of the originating path. If the traffic shaping port is not the WAN port, this valueequals the input VPI of the through path from the shaping port to the WAN port. The-trafficsvpi parameter only applies to the Series C network modules.

-loopvpi <integer> The originating vpi will be shaped by a through path going to a Series D network module.You should enter the input vpi of the through path that goes from the looping port to theWAN port. This parameter is also used when creating the through path that connects fromthe WAN port to the looping port. The through path loopvpi should be the same vpi as theterminating path on the looping port. See Chapter 1 of the Multiservice Broadband SwitchNetwork Configuration Manual for an example of this feature.

-nrtvbrob <percent> The percentage of bandwidth overbooking for nrtVBR connections on this originatingpath. Enter an integer value from 1 to 32,767. The default is 100, which means that nooverbooking has been defined. Values less than 100 cause underbooking. Values greaterthan 100 cause overbooking.

Overbooking cannot be specified on an elastic path. Therefore, you can only specify anoverbooking factor for an originating path when you also have reserved bandwidth forthe path (i.e., specified the -reservedbw <Kbps> parameter).

-nrtvbrbob <percent> The percentage of buffer overbooking for nrtVBR connections on this originating path.Enter an integer value from 1 to 32,767. The default is 100, which means that nooverbooking has been defined. Values less than 100 cause underbooking. Values greaterthan 100 cause overbooking.


-rtvbrob <percent> The percentage of bandwidth overbooking for rtVBR connections on this originating path.Enter an integer value from 1 to 32,767. The default is 100, which means that nooverbooking has been defined. Values less than 100 cause underbooking. Values greater



on

sd

sthan 100 cause overbooking.


On Series C, LC, LE, and D network modules, CBR and rtVBR traffic share a queue.Therefore, configuring overbooking on rtVBR traffic may increase the CDV of the CBRtraffic or may cause the CBR traffic to be dropped due to bursty rtVBR traffic on thesetypes of network modules.


-rtvbrbob <percent> The percentage of buffer overbooking for rtVBR connections on this originating path.Enter an integer value from 1 to 32,767. The default is 100, which means that nooverbooking has been defined. Values less than 100 cause underbooking. Values greaterthan 100 cause overbooking.


On Series C, LC, LE, and D network modules, CBR and rtVBR traffic share a queue.Therefore, configuring overbooking on rtVBR traffic may increase the CDV of the CBRtraffic or may cause the CBR traffic to be dropped due to bursty rtVBR traffic on thesetypes of network modules.

-shaping (flat|shaped|shaped-roundrobin)

The -shaping parameter only applies to originating paths on Series D or Series Enetwork modules or to originating paths on the Series 2 port cards in an ASX-4000 switch.

flat means there is no path level shaping. All elastic VPTs are flat. Individualconnections can still be shaped using a UPC contract. The default is flat.

shaped means the individual VCCs can be serviced by any scheduling mode.

shaped-roundrobin means the individual VCCs on this VPT are only serviced by theroundrobin scheduling mode.

-cbr (none|default|qosext_index)

none means the specified class of service is not supported.

default means the default parameters of 0 CTD, 0 CDV, and 0 CLR are to be used for thisclass of service.

qosext_index means the index number of the set of QoS extension parameters found inthe Index field under connections qosext show. The index must exist before it can beapplied to a VPT.

-rtvbr (none|default|qosext_index)




-nrtvbr (none|default|qosext_index)


default means the default parameters of 0 CTD, 0 CDV, and 0 CLR are to be used for this



class of service.


-abr (none|default|qosext_index) 3




Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


-ubr (none|default|qosext_index)




1. In the new command, the -maxvci parameter can be used for any VPT. In the modify command, it is only used on thecontrol port.

2. If you want to shape traffic on more than two ports on a given network module, it is recommended that you set thetraffic memory model to 5 for Series C network modules using hardware netmod traffic c modify -model.

3. The channelized OC-3 port card does not support ABR traffic.



on

sd

s


3.5.1.4 connections path term showThis command lets you display virtual path terminators for all of the ports on a switch fabric.Enter the following parameters:

myswitch:connections path term-> show

AtmIf VPI Type ResBW CurBW MinVCI MaxVCI VCs Protocol

1B1 0 term N/A 0.8K 1 511 4 pvc

1B1 0 orig N/A 0.8K 1 511 4 pvc

1B2 0 term N/A 0.8K 1 511 4 pvc

1B2 0 orig N/A 0.8K 1 511 4 pvc

1B3 0 term N/A 0.8K 1 511 4 pvc

1B3 0 orig N/A 0.8K 1 511 4 pvc

1B4 0 term N/A 0.8K 1 511 4 pvc

1B4 0 orig N/A 0.8K 1 511 4 pvc

1CTL 0 term N/A 0.0K 1 1023 19 pvc

1CTL 0 orig N/A 0.0K 1 1023 18 pvc


Field Description

AtmIf The incoming ATM interface number of the vpt.

VPI The incoming or outgoing virtual path number.

Type Shows orig if it is an originating path.

Shows term if it is a terminating path.

ResBW The maximum amount of bandwidth, in Kbps, that is reserved for the virtual channelsusing this vpt.

A value of N/A indicates that this path is an elastic path. Elastic paths allocate and de-allocate bandwidth for their channels from the link.

CurBW The amount of bandwidth, in Kbps, that is being used by the virtual channels using thisvpt.


MinVCI The bottom number for the range of VCIs that are reserved for VCCs on this virtual pathterminator.

MaxVCI The top number for the range of VCIs that are reserved for VCCs on this virtual pathterminator. Also, this is the maximum VCI number to be supported on the control port.

VCs The number of virtual channels that are currently using this vpt.

Protocol The type of protocol running on this channel.

Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


3.5.1.4.1 connections path term show -advanced

To list all of the advanced options about all of the existing virtual path terminators, enter thefollowing parameters:

myswitch:connections path term-> show -advanced

AtmIf VPI Type ShapeVPI LoopVPI Shaping

1B1 0 term N/A N/A N/A

1B1 0 orig flat


1B2 0 orig flat


1B3 0 orig flat


1B4 0 orig flat

1CTL 0 term N/A N/A N/A

1CTL 0 orig flat


Field Description



Type Shows orig if it is an originating path.

Shows term if it is a terminating path.

ShapeVPI Shows the output port on which traffic shaping has been enabled for this originating vpt.This only applies to Series C network modules.

N/A means that shaping has not been configured on this port.

LoopVPI Shows the looping ATM interface that has been configured to loop traffic on that port forshaping on a Series D port.

N/A means that looping has not been configured on this port.

Shaping This parameter only applies to originating paths on Series D or Series E network modules,


on

sd

sor to originating paths on Series 2 port cards in an ASX-4000 switch.

• flat means there is no path level shaping. All elastic VPTs are flat. Individualconnections can still be shaped using a UPC contract. The default is flat.

• shaped means the individual VCCs can be serviced by any scheduling mode.

• shaped-roundrobin means the individual VCCs on this VPT are only serviced bythe roundrobin scheduling mode.


3.5.1.4.2 connections path term show -overbooking

To display overbooking information about virtual path terminators, enter the following:

myswitch:connections path term-> show -overbooking

nrtVBR rtVBR

AtmIf VPI OB BuffOB OB BuffOB

1B1 0 N/A N/A N/A N/A

1B1 0 port port port port







Field Description



nrtVBR OB The percentage of bandwidth overbooking for nrtVBR connections on this originatingpath. A value of 100 means that no overbooking has been defined. Values less than 100denote underbooking. Values greater than 100 denote overbooking.

port means this is an elastic path. Since elastic paths derive their overbooking factorsfrom their parent ports, use interfaces atmif overbooking show to display theoverbooking value.

nrtVBR BuffOB The percentage of buffer overbooking for nrtVBR connections on this originating path. Avalue of 100 means that no overbooking has been defined. Values less than 100 denoteunderbooking. Values greater than 100 denote overbooking.



rtVBR OB The percentage of bandwidth overbooking for rtVBR connections on this originating path.A value of 100 means that no overbooking has been defined. Values less than 100 denoteunderbooking. Values greater than 100 denote overbooking.


rtVBR BuffOB The percentage of buffer overbooking for rtVBR connections on this originating path. Avalue of 100 means that no overbooking has been defined. Values less than 100 denoteunderbooking. Values greater than 100 denote overbooking.


Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


3.5.1.4.3 connections path term show -qosext

To display QoS extension parameter information about virtual path terminators, enter thefollowing parameters:

myswitch:connections path term-> show -qosext

AtmIf VPI Type Cbr RtVbr NrtVbr Abr Ubr

1B1 0 term N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

1B1 0 orig N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A







1CTL 0 term N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

1CTL 0 orig N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A


The fields in the qosext display are defined as follows:

Field Description


VPI The virtual path number.

Type Shows orig if it is an originating path. Shows term if it is a terminating path.

Cbr Shows the path QoS metric information for CBR service.

RtVbr Shows the path QoS metric information for rtVBR service.

NrtVbr Shows the path QoS metric information for nrtVBR service.

Abr Shows the path QoS metric information for ABR service.

Ubr Shows the path QoS metric information for UBR service.


on

sd

s


3.5.1.4.4 connections path term show -stats

You can display virtual path terminator statistics and fabric path counters. Fabric pathcounters record the number of CAC (Connection Admission Control) failures, VPI allocationfailures, VCI allocation failures, and connection setup errors for each path. Each path counteronly records errors that occurred on that path. The counters are direction specific, meaningthat errors that occurred on the input side are differentiated from errors that occurred on theoutput side. Enter the following parameters:

myswitch:connections path term-> show -stats

Cells Cells F a i l u r e s

AtmIf VPI Type Uptime Received Rejected CAC VCI Setup

1B1 0 term 00:16 0 0 0 0 0

1B1 0 orig 00:16 338 N/A 0 0 0

1B2 0 term 00:16 0 0 0 0 0

1B2 0 orig 00:16 338 N/A 0 0 0

1B3 0 term 00:16 0 0 0 0 0

1B3 0 orig 00:16 338 N/A 0 0 0

1B4 0 term 00:16 0 0 0 0 0

1B4 0 orig 00:16 571 N/A 0 0 0

1CTL 0 term 00:16 7262 0 0 0 0

1CTL 0 orig 00:16 0 N/A 0 0 0


Field Description


VPI The virtual path number.

Type Shows orig if it is an originating path. Shows term if it is a terminating path.

Uptime The length of time that this virtual path has been in its current state.

Cells Received The total (aggregate) number of cells that were transferred over this path.

Cells Rejected The total (aggregate) number of cells over this path that were rejected (dropped) by the


hardware due to a traffic policing violation. This does not include any cells that may havebeen tagged with CLP=1 by the policer, only cells that were discarded.

Failures CAC The number of CAC failures on this path. this counter. This counter currently does notincrement since CAC is not performed on the input side. (CAC is only performed on theoutput side.)

Failures VCI The number of VCI allocation failures on this path. These failures occur when an inputVCI cannot be allocated because the VCI is already in use, because the VCI is out of range,or because no more VCIs are available for allocation on the path.

Failures Setup The number of connection setup failures on this path. These failures occur if theconnection cannot be set up on the fabric because the output network module cannotsupport the connection for various reasons, or because a connection ID cannot be allo-cated on an ASX-1000 fabric, ASX-1200 fabric, or TNX-1100 fabric.

Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


3.5.2 connections path throughThese commands let you configure Permanent Virtual Paths (PVPs), which are also calledVirtual Path Connections (VPCs), or through paths. You can display the list of availablesubcommands by typing ? at the through level.

myswitch:connections path through-> ?

delete Remove a through path

new Create a new through path

outputstat Display Connection Statistics for Output

show Display through paths configuration

statistics Display through path statistics

NOTEOnce a VPI is used for any point-to-multipoint(PMP) connection, it cannot be used for anyconnection on that fabric other than to add to aPMP connection.


on

sd

s


3.5.2.1 connections path through deleteThis command lets you delete an existing virtual through path or an active point-to-point SVP.The deletion of an SVP will send a release to both endpoints of the call.

NOTEPrior to using this command to delete SVPs, youmay need to perform other administrativeactions to prevent call re-establishment betweenthe affected parties.

myswitch:connections path through-> delete

Usage:

[-iatmif] <AtmIf> Input Port


[-oatmif] <AtmIf> Output Port


[[-allocbw] <Kbps>] Allocated Bandwidth

[[-sigprotocol] <path_sigprotocol>] Signaling Protocol

[[-upc] <UPC Index>] UPC Index




[[-servcat] <ServCat>] Service Category


3.5.2.2 connections path through newThis command lets you create a virtual through path as follows:

myswitch:connections path through-> new

Usage:

[-iatmif] <AtmIf> Input Port



[-oatmif] <AtmIf> Output Port


[[-upc] <UPC Index>] UPC Index (default: 0)




Co

nn

ectiC

om

man




-iatmif <AtmIf> The incoming ATM interface number.

-ivpi <integer> The incoming virtual path number.1

-oatmif <AtmIf> The outgoing ATM interface number.

-ovpi <integer> The outgoing virtual path number.

-allocbw <Kbps> The amount of bandwidth that you want to reserve on this path, in Kbps.

-sigprotocol<path_sigprotocol>

The type of signalling protocol running on this channel.

-upc <UPC Index> The integer index that refers to a specific UPC traffic contract. If no index is specified, thenno traffic policing will take place on this VPI. It is assigned a default UPC index of 0, andall traffic on this VPI is treated as UBR traffic.

-loopvpi <integer> This parameter is used to perform shaping. The originating vpi is shaped by a throughpath going to a Series D network module. Enter the receive vpi of the through path thatgoes from the looping port to the WAN port. This parameter is also used to create thethrough path that connects from the WAN port to the looping port. The through pathloopvpi should be the same VPI as the terminating path on the looping port. See Chapter 1of the Multiservice Broadband Switch Network Configuration Manual for an example of thisfeature.

-name <text> The name you want to assign to this through path to help identify it uniquely. It is mostuseful for billing purposes so you can identify which paths are being used by whichcustomers. Can be up to 32 ASCII characters long.

-ctype <connection_type> The path connection type. For billing purposes, it denotes on which switch this path isarriving. Valid entries are a combination of the following parameters (e.g., thru-term-pmpor orig-term-mpp, etc.):

• orig (originating) means that the ingress endpoint of the path is connected to thesource node which is outside the network.

• thru (through) means that the ingress endpoint of the path is connected to a nodewithin the network.

• term (terminating) means that the ingress endpoint of the path is connected to thedestination node which is outside the network.


on

sd

s

1. The valid range of incoming and outgoing VPIs is 0 - 1022 (1023 is used for multicast). However, Series D E3 and DS3network modules can only use VPIs 0 - 510 (511 is used for multicast).

• pp means this is a point-to-point path.

• pmp means this is a point-to-multipoint path.

• mpp means this is a multipoint-to-point path.

• mpmp means this is a multipoint-to-multipoint path.

NOTE: By indicating pp, pmp, mpp, or mpmp, you are only assigning a label for recordkeeping purposes. The switch does not necessarily create the type of path you havespecified. If you assign a connection type, but do not assign a pp, pmp, mpp, or mpmp label,the switch assigns a label of pp (point-to-point).


3.5.2.3 connections path through outputstatYou can also display virtual path traffic statistics for individual network modules. The fieldsthat are displayed vary depending on the type of network module on which the connectionsare output.

This command does not apply to Series C network modules. If the connections are output on aSeries D network module, then the display will vary depending on whether or not the modulepacket counter is disabled. Enter the following:

myswitch:connections path through-> outputstat

Input Output C e l l s

AtmIf VPI AtmIf VPI Transmitted Lost

1A2 40 1C2 40 N/A N/A

1C2 40 1A2 40 0 0


Field Description





Cells Transmitted The number of cells that were transmitted on this path.

Cells Lost The number of cells dropped on this path due to EPD (Early Packet Discard).


Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


3.5.2.3.1 connections path through outputstat -advanced

You can display advanced statistics as follows:

myswitch:connections path through-> outputstat -advanced

Input Output Cells Transmitted C e l l s L o s t

AtmIf VPI AtmIf VPI C L P 0 C L P 1 Intentional Unintentional

1A2 40 1C2 40 N/A N/A N/A N/A

1C2 40 1A2 40 N/A N/A N/A N/A


Field Description





Cells Transmitted CLP0 The number of CLP=0 cells that were transmitted on this path.

Cells Transmitted CLP1 The number of CLP=1 cells that were transmitted on this path.

CellsLost Intentional The number of cells dropped on this path due to PPD (Partial Packet Discard).

CellsLost Unintentional The number of cells dropped on this path due to output memory shortages or theper-port/per-priority CLP (Cell Loss Priority) thresholds.


on

sd

s


3.5.2.3.2 connections path through outputstat -packets

You can display advanced statistics as follows:

myswitch:connections path through-> outputstat -packets

Input Output P a c k e t s

AtmIf VPI AtmIf VPI Transmitted Lost

1A2 40 1C2 40 N/A N/A

1C2 40 1A2 40 N/A N/A


Field Description





Packets Transmitted The number of transmitted packets on this path.

Packets Lost The number of packets lost on this path.


Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


3.5.2.4 connections path through showThis command lets you display existing virtual through paths on an individual switch fabric.Enter the following parameters:

myswitch:connections path through-> show

Input Output

AtmIf VPI AtmIf VPI AllocBW Serv Protocol Name

Categy

1A1 1 1A1 2 0.0K UBR pvc N/A

1A1 4 1A1 5 0.0K UBR pvc N/A

1A1 5 1A1 6 0.0K UBR pvc N/A

1A1 7 1A1 6 0.0K UBR pvc N/A


Field Description

AllocBW The amount of bandwidth reserved on this path, in Kbps.

Input AtmIf The incoming ATM interface number of the through path.


Output AtmIf The outgoing ATM interface number of the through path.


AllocBW The amount of bandwidth reserved on this path, in Kbps.

Serv Categy The traffic type on this virtual path.

Protocol The type of protocol running on this path.

Name The user-assigned name which helps to identify this through path uniquely.


on

sd

s


3.5.2.4.1 connections path through show -advanced

To list advanced information about the existing virtual through paths, enter the following:

myswitch:connections path through-> show -advanced

Input Output

AtmIf VPI AtmIf VPI LoopVPI UPC ConType

1A1 1 1A1 2 0 N/A

1A1 4 1A1 5 0 N/A

1A1 5 1A1 6 0 N/A

1A1 7 1A1 6 0 N/A

The fields in this are defined as follows:

Field Description

Input AtmIf The incoming ATM interface number of the through path.


Output AtmIf The outgoing ATM interface number of the through path.


LoopVPI Indicates whether or not traffic shaping has been enabled for this path.

UPC The integer index that refers to a specific traffic contract assigned to this through path.UPC contracts can be displayed using connections upc show.

ConType The connection type for the endpoints of this path with respect to a particular network.


Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


3.5.2.5 connections path through statisticsYou can display virtual path statistics as follows:

myswitch:connections path through-> statistics

Input Output Cells Cells

AtmIf VPI AtmIf VPI Uptime Received Rejected

1A1 75 1B1 75 00:02 0 0

1B1 75 1A1 75 00:02 0 0

1B2 68 1C1 68 00:00 0 0

1C1 68 1B2 68 00:01 0 0


Field Description





Uptime The length of time that this virtual path has been in its current state.

Cells Received The total (aggregate) number of cells that were transferred over this path.

Cells Rejected The total (aggregate) number of cells over this path that were rejected (dropped) by thehardware due to a traffic policing violation. This does not include any cells that may havebeen tagged with CLP=1 by the policer, only cells that were discarded.


on

sd

s


3.6 connections qos

These commands let you delete, create, or display information about Quality of Service (QOS)entries in the QOS expansion table. The QOS expansion table is used for translating the QOSclass in an incoming connection setup request into parameterized QOS values for CellTransfer Delay (CTD), Cell Delay Variation (CDV), and Cell Loss Ratio (CLR). Please refer toSection 6.5.2.3.5 of the ATM Forum PNNI Specification for more information.

Each entry in the expansion table is indexed by an index and a QOS class. The index is usedfor associating entries in the expansion table with signalling interfaces. The table contains 5default entries with an index of 0. When a new signalling interface is created, an expansiontable index will be associated with it. If no index is specified while creating the signallinginterface, the default entries with index 0 will be used to associate this signalling interfacewith the QOS expansion table entries.

You can display the list of available subcommands by typing ? at the qos level.

myswitch:connections qos-> ?

delete Remove a qos expansion entry

new Create a new qos expansion entry

show Display qos expansion configuration

3.6.1 connections qos deleteThese commands let you delete an entry from the QOS expansion table. If a QOS expansiontable is currently being used by one or more signalling interfaces or originating SPVCs, thenthe expansion entries in that table cannot be deleted. Also, the entries in the default QOSexpansion table (index 0) cannot be deleted.

myswitch:connections qos-> delete


Usage:

[-index] <integer> Index

[-qosclass] <QoS Class> QoS Class

[[-fwdctd] (integer|any_value)] Fwd CTD (us)

[[-fwdcdv] (integer|any_value)] Fwd CDV (us)

[[-backcdv] (integer|any_value)] Back CDV (us)

[[-fwdclr] (integer|any_value)] Fwd CLR

[[-backclr] (integer|any_value)] Back CLR


Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


The parameters are defined in the same manner as for the connections qos show command(see Section 3.6.3).

3.6.2 connections qos newThese commands let you add an entry to the QOS expansion table. If an expansion entry iscreated without some of the values specified for some of the QOS classes, then it is assumedthat any value is acceptable for all the parameters. If such a partially specified QOS expansiontable is used to create a signalling interface or originating SPVC, then no new expansionentries can be added to this table. You will be able to add the unspecified expansion entriesonce all of the signalling interfaces and originating SPVCs referencing the partially specifiedtable are deleted.

myswitch:connections qos-> new

Usage:


[-qosclass] <QoS Class> QoS Class

[[-fwdctd] (integer|any_value)] Fwd CTD (us) (default: ANY_VAL)

[[-fwdcdv] (integer|any_value)] Fwd CDV (us) (default: ANY_VAL)

[[-backcdv] (integer|any_value)] Back CDV (us) (default: ANY_VAL)

[[-fwdclr] (integer|any_value)] Fwd CLR (default: ANY_VAL)

[[-backclr] (integer|any_value)] Back CLR (default: ANY_VAL)

[[-name] <text>] Name (default: “”)

The parameters are defined in the same manner as for the connections qos show command(see Section 3.6.3).


on

sd

s


3.6.3 connections qos showThese commands let you display the entries in the QOS expansion table.

myswitch:connections qos-> show

Index Class fCtd(us) fCdv(us) bCdv(us) fClr bClr Name

0 class0 ANY_VAL ANY_VAL ANY_VAL ANY_VAL ANY_VAL def_class_0_expn






Field Description

Index The index into the QOS expansion table that is used to associate signalling interfaces withexpansion table entries.

Class Specifies the QOS class that is to be expanded into parameterized QOS IEs. Can have avalue of 0 to 4.

fCtd(us) The maximum acceptable forward CTD value to be used for this expansion. Can rangefrom 0 to 16777215 microseconds. any_value means that any amount of cell transferdelay is acceptable.

fCdv(us) The maximum acceptable forward CDV value to be used for this expansion. Can rangefrom 0 to 16777215 microseconds. any_value means that any amount of cell delayvariation is acceptable.

bCdv(us) The maximum acceptable backward CDV value to be used for this expansion. Can rangefrom 0 to 16777215 microseconds. any_value means any amount of cell delay variation isacceptable.

fClr The maximum acceptable forward CLR value to be used for this expansion. Can rangefrom 1 to 15. A CLR value of x means 10-x; e.g., 5 means 10-5. any_value means that anyamount of cell loss is acceptable.


bClr The maximum acceptable backward CLR value to be used for this expansion. Can rangefrom 1 to 15. A CLR value of x means 10-x; e.g., 5 means 10-5. any_value means that anyamount of cell loss is acceptable.

Name An optional text string associated with this entry to help you identify it.

Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


3.7 connections qosext

These commands let you delete, create, or display information about Quality of Service (QOS)extension table entries. The QOS extension table is used to hold a set of QOS parameters ofmaxctd, maxcdv, and maxclr. When creating a VPT using the connections path term newcommand, the external QOS contribution of an originating/terminating path for a certaintraffic type can be specified by an index pointing to this table. You can display the list ofavailable subcommands by typing ? at the qosext level.

myswitch:connections qosext-> ?

delete Remove a qos extension entry

modify Modify a qos extension entry

new Create a new qos extension entry

show Display qos extension configuration

3.7.1 connections qosext deleteThis command allows you to delete a QOS extension table entry.

myswitch:connections qosext-> delete

Usage:


[[-maxctd] <integer>] Max CTD (us)

[[-maxcdv] <integer>] Max CDV (us)

[[-maxclr] <integer>] Max CLR (us)

The parameters are defined in the same manner as for the connections qosext show (seeSection 3.7.4).


on

sd

s3.7.2 connections qosext modifyThis command allows you to modify a set of QOS extension table entry.

myswitch:connections qosext-> modify

Usage:


[[-maxctd] <integer>] Max CTD (us)

[[-maxcdv] <integer>] Max CDV (us)

[[-maxclr] <integer>] Max CLR (us)



3.7.3 connections qosext newThis command lets you create a set of QOS extension table entry.

myswitch:connections qosext-> new

Usage:


[-maxctd] <integer> Max CTD (us)

[-maxcdv] <integer> Max CDV (us)

[-maxclr] <integer> Max CLR (us)


3.7.4 connections qosext showThis command allows you to display the QOS extension table.

myswitch:connections qosext-> show

Index MaxCtd MaxCdv MaxClr

(usec) (usec)

1 10 10 10

2 10 10 10

3 10 10 10

4 10 10 10

5 10 10 10

6 10 10 10

7 10 10 10


8 10 10 10

9 10 10 10

The fields are defined as follows:

Field Description

Index The index number of the set of QOS extension parameters.

MaxCtd (usec) The maximum cell transfer delay, in microseconds.

MaxCdv (usec) The maximum cell delay variation, in microseconds.

MaxClr The maximum cell loss ratio.

Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


3.8 connections spvcc

These commands allow you to configure Smart Permanent Virtual Circuit Connections(SPVCCs, hereafter referred to as SPVCs), which includes ATM Forum PNNI point-to-point(PP) or point-to-multipoint (PMP) SPVCs. An SPVC is a connection that goes across multipleswitch fabrics. An SPVC looks like a PVC at the local and remote endpoints with an SVC in themiddle. SPVCs are more robust than PVCs. If a link carrying a PVC goes down, then the PVCgoes down. If a link carrying an SPVC goes down and there is an alternate route, then the endswitch fabrics of the SPVC automatically reroute the SPVC around the failed link.

Unlike the SPANS SPVCs, PNNI SPVCs are inherently bidirectional, which means that asingle signalling call establishes the circuits in both directions. Although PNNI SPVCs arebidirectional, the endpoint that initiates the call setup is the source (originating) and the otherendpoint is the destination (terminating or party).

Type ? at the spvcc level to display the list of available subcommands.

myswitch:connections spvcc-> ?

parameters Display/Modify PNNI SPVCC parameters

pmp> The pmp directory

pp> The pp directory

spans> The spans directory

3.8.1 connections spvcc parametersThis command allows you to display and/or modify certain PNNI SPVC parameters. Todisplay the configuration, enter the following:

myswitch:connections spvcc -> parameters

Pace Interval (millisecs): 2000


on

sd

s

Pace Calls/Interval: 20

Reroute Interval (millisecs): 10000

Reroute Calls/Interval: 20

Reroute Threshold: 50%

Lowest Priority: 10

Default UBR Bandwidth: 1

DTL Backoff Interval (secs): 600

Traps Sent for spvcc: reroute

Party Pace Calls/Interval: 10

To modify the parameters, enter the following:


myswitch:connections spvcc -> parameters ?

[[-paceinterval] <integer>] Pace Interval (millisecs)

[[-pacenumspvcs] <integer>] Pace Calls/Interval

[[-rerouteinterval] <integer>] Reroute Interval (millisecs)

[[-reroutenumspvcs] <integer>] Reroute Calls/Interval

[[-reroutethreshold] <percent>] Reroute Threshold

[[-lowestpriority] <integer>] Lowest Priority

[[-defaultubrbandwidth] <integer>] Default UBR Bandwidth

[[-backoffinterval] <integer>] DTL Backoff Interval (secs)

[[-trapmode] <spvcc_traps>] Traps Sent for spvcc

[[-partypacenum] <integer>] Party Pace Calls/Interval

The parameters are defined as follows:


-paceinterval <integer> The interval, in milliseconds, between call setup attempts. Values can be from 50 to300,000 ms. The least significant millisecond value is rounded off. For example a value of6,788 is converted to 6,780. The default is 2,000 ms. If there are a large number of SPVCsoriginating from this switch, setting a low pacing interval and a high pacing number mayput excessive load on the switch. Use caution when configuring a very low pacing intervaland a very high pacing number. A pacing interval that is considered low and a pacingnumber that is considered high depends on your switch’s performance numbers (callsetups/second). See the Installation and Maintenance Manual for your switch forperformance specifications.

-pacenumspvcs <integer> The number of SPVCs which can be set up at one time during an attempt. Values can befrom 1 to 1000. The default is 20 calls.

-rerouteinterval <integer> The time interval, in milliseconds between successive callbacks to the SPVC controller tocheck for and reroute existing SPVC connections if a better path becomes available. Theleast significant millisecond value is rounded off. For example, a value of 6,788 isconverted to 6,780. The default is 10,000 ms. The range of values is 50 to 3,600,000ms, inclusive.

-reroutenumspvcs <integer> Indicates how many SPVCs that are up, per interval, will be analyzed to determinewhether or not those SPVCs need to be rerouted. The default is 20 SPVCs. The range of


valid values is 1 to 1000, inclusive.

-reroutethreshold <percent> The minimum percentage improvement in the cost that the new SPVC path must haveover the current SPVC path before a reroute is performed. The default value is 50 percent.The range of valid values is 1 to 99, inclusive.

-lowestpriority <integer> The value that you want to be the lowest value (last tried and least often tried) whendetermining the order in which and the frequency with which SPVCs are tried for aconnection. This value cannot be less than the priority of an existing SPVC and it cannotbe greater than 100. The default is 10.

-defaultubrbandwidth<integer>

The default estimated bandwidth value, in kilocells per second, to be used whencalculating load-balanced UBR routing. The value must be an integer from 0 to 65534. Thedefault is 1 kcps (0.424 Mbps).

Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


-backoffinterval <integer> If the back-off mechanism is enabled under connections spvcc pp new, directed DTLsthat fail will be off for the amount of time specified here before they are tried again. Thisback-off interval allows the network to stabilize before attempting the failed DTL again.

The amount of time, in seconds, that failed directed DTLs should be held before they aretried again. This value is used by all point-to-point SPVCs that have the back-off mechanismenabled. (It is enabled by default.) The value must be an integer from 0 to 90,000 (0 - 25hours). Entering a value of 0 disables the DTL back-off mechanism for all PNNI point-to-point SPVCs. The default is 600 seconds. If the back-off mechanism is enabled, directedDTLs that fail will be off for the amount of time specified here before they are tried again.This back-off interval allows the network to stabilize before attempting the failed DTL again.

-trapmode <spvcc_traps> In previous ForeThought releases, an spvcRerouteInitiated trap (number 1090) is sentwhenever an SPVC is torn down and rerouted because a more optimal route has becomeavailable. This command gives you more flexibility to configure which trap(s) should besent, on a per-switch basis, when an SPVC is set up or torn down. reroute indicates anspvcRerouteInitiated trap will be sent when an SPVC is torn down because a betterroute has become available or because a network failure has occurred. This is the default.failure indicates a pnniSpvccFail trap will be sent if a call cannot be established after16 consecutive attempts. A pnniSpvccUp trap is sent if a call is established that haspreviously sent a pnniSpvccFail trap. all indicates a pnniSpvccDown trap will besent (instead of the spvcRerouteInitiated trap) when an SPVC is torn down becausea better route has become available or because a network failure has occurred. ApnniSpvccFail trap is sent if a call cannot be established after 16 consecutive attempts.A pnniSpvccUp trap is sent when a call is established.

none indicates no SPVC traps will be sent.

-partypacenum <integer> The number of parties within a PMP SPVC which can be set up at one time during anattempt. The default is 10 parties. This value should not exceed the -pacenumspvcsvalue since this will overload the switch.



on

sd

s


3.8.2 connections spvcc pmpThese commands allow you to configure PNNI (point-to-multipoint) PMP SPVCs. Type ? atthe pmp level to display the list of available subcommands.

myswitch:connections spvcc pmp-> ?

destparty Display destination PNNI PMP Party SPVCCs

destroot Display destination PNNI PMP Root SPVCCs

number Display number of PNNI PMP SPVCCs

origination Display Source PNNI PMP Root and Party

Information

party> The party directory

root> The root directory

termination Display destination PNNI PMP Root and Party

Information

NOTEPoint-to-multipoint calls are always recorded asa series of legs. If you have a PMP PVC from A toB and from A to C, and a filter is applied to onlyrecord PVCs that involve port A, then both legswill be recorded. If the PMP PVC is from A to Band from B to C, then the same filter would notallow the B to C leg to be recorded.


Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


3.8.2.1 connections spvcc pmp destpartyThis command lets you display destination PNNI point-to-multipoint SPVCs as follows:

myswitch:connections spvcc pmp-> destparty

SPVCCID PartyId AtmIf VPI VCI State UpTime RGroupID

1 1 1A1 0 35 up 00:02 N/A

PartyNsapAddress: 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f21c.3965.0020480d0000.00

2 1 1A1 0 37 up 00:00 N/A

PartyNsapAddress: 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f21c.3965.0020480d0000.00

If there are no destination PNNI PMP SPVCs, the following displays:

myswitch:connections spvcc pmp-> destparty

No Destination PNNI PMP Party SPVCCs


Field Description

SPVCCID The index number assigned to this PNNI PMP SPVC by AMI to identify it uniquely fromother PNNI SPVCs that have this switch fabric as their source.

PartyId The index number assigned to this party for the PMP SPVC.

AtmIf The port identifier of the party.

VPI The assigned virtual path number of the party.

VCI The assigned virtual channel number of the party.

State The current status of the party.

Uptime If applicable, shows in HH:MM format, the number of days and time (in hundredths of asecond) since this PNNI PMP SPVC was created or the time since the last successful call


on

sd

s

setup occurred.

RGroupID The APS redundancy group ID.

PartyNSAPAddress The NSAP ATM address of the PMP SPVC party.


3.8.2.2 connections spvcc pmp destrootThis command lets you display destination PNNI point-to-multipoint root SPVCCs.

myswitch:connections spvcc pmp-> destroot

PMP Bearer Forward Num Of

SPVCCID AtmIf VPI VCI Class Qos Parties CLIP

1 179 0 32 classX class0 1 no

RootNsapAddress: 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f21c.3950.0020480d00b3.00

2 179 0 33 classX class0 1 no

RootNsapAddress: 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f21c.3950.0020480d00b3.00


Field Description

PMP SPVCCID The index number assigned to this PNNI PMP SPVC by AMI to identify it uniquely fromother PNNI SPVCs that have this switch fabric as their source.

AtmIf The port identifier of the party.

VPI The assigned virtual path number of the party.

VCI The assigned virtual channel number of the party.

Bearer Class The broadband bearer class specified for this PNNI PMP SPVC. Can be classA, classC,or classX.

Forward Qos The requested QoS class for this PMP SPVC in the forward (calling to called) direction.The default is class0.

Num of Parties The number of parties in the PM SPVC that are currently active.

CLIP Indicates whether the PNNI PMP SPVC is susceptible to clipping. Clipping is the loss of abrief interval at the beginning of a speech spurt during speech transmission. no indicatesthis PMP SPVC is not susceptible to clipping. yes indicates this PMP SPVC is susceptibleto clipping. The default is no.


3.8.2.3 connections spvcc pmp numberThis command lets you display the number of configured originating and terminating PNNIPMP SPVCCs.

myswitch:connections spvcc pmp-> number

Originating PNNI PMP SPVCCs 1

Terminating PNNI PMP SPVCCs 0

RootNsapAddress The NSAP ATM address of the root PMP SPVC.

Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


3.8.2.4 connections spvcc pmp originationThis command lets you display originating PNNI PMP root and party information.

myswitch:connections spvcc pmp-> origination

Root Party

SPVCCID AtmIf VPI VCI UPC State PartyId AtmIf VPI VCI State

1 4D1 0 35 0 down 3 114 N/A N/A down

PartySwitchPrefix: 47.000580ffe1000000f2b10510

These fields are defined as follows:

Field Description


AtmIf The port identifier on the originating switch fabric that contains the permanent portion forthis PNNI PMP SPVC.

Root VPI The virtual path number used in the permanent portion of this PNNI PMP SPVC on theoriginating switch fabric.

Root VCI The virtual channel number in the permanent portion of this PNNI PMP SPVC on theoriginating switch fabric.

Root UPC The forward (going from the local switch fabric to the remote switch fabric) UPC contractindex associated with this PNNI PMP SPVC.

Root State The operational state of this PMP SPVC. Can be up or down.

PartyId The index number assigned to this party for the PMP SPVC.

Party AtmIf The port identifier on the terminating switch fabric that contains the permanent portionfor this PNNI PMP SPVC, if the destination end is a Marconi switch. If the port at thedestination switch cannot be determined, a question mark (?) is displayed.

Party VPI The virtual path number used in the permanent portion of this PNNI PMP SPVC on theoriginating switch fabric. any means the user did not specify the VPI to be used at theorigination.


on

sd

s

Party VCI The virtual channel number used in the permanent portion of this PNNI PMP PVC on theoriginating switch fabric. any means the user did not specify the VCI to be used at theorigination.

Party State The operational state of the party. Can be up, down, or connecting

PartySwitchPrefix The NSAP ATM Address of the PMP SPVC party.


3.8.2.5 connections spvcc pmp partyThese commands let you configure PNNI PMP parties. Type ? at the party level to displaythe list of available subcommands.

myswitch:connections spvcc pmp party-> ?

delete Delete a source PNNI PMP Party Smart Channel

modify Modify party info of a PNNI PMP Party Smart

Channel

new Create a new source PNNI PMP Party Smart Channel

reroute Attempt Reroute for a party in a PNNI PMP Smart

Channel

show Display source PNNI PMP Party spvcc

3.8.2.5.1 connections spvcc pmp party delete

This command lets you delete parties within an existing PNNI PMP SPVC.

myswitch:connections spvcc pmp party-> delete

Usage:

[-spvccid] <integer> PMP SPVCCID

[-partyid] <integer> Party ID

[[-atmaddr] <NSAP Address>] Party NSAP Address

[[-vpi] <integer>] Called VPI

[[-vci] <integer>] Called VCI

[[-assignedvpi] <integer>] VPI

[[-assignedvci] <integer>] VCI

[[-vpvcsel] (noPref|require)] VPVC Select

[[-state] <partystate>] State

[[-name] <text>] Party Name

[[-lastfailcause] <text>] Last Failure Cause

[[-retrycount] <integer>] Retry Count

[[-lastchangetime] <timeticks>] Last Change Time

[[-reroutestatus] <reroutestatus>] Reroute Status

[[-qosindex] <integer>] QoS Exp Index


[[-lastlocation] <text>] Last Fail Location

[[-autodtl] (enabled|disabled)] Auto DTL

[[-downreason] <downReason>] Down Reason

[[-routecost] <integer>] Route Cost

NOTEFor a PMP PVC with multiple parties, deletingone party does not automatically change thepoint-to-multipoint to a point-to-point PVC.

The parameters are defined in the same manner as for the connections spvcc pmp partynew command (see Section 3.8.2.5.3).

Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


3.8.2.5.2 connections spvcc pmp party modify

This command lets you modify party information for an existing PNNI PMP SPVC.

myswitch:connections spvcc pmp party-> modify

Usage:



[[-reroutestatus] <reroutestatus>] Reroute Status


The parameters are defined in the same manner as for the connections spvcc pmp partynew command (see Section 3.8.2.5.3).

3.8.2.5.3 connections spvcc pmp party new

This command lets you add one or more parties to a PMP SPVC. Parties can be added withoutaffecting the data transfer to currently active parties within the existing PMP SPVC. The stateof a PMP SPVC changes to up upon successfully establishing a connection to at least oneparty.

NOTEOnce a VPI is used for any PMP connection, itcannot be used for any connection on that fabricother than to add to a PMP connection.

myswitch:connections spvcc pmp party-> new

Usage:


[[-partyid] <integer>] Party ID

[-atmaddr] <NSAP Address> Party NSAP Address

[[-vpi] <integer>] Called VPI


on

sd

s

[[-vci] <integer>] Called VCI

[[-name] <text>] Party Name

[[-ftdtlindex] <integer>] FT-PNNI DTL(DEPRECATED)

[[-reroutestatus] <reroutestatus>] Reroute Status (default:

rerouteNotRequested)

[[-qosindex] <integer>] QoS Exp Index (default: 0)

[[-autodtl] (enabled|disabled)] Auto DTL (default: enabled)


The parameters for delete, modify, and new are defined as follows:


-spvccid <integer> The index number assigned to this PMP SPVC to identify it uniquely. The PMP SPVCCID is found in the INDEX field under conn spvcc pmp party show.

-partyid <integer> The index assigned to the destination switch. This is useful when addressing the partyin other commands. Party IDs are unique among all the parties for a given PMP SPVC.If a party ID is not specified, it will be assigned upon creation.

-atmaddr <NSAP Address> The unique NSAP ATM address of the destination switch for a given PMP SPVC.

-vpi <integer> The virtual path number of the destination switch for a given PMP SPVC.

-vci <integer> The virtual channel number of the destination switch for a given PMP SPVC.

-name <text> The optional name assigned to uniquely identify the party.

-ftdtlindex <integer> NOTE: This parameter has been deprecated and is not used in ForeThought 7.1.x andlater releases.

The FT-PNNI Designated Transit List (DTL) tag, or index number, assigned to this PMPSPVC party. The DTL specifies the preferred call routing for the SVC portion of thePMP SPVC. Only one DTL can be configured for a party.

-reroutestatus <reroutestatus> Indicates whether rerouting was requested for this PNNI PMP SPVC.

-qosindex <integer> The index number in the QoS expansion table that is used to do QoS class-to-parameterexpansion when sending the PMP SPVC call set-up message across a PNNI link. See theQoSExpIndex field under connections qos show for this number. The qosindexthat is specified for this PMP SPVC must already be present in the switch. Default is 0.

-autodtl (enabled|disabled) Indicates whether automatic DTL routing is enabled or disabled. enable means thatdynamic path computation is used to route an SPVC when all of the configured DTLsfail. disable means that dynamic path computation is not used to route an SPVC whenall of the configured DTLs fail. This feature applies to PNNI DTLs. The default isenable. This flag does not apply when no DTLs are configured.

-assignedvpi <integer> The assigned virtual path number of the party.

-assignedvci <integer> The assigned virtual channel number of the party.

-vpvcsel (noPref|require) NoPref means that you did not specify which VPI/VCI combination that the


destination switch should use for the permanent portion when this PNNI point-to-point SPVC was created. If the destination switch is a Marconi switch, the values aredisplayed in the Destination VPI and Destination VCI fields. If the destinationswitch is not a Marconi switch, a ? is displayed in the Destination VPI andDestination VCI fields. Require means that the destination switch must use theVPI/VCI combination given for the permanent portion when the PNNI point-to-pointSPVC was created.

-state <partystate> The operational status of the party.

-lastfailcause <text> The reason for the last call setup failure for this PNNI PMP SPVC. This parameter isvalid only for originating SPVCs that are down.

Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


3.8.2.5.4 connections spvcc pmp party reroute

Sometimes PMP SPVCs are forced to use a less than optimal route because of temporary linkfailures or because of an inconsistent routing database. This command lets you attempt a re-route when PMP SPVCs that are using less than optimal routes and reroute them if a betterroute becomes available. For example, for PNNI, a path is considered “better” than anotherpath if its administrative weight is lower by a specified percentage. If a party within a PMPSPVC is currently routed with the DTL specified, the party will not be rerouted. Use the AMIcommand connections spvcc party pmp show -advanced to display the current reroutestatus.

myswitch:connections spvcc pmp party-> reroute

Usage:

-retrycount <integer> The number of times the call setup has been attempted since the PNNI PMP SPVC wascreated or since the last successful call setup occurred. This is only valid when theSTATE is down.

-lastchangetime <timeticks> If applicable, shows in HH:MM format, the number of days and time (in hundredths ofa second) since this PNNI PMP SPVC was created or the time since the last successfulcall setup occurred.

-lastlocation <text> The last call setup failure location code for this SPVC. This indicates the switch thatinitiated the clearing for the call. This parameter is formatted as a text string with thefollowing values:

• FMT - Indicates diagnostic format.

• RMT - Indicates whether a remote switch is the source of the failure or this switchinserted the location diagnostic.

• LINK - Link ID to which the clearing call pertains.

• VPI - VPI to which the clearing call pertains.

-downreason <downReason> Indicates whether the SPVC call was cleared due to a better route being found, anetwork failure, or an SPVC deletion.

-routecost <integer> Specifies the path cost of the call the previous time that this call was up.



on

sd

s[-spvccid] <integer> PMP SPVCCID




-spvccid <integer> The index number assigned to this PMP SPVC to identify it uniquely. The PMP SPVCC IDis found in the INDEX field under connections spvcc pmp party show.

-partyid <integer> The index number of the party you want to reroute.


3.8.2.5.5 connections spvcc pmp party show

This command lets you display source PMP party SPVC information.

myswitch:connections spvcc pmp party-> show

SPVCCID PartyId VPI VCI State VPVCSel QosExpIndex Time

1 1 0 196 up noPref 0 00:07

PartyNsapAddress: 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f243.0007.0020480d0082.00

1 2 0 33 up noPref 0 00:07


2 1 0 197 up noPref 0 00:07


2 2 0 34 up noPref 0 00:07


3 1 0 198 up noPref 0 00:07


3 2 0 35 up noPref 0 00:07


4 1 0 199 up noPref 0 00:07


4 2 0 36 up noPref 0 00:07

Press <return> for more, or 'q' to quit... q

If no source PMP party SPVCs have been configured, the following displays:


myswitch:connections spvcc pmp party-> show

No Source PNNI PMP Party spvcc

Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


To display advanced information, enter the following:

myswitch:connections spvcc pmp party-> show -advanced


1 1 0 196 up noPref 0 00:07

PartyNsapAddress = 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f243.0007.0020480d0082.00

FtPnniDTL = N/A, RetryCount = 0 , RerouteStatus = rerouteNotRequested

PartyName = , AutoDTL = enabled

Last Failure Cause = N/A

Failure Location = Not Available

Down Reason = downreasonFailure

Route Cost = 5040


1 2 0 33 up noPref 0 00:07

PartyNsapAddress = 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f243.0007.0020480d0002.00

FtPnniDTL = N/A, RetryCount = 0 , RerouteStatus = rerouteNotRequested

PartyName = , AutoDTL = enabled

Last Failure Cause = N/A

Failure Location = Not Available

Down Reason = downreasonFailure

Route Cost = 5040


The fields for show and show -advanced are defined as follows:

Field Description


PartyId The index number assigned to the party.


on

sd

sVPI The virtual path number of the party.

VCI The virtual channel number of the party.

State The state of the party. Can be up or down.

VPVCSel NoPref means that you did not specify which VPI/VCI combination that the destinationswitch should use for the permanent portion when this PNNI point-to-point SPVC wascreated. If the destination switch is a Marconi switch, the values are displayed in theDestination VPI and Destination VCI fields. If the destination switch is not aMarconi switch, a ? is displayed in the Destination VPI and Destination VCI fields.Require means that the destination switch must use the VPI/VCI combination given forthe permanent portion when the PNNI point-to-point SPVC was created.


QoSExpIndex The index number in the QoS expansion table that is used to do QoS class-to-parameterexpansion when sending the PMP SPVC call set-up message across a PNNI link. See theQoSExpIndex field under connections qos show for this number.

Time If applicable, shows in HH:MM format, the number of days and time (in hundredths of asecond) since this PNNI PMP SPVC was created or the time since the last successful callsetup occurred.

PartyNSAPAddress The NSAP ATM address of the PMP SPVC party.

FtPnniDTL NOTE: This field has been deprecated and is not used in ForeThought 7.1.x and laterreleases.

The Designated Transit List (DTL) index number, assigned to this party. The DTL specifiesthe preferred call routing for the SVC portion of the SPVC. Only one FT-PNNI DTL can beconfigured for a party.

RetryCount The number of times the call setup has been attempted since the PNNI PMP SPVC wascreated or since the last successful call setup occurred. This is only valid when the STATEis down.

RerouteStatus Indicates whether rerouting was requested for this PMP SPVC.

PartyName The name assigned to the PMP SPVC party. N/A displays if a name has not be assigned.

AutoDTL Indicates whether automatic DTL routing is enabled or disabled. enable means thatdynamic path computation is used to route an SPVC when all of the configured DTLs fail.disable means that dynamic path computation is not used to route an SPVC when all ofthe configured DTLs fail. This feature applies to PNNI DTLs. The default is enable. Thisflag does not apply when no DTLs are configured.

LastFailureCause The reason for the last call setup failure for this PNNI point-to-point SPVC. This field isonly displayed for originating SPVCs that are down.

Failure Location The last call setup failure location for this SPVC, if applicable. This field indicates theswitch that initiated the clearing for the call. This field is formatted as a text string with thefollowing values:

• FMT - Indicates diagnostic format.

• RMT - Indicates whether a remote switch is the source of the failure or this switchinserted the location diagnostic.

Field Description


• LINK - Link ID to which the clearing call pertains.

• VPI - VPI to which the clearing call pertains.

Down Reason Indicates whether the SPVC call was cleared due to a better route being found, a networkfailure, or an SPVC deletion.

Route Cost Specifies the path cost of the call the previous time that this call was up.

Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


3.8.2.6 connections spvcc pmp rootThe commands listed under connections spvcc pmp root let you configure root PNNIPMP SPVCs. Type ? at the root level to display the list of available subcommands.

myswitch:connections spvcc pmp root-> ?

delete Delete a source PNNI PMP Root Smart Channel

modify Change the priority of a PNNI PMP Root Smart

Channel

new Create a new source PNNI PMP Root Smart Channel

show Display source PNNI PMP Root spvcc

3.8.2.6.1 connections spvcc pmp root delete

This command lets you delete an existing PNNI PMP SPVC from the source switch. You mustspecify the PMP SPVCC ID of the PMP SPVC that you want to delete.

NOTEAll parties must be deleted before a PMP SPVCcan be deleted.

myswitch:connections spvcc pmp root-> delete

Usage:


[[-atmif] <AtmIf>] AtmIf

[[-vpi] <integer>] VPI

[[-vci] <integer>] VCI

[[-upc] <integer>] UPC

[[-bearerclass] <bearerclass>] Bearer Class

[[-susceptclip] (no|yes)] CLIP

[[-fwdqosclass] <QoS Class>] Forward Qos


on

sd

s[[-state] (up|down|wait)] State


[[-priority] <integer>] Priority

[[-numberofparties] <integer>] Number Of Parties

[[-nextpartyindex] <integer>] Next Party Index

[[-domainid] <integer>] Domain ID

[[-rgroupid] <integer>] Redundancy Group ID

[[-secondaryvpi] <integer>] Secondary VPI

[[-secondaryvci] <integer>] Secondary VCI

The parameters are defined in the same manner as for the connections spvcc pmp rootnew command (see Section 3.8.2.6.3).


3.8.2.6.2 connections spvcc pmp root modify

This command lets you modify an existing PNNI point-to-multipoint SPVC from the sourceswitch. The connection does not go down when changing the priority. However, if the DTL ischanged or specified, the currently connected party connection will be torn down and re-established with the new DTL.

myswitch:connections spvcc pmp root-> modify

Usage:




The parameters are defined in the same manner as for the connections spvcc pmp rootnew command (see Section 3.8.2.6.3).

3.8.2.6.3 connection spvcc pmp root new

This command lets you create a PNNI point-to-multipoint SPVC.

NOTEYou need to open a session on the destinationswitch to create a PNNI point-to-multipointSPVC. This is needed to get the party NSAPaddress from the destination switch.

myswitch:connections spvcc pmp root-> new

Usage:

[[-spvccid] <integer>] PMP SPVCCID (default: 1)




[-vci] <integer> VCI

[[-upc] <integer>] UPC (default: 0)

[[-bearerclass] <bearerclass>] Bearer Class (default: classX)

[[-susceptclip] (no|yes)] CLIP (default: no)

[[-fwdqosclass] <QoS Class>] Forward Qos (default: class0)


[[-priority] <integer>] Priority (default: 10)


[[-domainid] <integer>] Domain ID (default: 1)




Co

nn

ectiC

om

man




-spvccid <integer> The index number assigned to this PMP SPVC to identify it uniquely. For PNNI PMPSPVCs, the index number may be assigned either by AMI or by the user. Valid values areintegers between 1 and 65535.

-atmif <AtmIf> The ATM interface number where the permanent portion of the PMP SPVC resides on thesource (local) switch fabric.

-vpi <integer> The virtual path number for the permanent portion of the PMP SPVC on the source fabric.

-vci <integer> The virtual channel number for the permanent portion of the PMP SPVC on the source fabric.

-upc <integer>1 The forward (going from the local switch fabric to the remote switch fabric) UPC contractindex assigned to this PMP SPVC. To find the index or create a new UPC, use the conn upcshow command. If no index is specified, the default index of 0 (UBR best effort) is used.

-bearerClass <bearerclass> The requested broadband bearer class for this PMP SPVC. X = all types of ATM media. A =non-ATM CBR media. C = non-ATM rtVBR, nrtVBR, UBR, and ABR media. X is the default.

-susceptclip (no | yes) Clipping is the loss of a brief interval at the beginning of a speech spurt during speechtransmission. no indicates this PMP SPVC is not susceptible to clipping. yes indicates thisPMP SPVC is susceptible to clipping. The default is no.

-fwdqosclass <QoS Class> The requested QoS class for this PMP SPVC in the forward (calling to called) direction.The default is class0.

-name <text> An optional name assigned to uniquely identify this PMP SPVC.

-priority <integer> The order in which and the frequency with which you want a PMP SPVC in the down stateto be tried for a successful connection. Higher priority PMP SPVCs are tried more often thanlower priority SPVCs. All parties within a PMP SPVC have the same priority. The value oflowestpriority (configured under connections spvcc parameters-lowestpriority) determines the number of times each PMP SPVC is tried beforeattempting a lower priority PMP SPVC. Valid values are from1 to lowestpriority, with1 being the highest priority (the first and the most often tried). The default value is half ofthe value of the lowestpriority. The value for lowestpriority is defaulted to 10.PMP and PP SPVC priorities are shared. Some PMP or PP SPVCs can be assigned a higherpriority compared to other PMP or PP SPVCs. For PMP and PP SPVCs with equal priority,PP SPVCs have higher priority over PMP SPVCs.


on

sd

s

1. The forward UPC contracts specified must be compatible with the bearerClass parameter for the PMP SPVC (e.g., allparameters are for VBR traffic or CBR traffic).

-nextpartyindex <integer> The index number of the next party for this PMP SPVC.

-domainid <integer> The PNNI domain ID number on the source (local) switch fabric. The default is 1, which isthe ID of the default routing domain.

-rgroupid <integer> The SPVC redundancy group index number.

-secondaryvpi <integer> The secondary virtual path identifier of an SPVC redundancy group.

-secondaryvci <integer> The secondary virtual channel identifier of an SPVC redundancy group.

-numberofparties <integer> The number of parties for this PMP SPVC.


3.8.2.6.4 connection spvcc pmp root show

This command lets you display source PNNI PMP root SPVCs.

myswitch:connections spvcc pmp root-> show


SPVCCID AtmIf VPI VCI UPC State Class Qos CLIP Parties Priority

1 4D1 0 35 0 wait classX class0 no 0 10

3 4D3 0 45 0 down classX class0 no 1 10

If no source PNNI PMP root SPVCs have been configured, the following displays:

myswitch:connections spvcc pmp root-> show

No Source PNNI PMP Root spvcc

To display advanced information, enter the following:

myswitch:connections spvcc pmp root-> show -advanced


SPVCCID AtmIf VPI VCI UPC State Class Qos CLIP Parties Priority

1 4D1 0 35 0 wait classX class0 no 0 10

DomainId = 1 , Name =

Redundancy GroupID = N/A, Secondary VPI = N/A, Secondary VCI = N/A

3 4D3 0 45 0 down classX class0 no 1 10

DomainId = 1 , Name =



Co

nn

ectiC

om

man



Field Description

PMP SPVCCID The index number assigned to this PNNI PMP SPVC by AMI to identify it uniquely fromother PNNI SPVCs that have this switch fabric as their source.

AtmIf The port identifier on the originating switch fabric that contains the permanent portion forthis PNNI PMP SPVC.

VPI The virtual path number used in the permanent portion of this PNNI PMP SPVC on theoriginating switch fabric.

VCI The virtual channel number in the permanent portion of this PNNI PMP SPVC on theoriginating switch fabric.

UPC The forward (going from the local switch fabric to the remote switch fabric) UPC contractindex associated with this PMP PNNI SPVC.

State The state of this PMP SPVC.

BearerClass The broadband bearer class specified for this PNNI PMP SPVC. Can be classA, classC,or classX.

Forward QoS The requested QoS class for this PMP SPVC in the forward (calling to called) direction.The default is class0.

CLIP no means this PNNI point-to-point SPVC is not susceptible to clipping and yes means it issusceptible to clipping.

Num of Parties The number of parties in the PMP SPVC.

Priority The order in which and the frequency with which this PMP SPVC is tried for a connection.Higher priority PMP SPVCs are tried more often than lower priority ones. All partieswithin a PMP SPVC have the same priority. Point-to-multipoint and point-to-point SPVCpriorities are shared, meaning some PMP or point-to-point SPVCs can be assigned ahigher priority compared to other PMP or point-to-point SPVCs. For PMP and point-to-point SPVCs with equal priority, point-to-point SPVCs have higher priority over PMPSPVCs.

DomainId The PNNI domain ID number on the source (local) switch fabric. The default is 1, which isthe ID of the default routing domain.

Name An optional name assigned to uniquely identify this PMP SPVC.


on

sd

s

Redundancy GroupID The SPVC redundancy group index number.

Secondary VPI The secondary virtual path identifier of an SPVC redundancy group.

Secondary VCI The secondary virtual channel identifier of an SPVC redundancy group.


3.8.2.7 connections spvcc pmp terminationThis command lets you display terminating PNNI PMP SPVCs.

myswitch:connections spvcc pmp-> termination

Root Party

SPVCCID AtmIf VPI VCI PartyId AtmIf VPI VCI State UpTime

1 179 0 32 1 1A1 0 35 up 00:03

RootSwitchPrefix: 47.000580ffe1000000f21c3950

2 179 0 33 1 1A1 0 37 up 00:01

RootSwitchPrefix: 47.000580ffe1000000f21c3950

If there are no terminating PNNI PMP SPVCs, the following displays:

myswitch:connections spvcc pmp-> termination

This table is currently empty.

The fields are defined as follows::

Field Description


Root AtmIf The port number assigned to the source PMP SPVC.

Root VPI The virtual port identifier assigned to the source PMP SPVC.

Root VCI The virtual channel identifier assigned to the source PMP SPVC.

PartyId The index number assigned to the party.

Party AtmIf The port number assigned to the party.

Party VPI The virtual port identifier assigned to the party.


Party VCI The virtual channel identifier assigned to the party.

State The operating state of the PMP SPVC party (up, down, or failed).

Uptime The amount of time that this PMP SPVC party has been up.

RootSwitchPrefix The NSAP prefix of the root (source) PMP SPVC.

Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


3.8.3 connections spvcc ppThese commands allow you to configure PNNI point-to-point SPVCs. Type ? at the pp todisplay the list of available subcommands.

myswitch:connections spvcc pp-> ?

delete Delete a source PNNI PP Smart Channel

destination Display destination PNNI PP spvcc

modify Change the priority of a PNNI PP Smart Channel

new Create a new source PNNI PP Smart Channel

number Display number of PNNI PP spvcc

show Display source PNNI PP spvcc

3.8.3.1 connections spvcc pp deleteThis command allows you to delete an existing PNNI point-to-point SPVC from the sourceswitch.

myswitch:connections spvcc pp-> delete

Usage:

[-index] <integer> index

[[-callingatmif] <AtmIf>] Src AtmIf

[[-callingvpi] <integer>] Src VPI

[[-callingvci] <integer>] Src VCI

[[-calledatmaddr] <NSAP Address>] Destination NSAP

[[-calledatmif] <integer>] Dst AtmIf

[[-calledvpi] <integer>] Called VPI

[[-calledvci] <integer>] Called VCI

[[-calledassignedvpi] <integer>] Dst VPI

[[-calledassignedvci] <integer>] Dst VCI

[[-calledvpvcsel] (noPref|require)] Dst VPVC Sel


on

sd

s[[-fwdupckey] <UPC Index>] Fwd UPC

[[-bckupckey] <UPC Index>] Bck UPC

[[-bearerclass] <bearerclass>] Bearer Class


[[-fwdqosclass] <QoS Class>] Fwd QoS

[[-bckqosclass] <QoS Class>] Bck QoS

[[-lastfailcause] <text>] Last Fail Cause



[[-status] <status>] State




[[-activedtlindex] <integer>] Active DTL Index

[[-activedtlnode] <nodeid>] Active DTL Node

[[-reroutestatus] (enabled|disabled)] Reroute Status

[[-callingdomain] <integer>] Calling Domain

[[-qosindex] <integer>] QoS Index

[[-backoffstatus] (enabled|disabled)] Backoff Status


[[-lastlocation] <text>] Last Fail Location

[[-dtltag] <integer>] DTL Tag





NOTEWhen a PNNI DTL is part of any DTL tag table,it cannot be deleted.


Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


If you enter an SPVCC ID that does not exist, the following error message is returned:

myswitch:connections spvcc pp-> delete 1234

ERROR: SPVCC does not exist

deletion failed: entry doesn't exist

The parameters are defined in the same manner as for the connections spvcc pp newcommand (see Section 3.8.3.4).

3.8.3.2 connections spvcc pp destinationThis command allows you to display existing destination PNNI point-to-point SPVCs.

myswitch:connections spvcc pp-> destination

Source Destination Redundancy

INDEX ATMIF VPI VCI ATMIF VPI VCI STATE Group ID

1 179 0 34 1A1 0 38 up N/A

Source ATM Addr: 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f21c.3950.0020480d00b3.00

Dest ATM Addr: 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f21c.3965.0020480d0000.00

2 179 0 35 1A1 0 39 up N/A

Source ATM Addr: 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f21c.3950.0020480d00b3.00

Dest ATM Addr: 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f21c.3965.0020480d0000.00

If no destination PNNI PP SPVCs have been configured, the following displays:

myswitch:connections spvcc pp-> destination

No Destination PP spvcc



on

sd

s


3.8.3.3 connections spvcc pp modifyThis command lets you modify an existing PNNI point-to-point SPVC.

myswitch:connections spvcc pp-> modify

Usage:



[[-backoffstatus] (enabled|disabled)] Backoff Status




NOTEWhen a PNNI DTL is part of any DTL tag table,it cannot be deleted.



Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


3.8.3.4 connections spvcc pp newThis command lets you create a PNNI point-to-point SPVC.

NOTEYou do not need to open a session to thedestination switch to create a PNNI SPVCbecause all PNNI SPVCs are bidirectional.

myswitch:connections spvcc pp-> new

Usage:

[[-index] <integer>] index (default: 31051)

[-callingatmif] <AtmIf> Src AtmIf

[-callingvpi] <integer> Src VPI

[-callingvci] <integer> Src VCI

[-calledatmaddr] <NSAP Address> Destination NSAP


[[-calledvci] <integer>] Called VCI

[[-fwdupckey] <UPC Index>] Fwd UPC (default: 0)

[[-bckupckey] <UPC Index>] Bck UPC (default: 0)

[[-bearerclass] <bearerclass>] Bearer Class (default: classX)


[[-fwdqosclass] <QoS Class>] Fwd QoS (default: class0)

[[-bckqosclass] <QoS Class>] Bck QoS (default: class0)


[[-reroutestatus] (enabled|disabled)] Reroute Status (default: disabled

[[-callingdomain] <integer>] Calling Domain (default: 1)

[[-qosindex] <integer>] QoS Index (default: 0)

[[-backoffstatus] (enabled|disabled)] Backoff Status (default: enabled)


[[-dtltag] <integer>] DTL Tag (default: 0)


on

sd

s

[[-autodtl] (enabled|disabled)] Auto DTL (default: enabled)





The parameters for delete, destination, modify, and new are defined as follows:


-index <integer> The index number assigned to this point-to-point SPVC to identify it uniquely. For PNNISPVCs, the index number may be assigned either by AMI or by the user. Valid values areintegers between 1 and 65535.

-callingatmif <atmif> The port number where the permanent portion of the SPVC resides on the source (local)switch fabric.

-callingvpi <integer> The virtual path number for the permanent portion of the SPVC on the source (local)switch fabric.

-callingvci <integer> The virtual channel number for the permanent portion of the SPVC on the source (local)switch fabric.

-calledatmaddr <NSAPAddress>

The ATM NSAP address of the destination (remote) switch for this SPVC. Use theconnections destnsap command on the destination switch to obtain this address. SeeSection for more information.

-calledvpi <integer> The virtual path number on the destination switch fabric for this PNNI SPVC. When usingthis parameter, both the -calledvpi and -calledvci must be specified. If thisparameter is not used, the destination switch uses any available value.

-calledvci <integer> The virtual channel number on the destination switch fabric for this PNNI SPVC. Whenusing this parameter, both the -calledvpi and -calledvci must be specified. If thisparameter is not used, the destination switch uses any available value.

-fwdupckey <UPC Index> The forward (going from the local switch fabric to the remote switch fabric) UPC contractindex assigned to this SPVC. To find the index you want, use the connections upcshow command. If no index is specified, the default index of 0 (UBR best effort) is used.

-bckupckey <UPC Index> The backward (going from the remote switch fabric to the local switch fabric) UPCcontract index assigned to this SPVC. To find the index you want, use the connectionsupc show command. If no index is specified, the default index of 0 (UBR best effort) isused.

-bearerclass <bearerclass> The requested broadband bearer class for this point-to-point SPVC. X is for all types ofATM media. A is for non-ATM CBR media. C is for non-ATM VBR, UBR, and ABR media.The default is X.

-susceptclip (no|yes) During speech transmission, clipping is the loss of a brief interval at the beginning of a


speech spurt. no indicates this SPVC is not susceptible to clipping. yes indicates thisSPVC is susceptible to clipping. The default is no.

-fwdqosclass1 <QoS Class> The requested QoS class for this point-to-point SPVC in the forward (calling to called)direction. The -fqos and -bqos options must be either both class0 or both a non-zeroclass. The default is class0.

-bckqosclass <QoS Class> The requested QoS class for this point-to-point SPVC in the backward (called to calling)direction. The -fqos and -bqos options must be either both class0 or both a non-zeroclass. The default is class0.

-name <text> An optional name for the user to assign to this PNNI SPVC to help uniquely identify it.

Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


-reroutestatus (enabled|dis-abled)

enable indicates that this SPVC will be examined periodically to see if it is using a sub-optimal route. disable indicates that this SPVC will not be retried, even if a DTL with ahigher priority becomes available. The default state for PNNI SPVCs is enable.

-callingdomain <integer> The PNNI domain ID number on the source (local) switch fabric. The default is 1, which isthe ID of the default routing domain.

-qosindex <integer> The index number in the QoS expansion table that is used to do QoS class-to-parameterexpansion when sending the SPVC call set-up message across a PNNI link. See theQoSExpIndex field under connections qos show for this number. The qosindex that isspecified for this SPVC must already be present in the switch. The default is 0.

-backoffstatus (enabled|dis-abled)

enable means the back-off mechanism is used for this point-to-point SPVC. Upon afailure, the failed directed DTL is not retried until the amount of time specified underconnections spvcc parameters -backoffinterval has elapsed. This allows oldinformation to age out and the network to stabilize. disable means the back-offmechanism is not used for this SPVC and directed DTLs that are configured for this SPVCare retried continually even after a failure. The default is enable.

-priority <integer> The order in which and the frequency with which you want this point-to-point SPVC to betried for a connection. Valid values are from 1 to lowestpriority, with 1 being thehighest priority (the first and the most often tried) and with lowestpriority being thevalue configured under connections spvcc parameters -lowestpriority. Thedefault value is half of the value of lowestpriority, rounded off to the lowest integer.The value for lowestpriority is defaulted to 10.

Higher priority SPVCs are tried more often than lower priority SPVCs. The value oflowestpriority determines the number of times each SPVC is tried before attemptinga lower priority SPVC.

Point-to-point and point-to-multipoint SPVC priorities are shared. Some point-to-point orPMP SPVCs can be assigned a higher priority compared to other point-to-point or PMPSPVCs. For point-to-point and PMP SPVCs with equal priority, point-to-point SPVCs havehigher priority over PMP SPVCs.

-dtltag <integer> The Designated Transit List (DTL) tag, or index number, assigned to this SPVC whichcorresponds to a list of preferred DTLs that you configure under routing dtltag. TheDTL specifies the preferred call routing for the SVC portion of the SPVC.

-autodtl (enabled|disabled) enable means that dynamic path computation is used to route an SPVC when all of the



on

sd

s

configured DTLs fail. disable means that dynamic path computation is not used to routean SPVC when all of the configured DTLs fail. This feature applies to PNNI DTLs. Thedefault is enable. This flag does not apply when no DTLs are configured.


-secondaryvpi <integer> The secondary virtual channel identifier of an SPVC redundancy group.

-secondaryvci <integer> The secondary virtual path identifier of an SPVC redundancy group.


-calledvpvcsel(noPref|require)

NoPref means that you did not specify which VPI/VCI combination that the destinationswitch should use for the permanent portion when this PNNI point-to-point SPVC wascreated. If the destination switch is a Marconi switch, the values are displayed in theDestination VPI and Destination VCI fields. If the destination switch is not aMarconi switch, a ? is displayed in the Destination VPI and Destination VCI fields.Require means that the destination switch must use the VPI/VCI combination given forthe permanent portion when the PNNI point-to-point SPVC was created.

-lastchangetime <timeticks> If applicable, shows, in hundredths of a second, the time since this PNNI point-to-pointSPVC was created or the time since the last successful call setup occurred. The STATEshows up.

-lastfailcause <text> The reason for the last call setup failure for this PNNI point-to-point SPVC. This field isonly displayed for originating SPVCs that are down.

-lastlocation <integer> Upon a call setup failure for this PNNI point-to-point SPVC, indicates the exact link, VPI,and NSAP address where the failure occurred.

-retrycount <timeticks> The number of times the call setup has been attempted since the PNNI PMP SPVC wascreated or since the last successful call setup occurred. This is only valid when the STATEis down.

-routecost <integer> The current call routing cost for this originating PNNI point-to-point SPVC. If the SPVC isdown, shows N/A.

-status <status> The state of this PMP SPVC.

-activedtlindex <integer> The Active Designated Transit List (DTL) index for this SPVPC (Smart Permanent VirtualPath Circuit). This value along with -activedtlnode uniquely identifies the DTL that iscurrently used by the SVC portion of the SPVPC.

-activedtlnode <integer> The Node index of the Active Designated Transit List for this SPVPC (Smart PermanentVirtual Path Circuit). The active DTL indexed by the node index and DTL index identifiesthe DTL that is currently used by the SVC portion of the SPVPC.

1. The forward and backward UPC contracts that you specify must be compatible with the bearerClass parameter forthe SPVC (e.g., all parameters are for VBR traffic or CBR traffic).



Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


NOTEWhen creating a point-to-point SPVC, the-fwdqosclass and -bckqosclass optionsmust be either both class0 or both a non-zeroclass. For example, the -fwdqosclass cannot beclass0 and the -bckqosclass be class1. Thiscombination is invalid. Having an -fwdqosclassof class0 and a -bckqosclass of class0 is avalid combination, and having an -fwdqosclassof class1 and a -bckqosclass of class4 is avalid combination, but having an -fwdqosclassof class2 and a -bckqosclass of class0 is notvalid.

3.8.3.5 connections spvcc pp numberThis command lets you display the number of source and destination PNNI point-to-pointSPVCs.

myswitch:connections spvcc pp-> number

Source PP spvcc 1

Destination PP spvcc 0

3.8.3.6 connections spvcc pp showThis command allows you to display all of the PNNI point-to-point SPVCs that originate andterminate on an individual switch fabric.

myswitch:connections spvcc pp-> show

INDEX Src: ATMIF VPI VCI UPC VPVC-SEL PRIORITY STATE

Dst: ATMIF VPI VCI UPC

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

1 R1A1 0 100 0 require 5 up

0 0 100 0


on

sd

sDestination: 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f243.0007.0020480d0000.00


0 0 101 0

Destination: 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f243.0007.0020480d0000.00


0 0 102 0



0 0 103 0




To display advanced information about PNNI point-to-point SPVCs on this switch, enter thefollowing:

myswitch:connections spvcc pp-> show -advanced

INDEX Src: ATMIF VPI VCI UPC VPVC-SEL PRIORITY STATE

Dst: ATMIF VPI VCI UPC

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------


0 0 100 0


DTL Info:

DtlTag = 0 , ActiveDTLIndex = 0 , ActiveDTLNode = 0

Backoff = enabled, AutoDtl = enabled

Advanced Info:

Name = N/A, Cost = 5040, Reroute = disabled, CLIP = no

BearerClass = classX, ForwardQoS = class0, BackwardQos = class0

DomainID = 1 , QoSExpIndex = 0

Last Failure Cause = no-user-responding-Cause18

Failure Location = LCL:0 LINK:65533 VPI:65533 NSAP:47000580ffe1000000f24301f6

uptime = 01:44, Retry Count = 0



0 0 101 0


DTL Info:

DtlTag = 0 , ActiveDTLIndex = 0 , ActiveDTLNode = 0

Backoff = enabled, AutoDtl = enabled

Advanced Info:

Name = N/A, Cost = 5040, Reroute = disabled, CLIP = no


BearerClass = classX, ForwardQoS = class0, BackwardQos = class0

DomainID = 1 , QoSExpIndex = 0

Last Failure Cause = temporary-failure-Cause41

Failure Location = LCL:0 LINK:65533 VPI:65533 NSAP:47000580ffe1000000f24301f6

uptime = 01:44, Retry Count = 0



Co

nn

ectiC

om

man



Field Description

INDEX The index number assigned to this PNNI point-to-point SPVC by AMI to identify ituniquely from other PNNI point-to-point SPVCs that have this switch fabric as theirsource.

Source ATMIF The port identifier on the originating switch fabric that contains the permanent portion forthis PNNI point-to-point SPVC.

Source VPI The virtual path number used in the permanent portion of this PNNI point-to-point SPVCon the originating switch fabric.

Source VCI The virtual channel number in the permanent portion of this PNNI point-to-point SPVCon the originating switch fabric.

Source UPC The forward (going from the local switch fabric to the remote switch fabric) UPC contractindex associated with this PNNI point-to-point SPVC.

Destination ATMIF The port identifier on the terminating switch fabric that contains the permanent portionfor this PNNI point-to-point SPVC, if the destination end is a Marconi switch. If the port atthe destination switch cannot be determined, a question mark (?) is displayed. If thedestination is a redundancy group, this number is the index value of the redundancygroup, not the integer value of the destination port.

Destination VPI The virtual path number used in the permanent portion of this PNNI point-to-point SPVCon the destination switch fabric. any means the user did not specify the VPI to be used atthe destination.

Destination VCI The virtual channel number used in the permanent portion of this PNNI point-to-pointSPVC on the destination switch fabric. any means the user did not specify the VCI to beused at the destination.

Destination UPC The backward (going from the remote switch fabric to the local switch fabric) UPCcontract index associated with this PNNI point-to-point SPVC.

Destination VPVC-SEL NoPref means that you did not specify which VPI/VCI combination that the destinationswitch should use for the permanent portion when this PNNI point-to-point SPVC wascreated. If the destination switch is a Marconi switch, the values are displayed in theDestination VPI and Destination VCI fields. If the destination switch is not aMarconi switch, a ? is displayed in the Destination VPI and Destination VCI fields.


on

sd

s

Require means that the destination switch must use the VPI/VCI combination given forthe permanent portion when the PNNI point-to-point SPVC was created.

Priority The order in which this SPVC is tried for a connection. Values are from 1 tolowestpriority, with 1 being the highest priority (the first tried and the most oftentried) and with lowestpriority being the value configured under connectionsspvcc parameters -lowestpriority.

Point-to-point and point-to-multipoint SPVC priorities are shared meaning some point-to-point or PMP SPVCs can be assigned a higher priority compared to other point-to-point orPMP SPVCs. For point-to-point and PMP SPVCs with equal priority, point-to-point SPVCshave higher priority over PMP SPVCs.

State The operational state of this point-to-point SPVC. Can be up or down.


Destination The NSAP ATM address for the terminating side of the PNNI point-to-point SPVC.

DtlTag The Designated Transit List (DTL) tag, or index number, assigned to this point-to-pointSPVC which corresponds to a DTL table that you configure under routing dtltable.The DTL specifies the preferred call routing SVC portion of the point-to-point SPVC.

ActiveDTLIndex The Active DTL index for this SPVPC. This value, along with the ActiveDTLNode value,uniquely identifies the DTL that is currently used by the SVC portion of the SPVPC.

ActiveDTLNode The node index of the Active DTL for this SPVPC. The active DTL indexed by the nodeindex and DTL index identifies the DTL that is currently used by the SVC portion of theSPVPC.

Backoff enabled means the back-off mechanism is used for this point-to-point SPVC. Upon afailure, directed DTLs that are configured for this point-to-point SPVC are not retried untilthe amount of time specified under connections spvcc parameters-backoffinterval has elapsed. This allows old information to age out and allow thenetwork to stabilize. disabled means the back-off mechanism is not used for this point-to-point SPVC and directed DTLs that are configured for this point-to-point SPVC areretried continually upon a failure.

AutoDtl Indicates whether automatic DTL routing is enabled or disabled. enable means thatdynamic path computation is used to route an SPVC when all of the configured DTLs fail.disable means that dynamic path computation is not used to route an SPVC when all ofthe configured DTLs fail. This feature applies to PNNI DTLs. The default is enable. Thisflag does not apply when no DTLs are configured.

Name The optional name assigned to this PNNI point-to-point SPVC to help identify it. If noname is assigned, N/A is displayed.

Cost The current call routing cost for this originating PNNI point-to-point SPVC. If the SPVC isdown, shows N/A.

Reroute enabled means this SPVC is examined to see if it is using a sub-optimal route. If it is, it isrerouted according to the parameters in connections spvcc parameters-reroutestatus. disabled means this point-to-point SPVC is not examined to see if itis using a sub-optimal route.

CLIP no means this PNNI point-to-point SPVC is not susceptible to clipping and yes means it issusceptible to clipping.

Field Description


BearerClass The broadband bearer class specified for this PNNI point-to-point SPVC. Can be classA,classC, or classX.

ForwardQos The requested quality of service for this point-to-point SPVC in the forward (calling tocalled) direction.

BackwardQos The requested quality of service for this point-to-point SPVC in the backward (called tocalling) direction.

Domainid The PNNI domain ID number on the source (local) switch fabric.

QoSExpIndex The index number in the QoS expansion table that is used to do QoS class-to-parameterexpansion when sending the point-to-point SPVC call set-up message across a PNNI link.See the QoSExpIndex field under connections qos show for this number.

Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


Last Failure Cause The reason for the last call setup failure for this PNNI point-to-point SPVC. This field isonly displayed for originating SPVCs that are down.

Failure Location Upon a call setup failure for this PNNI point-to-point SPVC, indicates the exact link, VPI,and NSAP address where the failure occurred.

Last Change Time If applicable, shows, in hundredths of a second, the time since this PNNI point-to-pointSPVC was created or the time since the last successful call setup occurred. The STATEshows up.

Uptime The amount of time that this SPVC has been up.

Retry Count Displays the number of times the call setup has been attempted since the PNNI point-to-point SPVC was created or since the last successful call setup occurred. This is onlydisplayed when the STATE is down.



Secondary VCI The secondary virtual channel identifier of an SPVC redundancy group.

Field Description


on

sd

s


3.8.4 connections spvcc spansThe commands listed under connections spvcc spans allow you to configure SPANSSPVCs. To create a SPANS SPVC, you must configure the two ends concurrently on the twoswitch fabrics. Therefore, you must have an AMI session open on both the local switch fabricand the destination switch fabric. Type ? at the spans level to display the list of availablesubcommands.

myswitch:connections spvcc spans-> ?

destination> The destination directory

source> The source directory

3.8.4.1 connections spvcc spans destinationThe commands listed under spvcc spans destination let you delete, create, and displaydestination SPANS SPVCCs. Type ? at the destination level to display the list of availablesubcommands.

myswitch:connections spvcc spans destination-> ?

delete Delete a destination SPANS Smart Channel

new Create a new destination SPANS Smart Channel

show Display destination SPANS spvcc

3.8.4.1.1 connections spvcc spans destination delete

This command lets you delete an existing SPANS destination SPVC.

myswitch:connections spvcc spans destination-> delete

Usage:

[-spvcid] <integer> Spvc Id

[[-switchaddr] <SPANS Address>] Switch Addr


[[-srcspvcid] <integer>] Src Spvc Id

[[-srcswitchaddr] <SPANS Address>] Src Switch Addr

[[-outatmif] <AtmIf>] Out AtmIf

[[-outvpi] <integer>] Out VPI

[[-outvci] <integer>] Out VCI

[[-allocbandwidth] <integer>] Alloc Bandwidth

[[-uptime] <integer>] Up Time

[[-status] <status>] Status

Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


The parameters are defined in the same manner as for the connections spvcc spansdestination new command (see Section 3.8.4.1.2).

3.8.4.1.2 connections spvcc spans destination new

This command lets you create a new destination (unidirectional SPANS SPVC going from theremote switch fabric to the local switch fabric) SPANS SPVC.

myswitch:connections spvcc spans destination-> new

Usage:


[-srcspvcid] <integer> Src Spvc Id

[-srcswitchaddr] <SPANS Address> Src Switch Addr

[-outatmif] <AtmIf> Out AtmIf

[-outvpi] <integer> Out VPI

[-outvci] <integer> Out VCI

[[-allocbandwidth] <integer>] Alloc Bandwidth (default: 0)



-spvcid <integer> A unique number that the SCP assigned to this SPANS SPVC.

-srcspvcid <integer> The port number on the local switch fabric.

-srcswitchaddr<SPANS Address>

The IP address of the remote switch.

-outatmif <AtmIf> The port number on the remote switch fabric.

-outvpi <integer> The virtual path number on the remote switch fabric.

-outvci <integer> The virtual channel number on the remote switch fabric.

-allocbandwidth <integer> The amount of peak bandwidth allocated for this SPANS SPVC, specified in kilobitsper second. The default is 0.


on

sd

s-uptime <integer> The amount of time that this SPANS SPVC has been up.

-status <status> The status of the SPANS SPVC (up, down, or failed).


3.8.4.1.3 connections spvcc spans destination show

This command lets you display destination SPANS SPVCs.

myswitch:connections spvcc spans destination-> show

Local Remote State

ID AtmIf VPI VCI BW ID

10 1A1 0 60 0 1 up

Source ATM Addr: 00000000.f21c3950

11 1A1 0 61 0 2 up

Source ATM Addr: 00000000.f21c3950

If no destination SPANS SPVCs have been created, the following displays:

myswitch:connections spvcc spans destination-> show

No Destination SPANS spvcc


Field Description

ID A unique number that the SCP assigned to this SPANS SPVC.

Local AtmIf The port number on the local switch fabric.

VPI The virtual path number on the remote switch fabric.

VCI The virtual channel number on the remote switch fabric.

BW The amount of peak bandwidth allocated for this SPANS SPVC, specified in kilobitsper second. The default is 0.

Remote ID The fabric ID that is assigned to the remote switch fabric.

State The status of the SPANS SPVC (up, down, or failed).

Source ATM Addr The IP address of the source switch.


Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


3.8.4.2 connections spvcc spans sourceThe commands listed under connections spvcc spans source let you delete, create, anddisplay source SPANS SPVCCs. Type ? at the source level to display the list of availablesubcommands.

myswitch:connections spvcc spans source-> ?

delete Delete a source SPANS Smart Channel

new Create a new source SPANS Smart Channel

show Display source SPANS spvcc

3.8.4.2.1 connections spvcc spans source delete

This command lets you delete an existing source SPANS SPVC.

myswitch:connections spvcc spans source-> delete

Usage:


[[-inatmif] <AtmIf>] In AtmIf

[[-invpi] <integer>] In VPI

[[-invci] <integer>] In VCI

[[-switchaddr] <SPANS Address>] Switch Addr

[[-destspvcid] <integer>] Dest Spvc Id

[[-destswitchaddr] <SPANS Address>] Dest Switch Addr

[[-allocbandwidth] <integer>] Alloc Bandwidth

[[-uptime] <integer>] Up Time

[[-status] <status>] Status

The parameters are defined in the same manner as for the connections spvcc spanssource new command (see Section 3.8.4.2.2).


on

sd

s


3.8.4.2.2 connections spvcc spans source new

This command lets you create a new source SPANS SPVC (unidirectional SPANS SPVC goingfrom the local switch fabric to the remote switch fabric).

myswitch:connections spvcc spans source-> new

Usage:


[-inatmif] <AtmIf> In AtmIf

[-invpi] <integer> In VPI

[-invci] <integer> In VCI

[-destspvcid] <integer> Dest Spvc Id

[-destswitchaddr] <SPANS Address> Dest Switch Addr

[[-allocbandwidth] <integer>] Alloc Bandwidth (default: 0)



-spvcid <integer> A unique number that the SCP assigned to this SPANS SPVC.

-inatmif <AtmIf> The port number on the local switch fabric.

-invpi <integer> The virtual path number on the local switch fabric.

-invci <integer> The virtual channel number on the local switch fabric.

-destspvcid <integer> The port number on the remote switch fabric.

-destwitchaddr<SPANS Address)

The IP address of the remote switch.

-allocbandwidth <integer> The amount of peak bandwidth allocated for this SPANS SPVC, specified in kilobitsper second. The default is 0.

-switchaddr <SPANS Address> The switch SPANS address.

-uptime <integer> The amount of time that this SPANS SPVC has been up.


-status <status> The status of the SPANS SPVC (up, down, or failed).

Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


3.8.4.2.3 connections spvcc spans source show

This command lets you display SPANS source SPVCs.

myswitch:connections spvcc spans source-> show

Local Remote State

ID AtmIf VPI VCI BW ID

1 4B1 0 50 0 10 up

Remote ATM Addr: 00000000.f21c3965

2 4B1 0 51 0 11 up

Remote ATM Addr: 00000000.f21c3965

If no destination SPANS SPVCs have been created, the following displays:

myswitch:connections spvcc spans source-> show

No Source SPANS spvcc


Field Description

ID A unique number that the SCP assigned to this SPANS SPVC.

Local AtmIf The port number on the local switch fabric.

VPI The virtual path number on the local switch fabric.

VCI The virtual channel number on the local switch fabric.

BW The amount of peak bandwidth allocated for this SPANS SPVC, specified in kilobitsper second. The default is 0.

Remote ID The fabric ID assigned to the remote switch fabric.

State The operating status of this SPANS SPVC (up, down, or failed).

Remote ATM Addr The IP address of the remote switch.


on

sd

s


3.9 connections spvpc

The commands listed under connections spvpc let you configure Smart Permanent VirtualPath Connections (SPVPCs, hereafter to referred to as SPVPs). An SPVP is a path that goesacross multiple switch fabrics. An SPVP looks like a PVP at the local and remote endpointswith a Switched Virtual Path (SVP) in the middle. SPVPs are more robust than PVPs. If anSPVP goes down and there is an alternate route, then the end switch fabrics of the SPVPautomatically reroute the SPVP around the failed link.

NOTESVPs and SPVPs are supported in ATM ForumPNNI networks. Point-to-multipoint SVPs andSPVPs are not supported.

Type ? at the spvpc level to display the list of available subcommands.

myswitch:connections spvpc-> ?

delete Delete a source PNNI spvpc

destination Display destination PNNI spvpc

modify Change the priority of a source PNNI spvpc

new Create a new source PNNI spvpc

number Display number of PNNI spvpc

parameters Display/Modify PNNI spvpc parameters

show Display source PNNI spvpc


Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


3.9.1 connections spvpc deleteThis command lets you delete an existing SPVP from the source end. You must specify theindex number assigned to the SPVP that you want to delete.

myswitch:connections spvpc-> delete

Usage:


[[-callingatmif] <AtmIf>] Src AtmIf

[[-callingvpi] <integer>] Src VPI

[[-calledatmaddr] <NSAP Address>] Destination NSAP

[[-calledatmif] <integer>] Dst AtmIf


[[-calledassignedvpi] <integer>] Dst VPI

[[-calledvpvcsel] (noPref|require)] Dst VPVC Sel

[[-fwdupckey] <UPC Index>] Fwd UPC

[[-bckupckey] <UPC Index>] Bck UPC


[[-fwdqosclass] <QoS Class>] Fwd QoS CLass

[[-bckqosclass] <QoS Class>] Bck QoS CLass

[[-lastfailcause] <text>] Last Fail Cause



[[-status] (up|down)] Status




[[-callingdomain] <integer>] Calling Domain

[[-qosindex] <integer>] Qos Index


[[-lastlocation] <text>] Last Location

[[-backoffstatus] (enabled|disabled)] DTL Backoff Status


on

sd

s[[-activedtlindex] <integer>] Active DTL Index

[[-activedtlnode] <nodeid>] Active DTL Node


[[-autodtlstatus] (enabled|disabled)] Auto DTL



The parameters are defined in the same manner as for the connections spvpc newcommand (see Section 3.9.4).


3.9.2 connections spvpc destinationThis command lets you display destination PNNI SPVPs.

myswitch:connections spvpc-> destination


INDEX ATMIF VPI ATMIF VPI STATE Group ID

1 179 1 1A1 15 up N/A

Source : 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f21c.3950.0020480d00b3.00

Destination: 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f21c.3965.0020480d0000.00

2 179 2 1A1 16 up N/A

Source : 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f21c.3950.0020480d00b3.00


If destination PNNI SPVPs have not been created, the following displays:

myswitch:connections spvpc-> destination

No Destination PNNI spvpc

To display more information, enter the following:

myswitch:connections spvpc-> destination -advanced


INDEX ATMIF VPI ATMIF VPI STATE Group ID

1 179 1 1A1 15 up N/A

Source : 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f21c.3950.0020480d00b3.00


ForwardQos = class0, BackwardQos = class0

Uptime = 00:20, Clip = no


2 179 2 1A1 16 up N/A

Source : 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f21c.3950.0020480d00b3.00


ForwardQos = class0, BackwardQos = class0

Uptime = 00:00, Clip = no


Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


3.9.3 connections spvpc modifyThis command lets you change the priority of an existing SPVP from the source end. Enter theindex number assigned to the SPVP that you want to modify.

myswitch:connections spvpc-> modify

Usage:



[[-backoffstatus] (enabled|disabled)] DTL Backoff Status


[[-autodtlstatus] (enabled|disabled)] Auto DTL



on

sd

s


3.9.4 connections spvpc newThis command lets you create a new SPVP.

myswitch:connections spvpc-> new

Usage:

[[-index] <integer>] index (default: 14547)

[-callingatmif] <AtmIf> Src AtmIf

[-callingvpi] <integer> Src VPI

[-calledatmaddr] <NSAP Address> Destination NSAP


[[-fwdupckey] <UPC Index>] Fwd UPC (default: 0)

[[-bckupckey] <UPC Index>] Bck UPC (default: 0)


[[-fwdqosclass] <QoS Class>] Fwd QoS CLass (default: class0)

[[-bckqosclass] <QoS Class>] Bck QoS CLass (default: class0)


[[-reroutestatus] (enabled|disabled)] Reroute Status (default: disabled)

[[-callingdomain] <integer>] Calling Domain (default: 1)

[[-qosindex] <integer>] Qos Index (default: 0)


[[-backoffstatus] (enabled|disabled)] DTL Backoff Status (default: enabled)


[[-autodtlstatus] (enabled|disabled)] Auto DTL (default: enabled)



The parameters for delete, destination, modify, and new are defined as follows:


-index <integer> The index number assigned to this SPVP to identify it uniquely. For SPVPs, the index


number may be assigned either by AMI or by the user. Valid values are integers between 1and 65535.

-callingatmif <AtmIf> The port number where the permanent portion of the SPVP resides on the source (local)switch fabric.

-callingvpi <integer> The virtual path number for the permanent portion of the SPVP on the source (local)switch fabric.

-calledatmaddr<NSAP Address>

The ATM NSAP address of the destination (remote) switch for this SPVP.

-calledvpi <integer> The virtual path number on the destination switch fabric for this SPVP. If this parameter isnot used, the destination switch uses any available value.

Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


-fwdupckey <UPC Index> The forward (going from the local switch fabric to the remote switch fabric) UPC contractindex assigned to this SPVP. To find the index you want, use the connections upc showcommand. If no index is specified, the default index of 0 (UBR best effort) is used.

-bckupckey <UPC Index> The backward (going from the remote switch fabric to the local switch fabric) UPCcontract index assigned to this SPVP. To find the index you want, use the connectionsupc show command. If no index is specified, the default index of 0 (UBR best effort) isused.

-susceptclip (no | yes) During speech transmission, clipping is the loss of a brief interval at the beginning of aspeech spurt. no indicates this SPVP is not susceptible to clipping. yes indicates thisSPVP is susceptible to clipping. The default is no.

-fwdqosclass <QoS Class> The requested QoS class for this SPVP in the forward (calling to called) direction. The -fqosand -bqos options must be either both class0 or both a non-zero class. The default is class0.

-bckqosclass <QoS Class> The requested QoS class for this SPVP in the backward (called to calling) direction. The-fqosand -bqos options must be either both class0 or both a non-zero class. The default is class0.

-name <text> An optional name for the user to assign to this SPVP to help uniquely identify it.

-reroutestatus(enabled|disabled)

enabled indicates that this SPVP will be examined periodically to see if it is using a sub-optimal route. If it is, it will be rerouted using a better route if configured usingconnections spvpc parameters. disabled indicates that this SPVP will not beexamined periodically to see if it is using a sub-optimal route. The default state for SPVPsis disabled.

-callingdomain <integer> The PNNI domain ID number on the source (local) switch fabric. The default is 1, which isthe ID of the default routing domain.

-qosindex <integer> The index number in the QoS expansion table that is used to do QoS class-to-parameterexpansion when sending the SPVP call set-up message across a PNNI link. See theQoSExpIndex field under connections qos show for this number. The qosindex thatis specified for this SPVP must already be present in the switch. The default is 0.

-priority <integer> The order in which and the frequency with which you want this SPVP to be tried for aconnection. Higher priority SPVPs are tried more often than lower priority ones. Thevalue of lowestpriority determines the number of times each SPVP is tried beforeattempting a lower priority SPVP. Valid values are from 1 to lowestpriority, with 1being the highest priority (the first tried) and with lowestpriority being the value



on

sd

sconfigured under connections spvpc parameters -lowestpriority. The defaultvalue is half of the value of lowestpriority, rounded off to the lowest integer. Thevalue for lowestpriority is defaulted to 10.

-backoffstatus(enabled|disabled)

enabled means the back-off mechanism is used for this SPVP. Upon a failure, the faileddirected DTL is not retried until the amount of time specified under connectionsspvpc parameters -backoffinterval has elapsed. This allows old information toage out. disabled means the back-off mechanism is not used for this SPVP and directedDTLs that are configured for this SPVP are retried continually even after a failure. Thedefault is enabled. See Chapter 3 of Part 3 of this manual for more information.

-dtltag <integer> The Designated Transit List (DTL) tag, or index number, assigned to this SPVP which cor-responds to a list of preferred DTLs that you configure under routing dtltable. TheDTL specifies the preferred call routing for the SVP portion of the SPVP.


-autodtlstatus(enabled|disabled)

Indicates whether automatic DTL routing is enabled or disabled. enable means thatdynamic path computation is used to route an SPVC when all of the configured DTLs fail.disable means that dynamic path computation is not used to route an SPVC when all ofthe configured DTLs fail. This feature applies to PNNI DTLs. The default is enable. Thisflag does not apply when no DTLs are configured.


-secondaryvpi <integer> The secondary virtual path identifier of an SPVC redundancy group.

-activedtlindex <integer> The Active Designated Transit List (DTL) index for this SPVPC (Smart Permanent VirtualPath Circuit). This value, along with -activedtlnode, uniquely identifies the DTL thatis currently used by the SVC portion of the SPVPC.

-activedtlnode <integer> The Node index of the Active Designated Transit List for this SPVPC (Smart PermanentVirtual Path Circuit). The active DTL indexed by the node index and DTL index identifiesthe DTL that is currently used by the SVC portion of the SPVPC.

-calledassignedvpi<integer>

The virtual path number on the destination switch fabric for this SPVP. If this parameter isnot used, the destination switch uses any available value

-calledatmif <integer> The port number of the destination switch for this SPVP.

-calledvpvcse1(noPref|require)

NoPref means that you did not specify which VPI that the destination switch should usefor the permanent portion of the through path when this SPVP was created. If thedestination switch is a Marconi switch, the value is displayed in the Destination VPIfield. If the destination switch is not a Marconi switch, a ? is displayed in theDestination VPI field. Require means that the destination switch must use the VPIgiven when the SPVP was created for the permanent portion of the through path.

-lastchangetime <timeticks> If applicable, shows, in hundredths of a second, the time since this PNNI point-to-pointSPVC was created or the time since the last successful call setup occurred. The STATEshows up.

-lastfailcause <text> The reason for the last call setup failure for this PNNI point-to-point SPVC. This field isonly displayed for originating SPVCs that are down.

-lastlocation <text> Upon a call setup failure for this PNNI point-to-point SPVC, indicates the exact link, VPI,and NSAP address where the failure occurred.

-retrycount <integer> Displays the number of times the call setup has been attempted since the SPVP was



created or since the last successful call setup occurred. This is only displayed when theSTATE is down.

-routecost <integer> The current call routing cost for this originating PNNI point-to-point SPVC. If the SPVC isdown, shows N/A.

-status (up|down) The operational status of this SPVP.

-uptime <integer> The amount of time that this SPVP has been up.

Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


3.9.5 connections spvpc numberThis command lets you display the number of source and destination PNNI SPVPs.

myswitch:connections spvpc-> number

Source PNNI spvpc 2000

Destination PNNI spvpc 0

3.9.6 connections spvpc parametersThis command lets you display or modify PNNI SPVP parameters. To display theconfiguration, enter the following:

myswitch:connections spvpc-> parameters

Pace Interval (millisecs): 2000

Pace Calls/Interval: 20

Reroute Interval (millisecs): 15000

Reroute Calls/Interval: 15

Reroute Threshold: 75%

Lowest Priority: 10

DTL Backoff Interval (secs): 600

Traps Sent for SPVPCs: reroute

To modify the parameters, enter the following:

myswitch:connections spvpc-> parameters ?

[[-paceinterval] <integer>] Pace Interval (millisecs)

[[-pacenum] <integer>] Pace Calls/Interval


on

sd

s

[[-rerouteinterval] <integer>] Reroute Interval (millisecs)

[[-reroutenum] <integer>] Reroute Calls/Interval

[[-reroutethreshold] <percent>] Reroute Threshold

[[-lowestpriority] <integer>] Lowest Priority

[[-backoffinterval] <integer>] DTL Backoff Interval (secs)

[[-trapmode] <spvpc_traps>] Traps Sent for SPVPCs




-paceinterval <integer> The interval, in milliseconds, between call setup attempts. Values can be from 50 to300,000 ms. The least significant millisecond value is rounded off. For example a valueof 6,788 is converted to 6,780. The default is 2,000 ms.

-pacenum <integer> The number of SPVPs which can be set up at one time during an attempt. Values can befrom 1 to 1000. The default is 20 calls.

-rerouteinterval <integer> The time interval, in milliseconds, between successive callbacks to the SPVP controller tocheck for and reroute existing SPVPs if a better route becomes available. The leastsignificant millisecond value is rounded off. For example, a value of 6,788 is converted to6,780. The default is 15,000 ms. The range of valid values is 50 to 3,600,000 ms,inclusive.

-reroutenum <integer> Indicates how many up SPVPs, per interval, will be analyzed to determine whether or notthose SPVPs need to be rerouted. The default is 15 SPVPs.

-reroutethreshold <percent> The minimum percentage improvement in the cost that the new SPVP must have over thecurrent SPVP before a reroute is performed. The default value is 75 percent. The range ofvalid values is 1 to 99, inclusive.

-lowestpriority <integer> The value that you want to be the lowest value (last tried and least often tried) whendetermining the order in which and the frequency with which SPVPs are tried for aconnection. This value cannot be less than the priority of an existing SPVP and it cannot begreater than 100. The default is 10.

-backoffinterval <integer> The amount of time, in seconds, that failed directed DTLs should be held before they aretried again. This value is used by all SPVPs that have the back-off mechanism enabled. (Itis enabled by default.) The value must be an integer from 0 to 90,000 (0 - 25 hours).Entering a value of 0 disables the DTL back-off mechanism for SPVPs. The default is 600seconds. If the backoff mechanism is enabled, directed DTLs that fail will be off for theamount of time specified here before they are tried again. This backoff interval allows thenetwork to stabilize before attempting the failed DTL again.

-trapmode <spvpc_traps> In previous ForeThought releases, an spvcRerouteInitiated trap (number 1090) is sentwhenever an SPVC is torn down and rerouted because a more optimal route has becomeavailable. This command gives you more flexibility to configure which trap(s) should besent, on a per-switch basis, when an SPVC is set up or torn down. SPVP traps aregenerated only by the source of an SPVP. The destination side of an SPVP does not


generate any traps. reroute indicates an spvcRerouteInitiated trap will be sentwhen an SPVP is torn down because a better route has become available or because anetwork failure has occurred. This is the default. failure indicates a pnniSpvpcFailtrap will be sent if a call cannot be established after 16 consecutive attempts. ApnniSpvpcUp trap is sent if a call is established that has previously sent apnniSpvpcFail trap. none indicates no SPVC traps will be sent. all indicates apnniSpvpcDown trap will be sent (instead of the spvcRerouteInitiated trap) whenan SPVC is torn down because a better route has become available or because a networkfailure has occurred. A pnniSpvpcFail trap is sent if a call cannot be established after 16consecutive attempts. A pnniSpvpcUp trap is sent when a call is established.

Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


3.9.7 connections spvpc showThis command lets you display originating and terminating SPVPs associated with thisswitch.

myswitch:connections spvpc-> show

Source Destination

INDEX ATMIF VPI UPC ATMIF VPI UPC VPVC-SEL PRIORITY STATE

1 4C4 10 0 57 N/A 0 noPref 5 down


If no source PNNI SPVPs have been configured, the following displays:

myswitch:connections spvpc-> show

No Source PNNI spvpc

To display more information, enter the following.

myswitch:connections spvpc-> show -advanced

Source Destination

INDEX ATMIF VPI UPC ATMIF VPI UPC VPVC-SEL PRIORITY STATE

1 4C4 10 0 57 N/A 0 noPref 5 down


ForwardQos = class0 , BackwardQos = class0 , Clip = no

DTL Info:

DtlTag = 0

Backoff = enabled , AutoDtl = enabled

Advanced Info:

Name = N/A , Cost = 0 , Reroute = disabled

Domainid = 1 , QosExpIndex = 0

Last Failure Cause = resource-unavailable-or-unspecified-Cause47


on

sd

s

LastFailureLocation=LCL:1 LINK:65533 VPI:65533 NSAP:47000580ffe1000000f21c457

Time = 00:25 , RetryCount = 110

Redundancy GroupID = N/A, Secondary VPI = N/A


Field Description

INDEX The index number assigned to this SPVP by AMI to identify it uniquely from other SPVPsthat have this switch fabric as their source.


Source ATMIF The port identifier on the originating switch fabric that contains the permanent portion forthis SPVP.

Source VPI The virtual path number used for the through path in the permanent portion of this SPVPon the originating switch fabric.

Source UPC The forward (going from the local switch fabric to the remote switch fabric) UPC contractindex associated with this SPVP.

Destination ATMIF The port identifier on the terminating switch fabric that contains the permanent portionfor this SPVP, if the destination end is a Marconi switch. If the port at the destinationswitch cannot be determined, a question mark (?) is displayed.

Destination VPI The virtual path number on the destination switch fabric that contains the permanentportion for this SPVP. any means the user did not specify the VPI to be used at thedestination.

Destination UPC The backward (going from the remote switch fabric to the local switch fabric) UPCcontract index associated with this SPVP.

VPVC-SEL NoPref means that you did not specify which VPI that the destination switch should usefor the permanent portion of the through path when this SPVP was created. If thedestination switch is a Marconi switch, the value is displayed in the Destination VPIfield. If the destination switch is not a Marconi switch, a ? is displayed in theDestination VPI field. Require means that the destination switch must use the VPIgiven when the SPVP was created for the permanent portion of the through path.

PRIORITY The order in which this SPVP is tried for a connection. Values are from 1 tolowestpriority, with 1 being the highest priority (the first tried and the most oftentried) and with lowestpriority being the value configured under connectionsspvpc parameters -lowestpriority. This parameter only applies to the sourceswitch.

STATE The state of this SPVP. Can be up or down.

Destination The NSAP ATM address for the terminating side of the SPVP.

ForwardQos The requested quality of service for this SPVP in the forward (calling to called) direction.

BackwardQos The requested quality of service for this SPVP in the backward (called to calling) direction.

Field Description


Clip no means this SPVP is not susceptible to clipping and yes means it is susceptible toclipping.

DtlTag The Designated Transit List (DTL) tag, or index number, assigned to this SPVP whichcorresponds to a DTL table that you configure under routing dtltable. The DTLspecifies the preferred call routing for the SVC portion of the SPVP.

Backoff enabled means the back-off mechanism is used for this SPVP. Upon a failure, directedDTLs that are configured for this SPVP are not retried until the amount of time specifiedunder connections spvpc parameters -backoffinterval has elapsed. This allowsold information to age out. disabled means the back-off mechanism is not used for thisSPVP and directed DTLs that are configured for this SPVP are retried continually upon afailure.

Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


AutoDtl enabled means that dynamic path computation is used to route an SPVP when all of theconfigured DTLs fail or when no DTLs are configured. disabled means that dynamicpath computation is not used to route an SPVP when all of the configured DTLs fail orwhen no DTLs are configured. This feature applies to PNNI DTLs.

Name The optional name assigned to this SPVP to help identify it. If no name is assigned, N/A isdisplayed.

Cost The current call routing cost for this originating SPVP. If the SPVP is down, shows N/A.

Reroute enabled means this SPVP is examined to see if it is using a sub-optimal route. If it is, it isrerouted according to the parameters in connections spvpc parameters-reroutestatus. disabled means this SPVP is not examined to see if it is using a sub-optimal route.

Domainid The PNNI domain ID number on the source (local) switch fabric.

QoSExpIndex The index number in the QoS expansion table that is used to do QoS class-to-parameterexpansion when sending the SPVP call set-up message across a PNNI link. See theQoSExpIndex field under connections qos show for this number.

Last Failure Cause The reason for the last call setup failure for this SPVP. This field is only displayed fororiginating SPVPs that are down.

LastFailureLocation Upon a call setup failure for this PNNI SPVC, indicates the exact link, VPI, and NSAPaddress where the failure occurred.

Time If applicable, shows, in hundredths of a second, the time since this SPVP was created orthe time since the last successful call setup occurred.

Retry Count Displays the number of times the call setup has been attempted since the SPVP wascreated or since the last successful call setup occurred. This is only displayed when theSTATE is down.



Field Description


on

sd

s


3.10 connections spvxredundancy

The commands listed under connections spvxredundancy let you configure PVCredundancy for SPVCs.

The switched portion (SVC) of an SPVC can be dynamically rerouted in case of networkfailures. In the case of failure in the permanent portion (PVC) of an SPVC, or if there is afailure at the host end of the PVC side, you can switch to another PVC portion on anotherinterface on the same switch. From an end-to-end perspective of an SPVC, an SPVC can thenbe considered fully redundant. Two ports on the same switch can be grouped as primary andsecondary SPVC ports (referred to as SPVC redundancy group). This redundancy group isassigned an SPVC redundancy group index and a unique NSAP address.

Type ? at the spvxredundancy level to display the list of available subcommands.

myswitch:connections spvxredundancy-> ?

delete Delete an SPVC Redundancy Group

modify Modify an SPVC Redundancy Group

new Create a new SPVC Redundancy Group

nsapaddr Compute the NSAP address for this SPVC Redundancy Group

as destination

show Display the SPVC Redundancy Group configuration

switchover Switchover an SPVC Redundancy Group


Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


3.10.1 connections spvxredundancy deleteThis command lets you delete an SPVC redundancy group. If there are SPVCs referring to thisindex, the entry cannot be deleted. An entry can only be deleted if all SPVCs (active, inactive,present in the CDB, not shown, etc.) referencing this index are removed.

myswitch:connections spvxredundancy-> delete

Usage:

[-index] <integer> Redundancy Group ID

[[-primaryatmif] <AtmIf>] Primary AtmIf

[[-secondaryatmif] <AtmIf>] Secondary AtmIf

[[-activeatmif] <AtmIf>] Active AtmIf


[[-autoswitchover] (enabled|disabled)] Auto PVC Switch Over

[[-pacingnumber] <integer>] Pacing Number

[[-pacinginterval] <integer>] Pacing Interval

[[-nsapaddr] <NSAP Address>] NSAP Address

[[-switchover] (primary|secondary)] Switch Over

[[-state] <state>] State

The parameters are defined in the same manner as for the connections spvxredundancynew command (see Section 3.10.3).

3.10.2 connections spvxredundancy modifyThis command lets you change the switchover port for an entry in an SPVX redundancygroup.

myswitch:connections spvxredundancy-> modify

Usage:



on

sd

s[[-switchover] (primary|secondary)] Switch Over

The parameters are defined in the same manner as for the connections spvxredundancynew command (see Section 3.10.3).


3.10.3 connections spvxredundancy newThis command lets you create primary and secondary port pairs. The automatic PVCswitchover indicates if the PVC switchover can be automatic (i.e., when there is a carrier loss).

myswitch:connections spvxredundancy-> new

Usage:

[[-index] <integer>] Redundancy Group ID (default: 2)

[-primaryatmif] <AtmIf> Primary AtmIf

[-secondaryatmif] <AtmIf> Secondary AtmIf


[[-autoswitchover] (enabled|disabled)] Auto PVC Switch Over (default:

disabled)

[[-pacingnumber] <integer>] Pacing Number (default: 200)

[[-pacinginterval] <integer>] Pacing Interval (millisecs) (default:

2000)

[[-switchover] (primary|secondary)] Switch Over Command (default:

primary)



-index <integer> The redundancy group index to be assigned to these ports.

-primaryatmif <AtmIf> The port to be configured as the primary redundant port.

-secondaryatmif <AtmIf> The port to be configured as the secondary redundant port.

-name <text> The name of the redundancy group.

-autoswitchover (enabled|disabled) Enable or disable automatic PVC switch over from active to standby and viceversa. The default is disabled.

-pacingnumber <integer> The default pacing number is 200.

-pacinginterval <integer> The pacing interval is specified in milliseconds and the minimum is 100ms. The


default pacing interval is 2000ms (2 seconds).

-switchover (primary|secondary) Manually switch from the primary port to the secondary port or vice versa.

-activeatmif <AtmIf> The active port.

-nsapaddr <NSAP Address> The NSAP address of the redundancy group.

-state <state> The current state of the PVC switch over. InProgress means that a PVCswitchover from active to standby is in progress. NotInProgress means thereis no switchover in progress.

Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


3.10.4 connections spvxredundancy nsapaddrThis command lets you compute and display the destination NSAP address for a redundancygroup. Since there may be multiple domains in a switch and an SPVC can be attached to aparticular domain, the NSAP address can be different for different domains. This NSAPaddress should be used as the destination address in SPVC creation if any SPVC needs to beterminated on this redundancy group. This command uses the -domainid from the routingdomain command.

myswitch:connections spvxredundancy-> nsapaddr

Usage:

[-domainid] <integer> Domain ID

[-rgroupid] <integer> Redundancy Group ID

myswitch:connections spvxredundancy-> nsapaddr 1 1

Rgroup Destination NSAP : 0x47.000580ffe1000000f21c4571.0020480d0001.80



-domainid <integer> The PNNI domain ID on the destination switch. The prefix corresponding tothat domain is used to compute the destination NSAP address.

-rgroupid <integer> The redundancy group index for these ports.


on

sd

s


3.10.5 connections spvxredundancy showThis command lets you display a list of all entries or a specific entry for a redundancy group.

myswitch:connections spvxredundancy-> show

RGroup Primary Secondary Active RGroup SwitchOver

Index AtmIf AtmIf AtmIf Name State

1 1C1 1C2 1C1 N/A NotInProgress

To list more details, enter the following:

myswitch:connections spvxredundancy-> show -advanced

RGroup Primary Secondary Active RGroup SwitchOver SwitchOver

Index AtmIf AtmIf AtmIf Name State Command

1 1C1 1C2 1C1 N/A NotInProgress primary

AutoPVCSwitchOver: disabled PacingNumber: 200 PacingInterval: 2000 msecs

NSAP Addr: 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.00ae.1e2e.0104.0020480d0001.80


Field Description

RGroup Index The redundancy group index assigned to these ports.

Primary AtmIf The port to be configured as the primary redundant port.

Secondary AtmIf The port to be configured as the secondary redundant port.

Active AtmIf The active port number.

RGroup Name The name of the primary and secondary port pairs.

SwitchOver State Indicates the switch over state (InProgress or NotInProgress). Modifying theswitch over state changes the active AtmIf.

SwitchOver Command Indicates whether the primary or secondary AtmIf is active.


AutoPVCSwitchOver Indicates whether the automatic PVC switch over from active to standby orvice versa is enabled or disabled. The default is disabled.

PacingNumber The default pacing number is 200.

PacingInterval The pacing interval is specified in milliseconds and the minimum is 100ms. Thedefault pacing interval is 2000ms (2 seconds).

NSAP Addr The NSAP address of the redundancy group.

Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


3.10.6 connections spvxredundancy switchoverThis command lets you switch over all SPVCs from the primary to secondary ports for aparticular group index. Executing this command will switch over from the active port to thestandby port.

myswitch:connections spvxredundancy-> switchover

Usage:


[-switchoverto] (primary|secondary) Switchover To

The parameters are defined as follows::


-index <integer> The redundancy group index assigned to these ports.

-switchoverto (primary|secondary) Switch over to the primary or secondary redundant port.


on

sd

s


3.11 connections upc

These commands let you create, delete, or display usage parameter control (UPC) trafficcontracts. These contracts can then be applied to PVCs using the connections channel newor the connections path through new command. You can display the list of availablesubcommands by typing ? at the upc level.

myswitch:connections upc-> ?

delete Remove a upc contract

fratm> The fratm directory

new Create a new upc contract

new-abr Create a new ABR contract

new-cbr Create a new CBR contract

new-ubr Create a new UBR contract

new-vbr Create a new VBR contract

show Display upc configuration

units Change/Display the units used for upc tables

3.11.1 connections upc deleteThis command allows you to delete an existing UPC contract. Enter the following parameters:

myswitch:connections upc-> delete

Usage:


[[-servcat] <ServCat>] Service Category

[[-pscheme] <pScheme>] Policing Scheme

[[-pcr] <integer>] PCR

[[-scr] <integer>] SCR


[[-mbs] <integer>] MBS

[[-cdvt] <integer>] CDVT


[[-gcra] (on|off)] GCRA Policing

[[-aal5] (yes|no)] AAL5

[[-pktdisc] (on|off)] Packet Discard

[[-pppol] (on|off)] PP Policing

[[-schdmod] <SchedMode>] Scheduling Mode

[[-altclp] (on|off)] Alt CLP Threshold

[[-mcr] <integer>] ABR MCR

[[-aal5cnt] <CountMode>] AAL5 Counting Mode

Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


[[-subcat] <integer (1..16)>] Service Sub-category

[[-lbmincr] <integer>] Load Balanced MinCR

[[-lbpcr] <integer>] Load Balanced PCR

[[-bcs] <integer>] Behavior Class Selector


3.11.2 connections upc fratmThese commands let you create or display Frame Relay UPC contracts. These contracts can beapplied to PVCs using the connections channel new or the connections path throughnew command. You can display the list of available subcommands by typing ? at the fratmlevel.

myswitch:connections upc fratm-> ?

new Create Frame Relay Contracts

show Display Frame Relay Contract

3.11.2.1 connections upc fratm newThis command lets you create a Frame Relay UPC contract. This command is only used onVBR Frame Relay PVCs that are output on Series D network modules. The -schdmodsmoothed option must be used on the Series D network modules. Enter the following:

myswitch:connections upc fratm-> new

Usage:

[[-index] <integer>] Index (default: 1)

[-frame_pscheme] (vbr1|vbr2|vbr3) VBR Policing Scheme

[-bc] <integer> Committed burst size in bits

[-be] <integer> Burst in excess in bits


on

sd

s

[-cir] <integer> Committed Information Rate in Kbps

[-ar] <integer> Access Rate in Kbps

[-frsize] <integer> Frame Size in bytes



You can then apply any UPC contract that uses these options to a Frame Relay PVC using the-faupc <UPC Index> and -afupc <UPC Index> options under services fratm pvc new,services fratm network-pvc new, or services fratm service-pvc new. When theseoptions are used, they are converted to ATM UPC parameters and are displayed as ATMparameters.


-index <integer> The integer index that refers to this specific traffic contract. Valid index numbers are from0 to 32,767.

-frame_pscheme(vbr1|vbr2|vbr3)

The policing scheme for this UPC contract as defined in the ATM Forum TM 4.0Specification.

-bc <integer> The committed burst size of a connection, in bits. Can only be used on a Frame Relayconnection. The bc + be must be less than or equal to the ar.

-be <integer> The excess burst size of a connection, in bits. Can only be used on a Frame Relayconnection. The bc + be must be less than or equal to the ar.

-cir <integer> The committed information rate of a connection, in kbps. Can only be used on a FrameRelay connection. The cir must be less than or equal to the ar. Entering 0 for thisparameter means the traffic is treated as best-effort.

-ar <integer> The access rate of a Frame Relay UNI, in kbps. Can only be used on a Frame Relayconnection. The default value is 64. If multiple timeslots are used, you must modify thisvalue accordingly. The access rate for one timeslot is 64 Kbps, and the access rate for twotimeslots is 128 Kbps, etc. The access rate for 24 timeslots (max. for DS1) is 1536 Kbps andthe access rate for 31 timeslots (max. for E1) is 1984 Kbps.

-frsize <integer> The maximum payload frame size, in bytes. Can only be used on a Frame Relayconnection. This value must not exceed 4,092. The default value is 4092.


Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


3.11.2.2 connections upc fratm showThis command lets you display Frame Relay UPC contracts as follows:

myswitch:connections upc fratm-> show

VBR Committed Excess Committed Access Frame

Index Policing Burst Burst Information Rate Rate Size

(bits) (bits) (Kbps) (Kbps) (bytes)

1 vbr1 256000 0 256 1544 1000

2 vbr2 320000 384000 256 1544 1000



Index The integer index that refers to this specific traffic contract.

VBR Policing The VBR policing scheme for this UPC contract as defined in the ATM Forum TM 4.0Specification.

Committed Burst The committed burst size of a connection, in bits.

Excess Burst The excess burst size of a connection, in bits.

Committed Information Rate The committed information rate of a connection, in kbps.

Access Rate The access rate of a Frame Relay UNI, in kbps.

Frame Size The maximum payload frame size, in bytes.


on

sd

s


3.11.3 connections upc newThis command lets you create a UPC contract. Enter the following parameters:

myswitch:connections upc-> new

Usage:


[[-servcat] <ServCat>] Service Category (default: UBR)

[[-pscheme] <pScheme>] Policing Scheme (default: ubr1)

[[-pcr] <integer>] PCR (default: “”)

[[-scr] <integer>] SCR (default: “”)

[[-mbs] <integer>] MBS (default: “”)



[[-gcra] (on|off)] GCRA Policing (default: off)

[[-aal5] (yes|no)] AAL5 (default: no)

[[-pktdisc] (on|off)] Packet Discard (default: on)

[[-pppol] (on|off)] PP Policing (default: off)

[[-schdmod] <SchedMode>] Scheduling Mode (default: default)

[[-altclp] (on|off)] Alt CLP Threshold (default: off)

[[-mcr] <integer>] ABR MCR (default: “”)

[[-aal5cnt] <CountMode>] AAL5 Counting Mode (default: default)

[[-subcat] <integer (1..16)>] Service Sub-category (default: default)






Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


3.11.4 connections upc new-abrThis command lets you create an ABR UPC contract. Enter the following parameters:

myswitch:connections upc-> new-abr

Usage:


[-pcr] <integer> PCR

[-mcr] <integer> ABR MCR



[[-gcra] (on|off)] GCRA Policing (default: on)








3.11.5 connections upc new-cbrThis command lets you create a CBR UPC contract. Enter the following parameters:

myswitch:connections upc-> new-cbr

Usage:


[-pscheme] (cbr1|cbr0|cbr0tag) Policing Scheme


[[-scr] <integer>] SCR (default: “”)



on

sd

s[[-name] <text>] Name (default: “”)











3.11.6 connections upc new-ubrThis command lets you create a UBR UPC contract. Enter the following parameters:

myswitch:connections upc-> new-ubr

Usage:


[-pscheme] (ubr1|ubr2) Policing Scheme











3.11.7 connections upc new-vbrThis command lets you create a VBR UPC contract. Enter the following parameters:

myswitch:connections upc-> new-vbr

Usage:


[-servcat] (rtVBR|nrtVBR) Service Category

[-pscheme] (vbr1|vbr2|vbr3) Policing Scheme


[-scr] <integer> SCR


[-mbs] <integer> MBS











Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


The parameters for delete, new, new-abr, new-cbr, new-ubr, and new-vbr are defined asfollows:


-index <integer> The integer index that refers to this specific traffic contract. Valid index numbers are from0 to 32,767.

-servcat <ServCat> The service category of the traffic that uses this contract.

-pscheme <pScheme> The policing scheme for this UPC contract as defined in the ATM Forum TM 4.0Specification. The cbr and cbr0 schemes are specific to Marconi switches.

-pcr <integer> Indicates the peak cell rate.

-scr <integer> Indicates the sustainable cell rate.

-mbs <integer> Indicates the maximum burst size.

-cdvt <integer> The Cell Delay Variation Tolerance (CDVT) associated with the peak cell rates, inmicroseconds. If the CDVT is not specified here, the default CDVT value associated withthe port is used. (See hardware port show, interfaces atmif show, andinterfaces atmif modify -cdvt for more information).

-name <text> The user-defined name associated with this UPC traffic contract. This helps youremember for what traffic type this specific contract is used.

-gcra (on|off) off means that GCRA policing is disabled on connections using this contract.

on means that GCRA policing is enabled on connections using this contract.

The default value that is displayed is dynamic based on the service category that isentered. For the UBR service category, the default is off. For all other service categories,the default is on.

You must use the on option when applying a UPC contract to the outbound signallingchannel using the -outputsigupc <UPC Index> variable under signalling new toprevent the outbound signalling channel from being policed.

-aal5 (yes|no) yes means that the connection is using the AAL5 Adaptation Layer. no means that theconnection is not using the AAL5 Adaptation Layer. The default is no.

-pktdisc (on|off) This parameter can only be used if the connection is AAL5 (i.e., the -aal5 option is yes).on enables EPD/PPD (AAL5 packet discard) on AAL5 connections. off disables EPD/PPD (AAL5 packet discard) on AAL5 connections. The default is on.


on

sd

s-pppol (on|off) Can only be used if the connection is AAL5 (i.e., the -aal5 option is yes). on means thatPartial Packet Policing is going to be performed on this connection. off means that PartialPacket Policing is not going to be performed on this connection. The default is off. TheHDCOMP ASIC must be version 1 or greater to support AAL5 partial packet policing. Todisplay the ASIC version, use the hardware inputlookuperrors command.


-schdmod <SchedMode> The scheduling mode to be used for servicing traffic on the output side of Series 2 portcards or on Series D or Series E network modules:

• roundrobin means that all service for these connections comes from one of theround-robin queues in the network module. This is the default mode for both SVCsand PVCs.

• smoothed means that all service for these connections comes from the networkmodule’s rate controller, which ensures that cells for these connections are transmittedinto the network at a fixed rate of R cells per second.

• guaranteed is a combination of the round-robin and smoothed modes. Service forthese connections are scheduled with both fixed rate R from the rate controller, andthey have an entry in the appropriate round-robin queue.

This -schdmod <SchedMode> parameter has an effect only on connections with outputson Series 2 port cards or on Series D or Series E network modules. All other networkmodule platforms only use roundrobin scheduling. The default is default.

-altclp (on|off) Applies to connections on Series D or Series E network modules, or to Series 2 port cards.on means that the alternate CLP threshold (configured using hardware netmodtraffic d modify -altclp01thresh -altclp1thresh) should be used for allconnections created with this UPC contract. off means that the alternate CLP thresholdshould not be used. The default is off.

-mcr <integer> Indicates the minimum cell rate for all cells. ABR connections with an MCR equal to 0 usethe roundrobin scheduling discipline. ABR connections with an MCR greater than 0 usethe guaranteed scheduling discipline. However, if there are no suitable rate groups in therate controller, the ABR connections with an MCR greater than 0 are rejected. Thisparameter is supported only on Series D or Series E network modules, or on Series 2 portcards.

-aal5cnt <CountMode> This parameter only applies to Series D or Series E network modules, or to Series 2 portcards in an ASX-4000 switch.

packet means AAL5 packets are counted when gathering statistics for AAL5connections.

cell means AAL5 cells are counted when gathering statistics for AAL5 connections.

default means the mode configured at the port card or network module level (packet orcell) is used when gathering statistics for AAL5 connections. The default value is default.

-subcat <integer (1..16)> The service subcategory for this connection. A set of connections can be grouped within a



service category. This index is used when assigning classes to a group of connections onthe Series 2 port cards in an ASX-4000 switch. The default value is default.

-lbmincr <integer> The minimum amount of UBR bandwidth expected for this call, in kilocells/second. (Theunits are entered in cells per second or kilobits per second depending on what isconfigured under connections upc units. However, this number is converted tokilocells per second and rounded up to the next whole number if needed.)

This amount is still reserved even if the actual measured amount of UBR traffic is less thanthis value. Applies only to UBR connections. This value is used by the load-balanced UBRrouting feature. See Chapter 6 in the Multiservice Broadband Switch Network ConfigurationManual for more information about load-balanced UBR routing.

If the -bcs parameter is used, then this parameter must be set to 0.

Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


NOTEThe units for pcr, scr, and mbs are specifiedeither in cells per second or in bits per second,depending on what you configured underconnections upc units. To display the currentsetting, use connections upc units show. Thedefault is cps (cells per second).

NOTEFor more information about traffic contracts, referto the ATM Forum UNI 4.0 Specification and theATM Forum TM 4.0 Specification.

NOTEPVCs that use UPC contracts that contain any ofthe -gcra, -aal5, -pktdisc, and -pppoloptions are valid only when the followingcommands are set to svcOn or svcOff:

• interfaces atmif modify -gcracbr

-lbpcr <integer> The maximum amount of UBR bandwidth expected for this call, in kilocells/second. (Theunits are entered in cells per second or kilobits per second depending on what isconfigured under connections upc units. However, this number is converted tokilocells per second and rounded up to the next whole number if needed.)

This value is used by path computation to determine on which path to route the call.Applies only to UBR connections. See Chapter 6 in the Multiservice Broadband SwitchNetwork Configuration Manual for more information about path computation and load-balanced UBR routing.

-bcs <integer> The index number of the custom Behavior Class Selector (BCS) that you want to apply tothis UPC contract. For Series E network modules, this number is found in the BCS fieldunder hardware netmod traffic e customBCS show. For Series 1 port cards, thisnumber is found in the BCS field under hardware netmod traffic pc1 customBCSshow. For Series 2 port cards, this number is found in the BCS field under hardwarenetmod traffic pc2 customBCS show. When this parameter is used, the -lbmincrparameter must be set to 0.



on

sd

s-gcranrtvbr -gcrartvbr

• interfaces atmif modify -aal5pktdcbr-aal5pktdnrtvbr -aal5pktdrtvbr-aal5pktdubr

• interfaces atmif modify -pppcbr-pppnrtvbr -ppprtvbr

• interfaces atmif modify -ubrtagging


Use interfaces atmif show -tm andinterfaces atmif show -advancedtm to checkthese settings.


Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


3.11.8 connections upc showThis command lets you display all of the UPC contracts as follows:

myswitch:connections upc-> show

Service Police

Index Category Scheme PCR SCR MBS MCR CDVT Name

0 UBR ubr1 default_ubr

1 CBR cbr1 111 cbr

2 CBR cbr0 222 111 cbr0

3 nrtVBR vbr1 111 100 110 vbr

4 nrtVBR vbr2 222 200 210 vbr0

5 ABR abr1 333 22 abr

6 CBR cbr1 2 cbr

7 UBR ubr1 lbubr


Field Description

Index The UPC contracts listed by index number.

Service Category The service category of the traffic that uses this contract.

Police Scheme The policing scheme for this UPC contract as defined in the ATM Forum TM 4.0Specification. The cbr and cbr0 schemes are specific to Marconi switches.

PCR1 The peak cell rate for all cells for this contract.

SCR The sustainable cell rate for all cells in this contract.

MBS The maximum burst size for all cells in this contract.

MCR The minimum cell rate for all cells in this ABR contract.

CDVT The Cell Delay Variation Tolerance (CDVT) associated with the peak cell rates, inmicroseconds.


on

sd

s

1. The units for PCR, SCR, and MBS are shown either in cps or in bps, depending on what you configured underconnections upc units. The default is cps.

Name The user-defined name associated with this UPC traffic contract.


3.11.8.1 connections upc show -advancedThis command lets you display advanced information for all of the UPC contracts as follows:

myswitch:connections upc-> show -advanced

Scheduling AAL5 Service

Index AAL5 BCS Mode CntMode Sub-category Name

0 no N/A default default default default_ubr

1 no N/A default default default cbr

2 no N/A default default default cbr0

3 no N/A default default default vbr

4 no N/A default default default vbr0

5 no N/A guaranteed default default abr

6 no N/A default default default cbr

7 no N/A default default default lbubr


Field Description


AAL5 yes means that the connection is using the AAL5 Adaptation Layer.

no means that the connection is not using the AAL5 Adaptation Layer.

BCS The index number of the custom Behavior Class Selector (BCS) that you want to apply tothis UPC contract.

Scheduling Mode The scheduling mode that dictates the way traffic is serviced on the output side of Series 2port cards or on Series D or Series E network modules.

• roundrobin means that all service for these connections comes from one of theround-robin queues in the network module. This is the default mode for both SVCsand PVCs.

• smoothed means that all service for these connections comes from the networkmodule’s rate controller, which ensures that cells for these connections are transmittedinto the network at a fixed rate of R cells per second.


• guaranteed is a combination of the round-robin and smoothed modes. Service forthese connections are scheduled with both fixed rate R from the rate controller, andthey have an entry in the appropriate round-robin queue.

• default means the scheduling mode configured under interfaces atmifschedule modify is used.

Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


AAL5 CntMode This parameter only applies to Series D or Series E network modules, or to Series 2 portcards in an ASX-4000 switch.

• packet means AAL5 packets are counted when gathering statistics for AAL5connections.

• cell means AAL5 cells are counted when gathering statistics for AAL5 connections.

• default means the mode configured at the Series 2 port card level (packet or cell) isused when gathering statistics for AAL5 connections. The default value is default.

Service Sub-category The service subcategory for this connection. A set of connections can be grouped within aservice category. This index is used when assigning classes to a group of connections onthe Series 2 port cards in an ASX-4000 switch.


Field Description


on

sd

s


3.11.8.2 connections upc show -flagsThis command lets you display the traffic management flags for the UPC contracts as follows:

myswitch:connections upc-> show -flags

Service

Index Category GCRApol PPpol AAL5 PktDisc AltCLP Name

0 UBR off off no N/A off default_ubr

1 CBR on off no N/A off cbr

2 CBR on off no N/A off cbr0

3 nrtVBR on off no N/A off vbr

4 nrtVBR on off no N/A off vbr0

5 ABR on off no N/A off abr

6 CBR on off no N/A off cbr

7 UBR off off no N/A off lbubr


Field Description


Service Category The service category of the traffic that uses this contract.

GCRApol on means that GCRA policing is enabled on all connections that use this contract.off means that GCRA policing is disabled on all connections that use this contract.

PPpol on means that partial packet policing is enabled on all connections that use this contract.off means that partial packet policing is disabled on all connections that use this contract.

AAL5 yes means that this is an AAL5 connection. no means that this is not an AAL5 connection.

PktDisc on means that packet discard is enabled on all AAL5 connections that use this contract.off means that packet discard is disabled on all AAL5 connections that use this contract.This field only applies to AAL5 connections.

AltCLP on means that the alternate CLP threshold (configured using hardware netmodtraffic d modify -altclp01thresh -altclp1thresh) should be used for all


connections created with this UPC contract.

off means that the alternate CLP threshold should not be used.

This field only applies to connections on Series 2 port cards or on Series D or Series Enetwork modules.


Co

nn

ectiC

om

man


3.11.8.3 connections upc show -loadbalThis command lets you display UBR load-balanced routing information for the UPC contractsas follows:

myswitch:connections upc-> show -loadbal

Index MinCR PeakCR Name

0 default_ubr

1 cbr

2 cbr0

3 vbr

4 vbr0

5 abr

6 cbr

7 1500 2000 lbubr


Field Description


MinCR The minimum amount of UBR bandwidth expected for this call, in kilocells/second. Thisamount is still reserved even if the actual measured amount of UBR traffic is less than thisvalue. Applies only to UBR connections. This value is used by the load-balanced UBRrouting feature. See Chapter 6 in the Multiservice Broadband Switch Network ConfigurationManual for more information about load-balanced UBR routing.

PeakCR The maximum amount of UBR bandwidth expected for this call, in kilocells/second. Thisvalue is used by path computation to determine on which path to route the call. Appliesonly to UBR connections. See Chapter 6 in the Multiservice Broadband Switch NetworkConfiguration Manual for more information about path computation and load-balancedUBR routing.



on

sd

s


3.11.9 connections upc unitsThis command allows you to change the type of units that are being used when configuringand displaying UPC contracts. To change the units, enter the following parameters:

myswitch:connections upc-> units ?

[[-choice] <cps/bps>] cells or bits per second


To display the type of units that are being used currently, enter the following parameters:

myswitch:connections upc-> units

Units: cps

NOTEIn ForeThought 6.2.x and later releases, when theunits are configured as bps, and you create aUPC contract with the PCR, MCR, or MBSparameter, you must enter an alpha letter k, m, org after the number for the switch to accept thedesired values. The alpha letter k stands for


-choice <cps/bps> cps indicates that UPC contracts are being configured and displayed in cells per second.The default is cps.

bps means that UPC contracts are being configured and displayed in bits per second.When UPC contracts are created with the units as bps, any input that is not an exactmultiple of 424 bits (the equivalent of one ATM cell) is rounded off to the next higher mul-tiple of 424 bits. For example, 650 bits is rounded off to 848 bits.


kilobits, m stands for megabits, and g stands forgigabits.

CHAPTER 4 Ethernet Commands

Marconi’s ASX-200BX, ASX-1000, ASX-1200, TNX-210, TNX-1100, and ESX-3000 switches allsupport Ethernet port functionality to their backplanes when equipped with appropriate portcards. The physical specifications of these port cards, as well as installation and hotswappingprocedures, are detailed in the hardware and quickstart manuals which accompany theswitches and/or port cards. Please consult these documents when you have questionsconcerning hardware-specific issues.

This section explains the AMI commands that are accessible to switches with properlyconfigured Ethernet port cards. Many of the commands and subcommands are platformspecific; that is, some of the following commands/subcommands only apply to port cardsinstalled in an ESX-3000 switch, while others only pertain to ASX or TNX platforms. When acommand or subcommand is only supported on a certain platform or switch, the limitation isduly noted.

On the ESX-3000 switch, the following subcommands are displayed:

myswitch:ethernet-> ?

bridge> The bridge directory

igmp> The igmp directory

lec> The lec directory

mpc> The mpc directory


vlan> The vlan directory

On the ASX-200BX, ASX-1000, ASX-1200, TNX-210, and TNX-1100 switches, the followingsubcommand is displayed:


Eth

ernet

Co

mm

and

s

myswitch:ethernet-> ?

bridge> The bridge directory

Please refer to the following sections which apply to your switch platform to receive details onhow to use the Ethernet features via AMI.

Ethernet Commands

4.1 ethernet bridge — ESX-3000 Platform

These commands allow you to configure a virtual Ethernet bridge for a VLAN on an ESX-3000switch. You can display the list of subcommands by typing ? at the bridge level.

myswitch:ethernet bridge-> ?

fdb> The fdb directory

modify Modify bridge parameters

show Display bridge parameters

stp> The stp directory

4.1.1 ethernet bridge fdbThis command allows you to flush/view the bridge forwarding database. Enter the following:

myswitch:ethernet bridge fdb-> ?

flush Flush bridge Forwarding DataBase

show Display bridge Forwarding DataBase

4.1.1.1 ethernet bridge fdb flushThis command allows you to flush the specified forwarding database entries. Enter thefollowing:

myswitch:ethernet bridge fdb-> flush ?

[[-port] <EthernetIf>] Port



NOTEIf you do not specify a specific port, the entireforwarding database table is flushed. It is notpossible to flush the forwarding database tablefor an individual VLAN.


-port <EthernetIf> The port number of the forwarding database entry you wish to flush.

Ethernet Commands

4.1.1.2 ethernet bridge fdb showThis command allows you to view the forwarding database entries. Enter the following:

myswitch:ethernet bridge fdb-> show

Port VLAN MAC Address(es) Learned

1A1 elan1 00:01:00:00:00:01

00:01:00:00:00:02

1A2 elan2 00:03:00:00:00:03

00:03:00:00:00:04

00:03:00:00:00:05

1A3 elan3 00:05:00:00:00:05

1A4 elan4 00:07:00:00:00:07

00:07:00:00:00:08

1A5 elan5 N/A

1A6 elan6 00:11:00:00:00:11

1A7 elan7 00:13:00:00:00:13



Field Description

Port The bridge port on which you wish to view the MAC addresses learned.

VLAN The VLAN on the bridge on which you wish to view the MAC addresses learned.

MAC Address(es) Learned The MAC address learned on the specified port in the VLAN.


Eth

ernet

Co

mm

and

s

Ethernet Commands

4.1.2 ethernet bridge modifyThis command allows you to modify the aging time and enable/disable the spanning treeinstance of a bridge. Enter the following:

myswitch:ethernet bridge-> modify

Usage:

[-name] <text> Bridge Name

[[-time] <integer>] Aging Time

[[-stpmode] (enabled|disabled)] STP mode


4.1.3 ethernet bridge showThis command allows you to list the configured bridges in the switch. Enter the following:

myswitch:ethernet bridge-> show

VLAN Name STP MAC Address #Ports Bridge Type Aging Time

default enabled 00:20:48:65:08:66 24 transparentOnly 3600



-name <text> The uniquely-identifiable name assigned to this bridge. The maximum number ofcharacters is 32.

-time <unsigned> The timeout period in seconds for aging out dynamically-learned MAC addresses. Valuesmay range from 10 to 1000000 seconds, with a default of 3600 seconds upon bridgecreation.

-stpmode (enabled|disabled) May be set to enabled or disabled, with a default of enabled for newly-created bridgeinstances.


Field Description

VLAN Name The uniquely-identifiable name assigned to this VLAN.

STP The spanning tree protocol status; enabled by default.

MAC Address The MAC address used by this bridge when it must be referred to in a unique fashion.When concatenated with Priority, a unique Bridge Identifier is formed which is used inthe Spanning Tree Protocol.

#Ports The number of ports in the bridge group.

Bridge Type Indicates the type of bridging performed.

Aging Time The timeout period in seconds for aging out dynamically-learned MAC addresses.

Ethernet Commands

4.1.4 ethernet bridge stpThis command directory allows you to configure/display the bridge STP and portparameters. Enter the following:

myswitch:ethernet bridge stp-> ?

configuration> The configuration directory

port> The port directory

status Display the STP parameters of a bridge

4.1.4.1 ethernet bridge stp configurationThis command allows you to configure/display the bridge STP parameters. Enter thefollowing:

myswitch:ethernet bridge stp configuration-> ?

modify Modify the STP parameters of a bridge

show Display the STP parameters of a bridge

4.1.4.1.1 ethernet bridge stp configuration modify

This command allows you to modify the bridge STP parameters. Enter the following:

myswitch:ethernet bridge stp configuration-> modify

Usage:

[-name] <text> Bridge Name


[[-maxage] <integer>] STP Max Age

[[-hellotime] <integer>] STP Hello Time

[[-forwarddelay] <integer>] STP Forward Delay


Eth

ernet

Co

mm

and

s



-name <text> The uniquely-identifiable name assigned to this bridge.

-priority <integer> The value of the write-able portion of the Bridge ID (i.e., the first two octets of the 8-octet-long Bridge ID). The value may be an integer between 0 and 65535. The last 6 octets of theBridge ID are given by the value of Base Bridge Address. Used to determine the root forthe STP.

Ethernet Commands

4.1.4.1.2 ethernet bridge stp configuration show

This command allows you to list the bridge STP parameters of configured bridges in theswitch. Enter the following:

myswitch:ethernet bridge stp configuration-> show

VLAN Name STP Priority Max Age Hello Time Hold Time Forward Delay

hithere 32768 20 2 1 15

hothere 32768 20 2 1 15

default 32768 20 2 1 15


-maxage <integer> The maximum age of Spanning Tree Protocol information learned from the network onany port before it is discarded, in seconds. This is the value that this bridge (and all others)would use if/when this bridge were to become the root.

-hellotime <integer> The amount of time between the transmission of Configuration bridge PDUs by this nodeon any port when it is the root of the spanning tree, or trying to become so, in seconds.

-forwarddelay <integer> Controls how fast a port changes its spanning state when moving toward the Forwardingstate, in seconds. The value determines how long the port stays in each of the Listeningand Learning states, which precede the Forwarding state. This value is also used, when atopology change has been detected and is underway, to age all dynamic entries in theForwarding Database. Note that this is the value that this bridge and all others would startusing if/when this bridge were to become the root.

Field Description


STP Priority The value of the write-able portion of the Bridge ID (i.e., the first two octets of the 8-octet-long Bridge ID). The value may be an integer between 0 and 65535. The last 6 octets of theBridge ID are given by the value of Base Bridge Address.



Max Age The maximum age of Spanning Tree Protocol information learned from the network onany port before it is discarded, in seconds.

Hello Time The amount of time between the transmission of Configuration bridge PDUs by this nodeon any port when it is the root of the spanning tree, or trying to become so, in seconds.

Hold Time Determines the interval length during which no more than two Configuration bridgePDUs shall be transmitted by this node, in seconds.

Forward Delay Controls how fast a port changes its spanning state when moving toward the Forwardingstate, in seconds. The value determines how long the port stays in each of the Listeningand Learning states, which precede the Forwarding state. This value is also used, when atopology change has been detected and is underway, to age all dynamic entries in theForwarding Database. Note that this is the value that this bridge and all others would startusing if/when this bridge were to become the root.

Ethernet Commands

4.1.4.2 ethernet bridge stp portThis command directory allows you to display/modify the bridge STP port configuration andstatus parameters. Enter the following:

myswitch:ethernet bridge stp port-> ?

configuration> The configuration directory

status Display port parameters of a bridge

4.1.4.2.1 ethernet bridge stp port configuration

This command allows you to configure/list the bridge STP port configuration parameters.Enter the following:

myswitch:ethernet bridge stp port configuration-> ?

modify Modify port parameters of a bridge

show Display port parameters of a bridge

4.1.4.2.1.1 ethernet bridge stp port configuration modify

This command allows you to modify the bridge STP port configuration parameters. Enter thefollowing:

myswitch:ethernet bridge stp port configuration-> modify

Usage:

[-port] <text> Bridge Port


[[-enable] (Yes|No)] Port Enabled

[[-pathcost] <integer>] Path Cost



Eth

ernet

Co

mm

and

s


-port <text> The port number of the port for which this entry contains Spanning Tree Protocolmanagement information.

-priority <integer> The value of the priority field which is contained in the first (in network byte order) octetof the (2 octet long) Port ID. The other octet of the Port ID is given by the value of Port.The value may be an integer between 0 and 255.

-enable (Yes|No) Port can be enabled (Yes) or disabled (No).

-pathcost <integer> The contribution of this port to the path cost of paths towards the spanning tree rootwhich include this port. It is recommended that the default value of this parameter be ininverse proportion to the speed of the attached LAN.

Ethernet Commands

4.1.4.2.1.2 ethernet bridge stp port configuration show

This command allows you to list the bridge STP port configuration parameters. Enter thefollowing:

myswitch:ethernet bridge stp port configuration-> show

Port Priority Enabled Path Cost VLAN Name

1A1 128 Yes 100 bear

1A2 128 Yes 100 chicken

1A3 128 Yes 100 horse

1A4 128 Yes 100 goat

1A5 128 Yes 100 default







Field Description

Port The port number of the port for which this entry contains Spanning Tree Protocolmanagement information. This is a read-only field.

Priority The value of the priority field which is contained in the first (in network byte order) octetof the (2 octet long) Port ID. The other octet of the Port ID is given by the value of Port.

Enabled The enabled/disabled status of the port.

Path Cost The contribution of this port to the path cost of paths towards the spanning tree rootwhich include this port. It is recommended that the default value of this parameter be ininverse proportion to the speed of the attached LAN.



Ethernet Commands

4.1.4.2.2 ethernet bridge stp port status

This command allows you to display the bridge STP port status parameters. Enter thefollowing:

myswitch:ethernet bridge stp port-> status

Port State Designated Bridge Forward Designated

Transitions Cost Port

1A1 forwarding 32768-00:20:48:65:08:66 1 0 1

1A2 forwarding 32768-00:20:48:65:08:66 1 0 2

1A3 forwarding 32768-00:20:48:65:08:66 1 0 3

1A4 forwarding 32768-00:20:48:65:08:66 1 0 4

1A5 forwarding 32768-00:20:48:65:08:66 1 0 5

1A6 forwarding 32768-00:20:48:65:08:66 1 0 6

1A7 forwarding 32768-00:20:48:65:08:66 1 0 7

1A8 forwarding 32768-00:20:48:65:08:66 1 0 8

1A9 forwarding 32768-00:20:48:65:08:66 1 0 9

1A10 forwarding 32768-00:20:48:65:08:66 1 0 10



Field Description

Port The port number of the port for which this entry contains Spanning Tree Protocolmanagement information.

State The port’s current state as defined by application of the Spanning Tree Protocol. This statecontrols what action a port takes on reception of a frame. If the bridge detects a port that ismalfunctioning, it places that port into the broken state. For ports which areadministratively disabled, this object has a value of disabled.

Designated Bridge The Bridge Identifier of the bridge which this port considers to be the Designated Bridgefor this port’s segment.

Forward Transitions The number of times this port has transitioned from the Learning state to the Forwarding


Eth

ernet

Co

mm

and

s

state.

Designated Cost The path cost of the Designated Port of the segment connected to this port. This value iscompared to the Root Path Cost field in received bridge PDUs. A cost of 0 (zero) meansthat this bridge considers itself to be the root.

Designated Port The Port Identifier of the port on the Designated Bridge for this port’s segment.

Ethernet Commands

4.1.4.3 ethernet bridge stp statusThis command directory allows you to display/modify the bridge STP status parameters.Enter the following:

myswitch:ethernet bridge stp-> status

VLAN Name Designated Root Root Root Time Since #TopoChanges

Cost Port TopoChange

default 32768-00:20:48:65:08:66 0 0 30161 50


Field Description


Designated Root The bridge identifier of the spanning tree root as determined by the Spanning TreeProtocol as executed by this node. This value is used as the Root Identifier parameter in allConfiguration Bridge PDUs originated by this node. This is a read-only field.

Root Cost The cost of the path to the root as seen from this bridge. This is a read-only field.

Root Port The port number of the port which offers the lowest cost path from this bridge to the rootbridge. This is a read-only field.

Time Since TopoChange The time (in seconds) since the last time a topology change was detected by the bridgeentity. This is a read-only field.

#TopoChanges The total number of topology changes detected by this bridge since the managemententity was last reset or initialized. This is a read-only field.


Ethernet Commands

4.2 ethernet bridge — ASX-200BX, ASX-1000, ASX-1200,TNX-210, and TNX-1100 Platforms

These commands allow you to configure a virtual Ethernet bridge on an ASX-200BX,ASX-1000, ASX-1200, TNX-210, or TNX-1100 switch. You can display the list of subcommandsby typing ? at the bridge level.

myswitch:ethernet bridge-> ?

fdb> The fdb directory

modify Modifies the aging timer of the bridge

show Display bridge parameters

static> The static directory

4.2.1 ethernet bridge fdbThis command allows you to flush/view the bridge forwarding database as well as viewinformation on destination MAC addresses. Enter the following:

myswitch:ethernet bridge fdb-> ?

dest> The dest directory

flush Flush bridge Forwarding DataBase


4.2.1.1 ethernet bridge fdb destThis command allows you to view information about the bridge forwarding database. Enterthe following:


Eth

ernet

Co

mm

and

s

myswitch:ethernet bridge fdb dest-> ?

mcast> The mcast directory


4.2.1.1.1 ethernet bridge fdb dest mcast

This command allows you to view the ports comprising a multicast group.

myswitch:ethernet bridge fdb dest mcast-> ?

show

Ethernet Commands

4.2.1.1.1.1 ethernet bridge fdb dest mcast show

This command allows you to view the ports comprising a multicast group. Enter thefollowing:

myswitch:ethernet bridge fdb dest mcast-> show ?

[[-bridgeName] <text>] Bridge Name

[[-grpNum] <integer>] Group Number

[[-dPorts] <list of PVCPort>] Destination Ports


4.2.1.1.2 ethernet bridge fdb dest show

This command allows you to view the contents of the bridge forwarding database(s). Enterthe following:

myswitch:ethernet bridge fdb dest-> show

MCast

DestMAC Address(es) SourcePort DestPort Grp Description

00:00:0c:47:ae:22 2D1/0/101 2A1 N/A Forward-

00:00:0c:47:ae:22 2A1 2D1/0/101 N/A Forward-

00:00:0c:47:ae:2e 2D1/0/101 2A1 N/A Forward-

ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff 2A2 2D1/0/201 N/A Static-Forward-

ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff 2D1/0/201 2A2 N/A Static-Forward-

ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff 2D1/0/101 2A1 N/A Static-Forward-


-bridgeName <text> The name of the bridge of the forwarding database entry whose ports you wish to view.

-grpNum <integer> The multicast group number whose ports you wish to view.

-dPorts <list of PVCPort> The list of destination ports you wish to view.


ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff 2A1 N/A 0 Static-Forward-


Field Description

MAC Address(es) The unicast source or destination MAC address for which the row represents theforwarding information.

SourcePort The port number on which a frame having a source address equal to the value of thecorresponding MAC address is seen. An entry of 0 indicates that the port number has notbeen learned but that the bridge has forwarding/filtering information about the address.

Ethernet Commands

4.2.1.2 ethernet bridge fdb flushThis command allows you to flush the specified forwarding database entries. Enter thefollowing:

myswitch:ethernet bridge fdb-> flush ?

[[-bridgeName] <text>] Bridge Name


NOTEIf you do not specify a bridge name, the entireforwarding database table is flushed. It is notpossible to flush the forwarding database tablefor an individual VLAN.

Port The port to which the frames with the corresponding MAC address will be sent out ifreceived on the listed source port.

MCast Grp The multicast group to which traffic is sent, if the traffic received on the source port isbeing multicasted.

Description A brief description of the entry’s status.


-bridgeName <text> The name of the bridge of the forwarding database entry you wish to flush.

Field Description


Eth

ernet

Co

mm

and

s

Ethernet Commands

4.2.1.3 ethernet bridge fdb showThis command allows you to view the forwarding database entries. Enter the following:

myswitch:ethernet bridge fdb-> show

SrcMAC Address(es) SourcePort PairPort Status Description

00:00:0c:47:ae:22 2A1 N/A learned Lookup Dest-

00:00:0c:47:ae:2e 2D1/0/101 2D1/0/101 learned Lookup Dest-


Field Description

MAC Address The unicast source or destination MAC address for which the row represents theforwarding information.

SourcePort The port number on which a frame having a source address equal to the value of thecorresponding MAC address is seen. An entry of 0 indicates that the port number has notbeen learned but that the bridge has forwarding/filtering information about the address.

PairPort The port to which the frames with the corresponding MAC address will be sent out ifreceived on the listed source port.

Status The entry’s status, which can be:

• invalid - entry is no longer valid (learned but since aged-out), buthas not yet been flushed from the table.

• learned - the value of the corresponding port was learned and stillin use.

• self - the value of the corresponding instance of MAC addressrepresents one of the bridge’s addresses. The corresponding instanceof port indicates which of the bridge’s ports has this address.

• mgmt - the value of the corresponding instance of MAC address isalso the value of an existing instance of MAC address in the staticfiltering table.

• other - entry is currently in use but the conditions under which itwill be used are different from each of the following values.


Description A brief description of the entry’s status.

Ethernet Commands

4.2.2 ethernet bridge modifyThis command allows you to modify the aging time of a bridge. Enter the following:

myswitch:ethernet bridge-> modify

Usage:

[-bridgeName] <text> Bridge Name

[[-agingTime] <integer>] Timer value for aging


4.2.3 ethernet bridge showThis command allows you to list the configured bridges in the switch. Enter the following:

myswitch:ethernet bridge-> show

Name MAC Address NPorts Bridge Type AgingTimer(secs) STP Mode

2C 00:00:0c:47:ae:22 5 transparentOnly 300 disabled



-bridgeName <text> The uniquely-identifiable name assigned to this bridge.

-agingTime <integer> The timeout period in seconds for aging out dynamically-learned MAC addresses.

Field Description

Name The uniquely-identifiable name assigned to this bridge.

MAC Address The MAC address used by this bridge when it must be referred to in a unique fashion. Thenumerically-smallest MAC address of all ports that belong to the bridge.


Eth

ernet

Co

mm

and

s

NPorts The number of ports in the bridge group.

Bridge Type Indicates the type of bridging performed.

AgingTimer (secs) The timeout period in seconds for aging out dynamically-learned forwarding information.

STP Mode Not supported at this time.

Ethernet Commands

4.2.4 ethernet bridge staticThis command allows you to delete, modify, create, and display static filters. Enter the follow-ing:

myswitch:ethernet bridge static-> ?

delete Delete a Static Filter entry

modify Modify Static Filters

new Create a new Static Filter entry

show Display Static Filtering Table

4.2.4.1 ethernet bridge static deleteThis command allows you to delete a static filter. Enter the following:

myswitch:ethernet bridge static-> delete

Usage:


[-name] <text> Unique Filter Name

[[-dmacAddr] <Mac Address>] Destination Address

[[-smacAddr] <Mac Address>] Source Address

[[-etherType] <list of EtherType value>] EtherType

[[-type] <block/forward>] FilterType

[[-status] <Static Filter Status>] Status




-bridgeName <text> The name of the bridge to which the filter applies.


-name <text> The uniquely-identifiable name assigned to the filter.

-dmacAddr <Mac Address> The Destination MAC Address in a frame to which the entry’s filter information applies.

-smacAddr <Mac Address> The Source MAC Address in a frame to which the entry’s filter information applies.

-etherType<list of EtherType Value>

The list of EtherTypes that are applied to the filter which can include NetBios, NetBeui,IPX, and AppleTalk.

-type <block/forward> Specifies whether frames are blocked (block) or filtered (forward).

Ethernet Commands

4.2.4.2 ethernet bridge static modifyThis command allows you to modify a static filter’s priority. Enter the following:

myswitch:ethernet bridge static-> modify

Usage:





4.2.4.3 ethernet bridge static newThis command allows you to create a static filter. Enter the following:

myswitch:ethernet bridge static-> new

-status <Static Filter Status> The entry’s status, which can be:

• Other - entry is currently in use but the conditions under which itwill be used are different from each of the following values.

• Permanent - entry is currently in use and will remain so after thenext reset of the bridge. This is the status default value.

• DeleteOnReset - entry is currently in use and will remain so untilthe next reset of the bridge.

• DeleteOnTimeout - entry is currently in use and will remain sountil it is aged out. The timeout value can be configured from thebridge menu.

-priority <integer> An integer value that assigns priority to a filter. Filters are applied in the order ofincreasing priority—in cases where two filters conflict, the one assigned the higherpriority is implemented.



Eth

ernet

Co

mm

and

s

Usage:



[[-dmacAddr] <Mac Address>] Destination Address

[[-smacAddr] <Mac Address>] Source Address

[[-etherType] <list of EtherType value>] EtherType

[[-type] <block/forward>] FilterType (default: block)

[[-status] <Static Filter Status>] Status (default: permanent)



Ethernet Commands

4.2.4.4 ethernet bridge static showThis command allows you to display a static filtering table. Enter the following:

myswitch:ethernet bridge static-> show

Filter Source Destination Ether

Name MAC MAC Type

1 N/A aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff ipx

2 11:22:33:44:55:66 N/A N/A

The fields in this display are defined in Section 4.2.4.1.


Ethernet Commands

4.3 ethernet igmp

These commands allow you to display information about the Internet Group ManagementProtocol (IGMP) on ESX-3000 switches equipped with Ethernet port cards. IGMP allows ahost to ask a local router to send it data addressed to a specific multicast group. You candisplay the list of subcommands by typing ? at the igmp level.

myswitch:ethernet igmp-> ?

routers Display router port group

show Display multicast port group

4.3.1 ethernet igmp routersThis command allows you to display information about the router port group. Enter thefollowing:

myswitch:ethernet igmp-> routers

Vlan Name Router Port(s)

elan1 7A1

elan2


Field Description

Vlan Name The uniquely-identifiable name assigned to this VLAN.

Router Port(s) Port number that an IGMP capable router has been discovered on.


Eth

ernet

Co

mm

and

s

Ethernet Commands

4.3.2 ethernet igmp showThis command allows you to display information about the multicast port group. Enter thefollowing:

myswitch:ethernet igmp-> show

Vlan Name IP M/cast Address Port Group

elan1 238.1.0.0 2A1 2A2 2A3 2A6 2A7


Field Description

Vlan Name The uniquely-identifiable name assigned to this VLAN.

IP M/cast Address IP Multicast address(s) detected on particular VLAN.

Port Group Port numbers that belong to the IP multicast group.


Ethernet Commands

4.4 ethernet lec

These commands allow you to display information associated with the automatically-createdESX-3000 LANE clients. You can display the list of subcommands by typing ? at the lec level.

myswitch:ethernet lec-> ?

arp> The arp directory

show Display VLAN/LEC status

statistics Display VLAN/LEC statistics

4.4.1 ethernet lec arpThis command allows you to flush/view the LEC’s ARP cache entries.

myswitch:ethernet lec arp-> ?

flush Flush VLAN/LEC ARP cache

show Display VLAN/LEC ARP cache

4.4.1.1 ethernet lec arp flushThis command allows you to flush the specified LEC’s ARP cache entries. Enter the following:

myswitch:ethernet lec arp-> flush ?

[[-lecindex] <integer>] LEC Index

[[-name] <text>] VLAN Name



Eth

ernet

Co

mm

and

s

NOTEIf you do not specify a specific VLAN Name orLEC Index, the entire LE ARP table is flushed.


-lecindex <integer> Unique number assigned to identify a LEC to facilitate interoperability.

-name <text> The name of the VLAN whose ARP table you wish to flush.

Ethernet Commands

4.4.1.2 ethernet lec arp showThis command allows you to view the specified LEC’s ARP cache. Enter the following:

myswitch:ethernet lec arp-> show

VLAN Name MAC Address ATM Addressgreen 00:00:ef:04:42:30 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f41a.01b9.0000ef044234.02

green 00:20:48:0e:55:67 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f21a.5a78.0020480e5567.02

red 00:00:ef:04:99:00 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f21a.00fe.0000ef049904.03

grey 00:00:ef:04:42:30 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f41a.01b9.0000ef044234.00

grey 00:00:ef:06:90:70 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f21a.33d7.0000ef069071.00

grey 00:20:48:08:90:17 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f21a.33d7.002048089017.02

grey 00:50:04:d0:34:04 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f21a.33d7.00a036008bc8.0b

grey 08:00:20:a2:17:94 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f21a.33d7.00a036008bc8.0b

grey 08:00:20:b0:c8:27 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f21a.33d7.00a036008bc8.0b

grey 08:00:20:b0:c9:87 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f21a.33d7.00a036008bc8.0b

grey 1e:20:48:06:53:c3 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f21a.264c.0020480653c3.14


Field Description

VLAN Name The name of the LEC/VLAN whose ARP cache you wish to view.

MAC Address The MAC address of the destination.

ATM Address The ATM address of the destination.


Ethernet Commands

4.4.2 ethernet lec showThis command allows you to list the LEC’s status parameters. The parameters displayed withthis command are read-only.

myswitch:ethernet lec-> show

LEC If Interface Max External

VLAN Name Index LECID Index State Mode Frame ELAN Name

default 1 0 1048 lecsConnect auto 1516 default

LEC : 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f258.0048.002048650b86.03

LECS: 0x47.0079.00.000000.0000.0000.0000.00a03e000001.00

LES : 0x0000000000000000000000000000000000000000

button 2 0 1246 lecsConnect auto 1516 -1

LEC : 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f258.0048.0020486509f6.0b

LECS: 0x47.0079.00.000000.0000.0000.0000.00a03e000001.00

LES : 0x0000000000000000000000000000000000000000

hook 3 0 1247 lecsConnect auto 1516 ()

LEC : 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f258.0048.00204865079e.03

LECS: 0x47.0079.00.000000.0000.0000.0000.00a03e000001.00

LES : 0x0000000000000000000000000000000000000000


Field Description


LEC Index The MIB index.

LECID The unique LEC identifier.


Eth

ernet

Co

mm

and

s

If Index The IfIndex.

Interface State The state the LEC is currently in. Possible states include: initial, lecsConnect,configure, joining, initialReg, busConnect, and operational.

Mode Set to automatic, not user-modifiable.

Max Frame The MTU of the specified VLAN.

External ELAN Name The LAN name as reported by the LES join phase.

LEC The ATM address of the LEC.

LECS The LECS address being used by the VLAN/ELAN.

LES The LES address discovered through the LECS configuration phase.

Ethernet Commands

4.4.2.1 ethernet lec show -errorsThis command allows you to display the LEC’s status error parameters. Enter the following:

myswitch:ethernet lec-> show -errors

VLAN Name InterfaceState LastErrorState LastError

default lecsConnect initialState none

car lecsConnect initialState none

truck lecsConnect initialState none

van lecsConnect initialState none

cycle lecsConnect initialState none


4.4.2.2 ethernet lec show -vccThis command allows you to display the LEC’s status vcc parameters. Enter the following:

myswitch:ethernet lec-> show -vcc

Config Control Control Multicast Multicast

VLAN Name Direct Direct Dist Send Forward

default 5A 0.0 5A 0.0 5A 0.0 5A 0.0 5A 0.0

birch 1A 0.0 1A 0.0 1A 0.0 1A 0.0 1A 0.0

oak 7A 0.0 7A 0.0 7A 0.0 7A 0.0 7A 0.0

maple 1A 0.0 1A 0.0 1A 0.0 1A 0.0 1A 0.0

Field Description

VLAN Name The name of the VLAN associated with the LEC you wish to display error information for.

InterfaceState The current state of the LEC.

LastErrorState The last failure state of the LEC.

LastError The cause of the last failure state of the LEC.


ash 2A 0.0 2A 0.0 2A 0.0 2A 0.0 2A 0.0


Field Description


Config Direct The signalling parameter used by the LEC when establishing the configuration directVCC.

Control Direct The signalling parameter used by the LEC when establishing the control direct VCC.

Ethernet Commands

4.4.3 ethernet lec statisticsThis command allows you to display the LEC statistics. Enter the following:

myswitch:ethernet lec-> statistics

LEC ArpReq ArpReq ArpRep ArpRep

VLAN Name Index In Out In Out

default 1 0 0 0 0

tiger 1 0 0 0 0

cheetah 1 0 0 0 0

lion 1 0 0 0 0

leopard 1 0 0 0 0


Control Dist The signalling parameter used by the LEC when establishing the control distribute VCC.

Multicast Send The signalling parameter used by the LEC when establishing the multicast send VCC.

Multicast Forward The signalling parameter used by the LEC when establishing the multicast forward VCC.

Field Description


LEC Index The uniquely-identifiable conceptual row in the statistics table.

ArpReq In The number of LE_ARP_REQUESTs received over the LUNI by the LEC. Requests mayarrive on the Control Direct VCC or on the Control Distribute VCC, depending upon howthe LES is implemented and the chances it has had for learning. This counter covers bothVCCs.

ArpReq Out The number of LE_ARP_REQUESTs sent over the LUNI by the LEC.

ArpResp In The number of LE_ARP_RESPONSEs received over the LUNI by the LEC. This count

Field Description


Eth

ernet

Co

mm

and

s

includes all such replies, whether solicited or not. Replies may arrive on the Control DirectVCC or on the Control Distribute VCC, depending upon how the LES is implemented.This counter covers both VCCs.

ArpResp Out The number of LE_ARP_RESPONSEs sent over the LUNI by the LEC.

Ethernet Commands

4.5 ethernet mpc

These commands allow you to modify and display information about Multiprotocol OverATM (MPOA) Multiple Protocol Clients (MPC)s on an ESX-3000 switch equipped withEthernet port cards. You can display the list of subcommands by typing ? at the mpc level.

myswitch:ethernet mpc-> ?

ec> The ec directory

ic> The ic directory

show Display Mpc Actual Table Configuration

statistics Display Mpc Statistics Table Configuration

4.5.1 ethernet mpc ecThese commands allow you to flush or display information on the VLAN MPC Egress CacheTable. Enter the following:

myswitch:ethernet mpc ec-> ?

flush Flushes VLAN mpcEgressCache

show Display Mpc Egress Cache Table Configuration

4.5.1.1 ethernet mpc ec flushThis command allows you to flush the VLAN MPC Egress Cache Table. Enter the following:

myswitch:ethernet mpc ec-> flush

Usage:

[-name] <text> VLAN Name




-name <text> The name of the VLAN whose MPC egress cache table you wish to flush.

Ethernet Commands

4.5.1.2 ethernet mpc ec showThis command allows you to display the VLAN MPC Egress Cache Table. Enter the following:

myswitch:ethernet mpc ec-> show

VLAN Name MPCID CacheId Dest IP Addr

elan5 2 2 5.5.5.106


4.5.2 ethernet mpc icThese commands allow you to flush or display information on the VLAN MPC Ingress CacheTable. Enter the following:

myswitch:ethernet mpc ic-> ?

flush Flushes VLAN/MPC Ingress cache

show Display Mpc Ingress Cache Table Entry

4.5.2.1 ethernet mpc ic flushThis command allows you to flush the VLAN MPC Ingress Cache Table. Enter the following:

Field Description


MPCID The uniquely-identifiable index assigned to this MPOA client.

CacheId The uniquely-identifiable index assigned to this cache entry.

Dest IP Addr Destination IP address of MPOA shortcut.


Eth

ernet

Co

mm

and

s

myswitch:ethernet mpc ic-> flush

Usage:




-name <text> The name of the VLAN whose MPC ingress cache table you wish to flush.

Ethernet Commands

4.5.2.2 ethernet mpc ic showThis command allows you to display the VLAN MPC Ingress Cache Table. Enter thefollowing:

myswitch:ethernet mpc ic-> show

VLAN Name : elan1

Dest. IP Address : 5.5.5.106

Dest. ATM Address : 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f258.12da.00204866c31e.00


4.5.3 ethernet mpc showThis command allows you to view MPC status parameters. Enter the following:

myswitch:ethernet mpc-> show

VLAN Name Mpc Disc SC Setup Mode Retry Max Retry Hold

Index Time Frame Time Time Time Time

default 1 0 0 automatic 5 40 160


Field Description


Dest. IP Address Destination IP address of MPOA shortcut.

Dest. ATM Address Corresponding NSAP address of destination.

Field Description



Mpc Index A unique value for each MPOA client which this SNMP agent manages. It isrecommended that values are assigned contiguously starting from 1. The value for eachMPOA Client must remain constant, even if the MPOA Client or SNMP agent isre-initialized.

Disc Time Discontinuity Time. The value of sysUpTime on the most recent occasion at which any oneor more of this MPC's counters experienced a discontinuity. The relevant counters are thespecific instances associated with this MPC. If discontinuities have not occurred since thelast re-initialization of the local management subsystem, then this object contains a zerovalue.

SC Setup Frame Time Shortcut Setup Frame Time. The shortcut setup frame time, in seconds.

Ethernet Commands

Mode Configuration Mode. Indicates whether this MPC should auto-configure the next time it is(re-)initialized. During the (re-)initialization of this MPC, if the mode is automatic(1), theLECS is contacted and requests are made for all MPC-p* parameters. Otherwise, if themode is manual(2), the values of the configuration parameters are obtained from thempcConfigTableand the mpcProtocolTable. In other words, when the MPC is firstinitialized, it can use the default or configured values from the mpcConfigTable andmpcProtocolTable. If the mode is manual (2), no further.

Retry Time Initial Retry Time. MPC-p4 is the initial value for the retry time out period used for timingout MPOA Resolution Requests in seconds. Retry time consists of this initial time-out(MPC-p4) and a retry multiplier (MPC-c1). If a response is not received, then anotherrequest is sent with a timeout of Retry Time * MPC-c1 seconds, or untilmpcRetryTimeMaximum.

Max Retry Time Maximum Retry Time. MPC-p5 cumulative max value for Retry Time (MPC-p4). Retriesare attempted at intervals determined by the algorithm described in the definition ofmpcIntialRetryTime.

Hold Time Hold Down Time. Minimum time to wait before re-initiating a failed resolution attempt.Default is mpcRetryTimeMaximum * 4.

Field Description


Eth

ernet

Co

mm

and

s

Ethernet Commands

4.5.4 ethernet mpc statisticsThis command allows you to view MPC packet statistics. Enter the following:

myswitch:ethernet mpc-> statistics

VLAN Name Resolve Imposition

Tx Reqs Rx Reply Acks Rx Reqs Tx Reply Acks

default 0 0 0 0


Field Description


Resolve Tx Reqs The number of MPOA Resolve Requests transmitted by this MPC. Discontinuities in thevalue of this counter can occur at re-initialization of the management system, and/orre-initialization of the MPC, and at other times, as indicated by the value ofmpcDiscontinuityTime.

Resolve Rx Reply Acks The number of positively acknowledged MPC Resolved Replies received by this MPCwith an MPOA CIE Code of 0x00 (Success). Discontinuities in the value of this counter canoccur at re-initialization of the management system, and/or re-initialization of the MPC,and at other times, as indicated by the value of mpcDiscontinuityTime.

Imposition Rx Reqs The number of MPOA Cache Imposition Requests received by this MPC. Discontinuitiesin the value of this counter can occur at re-initialization of the management system, and/or re-initialization of the MPC, and at other times, as indicated by the value ofmpcDiscontinuityTime.

Imposition Tx Reply Acks The number of successful MPOA Cache Imposition replies transmitted by this MPC withan MPOA CIE Code of 0x00 Success. Discontinuities in the value of this counter can occurat re-initialization of the management system, and/or re-initialization of the MPC, and atother times, as indicated by the value of mpcDiscontinuityTime.


Ethernet Commands

4.5.4.1 ethernet mpc statistics -errorsThis command allows you to view MPC packet error statistics. Enter the following:myswitch:ethernet mpc-> statistics -errors

VLAN Name : default Unrecog.Ext : 0

Loops Detected : 0 Proto.Addr Unreachable : 0

Proto.Errors : 0 SDU Size Exceeded : 0

Invalid Ext. : 0 Hop Cnt Exceeded : 0

Auth. Failure : 0


Field Description


Unrecog. Ext The number of Error Indication packets received by this MPC with the error codeUnrecognized Extension. Discontinuities in the value of this counter can occur atre-initialization of the management system, and/or re-initialization of the MPC, and atother times, as indicated by the value of mpcDiscontinuityTime.

Loops Detected The number of Error Indication packets received by this MPC with the error code LoopDetected. Discontinuities in the value of this counter can occur at re-initialization of themanagement system, and/or re-initialization of the MPC, and at other times, as indicatedby the value of mpcDiscontinuityTime.

Proto. Addr Unreachable The number of Error Indication packets received by this MPC with the error code ProtocolAddress Unreachable. Discontinuities in the value of this counter can occur atre-initialization of the management system, and/or re-initialization of the MPC, and atother times, as indicated by the value of mpcDiscontinuityTime.

Proto. Errors The number of Error Indication packets received by this MPC with the error code ProtocolErrors. Discontinuities in the value of this counter can occur at re-initialization of themanagement system, and/or re-initialization of the MPC, and at other times, as indicatedby the value of mpcDiscontinuityTime.

SDU Size Exceeded The number of Error Indication packets received by this MPC with the error code SDUSize Exceeded. Discontinuities in the value of this counter can occur at re-initialization ofthe management system, and/or re-initialization of the MPC, and at other times, asindicated by the value of mpcDiscontinuityTime.


Eth

ernet

Co

mm

and

s

Invalid Ext. The number of Error Indication packets received by this MPC with the error code InvalidExtensions. Discontinuities in the value of this counter can occur at re-initialization of themanagement system, and/or re-initialization of the MPC, and at other times, as indicatedby the value of mpcDiscontinuityTime.

Hop Cnt Exceeded The number of Error Indication packets received by this MPC with the error code HopCount Exceeded. Discontinuities in the value of this counter can occur at re-initializationof the management system, and/or re-initialization of the MPC, and at other times, asindicated by the value of mpcDiscontinuityTime.

Auth. Failure The number of Error Indication packets received by this MPC with the error codeAuthentication Failure. Discontinuities in the value of this counter can occur atre-initialization of the management system, and/or re-initialization of the MPC, and atother times, as indicated by the value of mpcDiscontinuityTime.

Ethernet Commands

4.5.4.2 ethernet mpc statistics -purgeThis command allows you to view MPC packet purge statistics. Enter the following:

myswitch:ethernet mpc-> statistics -purge

VLAN Name EC Data Plane

Tx Reqs Rx Tx

default 0 0 0


Field Description


EC Tx Reqs. The number of MPOA Egress Cache Purge Requests transmitted by this MPC.Discontinuities in the value of this counter can occur at re-initialization of themanagement system, and/or re-initialization of the MPC, and at other times, as indicatedby the value of mpcDiscontinuityTime.

Data Plane Rx The number of MPOA Data Plane Purge messages received by this MPC. Discontinuitiesin the value of this counter can occur at re-initialization of the management system, and/or re-initialization of the MPC, and at other times, as indicated by the value ofmpcDiscontinuityTime.

Data Plane Tx The number of MPOA Data Plane Purge messages transmitted by this MPC.Discontinuities in the value of this counter can occur at re-initialization of themanagement system, and/or re-initialization of the MPC, and at other times, as indicatedby the value of mpcDiscontinuityTime.


Ethernet Commands

4.6 ethernet system

These commands allow you to modify/view port card memory and panic data. You candisplay the list of subcommands by typing ? at the system level.

myswitch:ethernet system-> ?

memory> The memory directory

panic> The panic directory

4.6.1 ethernet system memoryThis command allows you to display the port card memory statistics. Enter the following:

myswitch:ethernet system memory-> ?

show Ethernet portcard memory statistics

4.6.1.1 ethernet system memory showThis command allows you to view the port card memory statistics. Enter the following:

myswitch:ethernet system memory-> show

Portcard Bytes Bytes Blocks Max Free

Free Used Free Block

1 19719676 10637996 466 17851336

2 20063396 10294276 462 18231868

3 20069796 10287876 458 18237308

4 20069796 10287876 456 18238592

5 19743004 10614668 468 17908116


Eth

ernet

Co

mm

and

s

6 19803452 10554220 460 13936732

7 20070548 10287124 460 18239364


Field Description

Portcard The slot that the Ethernet card is installed in.

Bytes Free The total amount of unused memory available on the port card.

Bytes Used The total amount of memory currently allocated to system programs on the port card.

Blocks Free The number of free blocks.

Ethernet Commands

NOTEThis command is useful for detecting memoryleaks on the port card system memory.

4.6.2 ethernet system panicThis command allows you to access the port card panic trace features. Enter the following:

myswitch:ethernet system panic-> ?

clear Clear panic trace on the portcard(s)

show Display portcard panic trace

4.6.2.1 ethernet system panic clearThis command allows you to clear the panic trace on all port cards. Enter the following:

myswitch:ethernet system panic-> clear

Panic trace cleared on All ethernet portcard(s)

To clear the panic trace on a specific port card, enter the following:

myswitch:ethernet system panic-> clear ?

[[-portcard] <integer>] Portcard


Max Free Block The maximum free block size.

Field Description



-portcard <integer> The port card on which you wish to clear the panic trace.

Ethernet Commands

4.6.2.2 ethernet system panic showThis command allows you to view the action on a panic. Enter the following:

myswitch:ethernet system panic-> show

Panic trace from portcard 1

No panic trace found










Eth

ernet

Co

mm

and

s

Ethernet Commands

4.7 ethernet vlan

These commands allow you to configure VLANs. You can display the list of subcommands bytyping ? at the vlan level.

myswitch:ethernet vlan-> ?

addports Add port(s) to a VLAN

delete Delete a VLAN

new Create a VLAN

removeports Remove port(s) from a VLAN

rename Rename a VLAN

show Show VLAN(s)

NOTEPort names must be enclosed within quotes andseparated by white space (“1x1 1y1 1z1”) whenexecuting any of the following commands withmore than one port.

4.7.1 ethernet vlan addportsThis command allows you to add ports to a VLAN. Enter the following:

myswitch:ethernet vlan-> addports

Usage:


[-ports] <text> VLAN Port List




-name <text> The name of the VLAN you wish to add ports to.

-ports <text> The list of ports you wish to add to the VLAN.

Ethernet Commands

4.7.2 ethernet vlan deleteThis command allows you to a delete a VLAN. Enter the following:

myswitch:ethernet vlan-> delete

Usage:


[[-ports] <text>] VLAN Port List


NOTEThe ports associated with the VLAN must beunconfigured prior to deletion. The ports areassociated with any other VLAN(s) until asubsequent ethernet vlan addports orethernet vlan new command is executed.

4.7.3 ethernet vlan newThis command allows you to create a new VLAN. Enter the following:

myswitch:ethernet vlan-> new

Usage:




-name <text> The name of the VLAN you wish to delete.

-ports <text> The ports associated with the VLAN to be deleted.


Eth

ernet

Co

mm

and

s


NOTEIf a VLAN with the same name as the one youattempt to configure already exists, the messageERROR: creation failed: duplicate entryappears.


-name <text> The name you wish to call the new VLAN. The maximum number of characters is 32.

-ports <text> The list of ports you wish to add to the new VLAN.

Ethernet Commands

4.7.4 ethernet vlan removeportsThis command allows you to remove ports from a VLAN. Enter the following:

myswitch:ethernet vlan-> removeports

Usage:




4.7.5 ethernet vlan renameThis command allows you to rename a VLAN. Enter the following:

myswitch:ethernet vlan-> rename

Usage:

[-currentname] <text> Current VLAN Name

[-newname] <text> New VLAN Name



-name <text> The name of the VLAN you wish to remove the ports from.

-ports <text> The list of ports you wish to remove from the VLAN.


-currentname <text> The name of the VLAN you wish to rename.

-newname <text> The new name of the VLAN.


Ethernet Commands

4.7.6 ethernet vlan showThis command allows you to list the configured VLANs. Enter the following:

myswitch:ethernet vlan-> show

Name Ports

quartz 1A2

ruby 1A1

diamond 1A3

sapphire 1A5

default 1A6 1A7 1A8 1A9 1A10 1A11 1A12 1A13 1A14 1A15

1A16 1A17 1A18 1A19 1A20 1A21 1A22 1A23 1A24 2A1

2A2 2A3 2A4 2A5 2A6 2A7 2A8 2A9 2A10 2A11

2A12 2A13 2A14 2A15 2A16 2A17 2A18 2A19 2A20 2A21

2A22 2A23 2A24 3A1 3A2 3A3 3A4 3A5 3A6 3A7

3A8 3A9 3A10 3A11 3A12 3A13 3A14 3A15 3A16 3A17

3A18 3A19 3A20 3A21 3A22 3A23 3A24 4A1 4A2 4A3

4A4 4A5 4A6 4A7 4A8 4A9 4A10 4A11 4A12 4A13

4A14 4A15 4A16 4A17 4A18 4A19 4A20 4A21 4A22 4A23

4A24 5A1 5A2 5A3 5A4 5A5 5A6 5A7 5A8 5A9

5A10 5A11 5A12 5A13 5A14 5A15 5A16 5A17 5A18 5A19

5A20 5A21 5A22 5A23 5A24 6A1 6A2 6A3 6A4 6A5

6A6 6A7 6A8 6A9 6A10 6A11 6A12 6A13 6A14 6A15


If no VLANs are configured on the switch, the

Field Description

Name The name of the VLAN whose configuration parameters you wish to see.

Ports The list of ports associated with the VLAN you specify.


Eth

ernet

Co

mm

and

s

NOTE message There are no VLANs configuredis displayed.

NOTEAn asterisk in front of a port name indicates thatthat particular port is out of service (i.e., theblade is pulled out of the chassis). For example, ifblade 2 is pulled, any ports on blade 2 will bedenoted *2A1, *2A1, and so on.

Ethernet Commands


Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

CHAPTER 5 Hardware Commands

These commands let you configure various aspects of the hardware. You can display the list ofavailable subcommands by typing ? at the hardware level.

myswitch:hardware-> ?

cecplus> The cecplus directory

chassis Display chassis information

dualscp> The dualscp directory

fabric> The fabric directory

fans Display fan bank information

inputlookuperrors Display hdcomp/input-lookup-error statistics

netmod> The netmod directory

port> The port directory

power Display power supply information

scp> The scp directory

tcm> The tcm directory

temperature Display temperature sensors information

NOTEThe cecplus> directory is only displayed on switchplatforms that can support a CEC-Plus. The tcm>directory is only displayed on ASX-4000 switchesthat have a TCM installed.


Hardware Commands

5.1 hardware cecplus

The cecplus commands let you configure the Timing Control Module (TCM) on a CEC-Plus.The CEC-Plus is an environmental/timing management subsystem that may be installed in anASX-1000 switch, ASX-1200 switch, or TNX-1100 switch. To display the cecplus commands,a TCM must be installed in the switch. You can display the list of available subcommands bytyping ? at the cecplus level.

myswitch:hardware cecplus-> ?

alarms> The alarms directory

ip> The ip directory

modify Modify TCM configuration

rs232 Display serial port information

show Display TCM Configuration

snmptraps> The snmptraps directory

statistics> The statistics directory

timing> The timing directory

5.1.1 hardware cecplus alarmsThis submenu lets you configure alarm conditions that are a result of various environmentaland synchronization timing conditions. You can display the list of available subcommands bytyping ? at the alarms level.

myswitch:hardware cecplus alarms-> ?

modify Enable or disable an alarm

relays> The relays directory

show Display alarm configuration

status Show major and minor relay state


Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.1.1.1 hardware cecplus alarms modifyThis command lets you enable or disable a CEC-Plus alarm. Enter the following parameters:

myswitch:hardware cecplus alarms-> modify

Usage:

[-type] <ecpAlarm> Type

[[-minorcategory] (enabled|disabled)] Minor Category

[[-majorcategory] (enabled|disabled)] Major Category


5.1.1.2 hardware cecplus alarms relaysThese commands let you configure or display alarm relays. You can show the list of availablesubcommands by typing ? at the relays level.

myswitch:hardware cecplus alarms relays-> ?

modify Modify alarm relay function

show Display alarm relay functions

5.1.1.2.1 hardware cecplus alarm relays modify


-type <ecpAlarm> Indicates the alarm condition. Valid parameters are displayed in the AlarmType fieldwhen the command hardware cecplus alarms show is entered.

-minorcategory(enabled | disabled)

Designates that the specified alarm type causes a minor alarm when that condition occurs.

-majorcategory(enabled | disabled)

Designates that the specified alarm type causes a major alarm when that condition occurs.


This command lets you set an alarm relay. Enter the following parameters:

myswitch:hardware cecplus alarms relays-> modify

Usage:

[-relay] <integer> Relay Number

[[-function] (major|minor|unused)] Alarm Function

Hardware Commands


5.1.1.2.2 hardware cecplus alarm relays show

This command lets you display the alarm relays. Enter the following parameters:

myswitch:hardware cecplus alarms relays-> show

Relay Alarm Current

Number Function State

1 major on

2 minor on

3 unused off

4 unused off

5 major on

The fields in this display are defined are defined as follows:

If no CEC-Plus is installed in the switch, then the following is displayed:


-relay <integer> The number that corresponds to one of the five alarm relay LEDs on the front of the ECP.

-function(major|minor|unused)

Indicates if you want the alarm relay to be major, minor, or unused.

Field Description

Relay Number Shows the number which corresponds to one of the five alarm relay LEDs on the front ofthe ECP.

Alarm Function Shows whether the alarm relay has been configured as major, minor, or unused.

Current State Shows whether the alarm relay is on (in a state of alarm) or off (not in a state of alarm).


myswitch:hardware cecplus alarms relays-> show

No CEC alarm relays available

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.1.1.3 hardware cecplus alarms showThis command lets you display the configuration of all CEC-Plus alarms. Enter the following:

myswitch:hardware cecplus alarms-> show

AlarmType AlarmStatus MinorAlarm MajorAlarm

powerSupplyInputFailed active disabled enabled

powerSupplyOutputFailed active disabled enabled

fanBankFailed active disabled enabled

tempSensorOverTemp inactive disabled enabled

powerSupplyOverCurrent inactive disabled enabled

powerSupply5VoltFailed inactive disabled enabled

faultyorMissingStandbyTcm inactive disabled disabled

esiLossOfSyncSrc active enabled disabled


The faultyorMissingStandbyTcm alarm isdisplayed only on a master TCM. This alarm is

Field Description

AlarmType Displays the name of the alarm.

AlarmStatus Shows whether the state of the alarm is active (alarming) or inactive (not alarming). Analarm is active if the underlying condition is detected. For power supplies, the input failedalarm condition is active if the input voltage is not within the nominal range for thesupply. This does not necessarily mean that an output failure will result. A power supplyoutput failure condition is active if any power supply is failing or if it is physicallyremoved.

MinorAlarm disabled means that this alarm type will not cause a minor alarm.

enabled means that this alarm type causes a minor alarm.

MajorAlarm disabled means that this alarm type will not cause a major alarm.

enabled means that this alarm type causes a major alarm.


NOTEregistered only if the number of installed TCMsis configured to be 2, or if the number ofinstalled TCMs is configured to be auto underoper env tcms (in EMI) and if a standby TCMis physically present in a slot at any time. Afterbeing registered, the alarm is continuouslymonitored and updated. After it is registered, theonly way to stop displaying the alarm is toreconfigure the value to 1 manually.

Hardware Commands

5.1.1.4 hardware cecplus alarms statusThis command lets you display the status of all CEC-Plus alarms. Enter the following:

myswitch:hardware cecplus alarms-> status

Major alarm relay status: on

Minor alarm relay status: off


If there is no TCM installed in the switch, then the following is displayed:

myswitch:hardware cecplus alarms-> status


5.1.2 hardware cecplus ip

NOTEThe ie0 and ie1 interfaces of all installed TCMsand the ie0 interface of all installed SCPs mustall reside on the same subnet.

Field Description

Major alarm relay status off means that no major alarms are currently active.

on means that one or more major alarms are currently active.

Look at the AlarmStatus field to see which condition is in a state of alarm.

Minor alarm relay status off means that no minor alarms are currently active.

on means that one or more minor alarms are currently active.

Look at the AlarmStatus field to see which condition is in a state of alarm.


These commands let you change the IP configuration of the TCM’s interfaces. You can displaythe list of available subcommands by typing ? at the ip level.

myswitch:hardware cecplus ip-> ?

route> The route directory

show Display IP Configuration

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.1.2.1 hardware cecplus ip route

These command allow you to delete a static IP route from the local IP routing table, add astatic IP route to the local IP routing table, or list the current static IP routes in the local IProuting table for one of the TCM’s IP interfaces. You can display the list of availablesubcommands by typing ? at the route level.

myswitch:hardware cecplus ip route-> ?

delete Delete a route

new Create a new route

show Display Routing Information

5.1.2.1.1 hardware cecplus ip route delete

This command lets you delete an IP route from one of the TCM’s IP interfaces. Enter thefollowing parameters:

myswitch:hardware cecplus ip route-> delete

Usage:

[-slot] (X|Y) Slot

[-destination] (default | <IP Address>) Destination

[[-gateway] <IP Address>] Gateway

[[-ifname] (ie0|ie1|lo0)] Interface

[[-metric] (0|1)] Metric

[[-type] (host | net)] Route Type

[[-flags] <text>] Flags



-slot (X|Y) Indicates the TCM slot on which you want to delete a route.


-destination (default |<destination IP Address>)

default indicates that you want to delete a default route. destination IP Addressindicates the destination IP network number of the route that you want to delete.

-gateway <IP Address> Indicates the gateway address to the destination IP network number.

-ifname (ie0|ie1|lo0) The local IP interface used to get to the destination IP network.

-metric (0|1) Indicates the number of hops to the destination IP network. The default value is 1.

-type (host|net) host indicates this is a host-specific route with the destination being a specific node’s IPaddress. net indicates this is a network-specific route with the destination being anetwork IP address.

-flags <text> H indicates the route is host-specific. G indicates the route is network-specific.

Hardware Commands

5.1.2.1.2 hardware cecplus ip route new

This command lets you create an IP route for one of the TCM’s IP interfaces. Enter thefollowing parameters:

myswitch:hardware cecplus ip route-> new

Usage:

[-slot] (X|Y) Slot

[-destination] (default | <IP Address>) Destination

[-gateway] <IP Address> Gateway

[[-metric] (0|1)] Metric (default: 1)

[[-type] (host | net)] Route Type (default: net)



-slot (X|Y) Indicates the TCM slot on which you want to create a route.

-destination(default|<IP Address>)

default indicates that you want to create a default route. IP Address indicates thedestination IP network number of the route that you want to create.

-gateway <IP Address> Indicates the gateway address to the destination IP network number.

-metric (0|1) Indicates the number of hops to the destination IP network. The default value of 1 is usedif no value is entered. If 1 is specified, the route is created with the RTF_GATEWAY flag.

-type (host|net) host indicates this is a host-specific route with the destination being a specific node’s IPaddress. net indicates this is a network-specific route with the destination being anetwork IP address. The default value of net is used if no value is entered.


Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.1.2.1.3 hardware cecplus ip route show

This command lets you display the current IP routes for the TCM’s IP interfaces. Enter thefollowing parameters:

myswitch:hardware cecplus ip route-> show

Destination Gateway Metric Interface Flags

default 198.29.31.75 1 ie0 G

127.0.0.1 127.0.0.1 0 lo0

169.144.85.3 198.29.31.75 1 ie0 G

198.29.31.0 198.29.31.28 0 ie0


5.1.2.2 hardware cecplus ip showThis command lets you display configuration information for the TCM’s IP interfaces. Enterthe following parameters:

myswitch:hardware cecplus ip-> show

interface state address netmask broadcast

ie0 up 169.144.28.125 255.255.255.0 169.144.28.255

ie1 up 169.144.28.225 255.255.255.0 169.144.28.255

lo0 up 127.0.0.1 255.0.0.0 N/A

Field Description

Destination Indicates the destination IP network number.

Gateway Indicates the gateway address to the destination IP network number.

Metric Shows the number of hops to the destination IP network.

Interface Shows the local IP interface used to get to the destination IP network.

Flags Shows H if the route is host-specific (created with the RTF_HOST flag set). Shows G if theroute is network-specific (created with the RTF_GATEWAY flag set).



Field Description

interface Indicates the name of the IP interface.

state Shows the administrative state of the IP interface.

address Displays the IP address of the IP interface.

netmask Shows the netmask address of the IP interface.

broadcast Indicates the broadcast address of the IP interface.

Hardware Commands

5.1.3 hardware cecplus modifyThis command lets you set or change the name, date, and the time zone on the TCM. Enter thefollowing parameters:

myswitch:hardware cecplus-> modify

Usage:

[-slot] (X|Y) Slot


[[-timezone] <text>] Time Zone



-slot (X|Y) Indicates the TCM slot that you want to configure.

-name <text> Indicates the new system name for the TCM.

-timezone <text> The time zone configured for this TCM. The TCM supports and automatically convertsfrom Standard to Daylight Savings time for the following time zones: EST5EDT (EasternStandard Time), CST6CDT (Central Standard Time), MST7MDT (Mountain Standard Time),PST8PDT (Pacific Standard Time), and AKST9AKDT (Alaska Standard Time).


Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

Locations outside of the time zones listed for -timezone <text> must supply the followingPOSIX standard 1003.1-1988 formula for switching between Daylight Savings Time andStandard Time:

stdoffset [dst[offset][, start[/time], end[/time]]]

The time zones have the following meanings:

Field Description

std and dst Indicates 3 or more bytes that designate standard (std) or Daylight Savings Time (dst).Only std is required; if dst is omitted, then it does not apply in this location. Can useuppercase or lowercase letters and any characters, except a leading colon(:), digits, comma(,), minus (-), plus (+), and ACSII NUL.

offset Indicates the value to add to local time to equal Greenwich Mean Time. offset is of theform:

hh[:mm[:ss]]

Hour (hh) is required and can be a single digit between 0 and 24. Minutes (mm) andseconds (ss) are optional and are between 0 and 59. If no offset follows dst, it isassumed to be one hour ahead of std. If preceded by a “-”, the time zone is east of thePrime Meridian; otherwise it is west (with an optional “+”)

start[/time], end[/time] start indicates the date when the change occurs from std to dst. end indicates the datewhen you change back. Both start and end are of the form:

Mm.n.d

d is the d-th day ( ) of week n of month m of the year ( ),where week 5 is the last d day in month m, which can occur in either the fourth or the fifthweek). Week 1 is the first week in which the d-th day occurs. Day 0 is Sunday. time is ofthe same format as offset, except that no leading “-” or “+” is allowed. If time is notentered, the default of 02:00:00 is used.

0 d 6≤ ≤ 1 n 5 1, m 12≤ ≤ ≤ ≤


Hardware Commands

5.1.4 hardware cecplus rs232This command allows you to display the settings for the RS-232 serial port on the TCM. Enterthe following parameters:

myswitch:hardware cecplus-> rs232

Port Type Speed Flow Bits Stops Parity

A rs232 9600 none 8 one none


If no TCM is installed, then the following is displayed:

myswitch:hardware cecplus-> rs232

There is no CEC on this switch

Field Description

Port Shows the physical port designation.

Type Shows the signalling standard used.

Speed Shows the receive/transmit rate in bits per second.

Flow Shows the type of flow control implemented on the given port.

Bits Shows the number of bit times in a single character.

Stops Shows the number of stop bits in a character frame.

Parity Shows the parity setting for the ports.


Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.1.5 hardware cecplus showThis command lets you display information about the TCM to which you are logged in. Enterthe following parameters:

myswitch:hardware cecplus-> show

Name: linus

Type: cec-plus

Uptime: 5 days 18:43

Hardware Version A ,Software Version T_ForeThought_6.1.0 (1.46581)

Serial Number: 30

Slot: X

State: active

TimeZone: N/A

External Inputs (1-5): off, off, off, off, off

ESI module is present

Other TCM Status is unknown


Field Description

Name This TCM’s system name.

Type Shows what type of TCM this is.

Uptime The amount of time (in days, hours, and minutes) since this TCM has been rebooted.

Hardware Version The hardware version of this TCM.

Software Version The software version being used by this TCM.

Serial Number The serial number of this TCM card.


Slot Indicates the TCM slot for which information is being displayed. X indicates the top slotand Y indicates the bottom slot.

State The current state of this TCM. active means this TCM is the controller and is functioningproperly. standby means this is the standby TCM. offline means the timing has failedon this TCM.

TimeZone The time zone configured for this TCM any offset from GM time. If this field reads N/A,then this value has not been configured yet.

External Inputs (1 - 5) The current state of each of the five front panel external inputs from the viewpoint of thisTCM. Can be either on (input being received) or off (no input).

Hardware Commands

5.1.6 hardware cecplus snmptrapsThese commands enable you to manage SNMP traps. You can display the list of availablesubcommands by typing ? at the snmptraps level.

myswitch:hardware cecplus snmptraps-> ?

delete Delete a trap destination

new Add a trap destination

show Display trap destinations

5.1.6.1 hardware cecplus snmptraps deleteThis command allows you to delete an existing SNMP trap destination. Before deleting a trapthat may need to be recreated later, show the list of current SNMP traps and either copy andsave the screen or write down the trap destinations. You can display the list of current SNMPtraps to find the number of the trap to be deleted. Enter the following parameters:

myswitch:hardware cecplus snmptraps-> delete

Usage:

[-slot] (X|Y) Slot

[-trapdest] <IP Address> Trap Destination

ESI module is present. The External Synchronization Interface (ESI) card status from the viewpoint of this TCM.This should always be present. absent indicates a failure of the ESI interface logic.

Other TCM If another TCM is not plugged in, nothing is displayed. If another TCM is plugged in,shows the software status of the other TCM from the viewpoint of this TCM. If this TCM isthe controller, normal means the standby TCM is actively updating and waiting to becalled into service, and unknown means the standby TCM is down. If this TCM is thestandby, active means the controller TCM is functioning normally.

Field Description




-slot (X|Y) Indicates the TCM slot on which you want to delete a trap.

-trapdest <IP Address> The number of the trap destination in the list of current SNMP traps that is to be removed.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.1.6.2 hardware cecplus snmptraps newThis command allows you to specify a host to which an TCM can send SNMP traps. Enter theIP address of the SNMP trap destination to be added. Repeat this for as many SNMP trapdestinations as needed. Traps are active as soon as they are set. Enter the followingparameters:

myswitch:hardware cecplus snmptraps-> new

Usage:

[-slot] (X|Y) Slot

[-trapdest] <IP Address> Trap Destination


5.1.6.3 hardware cecplus snmptraps showThis command enables you to list all of the current SNMP traps. Enter the following:

myswitch:hardware cecplus snmptraps-> show

Trap Destination

1 192.88.243.18

2 198.29.16.14

3 198.29.16.18

4 198.29.23.39

5 198.29.31.130

If no SNMP traps have been configured, the following message is displayed:


-slot (X|Y) Indicates the TCM slot on which you want to create a trap.

-trapdest <IP Address> The IP address of the trap destination that is to be created.


myswitch:hardware cecplus snmptraps-> show

No SNMP trap destinations configured

Hardware Commands

5.1.7 hardware cecplus statisticsThis section contains a detailed description of the statistics commands that displayoperational performance and error information received by the CEC-Plus.

NOTEThe hardware cecplus statisticscommands are only displayed on the platformsthat can support a CEC-Plus. For moreinformation about the CEC-Plus, see theCEC-Plus Installation and User’s Manual.

Type ? at the statistics level to display the available commands:

myswitch:hardware cecplus statistics-> ?

icmp Display ICMP statistics

if Display interface statistics

ip Display IP statistics

tcp Display TCP statistics

udp Display UDP statistics


Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.1.7.1 hardware cecplus statistics icmpYou can list ICMP statistics for the TCM by entering icmp at the statistics level asfollows:

myswitch:hardware cecplus statistics-> icmp

ICMP Counter for slot X In Delta Out Delta

----------------------- ----------------------- -----------------------

Msgs: 35 (35) 39031 (39031)

Errors: 0 (0) 39003 (39003)

Dest Unreachs: 7 (7) 38875 (38875)

Time Excds: 0 (0) 128 (128)

Parmprobs: 0 (0) 0 (0)

Src Quenchs: 0 (0) 0 (0)

Redirects: 0 (0) 0 (0)

Echos: 28 (28) 0 (0)

Echo Replys: 0 (0) 28 (28)

Timestamps: 0 (0) 0 (0)

Timestamp Replys: 0 (0) 0 (0)

Addrmasks: 0 (0) 0 (0)

Addrmask Replys: 0 (0) 0 (0)


Field Description

Msgs In The total number of ICMP messages received. This counter includes all those counted byErrors In.

Msgs Out The total number of ICMP messages which this entity attempted to send. This counterincludes all those counted by Errors Out.

Errors In The number of ICMP messages received but determined as having ICMP-specific errors(bad ICMP checksums, bad length, etc.).


Errors Out The number of ICMP messages which this entity did not send due to problems discoveredwithin ICMP such as a lack of buffers. This value should not include errors discoveredoutside the ICMP layer such as the inability of IP to route the resultant datagram. In someimplementations there may be no types of error which contribute to this counter’s value.

Dest Unreachs In The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received.

Dest Unreachs Out The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages sent.

TimeExcds In The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received.

TimeExcds Out The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages sent.

Parmprobs In The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received.

Parmprobs Out The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages sent.

Hardware Commands

NOTEThe In and Out columns display the currentvalue of the counter. The Delta columns displaythe change in the counter since the last time youchecked this value. The counters are reset whenthe switch is restarted.

Src Quenchs In The number of ICMP Source Quench messages received.

Src Quenchs Out The number of ICMP Source Quench messages sent.

Redirects In The number of ICMP Redirect messages received.

Redirects Out The number of ICMP Redirect messages sent. For a host, this object is always zero, sincehosts do not send redirects.

Echos In The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages received.

Echos Out The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages sent.

Echo Replys In The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages received.

Echo Replys Out The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent.

Timestamps In The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages received.

Timestamps Out The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages sent.

Timestamp Replys In The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages received.

Timestamp Replys Out The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages sent.

AddrMasks In The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages received.

AddrMasks Out The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages sent.

AddrMask Replys In The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages received.

AddrMask Replys Out The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages sent.

Field Description


Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.1.7.2 hardware cecplus statistics ifYou can list interface statistics for the TCM by entering if at the statistics level asfollows:

myswitch:hardware cecplus statistics-> if

Slot X, ie0 Counter In Delta Out Delta

----------------------- ----------------------- -----------------------

Octets: 4294967295 (4294967295) 4294967295 (4294967295)

Unicast Packets: 1418897 (1418897) 48811 (48811)

Non-unicast Packets: 0 (0) 0 (0)

Discards: 0 (0) 0 (0)

Errors: 0 (0) 0 (0)

Unknown Protocols: 0 (0)

Qlen: 0

Slot X, ie1 Counter In Delta Out Delta

----------------------- ----------------------- -----------------------

Octets: 4294967295 (4294967295) 4294967295 (4294967295)

Unicast Packets: 12715678 (12715678) 3577037 (3577037)

Non-unicast Packets: 0 (0) 0 (0)

Discards: 0 (0) 0 (0)

Errors: 0 (0) 0 (0)

Unknown Protocols: 0 (0)

Qlen: 0

Press return for more, q to quit: q


Field Description

Octets In The total number of octets received on the interface, including framing characters.


Octets Out The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing characters.

Unicast Packets In The number of subnetwork-unicast packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol.

Unicast Packets Out The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted to asubnetwork-unicast address, including those that were discarded or not sent.

Non-unicast Packets In The number of non-unicast (i.e., subnetwork-broadcast or subnetwork-multicast) packetsdelivered to a higher-layer protocol.

Non-unicast Packets Out The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted to a non-unicast (i.e., a subnetwork-broadcast or subnetwork-multicast) address, including thosethat were discarded or not sent.

Hardware Commands

NOTEThe In and Out columns display the currentvalue of the counter. The Delta columns displaythe change in the counter since the last time youchecked this value. The counters are reset whenthe switch is restarted.

Discards In The number of inbound packets that were chosen to be discarded even though no errorshad been detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol. Onepossible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space.

Discards Out The number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though noerrors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted. One possible reason fordiscarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space.

Errors In The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from beingdeliverable to a higher-layer protocol.

Errors Out The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors.

Unknown Protocols In The number of packets received via the interface which were discarded because of anunknown or unsupported protocol.

QLen Out The length of the output packet queue (in packets).

Field Description


Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.1.7.3 hardware cecplus statistics ipYou can display IP statistics for the TCM by entering ip at the statistics level as follows:

myswitch:hardware cecplus statistics-> ip

IP Counter for slot X Value Delta

------------------------------ ---------- -----------

In Receives: 12510067 (12510067)

Inhdr Errors: 0 (0)

In Addr Errors: 5 (5)

Forw Datagrams: 3 (3)

In Unknown Protos: 7 (7)

Indiscards: 0 (0)

Indelivers: 12509924 (12509924)

Outrequests: 1796389 (1796389)

Outdiscards: 0 (0)

Out No Routes: 0 (0)

Reasm Reqds: 0 (0)

Reasm Oks: 0 (0)

Reasm Fails: 0 (0)

Frag Oks: 0 (0)

Frag Fails: 0 (0)

Frag Creates: 0 (0)


Field Description

In Receives The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces, including those received inerror.

Inhdr Errors The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IP headers, including badchecksums, version number mismatch, other format errors, time-to-live exceeded, errorsdiscovered in processing their IP options, etc.


In Addr Errors The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their IP header’sdestination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity. This includes invalidaddresses (e.g., 0.0.0.0) and addresses of unsupported Classes (e.g., Class E). For entitieswhich are not IP Gateways and, therefore, do not forward datagrams, this includesdatagrams discarded because the destination address was not local.

Forw Datagrams The number of input datagrams for which this entity was not their final IP destination, asa result of which an attempt was made to find a route to forward them to that finaldestination. In entities which do not act as IP Gateways, this counter includes only thosepackets which were Source-Routed via this entity, and the Source-Route option processingwas successful.

Hardware Commands

In Unknown Protos The number of locally-addressed datagrams received successfully but discarded becauseof an unknown or unsupported protocol.

Indiscards The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to preventtheir continued processing, but which were discarded (e.g., for lack of buffer space). Thiscounter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re-assembly.

Indelivers The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP user-protocols(including ICMP).

Outrequests The total number of IP datagrams which local IP user-protocols (including ICMP)supplied to IP in requests for transmission. This counter does not include datagramscounted in ipForwDatagrams.

Outdiscards The number of output IP datagrams for which no problem was encountered to preventtheir transmission to their destination, but which were discarded (e.g., for lack of bufferspace). This counter includes datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams if any suchpackets met this (discretionary) discard criterion.

Out No Routes The number of IP datagrams discarded because no route could be found to transmit themto their destination. This counter includes any packets counted in ipForwDatagramswhich meet this “no-route” criterion. This includes datagrams which a host cannot routebecause all of its default gateways are down.

Reasm Reqds The maximum number of seconds which received fragments are held while they areawaiting reassembly at this entity.

Reasm Oks The number of IP datagrams successfully reassembled.

Reasm Fails The number of failures detected by the IP reassembly algorithm (for whatever reason:timed out, errors, etc.). This is not necessarily a count of discarded IP fragments sincesome algorithms (notably the algorithm in RFC-815) can lose track of the number offragments by combining them as they are received.

Frag Oks The number of IP datagrams that have been successfully fragmented at this entity.

Frag Fails The number of IP datagrams that have been discarded because they needed to befragmented at this entity but could not be (e.g., because their Don’t Fragment flag wasset).

Frag Creates The number of IP datagram fragments that have been generated as a result of

Field Description


NOTEThe Value column shows the current value of thecounter. The Delta column shows the change inthe counter since the last time you checked it.The counters are reset when the switch isrestarted.

fragmentation at this entity.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.1.7.4 hardware cecplus statistics tcpYou can display TCP statistics for the TCM by entering tcp at the statistics level:

myswitch:hardware cecplus statistics-> tcp

TCP Counter for slot X Value Delta

------------------------------ ---------- -----------

Active Opens: 0 (0)

Passive Opens: 6 (6)

Attempt Fails: 0 (0)

Established Resets: 0 (0)

Current Established: 0

In Segments: 2988 (2988)

Out Segments: 0 (0)

Retrans Segments: 0 (0)


Field Description

Active Opens The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the SYN-SENTstate from the CLOSED state.

Passive Opens The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the SYN-RCVDstate from the LISTEN state.

Attempt Fails The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the CLOSED statefrom either the SYN-SENT state or the SYN-RCVD state, plus the number of times TCPconnections have made a direct transition to the LISTEN state from the SYN-RCVD state.

Established Resets The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the CLOSED statefrom either the ESTABLISHED state or the CLOSE-WAIT state.

Current Established The number of TCP connections for which the current state is either ESTABLISHED orCLOSE-WAIT.

In Segments The total number of segments received, including those received in error. This count


NOTEThe Value column displays the current value ofthe counter. The Delta column displays thechange in the counter since the last time youchecked this value. The counters are reset whenthe switch is restarted.

includes segments received on currently established connections.

Out Segments The total number of segments sent, including those on current connections but excludingthose containing only retransmitted octets.

Retrans Segments The total number of segments retransmitted; i.e., the number of TCP segments transmittedcontaining one or more previously transmitted octets.

Hardware Commands

5.1.7.5 hardware cecplus statistics udpYou can display UDP statistics for the TCM by entering udp at the statistics level asfollows:

myswitch:hardware cecplus statistics-> udp

UDP Counter for slot X Value Delta

------------------------------ ---------- -----------

In Datagrams: 12318903 (12318903)

Out Datagrams: 1755476 (1755476)

NonExistant Ports: 227221 (227221)

In Errors: 0 (0)


NOTEThe Value column displays the current value ofthe counter. The Delta column displays thechange in the counter since the last time youchecked this value. The counters are reset whenthe switch is restarted.

Field Description

In Datagrams The total number of UDP datagrams delivered to UDP users.

Out Datagrams The total number of UDP datagrams sent from this entity.

NonExistant Ports The total number of received UDP datagrams for which there was no application at thedestination port.

In Errors The number of received UDP datagrams that could not be delivered for reasons other thanthe lack of an application at the destination port.


Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.1.8 hardware cecplus timingThese commands let you configure external synchronization timing. Type ? at the timinglevel to display the list of available subcommands.

myswitch:hardware cecplus timing-> ?

modify Modify timing configuration

references> The references directory

show Display current timing configuration

5.1.8.1 hardware cecplus timing modifyThis command lets you configure timing on a CEC-Plus:

myswitch:hardware cecplus timing-> modify

Usage:

[[-mode] <requestedref>] Requested Timing Ref

[[-primary] <refsource>] Primary Ref Source

[[-secondary] <refsource>] Secondary Ref Source

[[-revertiveswitching] (enabled|disabled)] Revertive Switching

[[-revertivedelay] <integer>] Revertive Switching Delay (sec)

[[-failoverdelay] <integer>] Failover Switching Delay (sec)

[[-framing] <bitsframing>] Bits Framing Format

[[-coding] (ami|b8zs|hdb3)] Bits Coding Format

[[-level] (0.6|1.2|1.8|2.4|3.0)] Bits Output Level



-mode <requestedref> Indicates the timing reference1 to be used on the TCM:


• freerun indicates that the TCM must use the local oscillator as its timing source.

• primary indicates that the TCM must use the primary timing source.

• secondary indicates that the TCM must use the secondary timing source.

• automatic is the default mode. See the CEC-Plus Installation and User’s Manual for adescription of how this mode works.

• bits indicates that the TCM will automatically use the most appropriate BITS input.See the CEC-Plus Installation and User’s Manual for a description of how this modeworks.

Hardware Commands

-primary <refsource> Indicates the primary timing source is to be taken from one of the exported clocks (eitherprimary or secondary) from one of the switch fabrics (1 - first (leftmost slot), 2 - secondslot, 3 - third slot, 4 fourth slot) switch fabric. Before configuring the primary source, usethe hardware cecplus timing references show command to display all of thepossible clocking references, their specific sources, and whether or not they are actuallyavailable for you to use. The freerun oscillator is not listed there because it is alwaysavailable.

-secondary <refsource> Indicates the secondary timing source is to be taken from one of the exported clocks(either primary or secondary) from one of the switch fabrics (1 - first (leftmost slot), 2 -second slot, 3 - third slot, 4 fourth slot) switch fabric. Before configuring the secondarysource, use the hardware cecplus timing references show command to display allof the possible clocking references, their specific sources, and whether or not they areactually available for you to use. The freerun oscillator is not listed there because it isalways available.

-revertiveswitching(enabled|disabled)

enabled indicates that the revertive timing delay is going to be turned on. disabledindicates that the revertive timing delay is going to be turned off.

When you disable revertive switching, you only turn it off. If you enable it again, the TCMuses the value that you last configured for the delay using hardware cecplus timingmodify -revertivedelay.

-revertivedelay <integer> Indicates the amount of time after the restoration of the primary timing reference beforethe TCM is instructed to return to the primary timing reference. The default is 3 seconds.

-failoverdelay <integer> Indicates the amount of time after the failure of the primary reference before the TCM isinstructed to switch to the secondary reference. The default is 0 seconds. The failoverdelay should be left at 0 under normal circumstances. This parameter is only meaningfulwhen the timing mode is automatic.

-framing <bitsframing> Indicates the type of framing format to be used for DS1 BITS interface or E1 BITS interfacefor this TCM. The following formats are supported for a DS1 interface:

• d4 indicates that D4 (also known as Superframe (SF)) framing should be used for theBITS interface on the TCM. SF consists of 12 frames of 192 bits each, with the 193rd bitproviding error checking and other functions.

• esf indicates that Extended Superframe (ESF) framing should be used for the BITSinterface on the TCM. ESF provides frame synchronization, cyclic redundancy, anddata link bits.



The following formats are supported for an E1 interface:

• fas indicates E1 framing that makes use of the Frame Alignment Signal.

• fascrc4 indicates E1 framing that makes use of the Frame Alignment Signal andCRC-4 checksums.

• mfas indicates E1 framing that makes use of the Multi-Frame Alignment Signal(sometimes referred to as TS16).

• mfascrc4 indicates E1 framing that makes use of the Multi-Frame Alignment Signaland CRC-4 checksums.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

-coding (ami|b8zs|hdb3) Indicates the type of coding to be used for the DS1 BITS interface or the E1 BITS interfacefor this TCM:

• ami indicates that Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI) coding should be used for the BITSinterface on the TCM. This means zeros are represented by 01 during each bit cell, andones are represented by 11 or 00, alternately, during each bit cell. This techniquerequires that the sending device maintain ones density. Ones density is not maintainedindependent of the data stream.

• b8zs indicates that Binary 8-Zero Substitution (B8ZS) coding should be used for theTCM. This means a special code is substituted whenever eight consecutive zeros aresent through the link. This code is then interpreted at the remote end of the connection.This technique guarantees ones density independent of the data stream.

• hdb3 indicates that High Density Bipolar (HDB3) coding should be used for the TCM.HDB3 is a bipolar coding method that does not allow more than 3 consecutive zeroes.HDB3 is only supported for an E1 interface.

-level (0.6|1.2|1.8|2.4|3.0) Indicates the output level (dB) of the DS1 BITS interface for this TCM. This parameter isnot valid when using an E1 source.

• 0.6 indicates that the output level for the BITS interface is 0.6 dB.





1. It is recommended that the freerun, primary, and secondary modes only be used during diagnostics andmaintenance because the TCM will not failover to another source when it is in one of these modes. automatic modeis only valid when the primary and secondary sources are recovered from network modules.



Hardware Commands

5.1.8.2 hardware cecplus timing referencesThese commands let you configure or display the timing reference sources and their status.Type ? at the references level to display the list of available subcommands.

myswitch:hardware cecplus timing references-> ?

modify Modify reference sources quality/admin status

show Display all reference sources and their status

5.1.8.2.1 hardware cecplus timing references modify

This commands lets you display all of the possible timing references from the switch. Enterthe following parameters:

myswitch:hardware cecplus timing references-> modify

Usage:

[-reference] <esirefsource> Reference

[[-refqual] <refqual>] RefQual

[[-admin] (up|down)] Admin



-reference <esirefsource> Indicates for which timing source you are changing the administrative status. Can beprimary or secondary.

-refqual <refqual> clear indicates that you want to clear1 a reference quality (RefQual) failure for a timingsource. Once a RefQual failure has been declared for a timing source, it is consideredinvalid and cannot be used as a timing source until the failure is cleared. You can use thiscommand to clear the failure and make the source a valid one again.

-admin (up|down) up means you are enabling this timing source. down means you are disabling this timingsource.


1. Before clearing a refqual failure, it is recommended that you investigate the cause of the failure and correct it.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.1.8.2.2 hardware cecplus timing references show

This commands lets you display all of the possible timing references from the switch. Enterthe following parameters:

myswitch:hardware cecplus timing references-> show

Reference Source Status Admin RefQual

fabric1_Primary 1C1 unavailable up ok

fabric1_Secondary 1 (No Timing) unavailable up ok

fabric2_Primary 2 (Down) unavailable up ok

fabric2_Secondary 2 (Down) unavailable up ok

fabric3_Primary 3A1 available up ok


fabric4_Primary 4 (No Timing) unavailable up ok


tcmX_bits1 BITS1 unavailable up ok

tcmY_bits2 BITS2 unavailable up ok


Fields Description

Reference Shows the name of the timing reference.

Source Shows from which network module port or BITS clock the timing is being derived for thisfabric or TCM. If the port is listed in regular BNP notation (e.g., 3B2), this indicates theexported timing source from this port. If the port is listed as 3 (No Timing), then thisnetwork module does not support distributed timing. If the port is listed as 3 OSC, thisindicates the timing source is the crystal oscillator on that network module. If the port islisted as 3 (Down), then this network module has been removed.

Status Shows if the timing source is available or not.

Admin Shows the administrative status of the timing reference. up means it is enabled and downmeans it is disabled.

RefQual Shows the reference quality (RefQual) status of the timing reference. ok means the source



myswitch:hardware cecplus timing references-> show

No ESI board found

is valid. fail means the source has gone out of specification. It is recommended that youinvestigate and correct the cause prior to resetting. To make the source valid, you mustmanually reset the RefQual status of that source using the hardware cecplus timingreferences modify -refqual command.

Hardware Commands

5.1.8.3 hardware cecplus timing showThis command lets you display the timing information that has been configured. Enter thefollowing parameters:

myswitch:hardware cecplus timing-> show

ESI module on linus Card Type DS1_Stratum_4

BITS interface framing d4

line coding ami , output level 0.6dB

PLL Status: locked

Current Timing Reference: secondary

Requested Timing Reference: automatic

Primary Reference (1C1 ) unavailable

Secondary Reference(3A1 ) available

BITS1 Reference unavailable

BITS2 Reference unavailable

Revertive Switching: enabled

Revertive Switching Delay: 3

Failover Switching Delay: 0


Field Description

ESI module Shows the name of the TCM.

Card Type Shows the ESI card type for this TCM.


BITS interface framing Shows the framing format of the BITS interface for this TCM. For DS1, can be: d4 or esf,and for E1, can be: fas, fascrc4, mfas, or mfascrc4.

line coding Shows the coding format of the BITS interface for this TCM. For DS1, can be: ami or b8zs,and for E1, can be: hdb3.

output level Shows the output level, in dB, of the DS1 BITS interface for this TCM. Can be 0.6, 1.2,1.8, 2.4, or 3.0.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands


myswitch:hardware cecplus timing-> show

There is no TCM on this switch

PLL Status Shows the phase-locked loop (PLL) status for this TCM. Can be one of the following:

• freerun means the local oscillator on the TCM is being used.

• locked means the current clock is good.

• holdover means the TCM has detected a clock source error and is using the last validclock source.

• acquire means the TCM is trying to lock on to the current clock (this may take up tofive minutes).

• refqual means the reference quality of the new clock is out of specification.

Current Timing Reference Shows the actual timing reference that is currently being used. Can be BITS1, BITS2,primary, secondary, or freerun.

Requested Timing Reference Shows the timing reference that was configured. If this source fails, it will not match whatis currently being used. Can be bits, automatic, primary, secondary, or freerun.

Primary Reference Shows the timing source configured as the primary source. Can be one of the primary orsecondary clocks exported from one of the switch fabrics.

Secondary Reference Shows the timing source configured as the secondary source. Can be one of the primary orsecondary clocks exported from one of the switch fabrics.

BITS1 Reference Shows whether the BITS1 timing source is currently available or unavailable.

BITS2 Reference Shows whether the BITS2 timing source is currently available or unavailable.

Revertive Switching Shows whether revertive switching is enabled or disabled.

Revertive Switching Delay Shows the amount of time, in seconds, between the time that the primary clock is restoredand the time that the TCM switches back to the primary clock again.

Failover Switching Delay Shows the amount of time, in seconds, after the failure of the primary clock source beforethe TCM switches to the secondary clock source.

Field Description


Hardware Commands

5.2 hardware chassis

This command enables you to display information about the CEC on an ASX-1000 switch,ASX-1200 switch, TNX-1100 switch, or the backplane on an ASX-4000 switch. The following isdisplayed:

myswitch:hardware-> chassis

Type: 64

Revision: F

SerialNumber: 1007


The following is displayed on all other types of switches:

myswitch:hardware-> chassis

No chassis information available

Field Description

Type The board type of the CEC on an ASX-1000 switch, ASX-1200 switch, or TNX-1100 switch,or the hardware revision of the backplane on an ASX-4000 switch.

Revision The hardware revision of the CEC on an ASX-1000 switch, ASX-1200 switch, or TNX-1100switch, or the hardware revision of the backplane on an ASX-4000 switch.

Serial Number The serial number of the CEC on an ASX-1000 switch, ASX-1200 switch, or TNX-1100switch, or the hardware revision of the backplane on an ASX-4000 switch.


Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.3 hardware dualscp

These commands let you configure failover support in a switch when two SCPs are installedin a single switch fabric.

NOTEOnly HA-based SCPs or Pentium-based SCPssupport dual SCP configuration. Using an earlierversion SCP in a redundant configuration cancause irreparable damage to your switch fabric.

These commands are not available locally on anESX-3000 switch.

For proper synchronization of informationbetween SCPs, ensure that the amount of freespace on both SCPs is roughly equal beforeperforming these commands.

You can display the list of available subcommands by typing ? at the dualscp level.

myswitch:hardware dualscp-> ?

modify Modify parameters of the dualscp configuration

show Show dualscp information

switchover Enable Dualscp Switchover

synchronize Synchronize with dual scp


Hardware Commands

5.3.1 hardware dualscp modifyThis command lets you configure failover support of two SCPs in a fabric. Enter the following:

myswitch:hardware dualscp-> modify

Usage:

[[-primary] (X|Y)] Primary SCP

[[-failover] (enabled|disabled)] Auto Failover

[[-threshold] <integer>] Failover Threshold (sec)

[[-autoremove] (enabled|disabled)] Auto Remove Old Files

[[-cdbsyncmode] (manual|automatic)] CDB Sync Mode

[[-resetstandby] (enabled|disabled)] Reset Standby SCP



-primary (X|Y)1 Designates which SCP is to control the switch at start-up:

• X indicates that the SCP in the left slot of the ASX-4000, ASX-200BX fabric or TNX-210fabric (the top slot in an ASX-1000 fabric, ASX-1200 fabric, or TNX-1100 fabric) is theprimary SCP. This is the default.

• Y indicates that the SCP in the right slot of the ASX-4000, ASX-200BX fabric or TNX-210 fabric (the bottom slot in an ASX-1000 fabric, ASX-1200 fabric, or TNX-1100 fabric)is the primary SCP.

-failover (enabled|disabled) Lets you enable or disable failover to a second SCP in the event of a hardware failure onthe controlling SCP. The default is enabled.

If SCP failover is disabled, the standby SCP will not take control of the switch fabric ifthe controlling SCP fails, regardless of how other dualscp parameters are set.

-threshold <integer> The threshold time, in seconds, that the standby SCP waits for a heartbeat from thecontrolling SCP before taking control of the switch. The minimum and default value is 2seconds. The maximum value is 300 seconds.

-autoremove(enabled|disabled)2

enabled indicates that autoremove is enabled on the standby SCP. When enabled, theSCP automatically deletes unused files and directories (i.e., old versions of switch


software), if necessary, when files are being synchronized by the controlling SCP.

disabled indicates that autoremove is disabled on the standby SCP. If disabled, youare not prompted and synchronization attempts fail in the event that there is not enoughfree space in FLASH. This is the default.

-cdbsyncmode(manual|automatic)3

manual indicates that you want to synchronize files manually between the controllingand standby SCPs.

automatic indicates that automatic synchronization will be enabled on the SCP. This isthe default. When enabled, the CDB is saved to the standby SCP every time the CDB iswritten to FLASH on the controlling SCP. The standby SCP then rereads the CDB once ithas been completely received. In addition, you can configure the controlling SCP toautomatically copy the password file to the standby SCP if changes are made to it.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

-resetstandby(enabled|disabled)

enabled lets you force the standby SCP to reboot.

1. The primary SCP and the controlling SCP are not necessarily the same. Primary refers to the SCP that is supposed tocontrol the switch after it boots. Controlling refers to the SCP that actually controls the switch. For example, if the SCPin slot X fails at start-up, the SCP in slot Y controls the switch even though it is not designated as the primary SCP.

2. Autoremove deletes old copies of the OS if no space is available during the synchronization process. When the OS isbeing synchronized, it also removes the CURRENT copy of the OS if that is the only file that can be deleted to makeroom for the new OS. When synchronizing the FLASH, the controlling SCP first instructs the standby SCP to deleteany files in its FLASH that are not on the controlling SCP’s FLASH. This could remove older copies or the CURRENTcopy of the OS, if those versions of the OS are not already present on the controlling SCPs FLASH.

3. Choosing automatic does not cause the automatic synchronization of switch software; only the CDB, password file,and other system configuration files are synchronized.



Hardware Commands

5.3.2 hardware dualscp showThis command lets you display the settings for dual SCP mode as follows:

myswitch:hardware dualscp-> show

Threshold Auto CDB Sync Sync

SCP State Primary Failover (in secs) Remove SyncMode Requests Failures

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

1X standalone X enabled 2 disabled automatic 0 0

Synchronization queue : CDB

Synchronization state : Idle

SVx/SPVx state transfer %: 100

SVx/SPVx dropped calls : 0

SVx/SPVx transfer status : OK

Last switchover time : N/A


Field Description

SCP The SCP for which the information is being displayed. For example, 3X indicates thatinformation for the SCP in slot X of switch fabric 3 is being displayed.

State The state of the SCP. standalone means that there is only one SCP in the switch fabric.dual means that there are two SCPs installed in the switch fabric, and the SCPs are com-municating with one another. other means that there are two SCPs installed in the switchfabric, but they are not communicating with one another.

Primary Shows which SCP (X or Y) is the primary SCP. The SCP in slot X is set to primary by default.

Failover Shows if failover is enabled on the switch fabric. failover is enabled by default.

Threshold (in secs) The amount of time, in seconds, that the standby SCP waits to receive a heartbeat from thecontrolling SCP before taking control of the switch. The maximum threshold is 300 sec-onds. The minimum and default threshold value is 2 seconds.


Auto Remove Shows if autoremove is enabled on the standby SCP. autoremove is disabled by default.

CDB SyncMode automatic means that CDB synchronization occurs automatically (autosync is enabledon the controlling SCP). manual means that CDB synchronization does not occur auto-matically (autosync is disabled on the controlling SCP). The default is automatic.

Sync Requests The number of synchronization requests that have been made between the controlling andstandby SCP.

Sync Failures The number of synchronizations requests that have failed between SCPs.

Synchronization queue The number of synchronization requests waiting to be processed.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

Synchronization state1 The state of the current synchronization attempt between the controlling and standby SCP.Suspended means either that the switch is not in dual SCP mode, or that the SCPs arerunning different versions of switch software. Idle means synchronization is not takingplace between SCPs. Manual means a manual synchronization is taking place betweenSCPs. Automatic means an automatic synchronization is taking place between SCPs.

SVx/SPVx state transfer When SVx/SPVx Call Preservation is enabled, call state information will be transferredfrom the Active SCP to the Standby SCP. Therefore, this field provides the completion per-centage of the information transfer.

SVx/SPVx dropped calls The number of calls for which SVx/SPVx Call Preservation has failed to transfer statefrom the Active SCP to the Standby SCP. If this field contains a number other than zeroand you wish to initiate recovery procedures, you must disable and then re-enable SVxCall Preservation. This procedure will re-initiate the state transfer for all the calls.

SVx/SPVx transfer status When SVx/SPVx Call Preservation is enabled, call state information will be transferredfrom the Active SCP to the Standby SCP. Therefore, this field indicates the status of theinformation transfer. OK indicates a successful transmission and Failed indicates a fail-ure in the transfer process.

Last switchover time Displays the time when the last switchover occurred, if applicable.

1. When manual or automatic synchronization is taking place between SCPs, the name of the file being synchronized isalso displayed.

Field Description


Hardware Commands

5.3.3 hardware dualscp switchoverThis command lets you force the standby SCP to take control of the switch. Enter thefollowing parameters:

myswitch:hardware dualscp-> switchover

WARNING: Switch over to the standby processor? (y or n): n

NOTEThis command also lets you switch manuallybetween two TCMs in an ASX-4000 switch.

NOTEWhen SVx call preservation is enabled and theswitchover command is executed, a warningmessage displays notifying you that the switchto the standby SCP may take longer than usualbecause the call connections have to besynchronized on the standby SCP. Refer tosystem modify in Chapter 4 of Part 3 of theAMI Configuration Commands Reference Manualfor more information on SVx call preservation.

5.3.4 hardware dualscp synchronizeTo ensure a reliable failover mechanism, the information contained on both SCPs should besynchronized. Synchronizing the FLASH between SCPs is requested manually by the user viaAMI. The CDB, LECS configuration, and switch software version can also be synchronizedbetween SCPs.


When the hardware dualscp modify -autoremove option is enabled, the switch deletesold copies of the OS if no space is available during the synchronization process. When the OSis being synchronized, that feature also deletes the CURRENT copy of the OS if that is the onlyfile that can be deleted to make room for the new OS.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

NOTEWhen synchronizing the FLASH, the controllingSCP first instructs the standby SCP to delete anyfiles in its FLASH that are not on the controllingSCP’s FLASH. This could remove older copies orthe CURRENT copy of the OS, if those versionsof the OS are not already present on thecontrolling SCPs FLASH.

To synchronize information between SCPs, enter the following:

myswitch:hardware dualscp-> synchronize

[-synchronize] <syncfile> Manual Sync Request



-synchronize <syncfile> To ensure a reliable failover mechanism, the information contained on both SCPs shouldbe synchronized. The following files may be synchronized:

• Flash indicates that all directories and files in FLASH on the controlling SCP will becopied to the standby SCP.

• CDB indicates that the Configuration Database (CDB) will be copied from thecontrolling to the standby SCP. The CDB is automatically synchronized at startup andwhenever a change is made to the CDB.

• LECS indicates that the LAN Emulation Configuration Services (LECS) configurationdatabase file will be copied from the controlling to the standby SCP.

• OS1 indicates the switch software will be copied from the controlling SCP to thestandby SCP.

• Securid indicates that the SecurID sdconf.rec configuration file will be copiedfrom the controlling SCP to the standby SCP. The SecurID file is automaticallysynchronized whenever a change is made to it.

• Secret indicates that the SecurID node secret file will be copied from thecontrolling SCP to the standby SCP.


• Init indicates that the FLASH on the standby SCP will be re-initialized.

• Loader indicates that the Mini Loader will be copied from the controlling to thestandby SCP.

• Krb5KeyTab indicates that the Kerberos v5srvtab file will be copied from thecontrolling SCP to the standby SCP.

1. Only the version of switch software to which CURRENT is pointing is copied to the standby SCP.

Hardware Commands

CAUTION Using the -synchronize init option formatsthe FLASH on the standby SCP. This removes allinformation from the FLASH.

NOTEWhen synchronizing the FLASH, the hardwaredualscp -autoremove setting must be set toenabled to replace a previously existing filelocated on the FLASH of the standby SCP. If thisaction is not done, the synchronization requestwill fail.

Once synchronization is complete, reset the standby SCP from the active SCP by entering thefollowing at the prompt:

myswitch:hardware dualscp-> modify -resetstandby enabled

Reset standby processor [n]? y

NOTEMake sure that the FLASH, CDB, LECSconfiguration file, Securid, Mini Loader, andswitch software have been synchronizedbetween SCPs before performing the reset.


Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.4 hardware fabric

This submenu lets you configure default values for the switch fabric. Type ? at the fabriclevel to display the available subcommands.

myswitch:hardware fabric-> ?

modify Set multicast space

outputbuffers Display outbuffer statistics

show Display board configuration

statistics Display fabric statistics

temperature Display fabric temperature state

thresholds Get/Set fabric alarm/trap temperature thresholds

traffic> The traffic directory

5.4.1 hardware fabric modifyThis command lets you configure the amount of multicast space on a switch fabric for anASX-4000 switch, an ESX-3000 switch, or a switch that contains Series E or Series LC networkmodules. This command dictates which memory model (under hardware netmod trafficpc1 models, hardware netmod traffic le models, hardware netmod traffic lcmodels, or hardware netmod traffic e models) can be used. If you change the multicastspace, the memory models are changed to a compatible model (i.e., a model with the namethat matches the mcastspace size) when the switch software is restarted. Enter the following:

myswitch:hardware fabric-> modify

Usage:

[-fabric] <board> Fabric

[[-mcastspace] <mcastSpace>] Multicast Space




-fabric <board> The number of the fabric for which the amount of multicast space is being configured. Onan ASX-4000 switch, an ASX-1200 switch, an ASX-1000 switch, or a TNX-1100 switch, thiscan be 1, 2, 3, or 4, with 1 being the leftmost of the fabric slots. On a ESX-3000 switch, thiscan be 1 or 2, with 1 being the lower fabric slot. On an ASX-200BX switch, or a TNX-210switch, this value is always 1.

-mcastspace <mcastSpace> The amount of multicast space that you want to use for this fabric. The mcast8K option isonly available on fabrics that contain only Series 1 OC-48c port cards. The default ismcast512 for all Series 1 port cards and for all Series E network modules. The default foran ESX-3000 fabric is mcast1K. Series LC and Series E network modules in the samefabric must support the same number of multicast connections. Other network modules inthe same fabric such as Series C and Series D do not need to have multicast space settingthat is compatible with Series LC and Series E.

Hardware Commands

5.4.2 hardware fabric outputbuffersYou can display output buffer statistics for all of the network modules in an individual switchfabric. The statistics on an ASX-200BX switch and TNX-210 switch are displayed as follows:

myswitch:hardware fabric-> outputbuffers

Destination PriorityName State BufferSize Q-Length ClpLoss/Overflows

1A ABR/UBR enabled 512 0 0

1A CBR/rtVBR/nrtVBR enabled 512 0 0

1B ABR/UBR enabled 512 0 0

1B CBR/rtVBR/nrtVBR enabled 512 0 0

The statistics on an ASX-1000 switch and TNX-1100 switch (with an SM-1100 fabric) aredisplayed as follows:





4C ABR/UBR disabled 0 0 0

4C CBR/rtVBR/nrtVBR disabled 0 0 0

4D ABR/UBR disabled 0 0 0

4D CBR/rtVBR/nrtVBR disabled 0 0 0

4CTL ABR/UBR enabled 4096 0 20009

4CTL CBR/rtVBR/nrtVBR enabled 4096 0 19765

The statistics on an ASX-1200 switch and TNX-1100 switch (with an SM-1100-B fabric) aredisplayed as follows:






1C ABR/UBR enabled 26832 0 0

1C CBR/rtVBR/nrtVBR enabled 26832 0 0

1D ABR/UBR enabled 26832 0 0

1D CBR/rtVBR/nrtVBR enabled 26832 0 0

1CTL ABR/UBR enabled 26832 0 10540

1CTL CBR/rtVBR/nrtVBR enabled 26832 0 10113

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

The statistics on an ESX-3000 switch are displayed as follows:



1 UCAST/UBR enabled 59552 0 0

1 MCAST/UBR enabled 3328 0 0

1 UCAST/nrtVBR enabled 59552 0 0

1 MCAST/nrtVBR enabled 3328 0 0

1 UCAST/ABR enabled 59552 0 0

1 MCAST/ABR enabled 3328 0 0

1 UCAST/CBR_rtVBR enabled 59552 0 0

1 MCAST/CBR_rtVBR enabled 3328 0 0


On an ASX-4000 switch, each port card is divided into two logical network modules (A and B orC and D). The output buffer statistics for the logical network modules on an ASX-4000 switchare displayed as follows:



1A UCAST/UBR enabled 119104 0 0

1A MCAST/UBR enabled 6656 0 0

1A UCAST/nrtVBR enabled 119104 0 0

1A MCAST/nrtVBR enabled 6656 0 0

1A UCAST/ABR enabled 119104 0 0

1A MCAST/ABR enabled 6656 0 0

1A UCAST/CBR_rtVBR enabled 119104 0 0

1A MCAST/CBR_rtVBR enabled 6656 0 0

1B UCAST/UBR enabled 119104 0 0

1B MCAST/UBR enabled 6656 0 0

1B UCAST/nrtVBR enabled 119104 0 0


1B MCAST/nrtVBR enabled 6656 0 0

1B UCAST/ABR enabled 119104 0 0

1B MCAST/ABR enabled 6656 0 0

1B UCAST/CBR_rtVBR enabled 119104 0 0

1B MCAST/CBR_rtVBR enabled 6656 0 0


Hardware Commands


Field Description

Destination The number of the output port.

PriorityName The name of the traffic priority for each queue.

• On an ASX-200BX switch and a TNX-210 switch, there are two queues. Onecorresponds to ABR/UBR traffic and one corresponds to CBR/VBR traffic.

• On an ASX-1000 switch, an ASX-1200 switch, and a TNX-1100 switch, there are fourqueues: one for each of the traffic types (UBR, VBR, ABR, and CBR).

• On an ASX-4000 switch and an ESX-3000 switch, there are 8 queues: one for each ofthe following traffic types: multicast UBR traffic, unicast UBR traffic, multicast VBRtraffic, unicast VBR traffic, multicast ABR traffic, unicast ABR traffic, multicast CBRtraffic, and unicast CBR traffic.

State Shows whether the buffer is enabled or disabled.

BufferSize The buffer size.

Q-Length The number of cells currently in this queue. For an ASX-1200 switch or a TNX-1100 switch(with an SM-1100-B fabric), this field only displays the size of the unicast queues.

CLP Loss The number of cells that were dropped for this port and priority due to the CLP (Cell LossPriority) threshold. This field only applies to an ASX-1200 switch, TNX-1100 switch (withan SM-1100-B fabric), ASX-4000 switch or ESX-3000 switch.

Overflows The number of overflows in this queue. This field does not display for an ASX-4000 switchor ESX-3000 switch.


Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.4.3 hardware fabric showThis command shows the current configuration of the switch fabric. Enter the followingparameters:

myswitch:hardware fabric-> show

Fabric Model Ver S/N NMs CtlPort Multicast

1 asx200bx B 9036 2 56 N/A

The following is displayed on an ESX-3000 switch:



1 esx3000 2 46 12 512 mcast1K

The following is displayed on an ASX-4000 switch:



1 asx4000 B 98460501 4 1024 mcast512


Field Description

Fabric The number of the slot in which the switch fabric is installed.

Model The type of switch this is.

Ver The manufacturing revision number.

S/N The serial number of this switch board.


NMs The number of network modules or port cards installed in this switch fabric.

CtlPort The number of the control port.

Multicast The multicast space configured for this switch fabric. This field only applies to anASX-4000 switch.

Hardware Commands

5.4.4 hardware fabric statisticsYou can display switch board statistics for all switch boards on an ASX-4000 switch byentering statistics at the fabric level as follows:

myswitch:hardware fabric-> statistics

Fabric Statistic Value

1 Overflows 0

1 UBR EPD/PPD Loss 0

1 VBR EPD/PPD Loss 0

1 ABR EPD/PPD Loss 0

1 CBR EPD/PPD Loss 0

3 Overflows 0





4 Overflows 0






Field Description

Fabric The board (switch fabric number).

Statistic Indicates what type of statistic is being displayed.

Value The number of cells that were lost due to overflow.


If this command is entered on a switch other than an ASX-4000 switch, the following isdisplayed:

myswitch:hardware fabric-> statistics

No fabric information available

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.4.5 hardware fabric temperatureThe current temperature and state values are displayed for all installed fabrics in an ASX-1000switch, ASX-1200 switch, or TNX-1100 switch only as follows:

myswitch:hardware fabric-> temperature

Index Deg C State

1 34 normal

3 37 norma


The following is displayed on all other platforms:

myswitch:hardware fabric-> temperature

No fabric temperature information available

Field Description

Index The number of the fabric currently installed in the switch. Switch fabric 1 (index 1) is inthe slot labeled 1 on the enclosure, switch fabric 2 is in the slot labeled 2 on the enclosure,etc.

Deg C The current temperature of the switch fabrics in degrees Celsius.

State Shows overTemp if an alarm has been tripped because of this sensor, based on the tripand reset values that have been configured. Shows normal if otherwise, or if the alarmhas reset.


Hardware Commands

5.4.6 hardware fabric thresholdsThis command allows you to set or display the thresholds at which a temperature alarm istripped and then later reset on an ASX-1000 switch, ASX-1200 switch, or TNX-1100 switch.Any temperature can cause the switch to display a state of normal or overTemp, dependingon the trip and reset thresholds that you have set. For example, a temperature of 55 oC showsa state of normal if the trip threshold was 60 oC and the switch fabric temperature neverreached 60 oC, but it would show a state of overTemp if the switch fabric temperature reached60 oC, and then had dropped to 55 oC, but had not yet reached a reset threshold set at 50 oC.

To modify the thresholds, enter the following:

myswitch:hardware fabric-> thresholds ?

[[-triptemp] <integer>] Trip Temperature

[[-resettemp] <integer>] Reset Temperature

To display the configured thresholds, enter the following:

myswitch:hardware fabric-> thresholds

Trip Threshold: 65

Reset Threshold: 60




-triptemp <integer> The temperature in oC at which an overtemperature alarm trips. The default is 65 oC.

-resettemp <integer> The temperature in oC at which an overtemperature alarm is reset. The default is 60 oC.


myswitch:hardware fabric-> thresholds

This switch does not support fabric temperature thresholds

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.4.7 hardware fabric trafficForeThought 6.0 and greater supports early packet discard (EPD) and partial packet discard(PPD) for ASX-4000 switch fabrics. The modify command under hardware fabrictraffic allows you to configure the EPD threshold. EPD is used to avoid unwantedcongestion in packet traffic. If the amount of the buffer space consumed at an outgoing portexceeds a threshold, EPD discards new packets while packets already partially transmittedremain unaffected.

When an AAL5 packet arrives after the EPD threshold has been exceeded, then the first cell ofthe packet is dropped by EPD. The remaining cells are dropped by PPD actions. PPD is notconfigured, but occurs because of EPD cell drop.

The commands listed under the traffic menu let you configure the EPD threshold on anASX-4000 fabric. Type ? at the traffic level to display the list of available subcommands.

myswitch:hardware fabric traffic-> ?

modify Set the fabric traffic management configuration

show Display fabric traffic management information

NOTEEPD/PPD is disabled when establishing aconnection to the control port.

NOTEThese commands are valid only on an ASX-4000switch.

The EPD/PPD setting for all the VCCs on the fabric is off by default in FT 5.3.x as it was notsupported in that release. VCCs can be configured as: AAL5 or non AAL5. Connection


preservation, which was first supported in ForeThought 5.3.0, can also have two states: enabledor disabled. For more information about connection preservation, see Chapter 4 in Part 3 ofthis manual.

The following scenarios can occur regarding connection preservation and EPD/PPD whenupgrading from 5.3.x to 6.1.x:

• In 5.3.x, if connection preservation is disabled and AAL5 is off = Connection istorn down.

• In 5.3.x, if connection preservation is disabled and AAL5 is on (This instance mayoccur if the switch was running 6.0 with AAL5, downgraded to 5.3.x, and thenupgraded back to 6.0.) = Connection is torn down.

Hardware Commands

• In 5.3.x, if connection preservation is enabled and AAL5 off = Connection ispreserved.

• In 5.3.x, if connection preservation is enabled and AAL5 on = Connection state ismodified without tearing down the connection. In this case, if any cells are lostdue to EPD/PPD, they will not be accounted for since the 5.3.x does not supportEPD/PPD. You may want to disable connection preservation before performing adowngrade or leave connection preservation enabled, delete and recreate all VCsthat have EPD/PPD enabled, one at a time.

5.4.7.1 hardware fabric traffic modifyThis command lets you configure the EPD threshold on an ASX-4000 switch. EPD can beapplied on a per-AAL5 VC, per-priority basis. Enter the following parameters:

myswitch:hardware fabric traffic-> modify

Usage:

[-fabric] <board> Fabric

[-priority] <fabric priority> Priority

[-feature] <traffic_feature> Feature

[[-value] <percent>] Value

The parameters in the display are defined as follows:

Field Description

-fabric <board> The number of the slot in which the switch fabric is installed.

-priority <fabric priority> The type of traffic to which EPD applies.

-feature <traffic_feature> The traffic feature that is to be modified.

-value <percent> The EPD threshold of shared memory as a percentage. The designated buffer discardstraffic once the threshold has been surpassed. OFF sets the threshold to 100 percent of theshared space for all priorities. DEFAULT sets the threshold to 90 percent of the sharedspace for all priorities.


Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.4.7.2 hardware fabric traffic showThis command lets you display EPD configuration information for an ASX-4000 switch. Enterthe following:

myswitch:hardware fabric traffic-> show

Fabric Priority Feature Value

1 UBR epd 90%

1 nrtVBR epd 90%

1 ABR epd 90%

1 CBR_rtVBR epd 90%

3 UBR epd 90%

3 nrtVBR epd 90%

3 ABR epd 90%

3 CBR_rtVBR epd 90%



myswitch:hardware fabric traffic-> show

Fabric traffic management not supported on this platform

Field Description

Fabric The number of the slot in which the switch fabric is installed.

Priority The traffic type to which the feature applies

Feature The traffic feature.

Value The EPD threshold of shared memory as a percentage. The designated buffer discardstraffic once the threshold has been surpassed. OFF sets the threshold to 100 percent of theshared space for all priorities. DEFAULT sets the threshold to 90 percent of the sharedspace for all priorities.


Hardware Commands

5.5 hardware fans

This command enables you to display information about the fans on an ASX-1000 switch,ASX-1200 switch, TNX-1100 switch, ESX-3000 switch, or an ASX-4000 switch. The followingis displayed:

myswitch:hardware-> fans

FanBank State SerialNumber Type Revision

1 normal N/A N/A N/A






myswitch:hardware-> fans

No fan bank information available

Field Description

FanBank On an ASX-1000 switch, ASX-1200 switch, or TNX-1100 switch, this field corresponds to asingle fan, indicating the number of the fan. On an ASX-4000 switch, this fieldcorresponds to a fan tray. 1 indicates the upper fan tray and 2 indicates the lower fan tray.

State The current state of the fan. If the fan is functioning properly, it reads normal. If the fanhas malfunctioned, it reads failed.

Serial Number The serial number of the fan tray. This field only applies to an ASX-4000 switch.

Type The type of fan tray installed. This field only applies to an ASX-4000 switch.

Revision The hardware revision number of the fan tray. This field only applies to an ASX-4000.


Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.6 hardware inputlookuperrors

You can display version information about the HDCOMP ASIC on an individual switch fabricand display the input lookup error statistics as follows:

myswitch:hardware-> inputlookuperrors

HDCOMP Version VPI-Lookup-Errors VCI-Lookup-Errors

1 1 32748 13

Something similar to the following is displayed on an ESX-3000 switch:



1 1 32748 13

5 1 22765 10

Something similar to the following is displayed on an ASX-4000 switch:



1A 1 15091 8

1B 1 12298 15

2C 1 11092 9

2D 1 10943 11


Field Description

HDCOMP The number of the slot in which the board (switch fabric) is installed.


Version1

1. The HDCOMP ASIC must be version 1 or greater to support the AAL5 partial packet policing command underinterfaces atmif modify -pppcbr, -pppnrtvbr, and -pppnrtvbr and to support changing the clockscaleunder system modify -clockscalingfactor.

The version number of the HDCOMP ASIC on this switch board.

VPI-Lookup-Errors The number of cells that do not match any VPI lookup tables. On an ASX-4000 switch andESX-3000 switch, this number reflects the aggregate of all of the port cards (networkmodules) in the switch.

VCI-Lookup-Errors The number of cells that do not match any VCI lookup tables. On an ASX-4000 switch andESX-3000 switch, this number reflects the aggregate of all of the port cards (networkmodules) in the switch.

Hardware Commands

5.7 hardware netmod

These commands let you configure the network modules in your switch fabric. The list ofavailable subcommands is displayed by typing ? at the netmod level.

myswitch:hardware netmod-> ?


application> The application directory

fram> The fram directory

modify Set netmod admin status to up/down

reset Reset Netmod Hardware

show Display netmod configuration

test> The test directory


NOTEThe fram> commands are not available on anESX-3000 switch nor on an ASX-4000 switch.

The following menu is displayed on an ASX-4000 switch:

myswitch:hardware netmod-> ?


application> The application directory

modify Set netmod admin status to up/down

panic> The panic directory

reset Reset Netmod Hardware

reset_pair Reset the netmod and its partner.


show Display netmod configuration

test> The test directory


NOTEThe panic> and reset_pair commands areonly available on an ASX-4000 switch.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.7.1 hardware netmod alarmsThese commands, used in conjunction with the system alarm modify command, allow youto configure alarms that notify you of the physical removal of a network module or a port cardfrom a particular slot in the switch fabric. You can display the list of available subcommandsby typing ? at the alarms level.

myswitch:hardware netmod alarms-> ?

modify Modify the priority

show Display netmod alarms

5.7.1.1 hardware netmod alarms modifyThis command lets you configure priorities for the alarms on an individual network modulein a switch fabric. These alarms alert you when a network module has been removed from theswitch fabric.

On an ASX-4000 switch and an ESX-3000 switch, the network module slots are physicallylabeled as 1A/B, 1C/D, etc. for each port card. Each port card contains two logical networkmodules. On an ASX-4000 switch and an ESX-3000 switch, these alarms alert you when a portcard has been removed from those slots. Enter the following:

myswitch:hardware netmod alarms-> modify

Usage:

[-netmod] <Netmod> Netmod

[[-priority] <alarm_priority>] Priority



-netmod <Netmod> The netmod on which you want to configure an alarm priority.


-priority <alarm_priority> The priority you want to assign to the netmod or port card. Each netmod or port card maybe assigned a different priority: high, low, or none. high means that thenetmodRemovedHighPrio alarm is activated when a network module or port card isremoved from that slot. low means that the netmodRemovedLowPrio alarm is activatedwhen a network module or port card is removed from that slot. none means that no alarmis activated when a network module or port card is removed from that slot. The default isnone.

Hardware Commands

5.7.1.2 hardware netmod alarms showThis command lets you display the current configuration of the network module alarms. Enterthe following parameters:

myswitch:hardware netmod alarms-> show

Netmod Priority Status

1A none present

1B none present

1C none present

1D none present




1A none absent

1B none absent

1C none absent

1D none absent

2A none present

2B none present

2C none absent

2D none absent




1A none absent

1B none absent


1C none absent

1D none absent

2A none absent

2B none absent

2C none absent

2D none absent


Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands


Field Description

Netmod The network module or port card slot in the switch fabric.

Priority The priority assigned to this slot. Can be none, high, or low.

• high means that the netmodRemovedHighPrio alarm is activated when a networkmodule or port card is removed from that slot.

• low means that the netmodRemovedLowPrio alarm is activated when a networkmodule or port card is removed from that slot.

• none means that no alarm is activated when a network module or port card isremoved from that slot. The default is none.

Status Shows present or absent depending on whether or not a network module or port cardis currently installed in that slot.


Hardware Commands

5.7.2 hardware netmod applicationThese commands let you upgrade or display information about the application software on aFramePlus network module, an IMA network module, or a Frame-based ATM over SONET/SDH / Packet over SONET/SDH (FAST/POS) port card for the ASX-4000 switch. The list ofavailable subcommands is displayed by typing ? at the application level.

myswitch:hardware netmod application-> ?

modify Modify application module entries

show Display application module configuration

upgrade Upgrade the software on a netmod

5.7.2.1 hardware netmod application modifyThis command lets you configure what action to take if the on-board processor fails on anIMA network module. Enter the following:

myswitch:hardware netmod application-> modify

Usage:

[-index] <AppBN> Index

[[-action] <action_type>] Panic Action



-index <AppBN> The board number of the IMA module you want to configure; e.g., 1A.

-action <action_type> The action to take upon a panic of an IMA network module’s on-board processor:

• reset - the IMA network module automatically resets upon experiencing a panic.This is the default action.

• suspend - the network module hangs in a suspended state upon experiencing a panic.


NOTEIt is highly recommended that you only use thesuspend mode for diagnostic purposes. Ifsuspend is the configured mode and thenetwork module’s processor panics, the networkmodule hangs until the user manually resets it.No automatic reset will occur.

This command does not apply to the FramePlusnetwork modules.

There is no panic record logged. This allows a way to perform debugging.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.7.2.2 hardware netmod application showThis command lets you display information about the application software on a FramePlus orIMA network module. Enter the following:

myswitch:hardware netmod application-> show

Netmod Application LED State Status

4B ima off up Netmod Up & Running

4C FRATM_SERVICE_APPL off up Netmod Up & Running

4D FRAM_FUNI_APPL off up Netmod Up & Running


The following is displayed for the POS application software on a FAST/POS port card for theASX-4000 switch. Enter the following:

myswitch:hardware netmod application-> show

Expected Version: ForeThought_POS_1.1.0 Development (1.64125)

Flash Version: ForeThought_POS_1.1.0 Development (1.64125)

Compatibility: Compatible version (same version)

Field Description

Netmod The board number of the FramePlus or IMA module that has been configured.

Application The current application that is running on this network module. DisplaysFRATM_SERVICE_APPL for Frame Relay running service interworking (FRF8),FRATM_NETWORK_APPL for Frame Relay running network interworking (FRF5),FRAM_FUNI_APPL for FUNI, or ima for IMA.

LED The current color of the out-of-service (OOS) LED on the network module. off means themodule is in-service. red means the module is out-of-service.

State The current operational state of the network module. Can be one of the following:notConfigured, hwinitInProgress, up, shutDownInProgress, down, or failed.

Status The detailed reason that the network module is in its current state. This field can help introubleshooting a problem.


File Location: FT7.1/POSOC312.EXE


Field Description

Expected Version The version of the FAST/POS port card software expected by the SCP software.

Flash Version The version of the FAST/POS port card software stored in the FLASH.

Compatibility The degree of compatibility between the expected and FLASH version.

File Location The location of the POS application software.

Hardware Commands

5.7.2.2.1 hardware netmod application show -appversion

This command lets you display which version of application software is running on aFramePlus or IMA network module. Enter the following:

myswitch:hardware netmod application-> show -appversion

Netmod AppVersion

4B N_IMA_ForeThought_03.00.00 FCS (1.54337)

4C 2.0.0

4D N_FR_ForeThought_2.0.00 FCS (1.50652)


5.7.2.2.2 hardware netmod application show -bootversion

This command lets you display which version of software is running on the boot PROM on aFramePlus or IMA network module. Enter the following:

myswitch:hardware netmod application-> show -bootversion

Netmod BootVersion

4B 1.1

4C 1.0.0

4D 1.2.1


Field Description

Netmod The board number of the FramePlus or IMA module.

AppVersion The embedded software release that is currently running on this network module. If aFramePlus network module is running BOOT PROM version 1.0.0, then the embeddedsoftware version simply displays a number; e.g., 1.4.0, rather than a string.


Field Description

Netmod The board number of the FramePlus or IMA module that has been configured.

BootVersion The version of software running on the boot PROM on this network module.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.7.2.2.3 hardware netmod application show -panicaction

This command lets you display what action is taken if the on-board processor fails on an IMAnetwork module. Enter the following:

myswitch:hardware netmod application-> show -panicaction

Netmod PanicAction

4B reset

4C N/A

4D N/A


Field Description

Netmod The board number of the IMA module that has been configured.

PanicAction The action to take upon a panic of the on-board processor:

• reset - the network module automatically resets upon experiencing a panic and apanic record is logged. This is the default action.

• suspend - the network module hangs in a suspended state upon experiencing a panic.There is no panic record logged. This allows a way to perform debugging. It alsoprovides a way to avoid the teardown of PVCs. PVCs are preserved so you can choosea more convenient time for resetting the network module.

This field displays N/A for FramePlus network modules. They have a default panic actionto reset.


Hardware Commands

5.7.2.3 hardware netmod application upgradeThis command lets you upgrade the software on a FramePlus or IMA network module, or on aFrame-based ATM over SONET/SDH / Packet over SONET/SDH (FAST/POS) port card forthe ASX-4000 switch.

• For more information about FramePlus network modules, see Appendix D in theMultiservice Broadband Switch Network Configuration Manual.

• For more information about IMA network modules, see Appendix F in the Multi-service Broadband Switch Network Configuration Manual.

• For more information about upgrading application software on FAST/POS portcards, see Appendix G in the ASX-4000 Switch Installation and Maintenance Manual.

The following command is displayed for a FramePlus or IMA network module:

myswitch:hardware netmod application-> upgrade

Usage:

[-netmod] <Netmod> Netmod to upgrade

[-url] <URL> URL of form [(ftp|tftp)://]<host>/<full filepath>

The following command is displayed for a FAST/POS port card:

myswitch:hardware netmod application-> upgrade

Usage:

[-url] <URL> URL of form [(ftp|tftp)://]<host>/<full filepath>

NOTEThe appropriate version of the port cardapplication software is installed automaticallyfor all of the FAST/POS port cards in a switchwhen the ForeThought switch software isupgraded on the switch SCPs. Therefore, it isgenerally not necessary to use this command for


FAST/POS port cards.



-netmod <Netmod> The FramePlus or IMA network module on which you want to upgrade the software.

-url <URL> The upgrade information:

• ftp or tftp - the protocol used for the upgrade

• host - the IP address of the remote host on which the upgrade file resides

• full filepath - the full path name of the upgrade file

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

NOTEAll of the FramePlus or IMA network modulesmust be running a software application versionwhich is compatible to the software running onthe switch SCP(s). If the FramePlus or IMAnetwork modules and the switch SCP(s) are notrunning corresponding releases, the protocols areincompatible and an error message results. Pleasesee the following web sites for hardware andsoftware compatibility matrices for these servicenetwork modules:

http://www.marconi.com/html/solutions/marconiatmswitchhardcompatmatrix.htmorhttp://www.marconi.com/html/solutions/ForeThoughtSoftwareCompatibilityMatrix.htm

NOTEYou should upgrade the software on the switchSCPs before upgrading the application softwareon the FramePlus or IMA network modules.


Hardware Commands

5.7.3 hardware netmod framThese commands let you configure or display information about FramePlus network modules.The list of available subcommands is displayed by typing ? at the fram level.

myswitch:hardware netmod fram-> ?

modify Modify FRAM Netmod Configuration

show Show FRAM Netmods

5.7.3.1 hardware netmod fram modifyThis command lets you configure FramePlus network modules. Enter the following:

myswitch:hardware netmod fram-> modify

Usage:

[-module] <Netmod> Netmod

[[-epdppdbufferproportion] <epdppdbufferproportion>]

Epd Ppd Buffer Proportion

[[-epdclp1highprio] (25|37|50|62)] Epdclp1 High Prio

[[-epdclp0highprio] (50|62|75|87)] Epdclp0 High Prio

[[-ppdclp1highprio] (50|62|75|87)] Ppdclp1 High Prio

[[-epdclp1lowprio] (25|37|50|62)] Epdclp1 Low Prio

[[-epdclp0lowprio] (50|62|75|87)] Epdclp0 Low Prio

[[-ppdclp1lowprio] (50|62|75|87)] Ppdclp1 Low Prio

[[-oamf5supervision] (enabled|disabled)] Oam F5 Supervision

[[-oamf5aisrxperiod] (1|2|3|4|5)] Oam F5 AISRX Period (s)

[[-oamf5aistxperiod] (1|2|3|4|5)] Oam F5 AISTX period (s)

[[-oamf5rdirxperiod] (1|2|3|4|5)] Oam F5 RDIRX period (s)

[[-oamf5rditxperiod] (1|2|3|4|5)] Oam F5 RDITX period (s)

[[-application] <application>] Application

[[-statsmonitor] (enabled|disabled)] Stats Monitor


Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

NOTEIf you manually admin a network module downprior to the change (using hardware netmodmodify -admin down), you must manuallyadmin it up after the change (using hardwarenetmod modify -admin up). However, if youmodify a parameter while the network module isin the admin up state, the software automaticallyadmins it down, makes the change, and thenadmins it back up without any additional userintervention.



-module <Netmod> The FramePlus network module that is to be configured.

-epdppdbufferproportion<epdppdbufferproportion>

The model for partitioning the buffer between the two (EPD and PPD) priorities:

• highzero - The high priority buffer will have 0 cells and the low priority buffer willhave 32,768 cells. (This implies that the epdclp1highprio, epdclp0highprio, andppdclp1highprio options will have no meaning if they are used.) This is thedefault.

• high1quarter - The high priority buffer will have 8,192 cells and the low priority bufferwill have 24,576 cells.

• high2quarter - The high priority buffer will have 16,384 cells and the low prioritybuffer will have 16,384 cells.

• high3quarter - The high priority buffer will have 24,576 cells and the low prioritybuffer will have 8,192 cells. See Appendix D in the Multiservice Broadband SwitchNetwork Configuration Manual for more information about setting this value.

-epdclp1highprio1

(25|37|50|62)The threshold for CLP1EPD, in percentage of the available size, for the high priorityqueue buffer. The default value is 37%. EPD discards packets once this CLP=1 thresholdhas been surpassed. See Appendix D in the Multiservice Broadband Switch NetworkConfiguration Manual for more information about setting this value.

-epdclp0highprio The threshold for CLP0EPD, in percentage of the available size, for the high priority


(50|62|75|87) queue buffer. The default value is 62%. EPD discards packets once this CLP=0 thresholdhas been surpassed. See Appendix D in the Multiservice Broadband Switch NetworkConfiguration Manual for more information about setting this value.

-ppdclp1highprio(50|62|75|87)

The threshold for CLP1PPD, in percentage of the available size, for the high priority queuebuffer. The default value is 50%. PPD discards cells once this CLP=1 threshold has beensurpassed.

-epdclp1lowprio(25|37|50|62)

The threshold for CLP1EPD, in percentage of the available size, for the low priority queuebuffer. The default value is 37%. EPD discards packets once this CLP=1 threshold has beensurpassed. See Appendix D in the Multiservice Broadband Switch Network ConfigurationManual for more information about setting this value.

Hardware Commands

-epdclp0lowprio(50|62|75|87)

The threshold for CLP0EPD, in percentage of the available size, for the low priority queuebuffer. The default value is 62%. EPD discards packets once this CLP=0 threshold has beensurpassed. See Appendix D in the Multiservice Broadband Switch Network ConfigurationManual for more information about setting this value.

-ppdclp1lowprio(50|62|75|87)

The threshold for CLP1PPD, in percentage of the available size, for the low priority queuebuffer. The default value is 50%. PPD discards cells once this CLP=1 threshold has beensurpassed.

-oamf5supervision2

(enabled|disabled)enabled indicates that OAM F5 (path) cells will be generated on the specified FramePlusnetwork module. disabled indicates that OAM F5 (path) cells will not be generated onthe specified FramePlus network module. The default is enabled.

-oamf5aisrxperiod(1|2|3|4|5)

Time interval, in seconds, at which an AIS OAM cell is to be received. The default is 3.

-oamf5aistxperiod(1|2|3|4|5)

Time interval, in seconds, at which an AIS OAM cell is to be transmitted. The default is 1.

-oamf5rdirxperiod(1|2|3|4|5)

Time interval, in seconds, at which an RDI OAM cell is to be received. The default is 3.

-oamf5rditxperiod(1|2|3|4|5)

Time interval, in seconds, at which an RDI OAM cell is to be transmitted. The default is 1.

-application <application> The application to be used on this FramePlus network module: FRATM_SERVICE_APPL(Frame Relay service interworking), FRATM_NETWORK_APPL (Frame Relay networkinterworking), or FRAM_FUNI_APPL (FUNI). FramePlus network modules run FrameRelay service interworking by default. You can look at the Appln field under hardwarenetmod application show to see which application is currently running.

The application should be changed only if you want to reconfigure the network module torun a different application. When you change the application, the switch deletes allexisting services and PVCs that use a different application, and removes them from theCDB.

-statsmonitor(enabled|disabled)

enabled means statistics are collected on the designated FramePlus network module. Thedefault is enabled.

disabled means statistics are not collected on the designated FramePlus network module.When statistics are disabled, the counters display N/A.



1. There are CLP0PPD high and low thresholds that are automatically set for you as 87.5% of the buffer size and cannot bechanged. (They are not displayed in AMI, but you need to know these values because the other thresholds arecalculated on the remaining buffer size.)

2. This parameter only affects Frame Relay service on a FramePlus network module. It does not have any effect when theFUNI application is being used.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

NOTEIf you modify any of the-epdppdbufferproportion,-epdclp0highprio, -ppdclp1highprio,-epdclp1lowprio, -epdclp0lowprio, or-ppdclp1lowprio parameters, then the buffercalculations are displayed.

NOTETo propagate OAM error information from theATM side to the Frame Relay side you need toenable three parameters:

• Enable -oamf5supervision underhardware netmod fram modify (this isenabled by default).

• Enable -aisrdi under interfaces atmifmodify (this is not enabled by default).

• Enable -atmlayeroam under systemmodify (this is not enabled by default).


Hardware Commands

5.7.3.2 hardware netmod fram showThis command lets you display information about FramePlus network modules as follows:

myswitch:hardware netmod fram-> show

Stats Oam

Netmod Monitor Monitor Application ProductNumber

4C enabled enabled FRATM_SERVICE_APPL NMFR-4/DS1A

4D enabled enabled FRATM_SERVICE_APPL NMFR-4/E1A


5.7.3.2.1 hardware netmod fram show -advanced

This command lets you display advanced information about the configuration of a FramePlusnetwork module. Enter the following:

myswitch:hardware netmod fram-> show -advanced

PPD Buffer Clp0Epd Clp1Ppd Clp1Epd rx tx rx tx

Netmod Proportion high low high low high low (s) (s) (s) (s)

4C highzero N/A 62 N/A 50 N/A 37 3 1 3 1

4D highzero N/A 62 N/A 50 N/A 37 3 1 3 1

Field Description

Netmod The FramePlus network module that has been configured.

Stats Monitor Shows if statistics collection is enabled (on) or disabled (off) for this FramePlus networkmodule.

Oam Monitor Shows if OAM F5 cell generation is enabled (on) or disabled (off) for this FramePlusnetwork module.

Application Shows the application type that has been configured for this FramePlus network module.

Product Number The Marconi product number for this module.


Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands


Field Description

Netmod The FramePlus network module that has been configured.

PPD Buffer Proportion The configured model for partitioning the cell buffer between the two (EPD and PPD)priorities:

• highzero - The high priority buffer has 0 cells and the low priority buffer has 32,768cells. (This implies that the epdclp1highprio, epdclp0highprio, andppdclp1highprio options have no meaning if they are used.) This is the defaultvalue.

• high1quarter - The high priority buffer has 8,192 cells and the low priority buffer has24,576 cells.



Clp0Epd high The CLP0EPD threshold for the high priority buffer, in percentage of the available size.The default value is 62%. EPD discards packets once this CLP=0 threshold has beensurpassed.

Clp0Epd low The CLP0EPD threshold for the low priority buffer, in percentage of the available size. Thedefault value is 62%. EPD discards packets once this CLP=0 threshold has been surpassed.

Clp1Ppd high The CLP1PPD threshold for the high priority buffer, in percentage of the available size.The default value is 50%. PPD discards cells once this CLP=1 threshold has beensurpassed.

Clp1Ppd low The CLP1PPD threshold for the low priority buffer, in percentage of the available size. Thedefault value is 50%. PPD discards cells once this CLP=1 threshold has been surpassed.

Clp1Epd high The CLP1EPD threshold for the high priority buffer, in percentage of the available size.The default value is 37%. EPD discards packets once this CLP=1 threshold has beensurpassed.

Clp1Epd low The CLP1EPD threshold for the low priority buffer, in percentage of the available size. Thedefault value is 37%. EPD discards packets once this CLP=1 threshold has been surpassed.

AIS rx The time interval, in seconds, at which an AIS OAM cell is to be received.


NOTEThere is a CLP0PPD threshold that is set bydefault as 87.5% of the buffer size and cannot bechanged. (It is not displayed.)

AIS tx The time interval, in seconds, at which an AIS OAM cell is to be transmitted.

RDI rx The time interval, in seconds, at which an RDI OAM cell is to be received.

RDI tx The time interval, in seconds, at which an RDI OAM cell is to be transmitted.

Hardware Commands

5.7.4 hardware netmod modifyThis command allows you to change the state of a network module up or down. Thiscommand should only be used when you want to test the network module. Enter the follow-ing parameters:

myswitch:hardware netmod-> modify

Usage:


[[-admin] <admin_type>] Admin State


NOTEThis command has no effect on CircuitEmulation Services (CES) DS1 and E1 networkmodules. You can only administer the individualports on a CES module up or down using thehardware port modify -adminstatuscommand.

NOTEWhen a network module is administered down,no configuration changes can be made under theredundancy menu or under the interfacesmenu, except for interfaces ima group,


-module <Netmod> The network module that is to be started or stopped.

-admin <admin_type> up brings that network module back on-line. down causes the designated network moduleto be be taken off-line temporarily so that it can be tested.


interfaces ima link, and interfaces if.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.7.5 hardware netmod panicThese commands allow you to view or clear any panic traces on the module control processor(MCP) and to set the action to be taken when the MCP panics on a logical network module ona FAST/POS port card on an ASX-4000 switch. Enter the following:

myswitch:hardware netmod panic-> ?

action> The action directory

clear Clear panic trace

save Save netmod panic information

show Netmod panic trace

5.7.5.1 hardware netmod panic actionThis command lets you set or view the course of action that the MCP on a FAST/POS portcard on an ASX-4000 switch takes upon experiencing a panic condition. Enter the following:

myswitch:hardware netmod panic action-> ?

modify This determines the Netmod action on a panic

show Netmod action on a panic

5.7.5.1.1 hardware netmod panic action modifyThis command allows you to set the course of action that the MCP on a FAST/POS port cardon an ASX-4000 switch takes upon experiencing a panic condition. Enter the following:myswitch:hardware netmod panic action-> modify

Usage:


[[-panicAction] <reset/suspend>] Action - Suspend/Reset



-netmod <Netmod> The network module on a FAST/POS port card on which you want to set the action for theMCP to take upon experiencing a panic condition.


NOTE

M It is highly recommended that you only use thesuspend mode for diagnostic purposes. Ifsuspend is the configured mode and the MCPpanics, the MCP hangs until the user manuallyresets the MCP. No automatic reset will occur.

-panicAction<reset/suspend>

• reset means that the MCP will automatically reset upon experiencing a panic. Apanic record is logged. This is the default action.

• suspend means that the MCP will hang in a suspended state upon experiencing apanic. There is no panic record logged. This allows a way to perform debugging. Italso provides a way to avoid the teardown of PVCs. PVCs are preserved so that youcan choose a more convenient time for resetting the MCP.

Hardware Commands

5.7.5.1.2 hardware netmod panic action show

To display course of action that the MCP on a FAST/POS port card on an ASX-4000 switchtakes upon experiencing a panic condition, enter the following:

myswitch:hardware netmod panic action-> show

Current panic action is to reset.

5.7.5.2 hardware netmod panic clearThis command lets you clear the panic acknowledgment flag without viewing the contents ofthe panic dump file. Once the flag is cleared, you may return to normal operation of theswitch.

NOTEDo not clear a panic condition until after youhave performed the following three steps.

1. Use the hardware netmod panic save command in AMI to transfer the panicfile to a remote host.

2. Send the panic file via e-mail to Marconi’s TAC along with a description of theevents leading up to the panic. Ask the TAC staff to open a case for you based onthat information. Once you have sent them the information, you may clear thepanic record.

Enter the following parameters to clear a panic record:

myswitch:hardware netmod panic-> clear





-netmod <Netmod> The network module on which you want to clear the panic condition.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.7.5.3 hardware netmod panic saveThis command lets you save the contents of the panic dump file on a FAST/POS port card onan ASX-4000 switch. The dump file contains information about what happened to the MCPwhen it panicked. Enter the following:

myswitch:hardware netmod panic-> save

Usage:


[-url] <URL> URL of form [(ftp|tftp)://<host>/]<filepath>


5.7.5.4 hardware netmod panic showThis command lets you view the contents of the panic dump file on a FAST/POS port card onan ASX-4000 switch as follows:

myswitch:hardware netmod panic-> show

Panic trace from netmod 2C

CDA Version: ForeThought_OC3/OC12_POS_1.1.0 FCS (1.72820)

Task Id is 0x3c0fcac and name is Runtime

Data Abort

Current Processor Status Register: 0x80000013

r0=0xe59ff0f4 r1=0xe5a0d693 r2=0x3b9b5d8 r3=0x3b9b964


-netmod <Netmod> The network module for which you want to save the panic file.

[-url] <URL> This command lets you directly transfer the contents of the panic dump file to a remotehost. The URL includes the IP address and path name of the remote host.


PC 0x000483d4 _painGetNextLayer

0x0006f04c _PainConnHandlerCB

0x000473a0 _CpCleanup

0x000626b0 _CyanideRxPacketHandler

0x00073ee4 _Runtime

0x0008aa74 _vxTaskEntry

If no panic condition has occurred on this network module since it was last reset, the follow-ing message is displayed:

Panic trace from netmod 3A

No panic trace Found

Hardware Commands

5.7.6 hardware netmod resetThis command is the software equivalent of removing and immediately re-inserting anetwork module while the switch is powered on. This command lets you reset the connectionson a given network module without having physical access to the switch. Enter the following:

myswitch:hardware netmod-> reset

Usage:



NOTEAll SVCs associated with this network moduleare torn down upon a reset and attempt toreconnect as needed.

If connection preservation is enabled (systemmodify -connectionpreservationenabled, all PVCs associated with this networkmodule are left intact.

If connection preservation is disabled, all PVCsassociated with this network module are torndown and set up again upon a reset. Dependingon the number of PVCs configured and the typeof processor in your switch, it may take a shorttime for all of the PVCs to be re-established aftera reset.


-netmod <Netmod> The network module that you want to reset.


For example, if you want to reset network module 3B, enter the following:

myswitch:hardware netmod-> reset 3b

The switch then cautions you that all connections will be torn down. To abort the reset, type nor press <ENTER>. To continue with the reset, type y.

Resetting the network module will destroy the

existing connections temporarily.

Reset the network module [n]? y

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.7.7 hardware netmod reset_pairThis command lets you protect a given logical network module or port card on an ASX-4000switch. Enter the following:

myswitch:hardware netmod-> reset_pair

Usage:




-module <Netmod> The logical network module or port card on an ASX-4000 switch that you want to protect.


Hardware Commands

5.7.8 hardware netmod showThis command displays general information about network modules or port cards that arecurrently installed in a fabric. Something similar to the following is displayed:

myswitch:hardware netmod-> show

Netmod Series Admin Speed Ports Timing Rev. S/N ProductNumber

4A D up 45.0M 4 yes 1 97090002 NM-4/DS3D

4B C up 155.0M 4 no 1.0 N/A NM-4/155UTP5C

4C D up 155.0M 4 yes B 82401086 NM-4/155MMSCD

4D C up 1.544M 2 yes 2.0 N/A NM-2/DS1C

4E B up 2560.0M 4 no 1.0 N/A NM-4/BPB


Field Description

Netmod Shows each network module or port card currently installed in the switch fabric. 1 meansthat it is the switch fabric in slot 1. The letter shows the position of the network module orport card in the switch fabric. E is the intra-fabric port to the other switch fabrics in anASX-1000 chassis, ASX-1200 chassis, or a TNX-1100 chassis.

Series The hardware series of the network module or port card. C is a Series C network module.LC is a Series LC network module. C2 is a circuit emulation services (CES) module or aFramePlus network module. LE is an interface group on an ESX-3000 switch. PC1 is aSeries 1 logical network module on a port card in an ASX-4000 switch. D is a Series Dnetwork module. E is a Series E network module. SF1 is special fabric Series 1, which isthe logical network module for the OC-48c fabric for an ASX-1200 switch, or for aTNX-1100 switch with SM-1100-B fabrics.

Admin up means this network module or port card is enabled.

down means this network module or port card is disabled.

Speed The speed in Mbps of the ports.

Ports The number of ports on the network module or port card.


Timing yes means this network module or port card supports distributed timing and no means itdoes not.

Rev. The hardware revision level of this network module or port card.

S/N1

1. This field is not available for some older versions of network modules.

The serial number of this network module or port card.

ProductNumber The Marconi product number for this module or port card. NM is network module, CE iscircuit emulation, FR is FramePlus, IMA is Inverse multiplexing over ATM (IMA), PC isport card, BPB is the ASX-1000 switch, ASX-1200 switch, or TNX-1100 switch intra-fabricmodule.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.7.8.1 hardware netmod show -advancedYou can display advanced information about the configuration of a network module or portcard as follows:

myswitch:hardware netmod-> show -advanced

Netmod Series Uptime CLEI

4A D 20:24 N/A

4B C 20:24 N/A

4C C 20:24 N/A

4D C 20:24 N/A

4E B 20:24 N/A


Field Description

Netmod Shows each network module or port card currently installed in the switch fabric.

Series The hardware series of the network module or port card.

Uptime Shows the amount of time in hours and seconds since this network module or port cardwas last reset.

CLEI The Common Language Equipment Identification (CLEI) of this network module or portcard.


Hardware Commands

5.7.9 hardware netmod testThis command lets you perform various shared memory ASIC self-tests and display theresults on Series D and Series E network modules only. The list of available subcommands isdisplayed by typing ? at the test level.

myswitch:hardware netmod test-> ?

modify Modify netmod tests status

show Show hardware memory tests status

5.7.9.1 hardware netmod test modifyThis command lets you perform various shared memory ASIC self-tests on Series D and SeriesE network modules only.

NOTEThe tests take approximately five to ten minutesto finish.

Before you can test a Series D or Series E network module, you must first take it out of serviceby administering it down as follows:

hardware netmod modify -netmod <Netmod> -admin down

When this command is entered, a warning message is displayed as follows:

Disabling the network module will destroy all existing connections on the module.

Disable the network module [n]? y


Entering n or pressing <ENTER> aborts the command. Entering y tears down all of theexisting connections and temporarily places the network module out of service. You can thentest the network module using the following AMI command:

myswitch:hardware netmod test-> modify

Usage:


[[-testadminstatus] <testadminstatus_type>] Test Admin Status

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands


To test module A on switch fabric 3, enter the following:

hardware netmod test modify -netmod 3A -testadminstatus startTest

You receive the following message:

Testing a network module may take 5-10 minutes

Start the test? [n]? y

Press the ENTER key to abort the test!!

Testing SRAM Bank 0......

Testing SRAM Bank 1.......

DRAM..........................................................................

..............................................................................

..............................................................................

.................................................................

Network module tests successful

Do you want to abort the tests [n]?

To abort the self-tests, press <ENTER> at any time during the test. You receive the followingmessage:


-netmod <Netmod> The Series D or Series E network module that is to be tested. Enter the board number andnetwork module; e.g., 3A.

-testadminstatus<testadminstatus_type>

Indicates the test status of the network module:

• normal indicates the hardware is okay on the network module.

• startTest starts the hardware tests on the network module.

• abortTest aborts the test if the network module is under test.


Do you want to abort the tests [n]?

Entering n or pressing <ENTER> allows you to resume the tests. Entering y stops the tests. Youreceive the following message:

Abort the test [n]? y

Network module test aborted.

Hardware Commands

When you are finished testing the network module, use the following command to put thenetwork module back into service.

hardware netmod modify -netmod <Netmod> -admin up

At that point, PVCs that are stored in the configuration database are re-established and SVCsare dynamically re-established.

5.7.9.2 hardware netmod test showThis command lets you display information about the shared memory ASIC self-tests onSeries D or Series E network modules only.

myswitch:hardware netmod test-> show

Admin Oper Detailed

Netmod Status Status Information

4A normal normal N/A

4B normal testUnsupported N/A

4C normal testUnsupported N/A

4D normal testUnsupported N/A

4E normal testUnsupported N/A


Field Description

Netmod The Series D or Series E network module that has been tested.

Admin Status Indicates the hardware test configuration of the network module:

• startTest starts the hardware tests on the network module.

• abortTest aborts the test if the network module is under test.

• normal means the test has ended or has been aborted.

Oper Status The status of the hardware tests on the network module:


• normal indicates that the network module has never undergone hardware tests.

• underTest means the tests are currently running on the network module.

• testSuccessful means the tests have completed successfully on the module.

• testFailed means the tests have completed unsuccessfully on the module.

• testAborted means the tests have been aborted.

• testUnsupported displays for network modules that do not support hardwaretests; e.g., Series LC network modules.

Detailed Information A message describing the status of the current test.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.7.10 hardware netmod trafficThese commands enable you to configure or to display information about the traffic on thenetwork modules. To list the available subcommands, type ? at the traffic level.

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic-> ?

c> The c directory

d> The d directory

e> The e directory

lc> The lc directory

oc48stats Display OC48 Traffic Management Statistics

sf1> The sf1 directory



le> The le directory



oc48stats Display OC48 Traffic Management Statistics

pc1> The pc1 directory


5.7.10.1 hardware netmod traffic cThese commands let you configure or display information about the traffic on Series Cnetwork modules. To list the available subcommands, type ? at the c level.


myswitch:hardware netmod traffic c-> ?

models Display netmod memory models

modify Modify netmod traffic configuration

show Display netmod traffic configuration

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.1.1 hardware netmod traffic c models

This command allows you to display the different types of traffic memory models on anetwork module. Enter the following parameters:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic c-> models

Model Memory Ucasts Mcasts MOuts Cells Name

1 32Kx48 4096 512 1024 2048 default

2 128Kx48 6144 512 1024 12288 default

3 128Kx48 11264 1024 2048 10240 more conns

5 128Kx48 2048 2048 16384 8192 VP shaping

6 128Kx48 3072 128 1024 13312 more cells

7 32Kx48 2048 256 1024 2560 more cells


Field Description

Model1 The shared memory model for this configuration. This is the number to enter for the-index <integer> parameter when using hardware netmod traffic c modify.

Memory The size of this shared memory configuration, in bytes.

Ucasts2 The maximum number of unicast connections supported for this model. Half of theseconnections are reserved for low-priority connections (nrtVBR, ABR, UBR) and half arereserved for high-priority connections (rtVBR, CBR). For example, if a model supports 4Kunicast connections, it really supports 2K rtVBR or CBR connections and 2K nrtVBR, ABR,or UBR connections.

Mcasts The number of input multicast connections supported from the switch fabric to thenetwork module for this shared memory model. Half of these connections are reserved forlow-priority connections (nrtVBR, ABR, UBR) and half are reserved for high-priorityconnections (rtVBR, CBR). A multicast connection can have multiple outputs on the samenetwork module. The number of outputs does not figure into this constraint.

MOuts The number of output multicast connections supported from the network module to thelink for this shared memory model. Any multicast connection can have multiple outputs


1. Memory model 4 has been removed.2. The Series C network modules offer an ABR-ready ATM interface. A future ForeThought release will support ABR QoS

operation on these interfaces. ABR options in the current release will apply in that ForeThought release.

on the same network module or the same port. If one multicast connection has fouroutputs, it requires 1 mcast and 4 mouts. Adding an output to a multicast connection canfail if all of the outputs are in use. Adding the multicast connection might not fail.

Cells The total amount of cell buffering that is supported for this shared memory model.

Name The identifier for this shared memory model.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.1.2 hardware netmod traffic c modify

This command lets you configure traffic on Series C network modules. Enter the following:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic c-> modify

Usage:


[[-model] <integer>] Model Used

[[-epd] <percent>] Early Packet Discard

[[-fifoblock] (normal|enabled)] FIFO Blocking



-netmod <Netmod>1

1. The following Series C network modules can only use the following traffic memory models: NM-6/25UTPEC andNM-4/155UTP5EC can only use models 1 and 7; all other Series C network modules can only use models 2 - 6.

The Series C network module to be configured for Early Packet Discard.

-model <integer>2

2. The network module must be reset for this command to take effect.

The predefined memory model to be used for this Series C network module. The modelsmake different trade-offs between the number of cell buffers, and the number of unicastand multicast connections. Enter the number found in the Model field of the hardwarenetmod traffic c models command for the shared memory configuration that youwant to use.

-epd <percent> The AAL5 packet drop threshold to be set, in percent of cells. By default, this value is setto 90% of the shared buffer size.

-fifoblock (normal|enabled) normal means that the network module passes traffic normally. enabled means thatFIFO blocking takes place on the network module when the buffers are full. The default isnormal.


Hardware Commands

5.7.10.1.3 hardware netmod traffic c show

This command enables you to display traffic model information about the Series C networkmodules. Enter the following parameters:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic c-> show

Netmod Memory Model EPD FIFOblock

4B 128Kx48 2 90% normal

4C 128Kx48 2 90% normal

4D 128Kx48 2 90% normal


Field Description

Netmod The network module that has been configured.

Memory The hardware configuration this shared memory model supports, in units of 48-bit words(x48).

Model The shared memory model used for this network module. See hardware netmodtraffic c models for more information.

EPD The threshold for AAL5 Early Packet Discard on this network module in percent of thebuffer size.

FIFOblock Displays enabled if FIFO blocking is enabled on this network module. Otherwise,displays normal.


Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.1.3.1 hardware netmod traffic c show -statistics

This command enables you to display statistics about the Series C network modules. Enter thefollowing parameters:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic c-> show -statistics

Unicast Multicast Multicast Current Shared Used

Netmod Connections Connections Outputs Cells Memory Memory

4B 23 1 4 0 8928 16

4C 32 1 6 0 7392 9

4D 11 1 2 0 10464 16


Field Description

Netmod The Series C network module for which information is being displayed.

Unicast Connections The number of unicast connections that are currently active on this Series C networkmodule.

Multicast Connections The number of multicast connections that are currently active on this Series C networkmodule.

Multicast Outputs The number of multicast outputs that are currently active on this Series C networkmodule.

Current Cells The number of cells currently in the dedicated queues and in the shared memory for thisSeries C network module.

Shared Memory The amount of shared memory that is configured for this Series C network module.

Used Memory The amount of shared memory that is currently being used on this Series C networkmodule.


Hardware Commands

5.7.10.2 hardware netmod traffic dThese commands let you configure or display information about the traffic on Series D andIMA network modules. To list the available subcommands, type ? at the d level.

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic d-> ?

channelStats Display channel statistics



pathStats Display through path statistics


5.7.10.2.1 hardware netmod traffic d channelStats

You can show channel traffic statistics for Series D and IMA network modules as follows:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic d -> channelStats

Output Packets CLP0 CLP1

AtmIf VPI VCI Tx Cells Tx Cells Tx

4B1 0 3 0 0 0

4B1 0 4 0 0 0

4B1 0 5 0 606 0

4B1 0 15 0 449849 0

4B1 0 16 0 73148 0

4B2 0 3 0 0 0

4B2 0 4 0 0 0

4B2 0 15 0 449849 0

Press q to quit, any other key to continue...q


Field Description


Output AtmIf The outgoing port number.



Packets Tx Counts the number of packets transmitted on this channel.

CLP0 Cells Tx The number of CLP0 cells on this channel that were transmitted.

CLP1 Cells Tx The number of CLP1 cells on this channel that were transmitted.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.2.1.1 hardware netmod traffic d channelStats -loss

You can show VCC traffic statistics for Series D and IMA network modules as follows:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic d->channelStats -loss

Output EPD Intent Unintent CLP1 CLP01

AtmIf VPI VCI Loss Loss Loss Loss Loss

4B1 0 3 0 0 0 0 0

4B1 0 4 0 0 0 0 0

4B1 0 5 0 0 0 0 0

4B1 0 15 0 0 0 0 0

4B1 0 16 0 0 0 0 0

4B2 0 3 0 0 0 0 0

4B2 0 4 0 0 0 0 0

4B2 0 15 0 0 0 0 0



Field Description




EPD Loss For AAL5 traffic, counts only the first cell of each packet dropped on this channel due toEPD (Early Packet Discard). For non-AAL5 traffic, this counter is not incremented.

Intent Loss For AAL5 traffic, counts the first cell of each packet dropped on this channel due to PPD(Partial Packet Discard). For non-AAL5 traffic, this counter is not incremented.

Unintent Loss For AAL5 traffic, counts only the first cell of each packet lost on this channel when outputshared memory is full or when the per-port/per-priority CLP (Cell Loss Priority)thresholds are exceeded. All remaining cells are counted under the CellsLost Intentcounter. For non-AAL5 traffic, counts all cells lost on this channel when output shared


memory is full or when the per-port/per-priority CLP (Cell Loss Priority) thresholds areexceeded.

CLP1 Loss For AAL5 traffic, counts only the first cell of each packet lost on this channel when theper-VC CLP=1 threshold is exceeded. All remaining cells are counted under theCellsLost Intent counter. For non-AAL5 traffic, counts all cells lost on this channelwhen the per-VC CLP=1 threshold is exceeded.

CLP01 Loss For AAL5 traffic, counts only the first cell of each packet lost on this channel when theper-VC CLP=0+1 threshold is exceeded. All remaining cells are counted under theCellsLost Intent counter. For non-AAL5 traffic, counts all cells lost on this channelwhen the per-VC CLP=0+1 threshold is exceeded.

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.2.1.2 hardware netmod traffic d channelStats -queue

You can display the current per-connection queue length for Series D and IMA networkmodules as follows:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic d->channelStats -queue

Output Current

AtmIf VPI VCI Qsize

4B1 0 3 0

4B1 0 4 0

4B1 0 5 0

4B1 0 15 0

4B1 0 16 0

4B2 0 3 0

4B2 0 4 0

4B2 0 15 0



Field Description




Current Qsize The current queue length.


Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.2.2 hardware netmod traffic d models

This command allows you to display the different types of traffic memory models on a SeriesD or IMA network module. Enter the following parameters:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic d-> models

Cell Table

Model Memory Memory Ucasts Mcasts MOuts Cells Counters Name

1 256Kx32 256Kx32 12288 1024 4096 16352 8 16K cells OC-12

2 256Kx32 256Kx32 12288 1024 4096 16352 8 16K cells OC-3

3 256Kx32 256Kx32 10240 512 4096 16352 8 16K cells DSn/En

4 512Kx32 256Kx32 12288 1024 4096 32736 8 32K cells OC-12

5 512Kx32 256Kx32 12288 1024 4096 32736 8 32K cells OC-3

6 512Kx32 256Kx32 10240 512 4096 32736 8 32K cells DSn/En


Field Description

Model1 The shared memory model for this configuration. This is the number to enter for the -index<integer> parameter when using the hardware netmod traffic d modify command.

Cell Memory2 The hardware configuration this shared memory model supports, in units of 32-bit words(x32).

Table Memory The hardware configuration this shared memory model supports, in units of 32-bit words (x32).

Ucasts The maximum number of unicast connections supported by this shared memory configuration.

Mcasts The number of input multicast connections supported from the switch fabric to the networkmodule by this shared memory configuration.

MOuts The number of output multicast connections supported from the network module to the linkfor this shared memory model. Any multicast connection can have multiple outputs on thesame network module or the same port. If one multicast connection has four outputs, itrequires 1 mcast and 4 mouts.

Cells The total amount of cell buffering that is supported by this shared memory configuration.


1. The following Series D network modules can only use the following traffic memory models: OC-12 network modulescan only use model 4; OC-3 network modules can only use model 5; and DS3, E3, DS1, and E1 network modules canonly use model 6. Models 1, 2, and 3 are not used.

2. The Cell and Table Memory sizes determine which memory models are appropriate for a given network module.

Counters3

3. If the module packet counter is enabled under hardware netmod traffic d modify -aal5pktcount, the TransmitCLP=0 and CLP=1 counters are combined into a single Transmit CLP0+1 count.

The number of per-connection counters that is supported by this shared memory configuration.The counters are: 1 - Transmit (CLP=0) counter, 2 - Transmit (CLP=1) counter, 3 - EPD counter, 4- Unintentional cell loss counter, 5 - CLP=1 threshold counter, 6 - CLP=0+1 threshold counter, 7- Intentional PPD counter, and 8 - Transmit packet counter.


Hardware Commands

5.7.10.2.3 hardware netmod traffic d modify

This command lets you configure traffic on Series D and IMA network modules. Enter thefollowing:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic d-> modify

Usage:


[[-model] <integer>] Model Used


[[-epdubr] <percent>] Early Packet Discard for UBR

[[-efcion] <integer>] EFCI On

[[-efcioff] <integer>] EFCI Off

[[-aal5pktcount] (disabled|enabled)] Count Packets

[[-altclp01thresh] <integer>] Alt CLP01 Threshold

[[-altclp1thresh] <integer>] Alt CLP1 Threshold

[[-vcclp01cbr] <integer>] VC CLP01 For CBR-rtVBR

[[-vcclp01nrtvbr] <integer>] VC CLP01 For nrtVBR

[[-vcclp01ubr] <integer>] VC CLP01 For UBR

[[-vcclp01abr] <integer>] VC CLP01 For ABR

[[-vcclp1cbr] <integer>] VC CLP1 For CBR-rtVBR

[[-vcclp1nrtvbr] <integer>] VC CLP1 For nrtVBR

[[-vcclp1ubr] <integer>] VC CLP1 For UBR

[[-vcclp1abr] <integer>] VC CLP1 For ABR



-netmod <Netmod>1 The Series D network module to be configured.

-model <integer>2 The predefined memory model to be used for this Series D network module. The variousmodels make different trade-offs between the number of cell buffers, and the number ofunicast and multicast connections, and the number of per-connection counters. Enter the


number found in the Model field of the hardware netmod traffic d modelscommand for the shared memory configuration that you want to use.

-epd <percent> The AAL5 packet drop threshold to be set for CBR, VBR, and ABR AAL5 connections, inpercent of cells. The default value is set to 75% of the total cell buffer size on IMA networkmodules and to 90% of the total cell buffer size on all other Series D network modules.

-epdubr <percent> The AAL5 packet drop threshold to be set for AAL5 UBR connections only, in percent ofcells. The default value is set to 75% of the total cell buffer size on IMA network modulesand to 90% of the total cell buffer size on all other Series D network modules.

-efcion <integer> The number of cells at which the EFCI bit will be set, indicating that there is congestion.This number must be entered in increments of 32. The default is 256 cells.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

-efcioff <integer>3 The number of cells at which the EFCI bit will be cleared, indicating that there is nocongestion. This number must be entered in increments of 32. The default is 192 cells.

-aal5pktcount(disabled|enabled)4

enable means the network module will count the number of transmitted AAL5 PDUs.disable means the network module will not count the number of transmitted AAL5PDUs. The default is disable.

-altclp01thresh <integer> The number of cells in the per-connection buffer at which the connection drops CLP=0+1cells. Applying a CLP=0+1 threshold means that when the current cell count for aconnection is greater than this threshold, cells are dropped, regardless of their CLP bit.This threshold must be greater than the CLP=1 threshold. This threshold can only beadjusted in increments of multiples of 16 cells (e.g., 16, 32, 48). For CLP=0+1, theminimum value is the CLP=1 threshold + 16 cells, the maximum is 4,080 cells, and thedefault is 4,080 cells.

-altclp1thresh <integer> The number of cells in the per-connection buffer at which the connection drops CLP=1cells. Applying a CLP=1 threshold means that when the current cell count for a connectionis greater than this threshold, cells that have a CLP=1 are dropped. This threshold must beless than the CLP=0+1 threshold. This threshold can only be adjusted in increments ofmultiples of 16 cells (e.g., 16, 32, 48). For CLP=1, the minimum value is 0, the maximum isthe CLP=0+1 threshold - 16 cells, and the default is 256 cells.

-vcclp01cbr <integer> The number of cells in the buffer at which CBR and rtVBR traffic type drops CLP=0+1cells. Applying a CLP=0+1 threshold means that when the current cell count for aconnection is greater than this threshold, cells are dropped, regardless of their CLP bit.This threshold must be greater than the CLP=1 threshold. This threshold can only beadjusted in increments of multiples of 16 cells (e.g., 16, 32, 48). For CLP=0+1, theminimum value is the CLP=1 threshold + 16 cells, the maximum is 4,080 cells, and thedefault is 4,080 cells.

-vcclp01nrtvbr <integer> The number of cells in the buffer at which nrtVBR traffic type drops CLP=0+1 cells.Applying a CLP=0+1 threshold means that when the current cell count for a connection isgreater than this threshold, cells are dropped, regardless of their CLP bit. This thresholdmust be greater than the CLP=1 threshold. This threshold can only be adjusted inincrements of multiples of 16 cells (e.g., 16, 32, 48). For CLP=0+1, the minimum value isthe CLP=1 threshold + 16 cells, the maximum is 4,080 cells, and the default is 4,080 cells.

-vcclp01ubr <integer> The number of cells in the buffer at which UBR traffic type drops CLP=0+1 cells. Applyinga CLP=0+1 threshold means that when the current cell count for a connection is greater



than this threshold, cells are dropped, regardless of their CLP bit. This threshold must begreater than the CLP=1 threshold. This threshold can only be adjusted in increments ofmultiples of 16 cells (e.g., 16, 32, 48). For CLP=0+1, the minimum value is the CLP=1threshold + 16 cells, the maximum is 4,080 cells, and the default is 4,080 cells.

-vcclp01abr <integer> The number of cells in the buffer at which ABR traffic type drops CLP=0+1 cells. Applyinga CLP=0+1 threshold means that when the current cell count for a connection is greaterthan this threshold, cells are dropped, regardless of their CLP bit. This threshold must begreater than the CLP=1 threshold. This threshold can only be adjusted in increments ofmultiples of 16 cells (e.g., 16, 32, 48). For CLP=0+1, the minimum value is the CLP=1threshold + 16 cells, the maximum is 4,080 cells, and the default is 4,080 cells.

Hardware Commands

-vcclp1cbr <integer> The number of cells in the buffer at which CBR and rtVBR traffic type drops CLP=1 cells.Applying a CLP=1 threshold means that when the current cell count for a connection isgreater than this threshold, cells that have a CLP=1 are dropped. This threshold must beless than the CLP=0+1 threshold. This threshold can only be adjusted in increments ofmultiples of 16 cells (e.g., 16, 32, 48). For CLP=1, the minimum value is 0, the maximum isthe CLP=0+1 threshold - 16 cells, and the default is 256 cells.

-vcclp1nrtvbr <integer> The number of cells in the buffer at which nrtVBR traffic type drops CLP=1 cells.Applying a CLP=1 threshold means that when the current cell count for a connection isgreater than this threshold, cells that have a CLP=1 are dropped. This threshold must beless than the CLP=0+1 threshold. This threshold can only be adjusted in increments ofmultiples of 16 cells (e.g., 16, 32, 48). For CLP=1, the minimum value is 0, the maximum isthe CLP=0+1 threshold - 16 cells, and the default is 256 cells.

-vcclp1ubr <integer> The number of cells in the buffer at which UBR traffic type drops CLP=1 cells. Applying aCLP=1 threshold means that when the current cell count for a connection is greater thanthis threshold, cells that have a CLP=1 are dropped. This threshold must be less than theCLP=0+1 threshold. This threshold can only be adjusted in increments of multiples of 16cells (e.g., 16, 32, 48). For CLP=1, the minimum value is 0, the maximum is the CLP=0+1threshold - 16 cells, and the default is 256 cells.

-vcclp1abr <integer> The number of cells in the buffer at which ABR traffic type drops CLP=1 cells. Applying aCLP=1 threshold means that when the current cell count for a connection is greater thanthis threshold, cells that have a CLP=1 are dropped. This threshold must be less than theCLP=0+1 threshold. This threshold can only be adjusted in increments of multiples of 16cells (e.g., 16, 32, 48). For CLP=1, the minimum value is 0, the maximum is the CLP=0+1threshold - 16 cells, and the default is 256 cells.

1. The following Series D network modules can only use the following traffic memory models: OC-12 network modulescan only use model 4; OC-3 network modules can only use model 5; and DS3, E3, DS1, and E1 network modules canonly use model 6. Models 1, 2, and 3 are not used. Since there is currently only one valid model for each type ofnetwork module, the software will not allow you to change the memory model for a Series D network module.

2. The network module must be reset for this command to take effect.3. The value for the efcioff threshold must always be less than or equal to the value for the efcion threshold.4. You must reset the network module once you have entered this command.



Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.2.4 hardware netmod traffic d pathStats

You can show path traffic statistics for Series D and IMA network modules as follows:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic d-> pathStats

Output Packets CLP0 CLP1

AtmIf VPI Tx Cells Tx Cells Tx

4B1 75 0 0 0


5.7.10.2.4.1 hardware netmod traffic d pathStats -loss

You can show traffic statistics that show losses on the paths for Series D and IMA networkmodules as follows:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic d> pathStats -loss

Output Unintent CLP1 CLP01

AtmIf VPI Loss Loss Loss

4B1 75 0 0 0


Field Description



Packets Tx The number of transmitted packets on this path.

CLP0 Cells Tx The number of CLP=0 cells on this path that were transmitted.

CLP1 Cells Tx The number of CLP=1 cells on this path that were transmitted.


Field Description



Unintent Loss The number of cells dropped on this path due to output memory shortages or theper-port/per-priority CLP (Cell Loss Priority) thresholds.

CLP1 Loss The number of cells lost on this path due to the per-VC CLP=1 threshold.

CLP01 Loss The number of cells lost on this path due to the per-VC CLP=0+1 threshold.

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.2.4.2 hardware netmod traffic d pathStats -queue

You can display the current per-path queue length for Series D and IMA network modules asfollows:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic d> pathStats -queue

Output Current

AtmIf VPI Qsize

4B1 75 0


Field Description



Current Qsize The current queue length.


Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.2.5 hardware netmod traffic d show

This command lets you display traffic model information about the Series D and IMAnetwork modules. Enter the following parameters:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic d-> show

CBR-rtVBR-

Cell nrtVBR-ABR UBR EFCI EFCI AAL5 AltVC Thresholds

Netmod Memory Model EPD EPD On Off PktCnt CLP0+1 CLP1

1A 512Kx32 5 90% 90% 256 192 disabled 4080 256

1B 512Kx32 6 75% 75% 256 192 disabled 4080 256


Field Description

Netmod The Series D network module that has been configured.

Cell Memory The size of this shared memory cell RAM configuration (x32).

Model The shared memory model used for this network module. See hardware netmodtraffic d models for more information.

CBR-rtVBR-nrtVBR-ABREPD

The AAL5 packet drop threshold for CBR, rtVBR, nrtVBR, and ABR traffic on this Series Dnetwork module, in cells.

UBR EPD The AAL5 packet drop threshold for UBR traffic on this Series D network module, in cells.

EFCI On The threshold value at which the EFCI bit will be set (turned on), signalling congestion,for all traffic, in cells.

EFCI Off The threshold value at which the EFCI bit will be cleared (turned off), indicating nocongestion for all traffic, in cells.

AAL5 PktCnt enable means the network module counts the number of transmitted AAL5 PDUs.disable means the network module does not count the number of transmitted AAL5PDUs.

AltVC Threshold CLP0+1 The alternate threshold at which cells are dropped, regardless of their CLP bit, when the


current cell count for a connection is greater than this threshold. This threshold is usedinstead of the VC CLP0+1 threshold if the hardware port traffic d modify-altclpcbr -altclpnrtvbr -altclpubr command is applied or if it is enabledusing the -AltCLP option under connections upc new.

AltVC Threshold CLP1 The alternate threshold at which cells that are CLP=1 are dropped when the current cellcount for a connection is greater than this threshold. This threshold is used instead of theVC CLP1 threshold if the hardware port traffic d modify -altclpcbr-altclpnrtvbr -altclpubr command is applied or if it is enabled using the -AltCLPoption under connections upc new.

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.2.5.1 hardware netmod traffic d show -perclass

You can display traffic information about the Series D and IMA network modules on aper-class basis as follows:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic d-> show -perclass

VC Thresholds

CLP0+1 CLP1

Netmod CBR-rtVBR nrtVBR UBR ABR CBR-rtVBR nrtVBR UBR ABR

1B 4080 4080 4080 4080 256 256 256 256


5.7.10.2.5.2 hardware netmod traffic d show -statistics

This command lets you show traffic statistics about all of the Series D and IMA networkmodules as follows:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic d-> show -statistics

Unicast Multicast Multicast Current Shared

Netmod Connections Connection Outputs Cells Memory

1B 22 1 4 1 28640


Field Description

Netmod The Series D network module that has been configured.

VC Thresholds CLP0+1 The threshold at which cells are dropped for the specified traffic type, regardless of theirCLP bit, when the current cell count for a connection is greater than this threshold for thistraffic type.

VC Thresholds CLP1 The threshold at which cells that are CLP=1 are dropped for the specified traffic typewhen the current cell count for a connection is greater than this threshold for this traffictype.

Field Description


Netmod The Series D network module for which information is being displayed.

Unicast Connections The number of unicast connections that are currently active on this Series D networkmodule.

Multicast Connection The number of multicast connections that are currently active on this Series D networkmodule.

Multicast Outputs The number of multicast outputs that are currently active on this Series D networkmodule.

Current Cells The number of cells currently in the dedicated queues and in the shared memory for thisSeries D network module.

Shared Memory The amount of shared memory that is configured for this Series D network module.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.3 hardware netmod traffic eThese commands let you configure or display information about the traffic on Series Enetwork modules. To list the available subcommands, type ? at the e level.

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e-> ?

buffer> The buffer directory

customBCS> The customBCS directory

modify Modify Series E Netmod Traffic Configuration

show Display Series E Netmod Traffic Configuration

5.7.10.3.1 hardware netmod traffic e buffer

These commands lets you configure the buffer class or traffic type for Series E networkmodules. The ASICs in the Series E network modules provide a total of eight buffer classes.The first five classes support ATM Forum TM4.0 traffic categories (base buffers for CBR,rtVBR, nrtVBR, ABR, and UBR service categories) and the remaining three classes can be usedto create new buffer classes. Default buffer classes cannot be deleted. To list the availablesubcommands, type ? at the buffer level.

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e buffer-> ?

assign> The assign directory

delete Remove a buffer class

modify Modify a buffer class

new Create a new buffer class

show Display Series E buffer classes

5.7.10.3.1.1 hardware netmod traffic e buffer assign

These commands let you create, remove, and display buffer class assignments on Series Enetwork modules. Buffer classes are assigned for the new subcategory created as per the UPCcontract. Assignment of a different subcategory traffic into the base buffer of a servicecategory is not allowed. For example, assigning part of nrt-VBR PVC traffic into the CBR base


buffer is not allowed. A subcategory cannot be assigned to two different buffer classes. ABRtraffic can be served only by its base buffer class. Additionally, no other subcategory traffic canbe assigned to ABR buffer class. This is required because of the special characteristics of theABR traffic (e.g., ER and RM cell features). All SVCs will be created with subcategory 1. To listthe available subcommands, type ? at the assign level.

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e buffer assign-> ?

delete Remove a buffer class assignment

new Create a new buffer class assignment

show Display Series E buffer class assignments

Hardware Commands

hardware netmod traffic e buffer assign delete

This command lets you delete a buffer class assignment on a Series E network module. Enterthe following parameters:

NOTEA network module reset is required for thecommand to take effect.

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e buffer assign-> delete

Usage:

[-netmod] <netmod> Netmod

[-servcat] <ServCat> Service Category

[-subcat] <integer (1..16)> Service Sub-category

[[-buffer] <text>] Buffer

These parameters are defined in the next section.

hardware netmod traffic e buffer assign new

This command lets you create a buffer class assignment on a Series E network module. Enterthe following parameters:

NOTEA network module reset is required for thecommand to take effect.

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e buffer assign-> new

Usage:




[-buffer] <text> Buffer




-netmod <netmod> The Series E network module to be configured.

-servcat <servcat> The service category to which the buffer class assignment will apply. Can be CBR, rtVBR,nrtVBR, ABR, or UBR.

-subcat <integer (1..16)> The service subcategory for this buffer class assignment. A set of connections can begrouped within a service category. This index is used when assigning classes to a group ofconnections on Series E network modules.

-buffer <text> The buffer class or traffic type.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

hardware netmod traffic e buffer assign show

This command lets you display the buffer class assignments on a Series E network module asfollows:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e buffer assign-> show

Service Service Buffer

Netmod Category Sub-category Class

2C CBR default cbr_1


5.7.10.3.1.2 hardware netmod traffic e buffer delete

This command lets you delete a buffer class on a Series E network module. Enter the followingparameters:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e buffer-> delete

Usage:



[[-epd] <percent>] EPD Threshold

Field Description

Netmod The Series E network module that has been configured.

Service Category The service category to which the buffer class assignment applies.

Service Sub-category The service subcategory for this buffer class assignment. A set of connections can begrouped within a service category. This index is used when assigning classes to a group ofconnections on Series E network modules.

Buffer Class The buffer class name.


These parameters are defined in Section 5.7.10.3.1.4.

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.3.1.3 hardware netmod traffic e buffer modify

This command lets you modify a buffer class assignment on a Series E network module. Enterthe following parameters:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e buffer-> modify

Usage:





5.7.10.3.1.4 hardware netmod traffic e buffer new

This command lets you create a buffer class assignment on a Series E network module. Enterthe following parameters:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e buffer-> new

Usage:



[[-epd] <percent>] EPD Threshold (default: 90%)




-buffer <text> The buffer class category for this Series E network module.

-epd <percent> The threshold for AAL5 Early Packet Discard on this Series E network module in percentof the buffer size. The default is 90%.


Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.3.1.5 hardware netmod traffic e buffer show

This command lets you display the buffer classes on a Series E network module. Enter thefollowing parameters:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e buffer-> show

Buffer EPD

Netmod Name Threshold

1B ABR 90%

1B CBR 90%

1B UBR 90%

1B nrtVBR 90%

1B rtVBR 90%


5.7.10.3.2 hardware netmod traffic e customBCS

These commands let you configure or display custom UBR Behavior Class Selector (BCS)information on Series E network modules. To list the available subcommands, type ? at thecustomBCS level.

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e customBCS-> ?

default Show Default Series E UBR BCS Configuration

defaultbcs Show Default Series E UBR BCS Configuration

Field Description

Netmod The Series E network module that has been configured.

Buffer Name The buffer class category for this Series E network module.

EPD Threshold The threshold for AAL5 Early Packet Discard on this Series E network module in percentof the buffer size.


delete Remove Series E Custom UBR BCS Configuration

modify Modify Series E Custom UBR BCS Configuration

new Create Series E Custom UBR BCS Configuration

show Display Series E Custom UBR BCS Configuration

NOTEFor more information about how to configure acustom UBRbcs, please see Chapter 1 in theMultiservice Broadband Switch NetworkConfiguration Manual.

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.3.2.1 hardware netmod traffic e customBCS default

This command lets you enter a BCS value on a Series E network module and have the switchreturn the corresponding weight. Enter the following parameters:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e customBCS-> default

Usage:


[-bcs] <integer> Behavior Class Selector


5.7.10.3.2.2 hardware netmod traffic e customBCS defaultbcs

This command lets you use a pre-configured, default UBRbcs configuration on an individualSeries E network module or on all Series E network modules in the switch fabric. The pre-defined BCS values are 10000, 20000, and 30000. Enter the following parameter:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e customBCS-> defaultbcs ?

[[-netmod] <netmod>] Netmod

This parameter is defined in Section 5.7.10.3.2.5.

If a specific network module is entered, the default UBRbcs configuration is used just on thatnetwork module. If no network module is entered, the default configuration is applied to allSeries E network modules in the switch fabric.

NOTETo take effect, this command requires a reset ofthe network module(s).


NOTEThis command is currently not supported.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.3.2.3 hardware netmod traffic e customBCS delete

This command lets you delete a custom UBRbcs configuration on a Series E network module.Enter the following parameters:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e customBCS-> delete

Usage:




[[-weight] <integer>] Weight


5.7.10.3.2.4 hardware netmod traffic e customBCS modify

This command lets you modify a custom UBRbcs configuration on a Series E network module.Enter the following parameters:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e customBCS-> modify

Usage:







Hardware Commands

5.7.10.3.2.5 hardware netmod traffic e customBCS new

This command lets you create a custom UBRbcs configuration on a Series E network module.Enter the following parameters:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e customBCS-> new

Usage:





The parameters for default, defaultbcs, delete, modify, and new are defined asfollows:

5.7.10.3.2.6 hardware netmod traffic e customBCS show

This command lets you display custom UBRbcs configuration information on a Series Enetwork module. Enter the following parameters:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e customBCS-> show

Network

Module BCS Buffer Weight

1B 1 UBR 1

1B 2 UBR2 2



-bcs <integer> A user-assigned index number that uniquely identifies this BCS.

-buffer <text> The user-assigned UBR buffer class for this BCS.

-weight <integer> A user-assigned weight for this BCS. This number indicates how many cells get servicedat a time from the UBR queue. The range of values is from 1 to 255. The default value (ofall UBR traffic) is 1, so this value should be greater than 1.


1B 3 UBR3 3

1B 4 UBR4 4


Field Description

Network Module The Series E network module that has been configured.

BCS A user-assigned index number that uniquely identifies this BCS.

Buffer The user-assigned buffer class for this BCS.

Weight A user-assigned weight for this BCS.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.3.3 hardware netmod traffic e modify

This command lets you modify the configuration on a Series E network module. Enter thefollowing parameters:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e-> modify

Usage:


[[-ucastConns] <integer>] Unicast Connections



[[-aal5cntMode] (cell|packet)] AAL5 Counting Mode

[[-aal5cntOverride] (on|off)] AAL5 Counting Mode Override

[[-overbookingHw] (disabled|enabled)] Hardware Overbooking Switch




-ucastConns <integer> The maximum number of unicast connections supported by this shared memoryconfiguration.

-efcion <integer> The threshold value at which the EFCI will be set (turned on), indicating congestion forABR traffic, in cells.

-efcioff <integer> The threshold value at which the EFCI will be cleared (turned off), indicating nocongestion for ABR traffic, in cells.

-aal5cntMode (cell|packet) The AAL5 counting mode by which the Series E network module counts the number oftransmitted AAL5 PDUs:



-aal5cntOverride (on|off) This parameter lets you override the current AAL5 counting mode at the per-connection


level:

• on means the Series E network module counts the number of transmitted AAL5PDUs, regardless of the current counting mode at the per-connection level.

• off means the Series E network module does not count the number of transmittedAAL5 PDUs, regardless of the current counting mode at the per-connection level. Thedefault is off.

-overbookingHw(disabled|enabled)

disabled turns off nrtVBR and rtVBR overbooking in the hierarchical shaper on thisnetwork module. The default is disabled.

enabled turns on nrtVBR and rtVBR overbooking in the hierarchical shaper on thisnetwork module.

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.3.4 hardware netmod traffic e show

This command lets you display the configuration on a Series E network module. Enter thefollowing parameters:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e-> show

Network Max Connections MDup EFCI EFCI Hardware

Module Ucast Mcast List On Off Overbooking

1B 32256 512 2046 256 192 disabled

1D 32256 512 2046 256 192 disabled


Field Description

Network Module The Series E network module currently present in the switch fabric.

Max Connections Ucast The total number of unicast connections that this Series E network module can support.

Max Connections Mcast The total number of multicast connections that this Series E network module can support.

MDup List The maximum number of multicast legs per port.

EFCI On The threshold value at which the EFCI will be set (turned on), indicating congestion forABR traffic, in cells.

EFCI Off The threshold value at which the EFCI will be cleared (turned off), indicating nocongestion for ABR traffic, in cells.

Hardware Overbooking disabled turns off nrtVBR and rtVBR overbooking in the hierarchical shaper on thisnetwork module.

enabled turns on nrtVBR and rtVBR overbooking in the hierarchical shaper on thisnetwork module.


Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.3.4.1 hardware netmod traffic e show -aal5CntMode

This command lets you display the Series E network module AAL5 counting modeconfiguration as follows:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e-> show -aal5CntMode

Network AAL5 Counting

Module Mode Override

1B packet off


If no Series E network modules have been configured, the following is displayed:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e-> show -aal5CntMode

There are no entries matching your query.

Field Description


AAL5 Counting Mode The AAL5 counting mode by which the logical network module counts the number oftransmitted AAL5 PDUs:



AAL5 Counting Override Indicates whether the current AAL5 counting mode at the per-connection level can beoverridden:

• on means the logical network module counts the number of transmitted AAL5 PDUs,regardless of the current counting mode at the per-connection level.

• off means the logical network module does not count the number of transmittedAAL5 PDUs, regardless of the current counting mode at the per-connection level. Thedefault is off.


Hardware Commands

5.7.10.3.4.2 hardware netmod traffic e show -memory

This command lets you display Series E network module memory configuration informationas follows:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e-> show -memory

Network Cell Table Scheduler Shared

Module Memory Memory Memory Memory

1B 128K 512Kx32 256Kx32 129248



myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e-> show -memory


Field Description


Cell Memory The hardware configuration this memory model supports.

Table Memory The hardware configuration this memory model supports, in 32-bit words (x32).

Scheduler Memory The scheduler memory size, in 32-bit words (x32).

Shared Memory The total amount of cell buffering that is supported by this shared memory configuration.


Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.3.4.3 hardware netmod traffic e show -stats

This command lets you display Series E network module statistics information as follows:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e-> show -stats

Network Current Connections MDup Cells

Module Ucast Mcast Used Buffered

1B 7 0 0 0



myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e-> show -stats


Field Description


Current Connections Ucast The current number of active unicast connections on this Series E network module.

Current Connections Mcast The current number of active multicast connections on this Series E network module.

MDup Used The maximum number of multicast legs used per port.

Cells Buffered The current number of cells buffered.


Hardware Commands

5.7.10.4 hardware netmod traffic lcThese commands let you configure or display information about the traffic on Series LCnetwork modules. To list the available subcommands, type ? at the lc level.

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic lc-> ?






5.7.10.4.1 hardware netmod traffic lc channelStats

You can show channel traffic statistics for Series LC network modules as follows:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic lc-> channelStats

Output C e l l s L o s t Cells

AtmIf VPI VCI Total Intentional Unintentional Transmitted

1B1 0 3 0 0 0 0

1B1 0 4 0 0 0 0

1B1 0 5 0 0 0 45600

1B1 0 15 0 0 0 166098

1B1 0 16 0 0 0 88906

1B1 0 100 0 0 0 4294967295



Field Description





Cells Lost Total The number of cells on this channel that were dropped by the output network module.

Cells Lost Intentional The number of cells dropped on this channel due to EPD (Early Packet Discard) or PPD(Partial Packet Discard).

Cells Lost Unintentional The number of cells dropped on this channel due to output memory shortages or the CLP(Cell Loss Priority) threshold.

Cells Transmitted The number of cells transmitted out this channel.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.4.2 hardware netmod traffic lc models

This command allows you to display the different types of traffic memory models on a SeriesLC network module. Enter the following parameters:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic lc-> models

Cell Table

Model Memory Memory Ucasts Mcasts Cells Counters Name

1 256Kx64 32Kx32 6144 512 32768 0 default

2 256Kx64 32Kx32 6144 512 16384 1 one counter

3 256Kx64 32Kx32 6144 512 8192 2 two counters

4 256Kx64 64Kx32 6144 512 32768 2 default

5 512Kx64 64Kx32 6144 512 65536 2 default

6 256Kx64 32Kx32 4096 1024 24576 1 more mcast

7 256Kx64 64Kx32 4096 1024 32768 2 more mcast

8 512Kx64 64Kx32 4096 1024 65536 2 more mcast

9 256Kx64 32Kx32 6144 256 32768 0 8-port default

10 256Kx64 32Kx32 4096 512 32768 0 8-port more mcast

11 256Kx64 32Kx32 4096 512 24576 1 8-port one counter

12 256Kx64 32Kx32 4096 512 14336 2 8-port two counters


Field Description

Model1 The shared memory model for this configuration. This is the number to enter for the-index <integer> parameter when using hardware netmod traffic lc modify.


Table Memory The hardware configuration this shared memory model supports, in units of 32-bit words(x32).

Ucasts The maximum number of unicast connections supported by this shared memoryconfiguration.


Mcasts3 The number of input multicast connections supported from the switch fabric to thenetwork module by this shared memory configuration.


Counters The number of per-connection counters that is supported by this shared memoryconfiguration. 0 means there are no per-connection counters. 1 means there areper-connection counters for cells transmitted and for cells lost. 2 means there areper-connection counters for cells transmitted, for cells lost, for intentional cells lost, andfor unintentional cells lost.


Hardware Commands

5.7.10.4.3 hardware netmod traffic lc modify

This command lets you configure traffic on Series LC network modules. Enter the following:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic lc-> modify

Usage:


[[-model] <integer>] Model used





[[-vbrpriority] (rt|nrt)] VBR Priority


1. For proper operation, all Series LC network modules in a switch must use memory models that support the same num-ber of unicast connections. Therefore, all Series LC modules in a switch should either use models 1-5 OR models 6-8.

The following Series LC network modules can only use the following models: OC-3 MM and UTP can only use models1, 2, 3, and 6; OC-3 SM can only use models 4 and 7; and OC-12 MM and SM can only use models 5 and 8.

2. The Cell Memory and Table Memory sizes determine which memory models are appropriate for any given networkmodule.

3. Only one multicast output is supported per port for each multicast connection.


-netmod <Netmod> The Series LC network module to be configured.

-model <integer>1 The predefined memory model to be used for this Series LC network module. The variousmodels make different trade-offs between the number of cell buffers, and the number ofunicast and multicast connections, and the number of per-connection counters. Enter thenumber found in the Model field of the hardware netmod traffic lc models AMIcommand for the shared memory configuration that you want to use.


-epd <percent> The AAL5 packet drop threshold to be set for AAL5 CBR, VBR, and ABR connections, inpercent of cells. By default, this value is set to 90% of the shared buffer size.

-epdubr <percent> The AAL5 packet drop threshold to be set for AAL5 UBR connections only, in percent ofcells. By default, this value is set to 90% of the shared buffer size.

-efcion <integer> The number of cells at which the ABR2 cells have the EFCI bit set, signalling that there iscongestion. The default for the on threshold is 64. The default for the off threshold is 1.

-efcioff <integer>3 The number of cells at which the ABR cells have the EFCI bit cleared, signalling that thereis no congestion. The default for the on threshold is 64. The default for the off thresholdis 1.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.4.4 hardware netmod traffic lc pathStats

You can show path traffic statistics for Series LC network modules as follows:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic lc-> pathStats


AtmIf VPI Total Intentional Unintentional Transmitted

1B1 75 0 0 0 0

1B2 98 0 0 0 0

1B2 99 0 0 0 0


-vbrpriority (rt|nrt) rt places the VBR traffic in the high priority queue. nrt places the VBR traffic in the lowpriority queue. The default is nrt. This parameter does not apply to the Port ExpansionModule (PEM) (1D) or to any other switch platform.

1. For proper operation, all Series LC network modules in a switch must use memory models that support the same num-ber of unicast connections. Therefore, all Series LC modules in a switch should either use models 1-5 OR models 6-8.

The following Series LC network modules can only use the following traffic memory models: OC-3 MM and UTP canonly use models 1, 2, 3, and 6; OC-3 SM can only use models 4 and 7; and OC-12 MM and SM can only use models 5and 8.

2. The Series LC network modules offer an ABR-ready ATM interface. A future ForeThought release will support ABR QoSoperation on these interfaces. ABR options in the current release will apply in that ForeThought release.

3. The value for the off threshold must always be less than the value for the on threshold.

Field Description



Cells Lost Total The number of cells on this path that were dropped by the output network module.



Cells Lost Intentional The number of cells dropped on this path due to EPD (Early Packet Discard) or PPD(Partial Packet Discard).

Cells Lost Unintentional The number of cells dropped on this path due to output memory shortages or the CLP(Cell Loss Priority) threshold.

Cells Transmitted The number of cells transmitted out this path for this priority.

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.4.5 hardware netmod traffic lc show

This command lets you display traffic model information on Series LC network modules asfollows:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic lc-> show

Cell Table CBR-VBR-ABR UBR EFCI EFCI

Netmod Series Memory Memory Model EPD EPD On Off VBR-Queue

4D LC 256Kx64 32Kx32 1 90% 90% 64 1 N/A


Field Description

Netmod The network module that has been configured.

Series Indicates what series of network module this is.


Table Memory The size of this shared memory table RAM configuration (x32).

Model The shared memory model used for this logical network module. See hardware netmodtraffic lc models for more information.

CBR-VBR-ABR EPD The AAL5 packet drop threshold for CBR, VBR, and ABR traffic on this logical networkmodule, in percent of the buffer size.

UBR EPD The AAL5 packet drop threshold for UBR traffic on this logical network module, inpercent of the buffer size.

EFCI On The threshold value at which the EFCI will be set (turned on), signalling congestion, forABR1 traffic, in cells.

1. The Series LC network modules offer an ABR-ready ATM interface. A future ForeThought release will support ABR QoS


VBR-Queue This field does not apply to Series LC network modules.


operation on these interfaces. ABR options in the current release will apply in that ForeThought release.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.4.5.1 hardware netmod traffic lc show -statistics

This command lets you show traffic statistics about all of the Series LC network modules asfollows:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic lc-> show -statistics

Unicast Multicast Current Shared Used

Netmod Connections Connections Cells Memory Memory

4D 21 0 0 27648 0


Field Description

Netmod The shared memory network module for which information is being displayed.

Unicast Connections The number of unicast connections that are currently active on this shared memorynetwork module.

Multicast Connections The number of multicast connections that are currently active on this shared memorynetwork module.

Current Cells The number of cells currently in the dedicated queues and in the shared memory for thisnetwork module.

Shared Memory The amount of shared memory that is configured for this network module.

Used Memory The amount of shared memory that is currently being used on this network module.


Hardware Commands

5.7.10.5 hardware netmod traffic oc48statsYou can display traffic statistics for Series PC1 OC-48c port cards or OC-48c network modulesas follows:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic-> oc48stats

Current Maximum Current Maximum

Netmod Unicasts Unicasts Multicasts Multicasts

4A 11 32768 0 1024


Field Description


Current Unicasts The current number of unicast connections active on this shared memory networkmodule.

Maximum Unicasts The total number of unicast connections that this network module can support.

Current Multicasts The current number of multicast connections active on this shared memory networkmodule.

Maximum Multicasts The total number of multicast connections that this network module can support.


Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.6 hardware netmod traffic leThese commands let you configure or display information about the traffic on Series LElogical network modules on an ATM port card on an ESX-3000. To list the availablesubcommands, type ? at the le level.

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic le-> ?






5.7.10.6.1 hardware netmod traffic le channelStats

You can show channel traffic statistics for logical Series LE network modules as follows:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic le-> channelStats



7A1 0 3 0 N/A N/A 0

7A1 0 4 0 N/A N/A 0

7A1 0 5 0 N/A N/A 56022

7A1 0 16 0 N/A N/A 628956

7A1 0 18 0 N/A N/A 66969

7A1 0 32 0 N/A N/A N/A

7A1 0 34 0 N/A N/A N/A



Field Description





Cells Lost Total The number of cells on this channel that were dropped by the output network module.

Cells Lost Intentional The number of cells dropped on this channel due to EPD (Early Packet Discard) or PPD(Partial Packet Discard).

Cells Lost Unintentional The number of cells dropped on this channel due to output memory shortages or the CLP(Cell Loss Priority) threshold.


Hardware Commands

5.7.10.6.2 hardware netmod traffic le models

This command allows you to display the different types of traffic memory models on a SeriesLE logical network module on an ATM port card on an ESX-3000. Enter the following:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic le-> models

Cell Table


1 256Kx64 32Kx32 6144 512 32768 0 default

2 256Kx64 32Kx32 6144 512 16384 1 one counter

3 256Kx64 32Kx32 6144 512 8192 2 two counters

4 256Kx64 64Kx32 6144 512 32768 2 default

5 512Kx64 64Kx32 6144 512 65536 2 default

6 256Kx64 32Kx32 4096 1024 24576 1 more mcast

7 256Kx64 64Kx32 4096 1024 32768 2 more mcast

8 512Kx64 64Kx32 4096 1024 65536 2 more mcast

9 256Kx64 32Kx32 6144 256 32768 0 8-port default

10 256Kx64 32Kx32 4096 512 32768 0 8-port more mcast

11 256Kx64 32Kx32 4096 512 24576 1 8-port one counter

12 256Kx64 32Kx32 4096 512 14336 2 8-port two counters


Field Description

Model The shared memory model for this configuration. This is the number to enter for the-index <integer> parameter when using hardware netmod traffic le modify.


Table Memory The hardware configuration this shared memory model supports, in units of 32-bit words(x32).


Mcasts2 The number of input multicast connections supported from the switch fabric to thenetwork module by this shared memory configuration.


1. The Cell Memory and Table Memory sizes determine which memory models are appropriate for a given networkmodule.

2. Only one multicast output is supported per port for each multicast connection.


Counters The number of per-connection counters that is supported by this shared memoryconfiguration. 0 means there are no per-connection counters. 1 means there areper-connection counters for cells transmitted and for cells lost. 2 means there areper-connection counters for cells transmitted, for cells lost, for intentional cells lost, andfor unintentional cells lost.


Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.6.3 hardware netmod traffic le modify

This command lets you configure traffic on logical Series LE network modules on an ATMport card on an ESX-3000. Enter the following:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic le-> modify

Usage:







[[-vbrpriority] (rt|nrt)] VBR Priority (LE only)



-netmod <Netmod> The logical Series LE network module to be configured.

-model <integer>1 The predefined memory model to be used for this logical Series LE network module. Thevarious models make different trade-offs between the number of cell buffers, and thenumber of unicast and multicast connections, and the number of per-connection counters.Enter the number found in the Model field of the hardware netmod traffic lemodels command for the shared memory configuration that you want to use.

-epd <percent> The AAL5 packet drop threshold to be set for AAL5 CBR, VBR, and ABR connections, inpercent of cells. By default, this value is set to 90% of the shared buffer size.

-epdubr <percent> The AAL5 packet drop threshold to be set for AAL5 UBR connections only, in percent ofcells. By default, this value is set to 90% of the shared buffer size.

-efcion <integer> The number of cells at which the ABR2 cells have the EFCI bit set, signalling that there iscongestion. The default for the on threshold is 64. The default for the off threshold is 1.

-efcioff <integer>3 The number of cells at which the ABR cells have the EFCI bit cleared, signalling that thereis no congestion. The default for the on threshold is 64. The default for the off thresholdis 1.


1. For proper operation, all Series LE network modules in a switch must use memory models that support the samenumber of unicast connections. Therefore, all Series LE modules in an ESX-3000 switch should either use models 1-5OR models 6-8. The following Series LE network modules can only use the following traffic memory models: OC-3MM and UTP can only use models 1, 2, 3, and 6; OC-3 SM can only use models 4 and 7; and OC-12 MM and SM canonly use models 5 and 8.

2. The Series LE network modules offer an ABR-ready ATM interface. A future ForeThought release will support ABR QoSoperation on these interfaces. ABR options in the current release will apply in that ForeThought release.


-vbrpriority (rt|nrt) rt places the VBR traffic in the high priority queue. nrt places the VBR traffic in the lowpriority queue. The default is nrt. This parameter only applies to the 25 MB logical SeriesLE network modules on an ESX-3000 switch

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.6.4 hardware netmod traffic le pathStats

You can show path traffic statistics for Series LE logical network modules on anESX-3000switch as follows:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic le-> pathStats



1B1 75 0 0 0 0

1B2 98 0 0 0 0

1B2 99 0 0 0 0


Field Description








Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.6.5 hardware netmod traffic le show

This command lets you display traffic model information on the Series LE logical networkmodules on an ESX-3000switch as follows:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic le-> show

Cell Table CBR-VBR-ABR UBR EFCI EFCI


7A LE 256Kx64 32Kx32 6 90% 90% 64 1 N/A

7B LE 256Kx64 32Kx32 6 90% 90% 64 1 N/A

7C LE 256Kx64 32Kx32 6 90% 90% 64 1 N/A


Field Description

Netmod The logical network module that has been configured.

Series Indicates what series of network module this is.


Table Memory The size of this shared memory table RAM configuration (x32).

Model The shared memory model used for this logical network module. See hardware netmodtraffic le models for more information.

CBR-VBR-ABR EPD The AAL5 packet drop threshold for CBR, VBR, and ABR traffic on this logical networkmodule, in percent of the buffer size.




VBR-Queue The queue that is servicing the VBR traffic. rt is the high priority queue and nrt is the


1. The logical Series LE network modules offer an ABR-ready ATM interface. A future ForeThought release will supportABR QoS operation on these interfaces. ABR options in the current release will apply in that ForeThought release.

low priority queue. This field only applies to 25 MB interfaces.

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.6.5.1 hardware netmod traffic le show -statistics

This command lets you show traffic statistics about all of the Series LE network modules asfollows:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic le-> show -statistics



7A 23 0 0 19456 0

7B 16 0 0 19456 0

7C 16 0 0 19456 0


Field Description


Unicast Connections The number of unicast connections that are currently active on this shared memorynetwork module.

Multicast Connections The number of multicast connections that are currently active on this shared memorynetwork module.

Current Cells The number of cells currently in the dedicated queues and in the shared memory for thisnetwork module.

Shared Memory The amount of shared memory that is configured for this network module.

Used Memory The amount of shared memory that is currently being used on this network module.


Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.7 hardware netmod traffic sf1These commands let you configure or display information about the traffic on Series SF1network modules. To list the available subcommands, type ? at the sf1 level.

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic sf1-> ?

modify Modify Series SF1 Netmod Traffic Configuration

show Display Series SF1 Netmod Traffic Configuration

5.7.10.7.1 hardware netmod traffic sf1 modify

This command lets you configure traffic on Series SF1 network modules. Enter the following:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic sf1-> modify

Usage:


[-prioindex] (abr|nrtvbr|cbr-rtvbr|ubr) Priority

[[-epd] <percent>] AAL5 Packet Drop


[[-efcioff] <integer>] EFCI off



-module <Netmod> The SF1 network module to be configured.

-prioindex(abr|nrtvbr|cbr-rtvbr|ubr)

The traffic type for which EPD or EFCI is being set. Can be ABR, nrtVBR, CBR-rtVBR, orUBR.

-epd <integer> The AAL5 packet drop threshold to be set for AAL5 CBR, VBR, and ABR connections, inpercent of cells. By default, this value is set to 90% of the shared buffer size.

-efcion <integer> The number of cells at which the ABR cells have the EFCI bit set, signalling that there iscongestion. The default for the on threshold is 64. The default for the off threshold is 1.


-efcioff <integer>1


The number of cells at which the ABR cells have the EFCI bit cleared, signalling that thereis no congestion. The default for the on threshold is 64. The default for the off thresholdis 1.

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.7.2 hardware netmod traffic sf1 show

This command lets you display traffic information on the Series SF1 network modules asfollows:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic sf1-> show

Module Priority EPD EFCI

ON OFF

4A ABR 90% 256 192

4A nrtVBR 90% N/A N/A

4A CBR-rtVBR 90% N/A N/A

4A UBR 90% N/A N/A


Field Description

Module The Series SF1 network module that has been configured.

Priority The specific class of traffic.

EPD The AAL5 packet drop threshold on this network module, in percent of the buffer size.

EFCI ON The threshold value at which the EFCI bit is set (turned on), signalling congestion, forABR traffic, in cells.

EFCI OFF The threshold value at which the EFCI bit is cleared (turned off), indicating no congestionfor ABR traffic, in cells.


Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.8 hardware netmod traffic pc1On an ASX-4000 switch, each port card contains two logical network modules (interfacegroups). These commands let you configure or display information about the traffic on thelogical network modules on Series 1 port cards. To list the available subcommands, type ? atthe pc1 level.

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc1-> ?







NOTEThe hardware netmod traffic pc1commands are only valid on an ASX-4000switch.


Hardware Commands

5.7.10.8.1 hardware netmod traffic pc1 channelStats

You can show channel traffic statistics for Series 1 port cards as follows:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc1-> channelStats



2A1 0 3 0 0 0 0

2A1 0 4 0 0 0 0

2A1 0 5 0 0 0 606

2A1 0 15 0 0 0 220774

2A1 0 16 0 0 0 35900

2A2 0 3 0 0 0 0

2A2 0 4 0 0 0 0

2A2 0 5 0 0 0 606

2A2 0 15 0 0 0 220774

2A2 0 16 0 0 0 35900



Field Description




Cells Lost Total The number of cells on this channel that were dropped by the output port card.

Cells Lost Intentional The number of cells dropped on this channel due to EPD (Early Packet Discard) or PPD(Partial Packet Discard). This field does not apply to Series 1 OC-48c port cards.

Cells Lost Unintentional The number of cells dropped on this channel due to output memory shortages or the CLP(Cell Loss Priority) threshold. This field does not apply to Series 1 OC-48c port cards.



Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.8.2 hardware netmod traffic pc1 customBCS

These commands let you configure or display custom UBR Behavior Class Selector (BCS)information on Series 1 port cards. To list the available subcommands, type ? at thecustomBCS level.

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc1 customBCS-> ?

default Show Default Series PC1 UBR BCS Configuration

defaultbcs Show Default Series PC1 UBR BCS Configuration

delete Remove Series PC1 custom UBR BCS configuration

modify Modify Series PC1 custom UBR BCS configuration

new Create new Series PC1 custom UBR BCS

configuration

show Display Series PC1 custom UBR BCS configuration


5.7.10.8.2.1 hardware netmod traffic pc1 customBCS default

This command lets you enter a BCS value on a Series 1 port card and have the switch returnthe corresponding weight. Enter the following parameters:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc1 customBCS-> default

Usage:





Hardware Commands

5.7.10.8.2.2 hardware netmod traffic pc1 customBCS defaultbcs

This command lets you use a pre-configured, default UBRbcs configuration on an individualSeries 1 port card, or on all Series 1 and Series 2 port cards in the switch. The pre-defined BCSvalues are 10000, 20000, and 30000. Enter the following parameter:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc1 customBCS-> defaultbcs ?



If a specific network module is entered, the default UBRbcs configuration is used just on thatnetwork module. If no network module is entered, the default configuration is applied to allSeries 1 and Series 2 port cards in the switch fabric.



5.7.10.8.2.3 hardware netmod traffic pc1 customBCS delete

This command lets you delete a custom UBRbcs configuration on a Series 1 port card. Enterthe following parameters:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc1 customBCS-> delete

Usage:






Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.8.2.4 hardware netmod traffic pc1 customBCS modify

This command lets you modify a custom UBRbcs configuration on a Series 1 port card. Enterthe following parameters:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc1 customBCS-> modify

Usage:





5.7.10.8.2.5 hardware netmod traffic pc1 customBCS new

This command lets you create a custom UBRbcs configuration on a Series 1 port card. Enterthe following parameters:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc1 customBCS-> new

Usage:



[-weight] <integer> Weight



-module <Netmod> The logical network module on a Series 1 port card to be configured.


-weight <integer> A user-assigned weight for this BCS. This number indicates how many cells get serviced


at a time from the UBR queue. The range of values is from 1 to 255. The default value (ofall UBR traffic) is 1, so this value should be greater than 1.

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.8.2.6 hardware netmod traffic pc1 customBCS show

This command lets you display custom UBRbcs configuration information on a Series 1 portcard. Enter the following parameters:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc1 customBCS-> show

Network

Module BCS Weight

1B 1 1

1B 2 2

1B 3 3

1B 4 4


Field Description

Network Module The logical network module on a Series 1 port card that has been configured.




Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.8.3 hardware netmod traffic pc1 models

This command allows you to display the different types of traffic memory models for a Series1 port card. Enter the following parameters:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc1-> models

Cell Table


1 1024Kx64 128Kx32 24576 512 131072 0 mcast512 -- default

2 1024Kx64 128Kx32 24576 512 65536 1 mcast512 -- one counter

3 1024Kx64 128Kx32 24576 512 32768 2 mcast512 -- two counters



6 1024Kx64 128Kx32 16384 1024 98304 1 mcast1K

7 1024Kx64 256Kx32 16384 1024 131072 2 mcast1K

8 2048Kx64 256Kx32 16384 1024 262144 2 mcast1K

9 2048Kx64 256Kx32 16384 2048 229376 2 mcast2K


Field Description

Model1 The shared memory model for this configuration. This is the number to enter for the-model parameter when using the hardware netmod traffic pc1 modify command.

Cell Memory2 The hardware configuration this shared memory model supports, in 64-bit words (x64).

Table Memory The hardware configuration this shared memory model supports, in 32-bit words (x32).


Mcasts3 The number of input multicast connections supported from the switch fabric to the logicalnetwork module by this shared memory configuration.


Counters The number of per-connection counters that is supported by this shared memoryconfiguration. 0 means there are no per-connection counters. 1 means there are


1. For proper operation, all Series 1 port cards in a fabric must use memory models that support the same number ofunicast connections. Additionally, their multicast spaces (indicated by their Name) must be compatible with what youhave configured under hardware fabric modify -index <board> -mcastspace.The Series 1 OC-12c port cards can only use the following traffic memory models: 5, 8, and 9. This command does notapply to Series 1 OC-48c port cards.

2. The Cell and Table Memory sizes determine which memory models are appropriate for a given logical network module.3. Only one multicast output is supported per port for each multicast connection.

per-connection counters for cells transmitted and for cells lost. 2 means there areper-connection counters for cells transmitted, for cells lost, for intentional cells lost, andfor unintentional cells lost.


Hardware Commands

5.7.10.8.4 hardware netmod traffic pc1 modify

This command lets you configure traffic on Series 1 port cards as follows:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc1-> modify

Usage:







[[-vbrpriority] (rt|nrt)] VBR Priority



-module <Netmod> The logical network module on a Series 1 port card to be configured.

-model1 <integer>2 The traffic memory model to be used for this logical network module on a Series 1 portcard. The predefined models make different trade-offs between the number of cellbuffers, the number of unicast and multicast connections, and the number ofper-connection counters. Enter the number found in the Model field of the hardwarenetmod traffic pc1 models command for the shared memory configuration that youwant to use.

-epd <percent> The threshold value, in a percent of cells, at which AAL5 Early Packet Discard (EPD) isactivated for CBR, VBR, and ABR connections on the logical network modules on Series 1port cards. AAL5 packets that arrive when the shared buffer is over this threshold arediscarded in whole. By default, this value is set to 90% of the shared buffer size.

-epdubr <percent> The threshold value, in a percent of cells, at which AAL5 Early Packet Discard (EPD) isactivated for UBR connections on the logical network modules on Series 1 port cards.AAL5 packets that arrive when the shared buffer is over this threshold are discarded inwhole. By default, this value is set to 90% of the shared buffer size.


1. For proper operation, all Series 1 port cards in a fabric must use memory models that support the same number ofunicast connections. Therefore, all Series 1 port cards in a fabric should either use model 5 or models 8-9.

2. The switch software must be restarted for this option to take effect.

-efcion <integer> The threshold, in cells, at which the ABR cells have the EFCI bit set, signalling congestionto downstream flow control mechanisms. Once this threshold is surpassed, EFCI continuesto be set until the queue empties below the -efcioff threshold. The default is 64.

-efcioff <integer> The threshold, in cells, at which the Available Bit Rate (ABR)3 cells have their explicitforward congestion indicator (EFCI) bit cleared, indicating no congestion. The default is 1.

3. The Series 1 port cards offer an ABR-ready ATM interface. A future ForeThought release will support ABR QoS operationon these interfaces. ABR options in the current release will apply in that ForeThought release.

-vbrpriority (rt|nrt) This option does not apply to the Series 1 port cards.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

NOTEThe -epd, -epdubr, -ecfion, and -efcioffoptions are not available on Series 1 OC-48c portcards.

5.7.10.8.5 hardware netmod traffic pc1 pathStats

You can show path traffic statistics for Series 1 port cards as follows:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc1-> pathstats



2A1 75 0 0 0 0

2A1 76 0 0 0 0


Field Description








Hardware Commands

5.7.10.8.6 hardware netmod traffic pc1 show

This command lets you display traffic model information on the Series 1 port cards. Theinformation is displayed for each module in the order in which they are installed in theswitch. In this example, 2A and 2B are logical network modules in an OC-12c port card and2D is a logical network module in an OC-48c port card. Enter the following parameters:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc1-> show

CBR-rtVBR-

Cell Table nrtVBR-ABR UBR EFCI EFCI


2A PC1 2048Kx64 256Kx32 5 90% 90% 64 1 N/A

2B PC1 2048Kx64 256Kx32 5 90% 90% 64 1 N/A


Field Description

Netmod The logical network module on a Series 1 port card that has been configured.

Series The series of port card this is.

Cell Memory The hardware configuration this memory model supports (x64).

Table Memory The hardware configuration this memory model supports (x32).

Model The shared memory model used for this logical network module. See hardware netmodtraffic pc1 models for more information.

CBR-rtVBR-nrtVBR-ABREPD

The AAL5 packet drop threshold for CBR, VBR, and ABR traffic on this logical networkmodule, in percent of the buffer size.



EFCI Off The threshold value at which the EFCI will be cleared (turned off), indicating no


1. The Series 1 port cards offer an ABR-ready ATM interface. A future ForeThought release will support ABR QoSoperation on these interfaces. ABR options in the current release will apply in that ForeThought release.

congestion for ABR traffic, in cells.

VBR-Queue This field does not apply to the Series 1 port cards.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.8.6.1 hardware netmod traffic pc1 show -statistics

This command lets you display additional traffic information for the Series 1 port cards.

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc1-> show -statistics



2A 20 0 0 253952 0

2B 20 0 0 253952 0


Field Description

Netmod The logical network module on a Series 1 port card for which information is beingdisplayed.

Unicast Connections The current number of active unicast connections on this logical network module.

Multicast Connections The current number of active multicast connections on this logical network module.

Current Cells The number of cells currently in the dedicated queues and in the shared memory for thislogical network module.

Shared Memory The amount of shared memory that is configured for this logical network module.

Used Memory The amount of shared memory currently being used on this logical network module.


Hardware Commands

5.7.10.9 hardware netmod traffic pc2On an ASX-4000 switch, each port card contains two logical network modules (interfacegroups). These commands let you configure or display information about the traffic on thelogical network modules on Series 2 port cards. To list the available subcommands, type ? atthe pc2 level.

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2-> ?

buffer> The buffer directory


modify Modify Series PC2 Netmod Traffic Configuration

show Display Series PC2 Netmod Traffic Configuration

5.7.10.9.1 hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffer

These commands lets you configure the buffer class or traffic type for Series 2 port cards. TheASICs in the Series 2 port cards provide a total of eight buffer classes. The first five classessupport ATM Forum TM4.0 traffic categories (base buffers for CBR, rtVBR, nrtVBR, ABR, andUBR service categories) and the remaining three classes can be used to create new bufferclasses. Default buffer classes cannot be deleted. To list the available subcommands, type ? atthe buffer level.

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffer-> ?

assign> The assign directory

delete Remove a buffer class

modify Modify a buffer class

new Create a new buffer class

show Display Series PC2 buffer classes


Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.9.1.1 hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffer assign

These commands let you create, remove, and display Series 2 buffer class assignments. Bufferclasses are assigned for the new subcategory created as per the UPC contract. Assignment of adifferent subcategory traffic into the base buffer of a service category is not allowed. Forexample, assigning part of nrt-VBR PVC traffic into the CBR base buffer is not allowed. Asubcategory cannot be assigned to two different buffer classes. ABR traffic can be served onlyby its base buffer class. Additionally, no other subcategory traffic can be assigned to ABRbuffer class. This is required because of the special characteristics of the ABR traffic (e.g., ERand RM cell features). All SVCs will be created with subcategory 1.

NOTEWhen a buffer class assignment is created ordeleted, a network module reset is required forthe command to take effect.

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffer assign-> ?

delete Remove a buffer class assignment

new Create a new buffer class assignment

show Display Series PC2 buffer class assignments

hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffer assign delete

This command lets you delete a buffer class assignment. A network module reset is requiredfor this command to take effect.

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffer assign-> delete

Usage:






These parameters are defined in the next section.

Hardware Commands

hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffer assign new

This command lets you create a new buffer class assignment. A network module reset isrequired for this command to take effect.

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffer assign-> new

Usage:





These parameters for delete and new are defined as follows:


-netmod <netmod> The logical network module on a Series 2 port card for which you are creating a newbuffer class assignment

-servcat <ServCat> The service category to which the buffer class assignment will apply. Can be CBR, rtVBR,nrtVBR, ABR, or UBR.

-subcat <integer (1..16)> The service subcategory for this buffer class assignment. A set of connections can begrouped within a service category. This index is used when assigning classes to a groupof connections on the Series 2 port cards on an ASX-4000 switch.

-buffer <text> The buffer class or traffic type.


Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffer assign show

This command lets you display buffer class assignment information.

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffer assign> show

Service Service Buffer

Netmod Category Sub-category Class

2C CBR default cbr_1

If buffer class assignments have not been created, the following displays:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffer assign-> show



5.7.10.9.1.2 hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffer delete

This command lets you remove a buffer class. A network module reset is required for thiscommand to take effect.

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffer-> delete

Field Description

Netmod Indicates the logical network module on a Series 2 port card for which a buffer classassignment applies.

Service Category Indicates the service category to which the buffer class assignment applies.

Service Sub-category Indicates the service subcategory for this buffer class assignment. A set of connections canbe grouped within a service category. This index is used when assigning classes to a groupof connections on the Series 2 port cards on an ASX-4000 switch.

Buffer Class Indicates the buffer class name.


Usage:





Hardware Commands

5.7.10.9.1.3 hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffer modify

This command lets you modify a buffer class. A network module reset is required for thiscommand to take effect.

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffer-> modify

Usage:





5.7.10.9.1.4 hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffer new

This command lets you create a new buffer class. A network module reset is required for thiscommand to take effect.

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffer-> new

Usage:



[[-epd] <percent>] EPD Threshold (default: 90%)



-netmod <netmod> The logical network module on a Series 2 port card for which you want to create a newbuffer class.

-buffer <text> The buffer class category.

-epd <percent> The threshold for AAL5 Early Packet Discard on this logical network module in percentof the buffer size. The default is 90%.


Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.9.1.5 hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffer show

This command lets you display buffer class information.

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffer> show

Buffer EPD

Netmod Name Threshold

2B ABR 90%

2B CBR 90%

2B UBR 90%

2B nrtVBR 90%

2B rtVBR 90%

2C ABR 90%

2C CBR 90%

2C UBR 90%

2C nrtVBR 90%

2C rtVBR 90%

2D ABR 90%

2D CBR 90%

2D UBR 90%

2D nrtVBR 90%

2D rtVBR 90%

2A ABR 90%

2A CBR 90%

2A UBR 90%

2A nrtVBR 90%

2A rtVBR 90%

If no buffer classes have been configured, the following displays:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffer-> show




Field Description

Netmod The logical network modules on a Series 2 port card.

Buffer Name The buffer class category for this logical network module.

EPD Threshold The threshold for AAL5 Early Packet Discard on this logical network module in percent ofthe buffer size. The default is 90%.

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.9.2 hardware netmod traffic pc2 customBCS

These commands let you configure or display custom UBR Behavior Class Selector (BCS)information on Series 2 port cards. To list the available subcommands, type ? at thecustomBCS level.

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2 customBCS-> ?

default Show Default Series PC2 UBR BCS Configuration

defaultbcs Show Default Series PC2 UBR BCS Configuration

delete Remove Series PC2 Custom UBR BCS Configuration

modify Modify Series PC2 Custom UBR BCS Configuration

new Create Series PC2 Custom UBR BCS Configuration

show Display Series PC2 Custom UBR BCS Configuration


5.7.10.9.2.1 hardware netmod traffic pc2 customBCS default

This command lets you enter a BCS value on a Series 2 port card and have the switch returnthe corresponding weight. Enter the following parameters:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2 customBCS-> default

Usage:





Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.9.2.2 hardware netmod traffic pc2 customBCS defaultbcs

This command lets you use a pre-configured, default UBRbcs configuration on an individualSeries 2 port card, or on all Series 1 and Series 2 port cards in the switch. The pre-defined BCSvalues are 10000, 20000, and 30000. Enter the following parameter:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2 customBCS-> defaultbcs ?



If a specific network module is entered, the default UBRbcs configuration is used just on thatnetwork module. If no network module is entered, the default configuration is applied to allSeries 1 and Series 2 port cards in the switch fabric.



5.7.10.9.2.3 hardware netmod traffic pc2 customBCS delete

This command lets you delete a custom UBRbcs configuration on a Series 2 port card. Enterthe following parameters:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2 customBCS-> delete

Usage:







Hardware Commands

5.7.10.9.2.4 hardware netmod traffic pc2 customBCS modify

This command lets you modify a custom UBRbcs configuration on a Series 2 port card. Enterthe following parameters:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2 customBCS-> modify

Usage:






5.7.10.9.2.5 hardware netmod traffic pc2 customBCS new

This command lets you create a custom UBRbcs configuration on a Series 2 port card. Enterthe following parameters:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2 customBCS-> new

Usage:







-netmod <netmod> The logical network module on a Series 2 port card to be configured.



-buffer <text> The user-assigned UBR buffer class for this BCS.

-weight <integer> A user-assigned weight for this BCS. This number indicates how many cells get servicedat a time from the UBR queue. The range of values is from 1 to 255. The default value (ofall UBR traffic) is 1, so this value should be greater than 1.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.9.2.6 hardware netmod traffic pc2 customBCS show

This command lets you display custom UBRbcs configuration information on a Series 2 portcard. Enter the following parameters:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2 customBCS-> show

Network

Module BCS Buffer Weight

1B 1 UBR 1

1B 2 UBR2 2

1B 3 UBR3 3

1B 4 UBR4 4


Field Description



Buffer The user-assigned buffer class for this BCS.



Hardware Commands

5.7.10.9.3 hardware netmod traffic pc2 modify

This command lets you modify Series 2 port card traffic configuration.

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2-> modify

Usage:


[[-ucastConns] <integer>] Unicast Connections



[[-aal5cntMode] (cell|packet)] AAL5 Counting Mode

[[-aal5cntOverride] (on|off)] AAL5 Counting Mode Override

[[-overbookingHw] (disabled|enabled)] Hardware Overbooking Switch



-netmod <netmod> The logical network module on a Series 2 port card to be configured.

-ucastConns <integer> The maximum number of unicast connections supported by this shared memoryconfiguration.

-efcion <integer> The threshold value at which the EFCI will be set (turned on), indicating congestion forABR traffic, in cells.

-efcioff <integer> The threshold value at which the EFCI will be cleared (turned off), indicating nocongestion for ABR traffic, in cells.

-aal5cntMode (cell|packet) The AAL5 counting mode by which the logical network module counts the number oftransmitted AAL5 PDUs. packet means AAL5 packets are counted when gatheringstatistics for AAL5 connections. cell means AAL5 cells are counted when gatheringstatistics for AAL5 connections.

-aal5cntOverride (on|off) This lets you override the current AAL5 counting mode at the per-connection level. onmeans the logical network module counts the number of transmitted AAL5 PDUs,regardless of the current counting mode at the per-connection level. off means thelogical network module does not count the number of transmitted AAL5 PDUs,


regardless of the current counting mode at the per-connection level. The default is off.

-overbookingHw(disabled|enabled)

disabled turns off nrtVBR and rtVBR overbooking in the hierarchical shaper on thisport card. The default is disabled.

enabled turns on nrtVBR and rtVBR overbooking in the hierarchical shaper on this portcard.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.9.4 hardware netmod traffic pc2 show

This command lets you display Series 2 port card traffic configuration information.

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2> show

Network Max Connections MDup EFCI EFCI Hardware

Module Ucast Mcast List On Off Overbooking

1A 126976 512 8184 256 192 disabled

1B 95232 512 6138 256 192 disabled

1C 126976 512 8184 256 192 disabled

1D 126976 512 8184 256 192 disabled

If Series 2 port card traffic has not been configured, the following displays:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2-> show



Field Description

Network Module The logical network module on a Series 2 port card.

Max Connections Ucast The total number of unicast connections that this logical network module can support.

Max Connections Mcast The total number of multicast connections that this logical network module can support.

MDup List The maximum number of multicast legs per port.

EFCI On The threshold value at which the EFCI will be set (turned on), indicating congestion forABR traffic, in cells.


Hardware Overbooking disabled turns off nrtVBR and rtVBR overbooking in the hierarchical shaper on this portcard.


enabled turns on nrtVBR and rtVBR overbooking in the hierarchical shaper on this portcard.

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.9.4.1 hardware netmod traffic pc2 show -aal5CntMode

This command lets you display Series 2 port card AAL5 counting mode configuration.

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2-> show -aal5CntMode

Network AAL5 Counting

Module Mode Override

2A packet off

2B packet off

2C packet off

2D packet off

If Series 2 port cards have not been configured, the following displays:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2-> show -aal5CntMode



Field Description


AAL5 Counting Mode The AAL5 counting mode by which the logical network module counts the number oftransmitted AAL5 PDUs. packet means AAL5 packets are counted when gatheringstatistics for AAL5 connections. cell means AAL5 cells are counted when gatheringstatistics for AAL5 connections.

AAL5 Counting Override Indicates whether the current AAL5 counting mode at the per-connection level can beoverridden. on means the logical network module counts the number of transmittedAAL5 PDUs, regardless of the current counting mode at the per-connection level. offmeans the logical network module does not count the number of transmitted AAL5 PDUs,regardless of the current counting mode at the per-connection level. The default is off.


Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.9.4.2 hardware netmod traffic pc2 show -memory

This command lets you display Series 2 port card memory configuration information.

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2-> show -memory

Network Cell Table Scheduler Shared

Module Memory Memory Memory Memory

2A 512K 2048Kx32 1024Kx32 516992

2B 512K 2048Kx32 1024Kx32 516992

2C 512K 2048Kx32 1024Kx32 501632

2D 384K 1536Kx32 768Kx32 376224

If no Series 2 port cards have been configured, the following displays:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2-> show -memory



Field Description


Cell Memory The hardware configuration this memory model supports.

Table Memory The hardware configuration this memory model supports, in 32-bit words (x32).

Scheduler Memory The scheduler memory size, in 32-bit words (x32).

Shared Memory The total amount of cell buffering that is supported by this shared memory configuration.


Hardware Commands

5.7.10.9.4.3 hardware netmod traffic pc2 show -stats

This command lets you display Series 2 port card statistics information.

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2-> show -stats

Network Current Connections MDup Cells

Module Ucast Mcast Used Buffered

2A 11 0 0 4

2B 8 0 0 4

2C 85 0 0 4

2D 64 0 0 3

If no Series 2 port cards have been configured, the following displays:

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2-> show -stats



Field Description


Current Connections Ucast The current number of active unicast connections on this logical network module.

Current Connections Mcast The current number of active multicast connections on this logical network module.

MDup Used The maximum number of multicast legs used per port.

Cells Buffered The current number of cells buffered.


Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.8 hardware port

These commands let you manage the configuration of the various ports. Type ? at the portlevel to display the available subcommands.

myswitch:hardware port-> ?

ds1> The ds1 directory

ds3> The ds3 directory

e1> The e1 directory

e3> The e3 directory


j2> The j2 directory

modify Set port admin status to up/down

show Display port configuration

sonet> The sonet directory

taxi> The taxi directory

tp25> The tp25 directory


NOTENot all of the above menus are displayed onevery platform. The ds1>, ds3>, e1>, e3>,ethernet>, j2>, taxi>, and tp25> menus areonly displayed on platforms that can supportthese types of connections.


Hardware Commands

5.8.1 hardware port ds1These commands allow you to modify various aspects of the configuration of the ports on aDS1 network module. The DS1 commands are available only when a DS1 network module isinstalled in the switch fabric. To list the available subcommands, type ? at the ds1 level.

myswitch:hardware port ds1-> ?

errors> The errors directory

modify Modify DS1 port configuration parameters

show Display DS1 port configuration

statistics Display ds1 statistics

5.8.1.1 hardware port ds1 errorsThis submenu lets you configure bit error rate (BER) parameters on a DS1 network module.You can display the list of available subcommands by typing ? at the errors level.

myswitch:hardware port ds1 errors-> ?

modify Modify DS1 port BER configuration parameters

show Display DS1 port BER configuration


Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.8.1.1.1 hardware port ds1 errors modify

This command lets you modify error thresholds on a DS1 network module as follows:

myswitch:hardware port ds1 errors-> modify

Usage:

[-port] <BNP> Port

[[-errormodel] (none|random|bursty)] BER Error Model

[[-seconds] <integer>] CRC Defect Seconds Threshold

[[-errors] <integer>] CRC Defect Errors Threshold

[[-failenable] (enabled|disabled)] Fail on Excessive Errors

[[-sfber] <integer>] Sig Fail BER

[[-sdber] <integer>] Sig Degrade BER



-port <BNP> The port number of the DS1 network module to be configured.

-errormodel(none|random|bursty)

The error distribution model which identifies signal degrade and signal fail conditions:

• random selects a random error distribution and declares signal conditions based onthe thresholds set under -sfber <integer> and -sdber <integer>.

• bursty selects a burst error model and declares signal degrade conditions based onthe thresholds set in under -seconds <integer> and -errors <integer>.

• none disables the detection of signal conditions.

-seconds <integer> The consecutive number of bad/good seconds to detect/clear an Excessive CRC ErrorDefect. This parameter is only applicable when the Error Model field under hardwareport ds1 errors show is set to bursty. The range of values is from 2 to 10. The defaultvalue is 10 seconds.

-errors <integer> The threshold for the number of CRC errors per second. If the number of errors exceedsthe threshold, the particular second is declared bad; otherwise it is declared good. Thisparameter is only applicable when the Error Model field under hardware port ds1errors show is set to bursty.

-failenable enabled means that when an Excessive CRC Error Defect is declared, the port’s


(enabled|disabled) operational state is forced to down.

disabled means that when an Excessive CRC Error Defect is declared, no action is takenon the port’s operational state.

-sfber <integer> The exponent of 10 for the current signal fail bit error rate (BER) threshold for this port.For example, the value -4 represents a BER of 10-4. The clearing threshold is always one-tenth of the declaring threshold. This parameter is only applicable when the ErrorModel field under hardware port ds1 errors show is set to random.

-sdber <integer> The exponent of 10 for the current signal degrade bit error rate (BER) threshold for thisport. For example, the value -8 represents a BER of 10-8. The clearing threshold is alwaysone-tenth of the declaring threshold. This parameter is only applicable when the ErrorModel field under hardware port ds1 errors show is set to random.

Hardware Commands

5.8.1.1.2 hardware port ds1 errors show

This command lets you display the BER configuration on a DS1 network module as follows:

myswitch:hardware port ds1 errors-> show

Port State ErrorModel FailEnable Seconds Errors SF SD

1D1 OK random disabled N/A N/A -3 -5



Field Description

Port The port number of each DS1 network module currently installed.

State The current state of the port as determined through bit error rate analysis. Can be one ofthe following:

• OK - The port is functioning normally.

• SD - The port is experiencing signal degradation.

• SF - The port is experiencing signal failure.

ErrorModel The error distribution model which identifies signal degrade and signal fail conditions:




FailEnable enabled means that when an Excessive CRC Error Defect is declared, the port’soperational state is forced to down.

disabled means that when an Excessive CRC Error Defect is declared, no action is takenon the port’s operational state.

Seconds The consecutive number of bad/good seconds to detect/clear an Excessive CRC ErrorDefect. This parameter is only applicable when the Error Model field is set to bursty.

Errors The threshold for the number of CRC errors per second. If the number of errors exceeds


the threshold, the particular second is declared bad; otherwise it is declared good. Thisparameter is only applicable when the Error Model field is set to bursty.

SF The exponent of 10 for the current signal fail bit error rate (BER) threshold for this port.For example, the value -4 represents a BER of 1E-4. This parameter is only applicable whenthe Error Model field is set to random.

SD The exponent of 10 for the current signal degrade bit error rate (BER) threshold for thisport. For example, the value -8 represents a BER of 1E-8. This parameter is only applicablewhen the Error Model field is set to random.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.8.1.2 hardware port ds1 modifyThis command lets you configure DS1 network modules as follows:

myswitch:hardware port ds1-> modify

Usage:

[-port] <BNP> Port

[[-mode] (hcs|plcp)] Mode

[[-loopback] <loopback>] Loopback Config

[[-timing] (network|internal)] Timing

[[-prbs] <prbs>] PRBS

[[-scrambling] (on|off)] Scrambling

[[-length] <ds1length_type>] Line Length

[[-emptycells] (unassigned|idle)] Empty Cells




-mode (hcs|plcp) plcp means that the port uses PLCP (Physical Layer Convergence Protocol) framing(G.751) for cell delineation.

hcs means that the port uses HCS (Header Check Sequence) based framing (G.832) forcell delineation. The default is hcs.

-loopback <loopback> The type of loopback:

• Line connects the transmitter to the receiver. The data stream received from the line isretransmitted out to the line. Cells switched to this port are not sent over the line.

• Payload means the DS1 stream received from the network has the DS1 overhead bitsre-inserted and is retransmitted to the network.

• Diagnostic connects the receiver to the transmitter. The DS1 stream transmitted bythe SCP to a port is looped back to the SCP. The stream is still transmitted over thecable, but the incoming stream is ignored.

• None means no loopback will take place on this port. The default is none.


-timing (network|internal) The transmit clock for this port.

• network means that the clock that is recovered from the receive line of this port isused to drive the transmit line of this port.

• internal means that the internal clock is used to drive the transmit line of this port.

-prbs <prbs> on means that PRBS is enabled on this port and the Pseudo-Random Bit SequenceGenerator (PRSG) will provide an unframed 2^15-1 test sequence as defined inRecommendation O.151 on this port.

off means that PRBS is disabled on this port. The default is off.

-scrambling (on|off) on indicates that cell payload scrambling is enabled on this port.

off means that cell payload scrambling is disabled on this port. Only the payload of theATM cells is scrambled. The default is off.

Hardware Commands

-length <ds1length_type> Lt110 means the physical cable is shorter than 110 ft.

110-220 means the physical cable is between 110 and 220 ft.





Gt6551 means the physical cable is greater than 655 ft.

Lt110A2 means the physical cable is shorter than 110 ft.

110-220A means the physical cable is between 110 and 220 ft.





Gt655A means the physical cable is greater than 655 ft.

-emptycells(unassigned|idle)3

The type of cells this port sends for filler when the port is not sending data:

• idle cells set the CLP bit=1.

• unassigned cells set the CLP bit=0. Idle=invalid cell pattern andunassigned=unassigned. The default is unassigned.

1. The DS1 network module is designed to meet all applicable requirements up to 655 feet of cable. Operation with cablesgreater than 655 feet in length is not guaranteed.

2. Series C, Revision 2, network modules with ACCA0055 part numbers should use ONLY the parameters that areappended with an A (e.g., Lt110A). To check the Series and Revision numbers, use the hardware netmod showcommand and look under the Series and Rev. fields, respectively. To check the Part number (ACCA####), remove thenetwork module from the switch, and look at either the right edge of the top of the printed circuit board, or the top ofthe rear connector.

3. Refer to page 57 of the ATM Forum 3.0 Specification for more information. In general, it is not necessary to change thisparameter from the default setting.



Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.8.1.3 hardware port ds1 showThis command allows you to display current information about all of the ports on a DS1network module. Enter the following parameters:

myswitch:hardware port ds1-> show

Port Carrier Stat Mode Framing Loopback Timing PRBS Scram Length EmptyCells

1D1 no 292 hcs ESF none internal N/A off Lt110 unassigned

1D2 no 292 hcs ESF none internal N/A off Lt110 unassigned


Field Description


Carrier1 yes means a carrier has been detected on this port. no means a carrier has not beendetected.

Stat The DS1 line status of the port.

Mode plcp means that the port uses PLCP (Physical Layer Convergence Protocol) framing forcell delineation. hcs means the port uses HCS (Header Check Sequence) cell delineation.

Framing The type of framing used for the port. The type of circuit affects the number of bits persecond that the circuit can reasonably carry, as well as the interpretation of the usage anderror statistics. This is a read-only field.

Loopback The loopback mode on the port. Can be: none, line, payload, or diagnostic.

Timing The transmit clock for this port. network means that the clock that is recovered from thereceive line of this port is used to drive the transmit line of this port. internal meansthat the internal clock is used to drive the transmit line of this port.

PRBS on means that PRBS is enabled on this port and the Pseudo-Random Bit SequenceGenerator (PRSG) will provide an unframed 2^15-1 test sequence as defined inRecommendation O.151. off means that PRBS is disabled on this port.

Scram on means that payload scrambling is enabled on this port. off means that payloadscrambling is disabled on this port.


1. A carrier is detected when a signal is applied to the receive side of the port. It does not guarantee that the signal is theproper frequency.

Length The length of the physical cable that is attached to this port.

EmptyCells2

2. Please refer to page 57 of the ATM Forum 3.0 Specification for more information. In general, it is not necessary tochange this parameter from the default setting.

The type of cells this port sends for filler when the port is not sending data. Idle cells setthe CLP bit=1 and unassigned cells set the CLP bit=0. Idle=invalid cell pattern andunassigned=unassigned.

Hardware Commands

5.8.1.4 hardware port ds1 statisticsYou can display statistics about all of the DS1 network modules in an individual switch fabricby entering statistics at the ds1 level. This command is available only when at least oneDS1 network module is installed in the switch fabric.

myswitch:hardware port ds1-> statistics

DS1 port 4D1 counter Value Delta

----------------------------------- ---------- -----------

ds1FramingLOSs 0 (0)

ds1FramingLCVs 0 (0)

ds1FramingFERRs 0 (0)

ds1FramingOOFs 0 (0)

ds1FramingAISs 0 (0)

ds1FramingB8ZSPatterns 0 (0)

ds1Framing8Zeros 0 (0)

ds1Framing16Zeros 0 (0)

ds1FramingYellowAlarms 0 (0)

ds1FramingRedAlarms 0 (0)

ds1FramingBEEs 0 (0)

ds1FramingPRBSs 0 (0)

ds1FramingBERs 0 (0)

ds1PlcpBIP8s 0 (0)

ds1PlcpFERRs 0 (0)

ds1PlcpFEBEs 0 (0)

ds1PlcpLOFs 0 (0)

ds1PlcpYellows 0 (0)

ds1AtmHCSs 0 (0)

ds1AtmRxCells 1033962 (1033962)

ds1AtmTxCells 1071617 (1071617)

ds1AtmUHCSs 0 (0)


ds1AtmCHCSs 0 (0)

ds1AtmLCDs 0 (0)


NOTEThe Value column shows the current value of thecounter. The Delta column shows the change inthe counter since the last time you checked thisvalue. The counters are reset when the switch isrestarted or when a network module is replaced.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

NOTEThe PLCP counters increment only when theDS1 network module is running in the PLCPmode, but the HCS counter always increments,regardless of which mode is running. The PLCPcounters do not apply to Series D DS1 networkmodules.


Field Description

ds1FramingLOSs The number of seconds in which Loss Of Signal (LOS) errors have been detected.

ds1FramingLCVs The number of Line Code Violations (LCV) that have been detected.

ds1FramingFERRs The number of DS1 framing error (FERR) events that have been detected.

ds1FramingOOFs The number of DS1 Out Of Frame (OOF) error events that have been detected.

ds1FramingAISs The number of seconds in which Alarm Indication Signals (AIS) were detected by the DS1Receive Framer block. AIS means an upstream failure has been detected by the far end.

ds1FramingB8ZSPatterns The number of seconds in which B8ZS Pattern events have been detected.

ds1Framing8Zeros The number of seconds in which 8 Zeros events have been detected.

ds1Framing16Zeros The number of seconds in which 16 Zeros events have been detected.

ds1FramingYellowAlarms The number of seconds in which Yellow Alarm events have been detected.

ds1FramingRedAlarms The number of seconds in which Red Alarm events have been detected.

ds1FramingBEEs The number of Bit Encoding Error (BEE) events that have been detected.

ds1FramingPRBSs The number of seconds in which Pseudo Random Bit Sequence (PRBS) patterns have beendetected.

ds1FramingBERs The number of PRBS Bit Error events that have been detected.

ds1PlcpBIP8s The number of BIP-8 (Bit Interleaved Parity-8) error events. The BIP-8 is calculated overthe Path Overhead field and the associated ATM cell of the previous PLCP frame. A BIP-Nis a method of error monitoring. An N-bit code is generated by the transmitting


equipment in such a manner that the first bit of the code provides even parity over thefirst bit of all N-bit sequences in the previous VT SPE, the second bit provides even parityover the second bits of all N-bit sequences within the specified portion, etc.

ds1PlcpFERRs The number of Physical Layer Convergence Protocol (PLCP) octet error events.

ds1PlcpFEBEs The number of ATM Far End Block Error (FEBE) events.

ds1PlcpLOFs The number of seconds in which Loss Of Frame (LOF) errors were detected by the PLCP(Physical Layer Convergence Protocol) receiver. LOF is declared when an Out Of Framestate persists for more than 1ms. LOF is removed when an in-frame state persists for morethan 12ms.

Hardware Commands

5.8.2 hardware port ds3These commands let you modify various aspects of the configuration of the ports on a DS3network module. These commands are available only when a DS3 network module isinstalled in the switch fabric. You can display the list of available subcommands by typing ? atthe ds3 level.

myswitch:hardware port ds3-> ?


modify Modify DS3 port configuration parameters

show Display DS3 port configuration

statistics Display ds3 statistics

DS3 Series E network modules do not use these

ds1PlcpYellows The number of seconds in which Yellow alarm errors were detected by the PLCP (PhysicalLayer Convergence Protocol) receiver. A yellow alarm is asserted when 10 consecutiveyellow signal bits are set to logical 1. Yellow signals are used to alert upstream terminals ofa downstream failure in order to initiate trunk conditioning on the failure circuit.

ds1AtmHCSs The number of header check sequence (HCS) error events. The HCS is a CRC-8 calculationover the first 4 octets of the ATM cell header.

ds1AtmRxCells The number of ATM cells that were received, not including idle/unassigned cells.

ds1AtmTxCells The number of ATM cells that were sent, not including idle/unassigned cells.

ds1AtmUHCSs The number of uncorrectable header check sequence (UHCS) error events. The HCS is aCRC-8 calculation over the first 4 octets of the ATM cell header.

ds1AtmCHCSs The number of correctable header check sequence (CHCS) error events. The HCS is aCRC-8 calculation over the first 4 octets of the ATM cell header.

ds1AtmLCDs The number of seconds in which Loss of Cell Delineation (LCD) has occurred. An LCDdefect is detected when an out of cell delineation state has persisted for 4ms. An LCDdefect is cleared when the sync state has been maintained for 4ms.

Field Description


NOTE commands. DS3 Series E network modules usethe commands under interfaces dsx3.

5.8.2.1 hardware port ds3 errorsThis submenu lets you configure bit error rate (BER) parameters on a DS3 network module.You can display the list of available subcommands by typing ? at the errors level.

myswitch:hardware port ds3 errors-> ?

modify Modify DS3 port BER configuration parameters

show Display DS3 port BER configuration

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.8.2.1.1 hardware port ds3 errors modify

This command lets you modify error thresholds on a DS3 network module as follows:

myswitch:hardware port ds3 errors-> modify

Usage:

[-port] <BNP> Port


[[-seconds] <integer>] Pbit Parity Defect Seconds Threshold

[[-errors] <integer>] Pbit Parity Defect Errors Threshold


[[-sfber] <integer>] Sig Fail BER Thresh

[[-sdber] <integer>] Sig Degrade BER Thresh





The error distribution model which identifies signal degrade and signal fail conditions:




-seconds <integer> The consecutive number of bad/good seconds to detect/clear an Excessive P-bit ParityError Defect. This parameter is only applicable when the Error Model field underhardware port ds3 errors show is set to bursty. The range of values is from 2 to 10.The default value is 10 seconds.

-errors <integer> The threshold for the number of P-bit Parity Errors per second. If the number of errorsexceeds the threshold, the particular second is declared bad; otherwise it is declared good.This parameter is only applicable when the Error Model field under hardware portds3 errors show is set to bursty.

-failenable enabled means that when an Excessive P-bit Parity Error Defect is declared, the port’s


(enabled|disabled) operational state is forced to down.

disabled means that when an Excessive P-bit Parity Error Defect is declared, no action istaken on the port’s operational state.

-sfber <integer> The exponent of 10 for the current signal fail bit error rate (BER) threshold for this port.For example, the value -4 represents a BER of 10-4. The clearing threshold is always one-tenth of the declaring threshold. This parameter is only applicable when the ErrorModel field under hardware port ds3 errors show is set to random.

-sdber <integer> The exponent of 10 for the current signal degrade bit error rate (BER) threshold for thisport. For example, the value -8 represents a BER of 10-8. The clearing threshold is alwaysone-tenth of the declaring threshold. This parameter is only applicable when the ErrorModel field under hardware port ds3 errors show is set to random.

Hardware Commands

5.8.2.1.2 hardware port ds3 errors show

This command lets you display the BER configuration on a DS3 network module as follows:

myswitch:hardware port ds3 errors-> show





Field Description


State The current state of the port as determined through bit error rate analysis. Can be one ofthe following:

• OK - The port is functioning normally.

• SD - The port is experiencing signal degradation.

• SF - The port is experiencing signal failure.

ErrorModel The error distribution model which identifies signal degrade and signal fail conditions:




FailEnable enabled means that when an Excessive P-bit Parity Error Defect is declared, the port’soperational state is forced to down.

disabled means that when an Excessive P-bit Parity Error Defect is declared, no action istaken on the port’s operational state.

Seconds The consecutive number of bad/good seconds to detect/clear an Excessive P-bit ParityError Defect. This parameter is only applicable when the Error Model field is set tobursty. The range of values is from 2 to 10. The default value is 10 seconds.


Errors The threshold for the number of P-bit Parity Errors per second. If the number of errorsexceeds the threshold, the particular second is declared bad; otherwise it is declared good.This parameter is only applicable when the Error Model field is set to bursty.

SF The exponent of 10 for the current signal fail bit error rate (BER) threshold for this port.For example, the value -4 represents a BER of 1E-4. This parameter is only applicable whenthe Error Model field is set to random.

SD The exponent of 10 for the current signal degrade bit error rate (BER) threshold for thisport. For example, the value -8 represents a BER of 1E-8. This parameter is only applicablewhen the Error Model field is set to random.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.8.2.2 hardware port ds3 modifyThis command lets you configure DS3 network modules as follows:

myswitch:hardware port ds3-> modify

[-port] <BNP> Port


[[-framing] (cbit|cchannel)] Framing




[[-length] (Lt225|Gt225)] Line Length





-mode (hcs|plcp) plcp means the port uses PLCP (Physical Layer Convergence Protocol) framing for celldelineation. hcs means the port uses HCS (Header Check Sequence) based framing forcell delineation. The default is hcs.

-framing (cbit|cchannel) The type of framing for the port. cchannel (clearchannel) means that standard M23framing is used on this port. The default is cbit (cbitparity).


• cell loopback means that the DS3 stream received from the network is unframed intoATM cells. The cells are reframed and transmitted back to the network.

• payload loopback mean the DS3 stream received from the network has the DS3overhead bits re-inserted and is retransmitted to the network.

• diagnostic loopback connects the receiver to the transmitter. The DS3 streamtransmitted by the switch to a port is looped back to the switch. The DS3 stream is stilltransmitted to the network, but the incoming DS3 stream is ignored.

• line loopback connects the transmitter to the receiver. The data stream received fromthe line is retransmitted out to the line. Cells that are switched to this port are not sentover the line.


• none designates that no loopback will take place on this port. This is the default.

-timing (network|internal) The transmit clock for this port. network means that the clock that is recovered from thereceive line of this port is used to drive the transmit line of this port. internal meansthat the internal clock is used to drive the transmit line of this port.

-scrambling (on|off) on means that cell payload scrambling is enabled on this port. off means that cellpayload scrambling is disabled on this port. The default is on.

-length (Lt225|Gt225) Use Lt225 if the physical cable is shorter than 225 ft. Use Gt225 if the physical cable isgreater than 225 ft. Gt225 is the default.

-emptycells(unassigned|idle)

The type of cells this port sends for filler when the port is not sending data. Idle cells setthe CLP bit=1 and unassigned cells set the CLP bit=0. Idle=invalid cell pattern andunassigned=unassigned. The default is unassigned.

Hardware Commands

5.8.2.3 hardware port ds3 showThis command allows you to display current information about all of the ports on the DS3network module. Enter the following parameters:

myswitch:hardware port ds3-> show

Port Carrier Stat Mode Framing Loopback Timing Scram Length EmptyCells

1A1 no 292 plcp cbit none internal off Gt225 unassigned





Field Description

Port The DS3 port number of the network module(s) currently installed in the switch.

Carrier1 yes means a carrier has been detected on this port. no means a carrier has not beendetected on this port. A carrier is detected when a signal is applied to the receive side ofthe port, but it does not guarantee the signal is the proper frequency.

Stat The DS3 line status of the port.

Mode Plcp means the port uses PLCP (Physical Layer Convergence Protocol) framing for celldelineation. Hcs means the port uses HCS (Header Check Sequence) based framing forcell delineation.

Framing The type of framing used for the port. Can be cchannel or cbit.

Loopback The loopback mode on the port. Can be cell, payload, diagnostic, line, or none.


Scram On means payload scrambling is enabled on the port. Off means payload scrambling isdisabled on the port.


1. A carrier is detected when a signal is applied to the receive side of the port, but it does not guarantee the signal is theproper frequency.

Length The length of the physical cable that is attached to this port. Lt225 means the cable is lessthan 225 ft. Gt225 means the cable is greater than 225 ft.

EmptyCells2


The type of cells this port sends for filler when the port is not sending data. Idle cells setthe CLP bit = 1 and unassigned cells set the CLP bit = 0. Idle = invalid cell pattern andunassigned = unassigned.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.8.2.4 hardware port ds3 statisticsYou can list statistics about all of the DS3 network modules in an individual switch fabric byentering statistics at the ds3 level. This command is available only when at least one DS3network module is installed in the switch fabric.

myswitch:hardware port ds3-> statistics

DS3 port 4A1 counter Value Delta

----------------------------------- ---------- -----------

ds3FramingLOSs 0

ds3FramingLCVs 65535

ds3FramingSumLCVs 65535

ds3FramingFERRs 1023

ds3FramingOOFs 0

ds3FramingFERFs 0

ds3FramingAISs 0

ds3FramingPbitPERRs 1976

ds3FramingCbitPERRs 16383

ds3FramingFEBEs 8756

ds3FramingIDLEs 0

ds3PlcpFERRs 288

ds3PlcpLOFs 4

ds3PlcpBIP8s 6

ds3PlcpFEBEs 0

ds3PlcpYellows 0

ds3AtmHCSs 95

ds3AtmRxCells 1067397

ds3AtmTxCells 1075163

ds3AtmLCDs 0



NOTEAll of the PLCP counters listed above incrementonly when the DS3 network module is runningin the PLCP mode. However, the HCS counteralways increments, regardless of which mode isrunning.

Hardware Commands



Field Description

ds3FramingLOSs The number of seconds in which Loss Of Signal (LOS) errors were detected by the DS3Receive Framer block.

ds3FramingLCVs The number of Line Code Violations (LCV) detected by the DS3 Receive Framer block.

ds3FramingSumLCVs The number of DS3 information blocks (85 bits) which contain one or more Line CodeViolations (LCV).

ds3FramingFERRs The number of DS3 framing error (FERR) events.

ds3FramingOOFs The number of seconds in which DS3 Out Of Frame (OOF) error events occurred.

ds3FramingFERFs The number of seconds in which a Far End Receive Failure (FERF) state has been detectedby the DS3 Receive Framer block. The FERF signal alerts the upstream terminal that afailure has been detected along the downstream line.

ds3FramingAISs The number of seconds in which Alarm Indication Signals (AIS) were detected by the DS3Receive Framer block. AIS means an upstream failure has been detected by the far end.

ds3FramingPbitPERRs The number of P-bit parity error (PERR) events.

ds3FramingCbitPERRs The number of C-bit parity error (PERR) events.

ds3FramingFEBEs The number of DS3 far end block error (FEBE) events.

ds3FramingIDLEs The number of seconds in which an IDLE signal was detected by the DS3 Receive Framerblock.

ds3PlcpFERRs The number of Physical Layer Convergence Protocol (PLCP) octet error events.

ds3PlcpLOFs The number of seconds in which Loss Of Frame (LOF) errors were detected by the PLCP(Physical Layer Convergence Protocol) receiver. LOF is declared when an Out-Of-Frame


state persists for more than 1ms. LOF is removed when an in-frame state persists for morethan 12ms.

ds3PlcpBIP8s The number of BIP-8 (Bit Interleaved Parity-8) error events. The BIP-8 is calculated overthe Path Overhead field and the associated ATM cell of the previous PLCP frame. A BIP-Nis a method of error monitoring. An N-bit code is generated by the transmittingequipment in such a manner that the first bit of the code provides even parity over thefirst bit of all N-bit sequences in the previous VT SPE, the second bit provides even parityover the second bits of all N-bit sequences within the specified portion, etc.

ds3PlcpFEBEs The number of ATM Far End Block Error (FEBE) events.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

ds3PlcpYellows The number of seconds in which Yellow alarm errors were detected by the PLCP (PhysicalLayer Convergence Protocol) receiver. A yellow alarm is asserted when 10 consecutiveyellow signal bits are set to logical 1. Yellow signals are used to alert upstream terminals ofa downstream failure in order to initiate trunk conditioning on the failure circuit.

ds3AtmHCSs The number of the header check sequence (HCS) error events. The HCS is a CRC-8calculation over the first 4 octets of the ATM cell header.

ds3AtmRxCells The number of ATM cells that were received, not including idle/unassigned cells.

ds3AtmTxCells The number of ATM cells that were sent, not including idle/unassigned cells.

ds3AtmLCDs The number of seconds in which Loss of Cell Delineation (LCD) has occurred. An LCDdefect is detected when an out of cell delineation state has persisted for 4ms. An LCDdefect is cleared when the sync state has been maintained for 4ms.

Field Description


Hardware Commands

5.8.3 hardware port e1These commands allow you to modify the configuration of the ports on an E1 networkmodule. These commands are available only when an E1 network module is installed in theswitch fabric. To display the list of available subcommands, type ? at the e1 level.

myswitch:hardware port e1-> ?

modify Modify E1 port configuration parameters

show Display E1 port configuration

statistics Display e1 statistics

5.8.3.1 hardware port e1 modifyThis command lets you configure E1 network modules as follows:

myswitch:hardware port e1-> modify

Usage:

[-port] <BNP> Port





[[-length] <e1length_type>] Line Length




-port <BNP> The number of the E1 port to be configured.

-mode (hcs|plcp)1 plcp means that the port uses PLCP (Physical Layer Convergence Protocol) framing


(G.751) for cell delineation. hcs means that the port uses HCS (Header Check Sequence)based framing (G.832) for cell delineation. The default is hcs.


• Line loopback connects the transmitter to the receiver. The data stream received fromthe line is retransmitted out to the line. Cells that are switched to this port are not sentover the line.

• Payload loopback means the stream received from the network has the E1 overheadbits re-inserted and is retransmitted to the network.

• Diagnostic loopback connects the receiver to the transmitter. The E1 streamtransmitted by the SCP to a port is looped back to the SCP. The stream is still transmit-ted over the cable, but the incoming stream is ignored.

• None means that no loopback will take place on this port. The default is none.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

-timing (network|internal) The transmit clock for this port:



-scrambling (on|off) on indicates that cell payload scrambling is enabled on this port.

off means that cell payload scrambling is disabled on this port. Only the payload of theATM cells is scrambled. The default is on.

-length <e1length_type>2 Lt110 means the physical cable is shorter than 110 ft.






G703-75 means the physical cable is a G703 standard 75 ohm coaxial line.

G703-120 means the physical cable is a G703 standard 120 ohm symmetrical line.

Lt110A means the physical cable is shorter than 110 ft.






G703-75A means the physical cable is a G703 standard 75 ohm coaxial line.

G703-120A means the physical cable is a G703 standard 120 ohm symmetrical line.




• unassigned cells set the CLP bit=0. Idle=invalid cell pattern andunassigned=unassigned. The default is idle.

1. This parameter is only available on Series C E1 network modules.2. Series C, Revision 2, network modules with ACCA0055 part numbers should use ONLY the parameters that are



appended with an A (e.g., Lt110A). To check the Series and Revision numbers, use the hardware netmod showcommand and look under the Series and Rev. fields, respectively. To check the Part number (ACCA####), remove thenetwork module from the switch, and look at either the right edge of the top of the printed circuit board, or the top ofthe rear connector.


Hardware Commands

5.8.3.2 hardware port e1 showThis command lets you display information about all of the ports on E1 network modules.Enter the following parameters:

myswitch:hardware port e1-> show

Port Carrier Stat Mode LineType Loopback Timing Scram Length EmptyCells

4B1 no 580 N/A CRC none internal on Lt110 idle





Field Description

Port The port numbers of each E1 network module currently installed in the switch fabric.

Carrier1 yes means a carrier has been detected on this port.

no means it has not been detected.

Stat The E1 line status of the port.

Mode plcp means that the port uses PLCP framing for cell delineation.

hcs means that the port uses HCS cell delineation.

LineType The variety of E1 line implementing this circuit. The type of circuit affects the number ofbits per second that the circuit can reasonably carry, as well as the interpretation of theusage and error statistics. This parameter is read-only.

Loopback The loopback mode on the port.

Timing The transmit clock for this port:



Scram on means that payload scrambling is enabled on this port. off means that it is disabled.



Length The length of the physical cable that is attached to this port.

EmptyCells2




• unassigned cells set the CLP bit=0. Idle=invalid cell pattern andunassigned=unassigned.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.8.3.3 hardware port e1 statisticsYou can display statistics about all of the E1 network modules in an individual switch fabricby entering statistics at the e1 level. This command is available only when at least one E1network module is installed in the switch fabric.

myswitch:hardware port e1-> statistics

e1 Port 1D1 Counter Value Delta

------------------------------ -------------- --------------

e1FramingLCVs 0 0

e1FramingFERRs 0 0

e1FramingFEBEs 0 0

e1FramingCRCs 0 0

e1FramingOOFs 1 0

e1FramingLOSs 0 0

e1FramingAISs 0 0

e1FramingAISDs 0 0

e1FramingRedAlarms 0 0

e1FramingYellowAlarms 0 0

e1PlcpBIP8s 0 0

e1PlcpFERRs 0 0

e1PlcpFEBEs 0 0

e1PlcpLOFs 844 17

e1PlcpYellows 0 0

e1AtmHCSs 0 0

e1AtmRxCells 19007 264

e1AtmTxCells 19352 264

e1AtmUHCSs 0 0

e1AtmCHCSs 0 0

e1AtmLCHDs 0 0



NOTEThe PLCP counters increment only when the E1network module is running in the PLCP mode,but the HCS counter always increments,regardless of which mode is running. The PLCPcounters do not apply to Series D E1 networkmodules at all.

Hardware Commands



Field Description

e1FramingLCVs The number of Line Code Violations (LCV) detected by the E1 Receive Framer block.

e1FramingFERRs The number of E1 framing error (FERR) events.

e1FramingFEBEs The number of E1 far end block errors.

e1FramingCRCs The number of cyclic redundancy check errors.

e1FramingOOFs The number of OOF (loss of basic frame alignment) errors that have been detected.

e1FramingLOSs The number of seconds in which LOS (loss of signal) error events occurred.

e1FramingAISs The number of seconds in which AIS (alarm indication signal) error events occurred.

e1FramingAISDs The number of seconds in which AISD (unframed pattern of all ones) error eventsoccurred.

e1FramingRedAlarms The number of seconds in which Red Alarm events were experienced.

e1FramingYellowAlarms The number of seconds in which Yellow Alarm events were experienced.

e1PlcpBIP8s The number of BIP-8 (Bit Interleaved Parity-8) error events. The BIP-8 is calculated overthe Path Overhead field and the associated ATM cell of the previous PLCP frame. A BIP-Nis a method of error monitoring. An N-bit code is generated by the transmittingequipment in such a manner that the first bit of the code provides even parity over thefirst bit of all N-bit sequences in the previous VT SPE, the second bit provides even parityover the second bits of all N-bit sequences within the specified portion, etc.

e1PlcpFERRs The number of Physical Layer Convergence Protocol (PLCP) octet error events.

e1PlcpFEBEs The number of ATM Far End Block Error (FEBE) events.


e1PlcpLOFs The number of seconds in which Loss Of Frame (LOF) errors were detected by the PLCP(Physical Layer Convergence Protocol) receiver. OOF is declared when an error is detectedin both the A1 and A2 octets or when 2 consecutive POHID octets are found in error. LOFis declared when an OOF state persists for more than 20ms. LOF is removed upon findingtwo valid consecutive sets of framing (A1 and A2) octets and two valid sequential pathoverhead identifier octets.

e1PlcpYellows The number of seconds in which Yellow alarm errors were detected by the PLCP (PhysicalLayer Convergence Protocol) receiver. A yellow alarm is asserted when 10 consecutiveyellow signal bits are set to logical 1. Yellow signals are used to alert upstream terminals ofa downstream failure in order to initiate trunk conditioning on the failure circuit.

e1AtmHCSs The number of header check sequence (HCS) error events. The HCS is a CRC-8 calculationover the first 4 octets of the ATM cell header.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.8.4 hardware port e3These commands allow you to modify various aspects of the configuration of the ports on anE3 network module. These commands are available only when an E3 network module isinstalled in the switch fabric. To list the available subcommands, type ? at the e3 level.

myswitch:hardware port e3-> ?

modify Modify E3 port configuration parameters

show Display E3 port configuration

statistics Display e3 statistics

e1AtmRxCells The number of ATM cells that were received, not including idle/unassigned cells.

e1AtmTxCells The number of ATM cells that were sent, not including idle/unassigned cells.

e1AtmUHCSs The number of uncorrectable header check sequence (UHCS) error events. The HCS is aCRC-8 calculation over the first 4 octets of the ATM cell header.

e1AtmCHCSs The number of correctable header check sequence (CHCS) error events. The HCS is aCRC-8 calculation over the first 4 octets of the ATM cell header.

e1AtmLCDs The number of seconds in which Loss of Cell Delineation (LCD) has occurred. An LCDdefect is detected when an out of cell delineation state has persisted for 4ms. An LCDdefect is cleared when the sync state has been maintained for 4ms.

Field Description


Hardware Commands

5.8.4.1 hardware port e3 modifyThis command lets you configure E3 network modules as follows:

myswitch:hardware port e3-> modify

Usage:

[-port] <BNP> Port



[[-timing] (network|internal)] Tx Clock Source





-port <BNP> The number of the E3 port to be configured.

-mode (hcs|plcp) plcp means that the port uses PLCP (Physical Layer Convergence Protocol) framing(G.751) for cell delineation. hcs means that the port uses HCS (Header Check Sequence)based framing (G.832) for cell delineation. The default is hcs.

-loopback <loopback> • Cell loopback means the E3 stream received from the network is unframed into ATMcells. The cells are then reframed and transmitted back to the network.

• Payload loopback means the E3 stream received from the network has the E3overhead bits re-inserted and is retransmitted to the network.

• Diagnostic loopback connects the receiver to the transmitter. The E3 streamtransmitted by the switch to a port is looped back to the switch. The E3 stream is stilltransmitted to the network, but the incoming E3 stream is ignored.

• Line loopback connects the transmitter to the receiver. The data stream received fromthe line is retransmitted out to the line. Cells that are switched to this port are not sentover the line.

• None means that no loopback will take place on the port. The default is none.





-scrambling (on|off) on means cell payload scrambling is enabled on this port. off means cell payloadscrambling is disabled. Only the payload of the ATM cells is scrambled. The default is on.



The type of cells this port sends for filler when the port is not sending data. Idle cells setthe CLP bit=1 and unassigned cells set the CLP bit=0. Idle=invalid cell pattern andunassigned=unassigned. The default is idle.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.8.4.2 hardware port e3 showThis command allows you to display current information about an E3 network module. Enterthe following parameters:

myswitch:hardware port e3-> show

Port Carrier Stat Mode Loopback Timing Scram EmptyCells

1C1 no 5136 hcs none internal on idle


1C3 yes 7296 hcs none internal on idle



Field Description

Port The port numbers of each E3 network module currently installed in the switch fabric.

Carrier1 yes means a carrier has been detected on this port.

no means a carrier has not been detected.

Stat The E3 line status of the port.

Mode plcp means that the port uses PLCP framing for cell delineation.

hcs means that the port uses HCS cell delineation.

Loopback The loopback mode on the port.

Timing The transmit clock for this port:



Scram on means that payload scrambling is enabled on this port.

off means that payload scrambling is disabled on this port.

EmptyCells2 The type of cells this port sends for filler when the port is not sending data:





• unassigned cells set the CLP bit=0. Idle=invalid cell pattern andunassigned=unassigned.

Hardware Commands

5.8.4.3 hardware port e3 statisticsYou can display statistics about all of the E3 network modules in an individual switch fabricby entering statistics at the e3 level. This command is available only when at least one E3network module is installed in the switch fabric.

myswitch:hardware port e3-> statistics

E3 port 1C1 counter Value Delta

----------------------------------- ---------- -----------

e3FramingLOSs 61008 (61008)

e3FramingLCVs 3701351264 (3701351264)

e3FramingFERRs 124822049 (124822049)

e3FramingOOFs 0 (0)

e3FramingFERFs 0 (0)

e3FramingAISs 0 (0)

e3FramingBIP8s 438314075 (438314075)

e3FramingFEBEs 7195460 (7195460)

e3PlcpFERRs 0 (0)

e3PlcpLOFs 0 (0)

e3PlcpBIP8s 0 (0)

e3PlcpFEBEs 0 (0)

e3PlcpYellows 0 (0)

e3AtmHCSs 0 (0)

e3AtmRxCells 0 (0)

e3AtmTxCells 146013 (146013)

e3AtmLCDs 0 (0)


NOTEAll of the PLCP counters listed above incrementonly when the E3 network module is running in


the PLCP mode. However, the HCS counteralways increments, regardless of which mode isrunning.


Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands


Field Description

e3FramingLOSs The number of seconds in which Loss Of Signal (LOS) errors were detected by the E3Receive Framer block.

e3FramingLCVs The number of Line Code Violations (LCV) that were detected by the E3 Receive Framerblock.

e3FramingFERRs The number of E3 framing error (FERR) events.

e3FramingOOFs The number of seconds in which E3 Out Of Frame (OOF) error events were experienced.

e3FramingFERFs The number of seconds in which Far End Receive Failures for a port configured with HCSframing were experienced. Indicates the number of seconds in which Remote AlarmIndications for a port configured with PLCP framing were experienced.

e3FramingAISs The number of seconds in which Alarm Indication Signals (AIS) were detected by the E3Receive Framer block. AIS indicates that an upstream failure has been detected by the farend.

e3FramingBIP8s The number of E3 G.832 BIP-8 errors. This counter is only valid for a port using HCS fram-ing.

e3FramingFEBEs The number of E3 far end block error (FEBE) events.

e3PlcpFERRs The number of Physical Layer Convergence Protocol (PLCP) octet error events.

e3PlcpLOFs The number of seconds in which Loss Of Frame (LOF) errors were detected by the PLCP(Physical Layer Convergence Protocol) receiver. LOF is declared when an Out-Of-Framestate persists for more than 1ms. LOF is removed when an in-frame state persists for morethan 12ms.

e3PlcpBIP8s The number of BIP-8 (Bit Interleaved Parity-8) error events. The BIP-8 is calculated overthe Path Overhead field and the associated ATM cell of the previous PLCP frame. A BIP-Nis a method of error monitoring. An N-bit code is generated by the transmittingequipment in such a manner that the first bit of the code provides even parity over thefirst bit of all N-bit sequences in the previous VT SPE, the second bit provides even parityover the second bits of all N-bit sequences within the specified portion, etc.

e3PlcpFEBEs The number of ATM Far End Block Error (FEBE) events.

e3PlcpYellows The number of seconds in which Yellow alarm errors were detected by the PLCP (Physical


Layer Convergence Protocol) receiver. Yellow alarm is asserted when 10 consecutiveyellow signal bits are set to logical 1. Yellow signals are used to alert upstream terminals ofa downstream failure in order to initiate trunk conditioning on the failure circuit.

e3AtmHCSs The number of header check sequence (HCS) error events. The HCS is a CRC-8 calculationover the first 4 octets of the ATM cell header.

e3AtmRxCells The number of ATM cells that were received, not including idle/unassigned cells.

e3AtmTxCells The number of ATM cells that were sent, not including idle/unassigned cells.

e3AtmLCDs The number of seconds in which Loss of Cell Delineation (LCD) has occurred. An LCDdefect is detected when an out of cell delineation state has persisted for 4ms. An LCDdefect is cleared when the sync state has been maintained for 4ms.

Hardware Commands

5.8.5 hardware port ethernetThis command allows you to access the auto-negotiation subcommand on an Ethernet portcard and is available only when an Ethernet port card is installed in the switch fabric. Todisplay the auto-negotiation subcommand, type ? at the ethernet level.

myswitch:hardware port ethernet-> ?

auto-negotiation> The auto-negotiation directory

5.8.5.1 hardware port ethernet auto-negotiationThis command allows you to enable or disable a port’s auto-negotiation feature as well asdisplay the port’s auto-negotiation parameters. Enter the following:

myswitch:hardware port ethernet auto-negotiation-> ?

modify Modify port's configuration mode

show Display auto-negotiation parameters

5.8.5.1.1 hardware port ethernet auto-negotiation modify — ESX-3000 Platforms

This command allows you to either enable the auto-negotiation feature or disable the featureand manually configure the speed and duplex parameters on the port. Enter the following:

myswitch:hardware port ethernet auto-negotiation-> modify

Usage:

[-port] <EthernetIf> Port Id

[[-configmodes] <Modes>] Config Modes



Field Description

-port <EthernetIf> The port on which you wish to enable and/or modify the auto-negotiation featureparameters.

-configmodes <Modes> The port’s configuration setting. May either be set for auto-negotiation (auto) or setmanually (10/Half, 10/Full, 100/Half, 100/Full, auto/10/half, auto/10/Full, auto/100/Half, or auto/100/Full).

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.8.5.1.2 hardware port ethernet auto-negotiation modify — ASX-200BX, ASX-1000,ASX-1200, TNX-210, and TNX-1100 Platforms

This command allows you to either enable the auto-negotiation feature or disable the featureand manually configure the speed and duplex parameters on the port. Enter the following:

myswitch:hardware port ethernet auto-negotiation-> modify

Usage:

[-port] <rfc1483If> Port

[[-mode] <ASX Ethernet Advertised speeds>] Config Modes

[[-modeSNMP] <ASX Ethernet Config Modes>] Config Modes SNMP


Field Description

-port The port on which you wish to enable and/or modify the auto-negotiation featureparameters.

-mode<ASX EthernetAdvertised speeds>

The port’s configuration setting. May either be set for auto-negotiation (auto) or setmanually (10/Half, 10/Full, 100/Half, 100/Full, auto/10/half, auto/10/Full, auto/100/Half, or auto/100/Full).

-modeSNMP<ASX EthernetConfig Modes>

The port’s configuration setting as exported to SNMP. May either be set for auto-negotiation (auto) or set manually (10/Half, 10/Full, 100/Half, or 100/Full).


Hardware Commands

5.8.5.1.3 hardware port ethernet auto-negotiation show

This command allows you to display the link state and parameters of a port. Enter thefollowing:

myswitch:hardware port ethernet auto-negotiation-> show

Config. Link Remote Remote

Port Mode OperState Status Auto State OperState

2B1 100/Full 100/Full up not-detected N/A




2C1 100/Full 100/Full up not-detected N/A





Field Description

Port The port on which you wish to view link states and parameters.

Config. Mode Shows the port setting. May either be capable of auto-negotiation (auto) or manually-setto one of eight speed/duplexes (10/Half, 10/Full, 100/Half, 100/Full, auto/10/half, auto/10/Full, auto/100/Half, or auto/100/Full).

OperState Shows the speed/duplex mode that the port is using. May be 10/Half, 10/Full, 100/Half, or 100/Full.

Link Status Shows whether or not the port detects that another Ethernet port is connected to it. upindicates connectivity, down indicates no connectivity.

Remote Auto State Shows whether or not a remote device is capable of auto-negotiation. auto indicates auto-negotiation capability, not-detected indicates absence of auto-negotiation capability.

Remote OperState For remote devices shown to be capable of auto-negotiation, indicates the speed/duplex.


Indicates N/A if auto-negotiation capability is not-detected.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.8.6 hardware port j2These commands let you modify various aspects of the configuration of a J2 network module.The following J2 commands are available only when a J2 network module is installed in theswitch fabric. To display the list of available subcommands, type ? at the j2 level.

myswitch:hardware port j2-> ?

modify Modify J2 port configuration parameters

show Display J2 port configuration

statistics Display j2 statistics

5.8.6.1 hardware j2 port modifyThis command lets you configure J2 network modules as follows:

myswitch:hardware port j2-> modify

Usage:

[-port] <BNP> Port

[[-linelength] (short|long)] Line Length

[[-loopback] (none|line|diag)] Loopback





-port <BNP> The number of the J2 port to be configured.

-linelength (short|long) The length of the physical cable attached to this port. If the line attached to the receive porthas greater than 4 db of attenuation, then the line must be configured as long. Ifotherwise, then it must be configured as short. In general, if the cable is less than 20 feet,then configure the line as short.



• Line connects the transmitter to the receiver. The data stream received from the line isretransmitted out to the line. Cells that are switched to this port are not sent over theline.

• Diagnostic loopback connects the receiver to the transmitter. The J2 streamtransmitted by the switch to a port is looped back to the switch. The J2 stream is stilltransmitted to the network, but the incoming J2 stream is ignored.

• None designates that no loopback will take place on this port. This is the default.

Hardware Commands

5.8.6.2 hardware j2 port showThis command allows you to display information about the configuration of the ports on a J2network module. Enter the following parameters:

myswitch:hardware port j2-> show

Port Carrier Status LineLength Loopback Timing EmptyCells

1D1 no 192 short none internal unassigned






• Network means that the clock that is recovered from the receive line of this port isused to drive the transmit line of this port.

• Internal means that the internal clock is used to drive the transmit line of this port.


The type of cells this port sends for filler when the port is not sending data. Idle cells setthe CLP bit=1 and unassigned cells set the CLP bit=0. Idle=invalid cell pattern andunassigned=unassigned. The default is idle.


Field Description

Port The J2 port number of the network module(s) currently installed in the switch.

Carrier1 yes means a carrier has been detected on this port. no means a carrier has not beendetected on this port. A carrier is detected when a signal is applied to the receive side ofthe port, but it does not guarantee the signal is the proper frequency.

Status The J2 line status of the port.

LineLength The length of the physical cable that is attached to this port. Can be short or long.




Loopback The loopback mode on the port. Can be diagnostic, line, or none.


EmptyCells The type of cells this port sends for filler when the port is not sending data. Idle cells setthe CLP bit=1 and unassigned cells set the CLP bit=0. Idle=invalid cell pattern andunassigned=unassigned. Refer to page 57 of the ATM Forum 3.0 Specification for moreinformation. In general, it is not necessary to change this parameter from the defaultsetting

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.8.6.3 hardware j2 port statisticsYou can display statistics about all of the J2 network modules by entering statistics at thej2 level. This command is available only when at least one J2 network module is installed.

myswitch:hardware port j2-> statistics

J2 port 1D1 counter Value Delta

----------------------------------- ---------- -----------

j2AtmHCSs 0 (0)

j2AtmRxCells 0 (0)

j2AtmTxCells 207772 (207772)

j2AtmLCDs 0 (0)

j2B8ZSCodingErrors 0 (0)

j2CRC5Errors 0 (0)

j2FramingErrors 0 (0)

j2RxLossOfFrame 0 (0)

j2RxLossOfClock 0 (0)

j2RxAIS 0 (0)

j2TxLossOfClock 0 (0)

j2RxRemoteAIS 0 (0)

j2RxLossOfSignal 86919 (86919)



Field Description

j2AtmHCSs The number of header check sequence (HCS) error events. The HCS is a CRC-8 calculation overthe first 4 octets of the ATM cell header.

j2AtmRxCells The number of ATM cells that were received.

j2AtmTxCells The number of ATM cells that were transmitted.

j2AtmLCDs The number of seconds in which a Loss of Cell Delineation (LCD) has occurred. An LCD defect


is detected when an out of cell delineation state has persisted for 4ms. An LCD defect is clearedwhen the sync state has been maintained for 4ms.

j2B8ZSCodingErrors The number of B8ZS coding violation errors.

j2CRC5Errors The number of CRC-5 received errors.

j2FramingErrors The number of framing patterns received in error.

j2RxLossOfFrame The number of seconds during which the receiver was experiencing Loss Of Frame.

j2RxLossOfClock The number of seconds during which the receiver was not observing transitions on thereceived clock signal.

j2RxAIS The number of seconds during which the receiver detected an Alarm Indication Signal.

Hardware Commands


j2TxLossOfClock The number of seconds during which the transmitter experienced Loss Of Clock.

j2RxRemoteAIS The number of seconds during which the receiver observed the Alarm Indication Signal in them-bits channel.

j2RxLossOfSignal The number of seconds during which the transmitter was experiencing Loss Of Signal.

Field Description


Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.8.7 hardware port modifyThis command allows you to change the state of a port or to set an LED model for the frontpanel LEDs on all network modules, except for Series LEs. Enter the following:

myswitch:hardware port-> modify

Usage:

[-port] <BNP> Port

[[-adminstatus] (up|down)] Admin Status

[[-ledmodel] (lan|wan)] LED Model



-port <BNP> The number of port to be managed.

-adminstatus (up|down) This parameter allows you to change the state of a port to be up (on-line) or down (off-line). When a port is down, all signalling and communication is disabled. This commandis useful for taking a port out of service temporarily to perform diagnostics.

up brings the designated port on-line. down takes the designated port off-line.

-ledmodel (lan|wan) This parameter lets you select an LED model to use for setting the front panel LED colorson a per-port basis on all network modules, except Series LE. Typically, the lan LEDsblink when transmitting or receiving data on a port. Typically, the wan LEDs illuminatesolid green, unless an error condition exists on a port.

For both the lan and wan models, RED means a fault in the receive direction, YELLOWmeans a fault in the transmit direction (Line Remote Defect Indication), AUTO/GREENmeans no fault. Only the receive LED color is changed. These models show only threestates and do not reflect the status of the Path Alarm Indications and Path Remote DefectIndications. lan is the default value for all network modules.

However, when redundancy is configured, the default (and only) LED model for Series Dnetwork modules is wan. When redundancy is configured, the default LED model forSeries E network modules is lan. Series E supports either model when redundancy isconfigured.


Hardware Commands

5.8.8 hardware port showThis command lets you display general information about the ports on an individual switchfabric. To show general information about all of the ports, enter the following:

myswitch:hardware port-> show

Port Carrier Admin Oper Speed (bps) Model

1B1 no up down 155000000 OC3

1B2 no up down 155000000 OC3

1B3 no up down 155000000 OC3

1B4 no up down 155000000 OC3

1C1 no up down 2048000 FRAME1




1CTL yes up up 80000000 ASX-CTL


Field Description

Port The port numbers of each network module currently installed in the switch fabric. Thecontrol port on an ASX-4000 switch is displayed as 5CTL since it does not belong to aspecific fabric.

Carrier yes means a carrier has been detected on this port. no means a carrier has not beendetected. A carrier is detected when a signal is applied to the receive side of the port. Itdoes not guarantee that the signal is the proper frequency

Admin The administrative state of this port. Can be up (on-line) or down (off-line).

Oper The current operational state of this port. If a port was administered up, but the carrier orthe framing bits were lost, the Admin status indicates up, but this status indicates that theport is down.

Speed (bps) The speed of this port’s link in Bps.


Model The type of network module. For the control port, displays ASX-CTL.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.8.8.1 hardware port show -ledThis command lets you display the LED models used for each port of all network modules(except for Series LE). Enter the following parameters:

myswitch:hardware port-> show -led

Port Type rxLED txLED clkLED Model

1B1 OC3 red auto N/A lan




1C1 FRAME1 yellow off off wan





Field Description

Port The port number of the network module(s) currently installed in the switch (fabric).

Type The type of network module it is. ASX-BP are the intra-fabric ports on an ASX-1000switch, ASX-1200 switch, or TNX-1100 switch. ASX-CTL is the control port.

rxLED The color of the receive LED for this port. Can be off, green, red, yellow, or auto.auto means that the LED is under hardware control. Typically, hardware control meansthat the LED is normally dark with green blinks to indicate data traffic.

txLED The color of the transmit LED for this port. Can be off, green, red, yellow, or auto.auto means that the LED is under hardware control. Typically, hardware control means thatthe LED is normally dark with green blinks to indicate data traffic.

clkLED This field only applies to the receive port LEDs on FramePlus network modules. greenindicates that the port is providing the 8 KHz clock reference to the switch. off meansthat the port is not providing the 8 KHz clock reference to the switch.


Model The LED model (lan or wan) that has been assigned to this port.

Hardware Commands

5.8.9 hardware port sonetThese commands allow you to modify various aspects of the configuration of all of the portson a SONET network module. The following SONET commands are available only when aSONET network module is installed in the switch fabric. You can display the list of availablesubcommands by typing ? at the sonet level.

myswitch:hardware port sonet-> ?


modify Modify SONET port configuration parameters

show Display SONET port configuration

statistics Display SONET statistics

NOTEAll SONET Series C, LC, LE, and D networkmodules, Series 1 port cards, and most Series 2port cards use these commands. SONET Series Enetwork modules and Series 2 channelizedOC-12 port cards do not use these commands;instead they use the commands underinterfaces sonet and interfaces atm-tc.

5.8.9.1 hardware port sonet errorsThese commands let you configure the bit error assessment method and its parameters forASX-4000 redundancy. You can display the list of available subcommands by typing ? at theerrors level.

myswitch:hardware port sonet errors-> ?

modify Manually edit BER configuration

show Display port Bit Error Rate configuration

5.8.9.1.1 hardware port sonet errors modify

This command lets you modify the bit error rate configuration. Three distribution models aresupported: random, bursty, and none. The choice of which model to use is based on the


expected pattern or distribution of line error occurrences. Enter the following:

myswitch:hardware port sonet errors-> modify

Usage:

[-port] <BNP> Port



[[-seconds] <integer>] Seconds Threshold

[[-errors] <integer>] Errors Threshold

[[-sfber] <integer>] Signal Fail BER

[[-sdber] <integer>] Signal Degrade BER

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands



-port <BNP> The port of the SONET network module to be configured.


The error distribution model to be used to identify signal degrade and signal failconditions. Three error models are available:

• none indicates that the detection of signal conditions is disabled. If the errordistribution model is set to none, signal degrade and signal fail conditions are neverdeclared (i.e., they are always reported as clear).

• random selects a random error distribution and declares signal conditions based onthe thresholds set in the -sdber and -sfber parameters. The random errordistribution model is implemented according to sections 5.3.3 and 5.3.4 of GR-253-CORE for detecting and clearing signal degrade and signal fail conditions. For thismodel, the thresholds are specified as two bit errors rates (BER). BER is expressed as anegative power of 10 (e.g. 10-5 is 1 bit error in 100,000 bits). Each of the specifiedthresholds is the declaration threshold. The clearing threshold is always one-tenth thedeclaration threshold. For example, port 2C1 declares a bit error when the BERexceeds 10-9, but only clears when the BER drops below 10-10.

Signal degrade thresholds range from 10-9 to 10-5, inclusively. For the signal failurethresholds, the range is from 10-5 to 10-3, inclusively. When a port is initially changedto the random error distribution model, the default settings for the signal degrade andthe signal failure thresholds are 10-5 and 10-3, respectively. When setting the BERthresholds, it is only necessary to enter the exponent (i.e., -5 to specify a BER of 10-5).random is the default error distribution model.

• bursty selects a burst error model and declares signal degrade condition based on thethresholds set in the -seconds and -errors parameters. The bursty errordistribution model is implemented according to section 2.2.2.5.2 of ITU-T G.783 fordetecting and clearing signal degrade conditions. This model cannot be used to detectsignal fail conditions from line bit errors. In this model, the threshold is specified as anumber of line BIP errors per seconds and a number of consecutive seconds. A signaldegrade condition is declared if the number of line BIP errors observed per secondexceeds the configured threshold for the configured number of consecutive seconds.Likewise, to clear the signal degrade condition, the number of line BIP errors observedper second must remain less than the configured threshold for the configured numberof consecutive seconds.


-failenable(enabled|disabled)

Enable or disable the signal fail condition on excessive errors.

-seconds <integer> The number of consecutive seconds over which the line BIP error count is compared to theconfigured error rate. The number of seconds ranges from 2 to 10 seconds with 10 beingthe default value.

-errors <integer> The threshold for the number of line BIP errors per seconds. This value varies from 1 to amaximum that is dependent on the signal level.

Hardware Commands

5.8.9.1.2 hardware port sonet errors show

This command lets you display the bit error distribution model and its thresholds for thesignal degrade condition and for the signal fail condition, if applicable. Enter the following:

myswitch:hardware port sonet errors-> show


2A1 OK random disabled N/A N/A -3 -5






-sfber <integer> The signal failure BER. Signal failure thresholds range from 10-5 to 10-3, inclusively. Whena port is initially changed to the random error distribution model, the default settings forthe signal degrade and the signal failure thresholds are 10-5 and 10-3, respectively. Whensetting the BER thresholds, it is only necessary to enter the exponent (i.e., -5 to specify aBER of 10-5).

-sdber <integer> The signal degrade BER. Signal degrade thresholds range from 10-9 to 10-5, inclusively.When a port is initially changed to the random error distribution model, the defaultsettings for the signal degrade and the signal failure thresholds are 10-5 and 10-3,respectively. When setting the BER thresholds, it is only necessary to enter the exponent(i.e., -5 to specify a BER of 10-5).

Field Description

Port The ports of each SONET network module or port card currently installed in the switchfabric.

State The current operating state of this SONET network module.

ErrorModel The error distribution model for this SONET network module.



FailEnable Displays whether the signal fail condition on excessive errors is enabled or disabled.

Seconds The number of consecutive seconds over which the line BIP error count is compared to theconfigured error rate.

Errors The threshold for the number of line BIP errors per seconds.

SF The signal failure BER. Only the exponent value is displayed (i.e., -3 to specify a BER of10-3).

SD The signal degrade BER. Only the exponent is displayed (i.e., -5 to specify a BER of 10-5).

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.8.9.2 hardware port sonet modifyThis command lets you configure SONET network modules as follows:

myswitch:hardware port sonet-> modify

Usage:

[-sonetport] <BNP> Port

[[-mode] (sonet|sdh)] Mode


[[-timing] (network|internal)] Tx Clock Source





-sonetport <BNP> The port number of the SONET network module to be configured.

-mode (sonet|sdh) The mode of operation for this port. Can be sonet or sdh.


• line connects the transmitter to the receiver. The data stream received from the fiberis retransmitted out to the fiber. In line loopback, the port acts as if it were an opticalrepeater. Cells that are switched to this port are not sent over the fiber. This option isvalid for all SONET network modules. This option is not supported for Series 1OC-48c port cards on an ASX-4000 switch.1

• diag(nostic) connects the receiver to the transmitter. The SONET streamtransmitted by the fiber to a port is looped back to the fiber. The stream is stilltransmitted over the fiber, but the incoming stream is ignored. This option is valid forall SONET network modules, except for Series C OC-12 network modules.

• path means that the loopback point is between the TPOP and RPOP blocks and thetransmit parallel stream is connected to the receive stream. This option is valid only forSeries C OC-12 network modules.

• both lets you perform both diagnostic and line loopback on a particular port. Thisoption is valid only for Series 1 OC-48c port cards on an ASX-4000 switch.


• none means no loopback will take place on this port. The default is none.




-scrambling (on|off)2 on means that cell payload scrambling is enabled on this port.

off means that cell payload scrambling is disabled on this port.

Hardware Commands




• unassigned cells set the CLP bit=0. Idle=invalid cell pattern andunassigned=unassigned. The default is unassigned.

1. An error occurs if you attempt to use line loopback on a Series 1 OC-48 port card on an ASX-4000 switch. If you want touse line loopback on a Series 1 OC-48 port card on an ASX-4000 switch, you can use the both option, which appliesboth line and diagnostic loopback to the port.

2. The scrambling mode should be set to the same status on both the transmitting side and the receiving side.3. Refer to page 57 of the ATM Forum 3.0 Specification for more information. In general, it is not necessary to change this

parameter from the default setting.



Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.8.9.3 hardware port sonet showThis command lets you display information about the configuration of all of the ports on aSONET network module. Enter the following parameters:

myswitch:hardware port sonet-> show

Port Width Line Mode Loopback Timing Scrambling EmptyCells

4B1 sts3c UTP sonet none internal on unassigned





Field Description

Port The port numbers of each SONET network module or port card currently installed in theswitch fabric.

Width The SDH transmission rates STM-1 (155.52 Mbps), STM-4 (622.08 Mbps) and STM-16(2488.32 Mbps) are equivalent to SONET rates STS-3, STS-12 and STS-48, respectively. Thisis a read-only field.

Line The line type for this interface. The line type for optical SONET signals may be SMSR(single-mode short reach), SMIR (single-mode intermediate reach), other (single-modelong reach), or MM (multi-mode) fiber. For electrical interfaces, the line type is UTP(Unshielded Twisted Pair).

Mode The mode of operation for this port. Can be sonet or sdh.

Loopback The loopback mode on the port. Can be one of the following: line, diagnostic, path,or none.

Timing1 The transmit clock for this port:




1. The timing option displays N/A on all OC-12 network modules because they always use internal timing.

Scrambling on means that payload scrambling is enabled on this port.


Scrambling on means that payload scrambling is enabled on this port.


Hardware Commands

5.8.9.3.1 hardware port sonet show -status

This command also lets you display information about the section, line, path, and ATM statusof all of the ports on the SONET network modules and port cards. Enter the following:

myswitch:hardware port sonet-> show -status

Port Carrier Section Line Path Atm

4B1 yes 1 1 1 1

4B2 yes 1 1 1 1

4B3 yes 1 1 1 1

4B4 no 2 1 1 1


Field Description

Port The port numbers of each SONET network module currently installed in the switch fabric.

Carrier yes means a carrier has been detected on this port.

no means a carrier has not been detected. A carrier is detected when a signal is applied tothe receive side of the port. It does not guarantee that the signal is the proper frequency

Section The Section Status of this interface. The variable is a bit map represented as a sum, so itcan represent multiple defects simultaneously. The various bit positions are as follows:

1 - sonetSectionNoDefect

2 - sonetSectionLOS - Loss Of Signal was detected. LOS is declared when 20 +/- 3us of allzero patterns is detected.

4 - sonetSectionLOF - Loss Of Frame was detected. LOF is declared when an out-of-framecondition persists for 3ms.

Line The Line Status of this interface. It is a bit map represented as a sum, so it can representmultiple defects simultaneously. The various bit positions are:

1 - sonetLineNoDefect

2 - sonetLineAIS - Line Alarm Indication Signal was detected. Line AIS is asserted when a111 binary pattern is detected in bits 6, 7, 8 of the K2 byte for five consecutive frames.

4 - sonetLineRDI Line Remote Defect Indication was detected. RDI is asserted when a 110


binary pattern is detected in bits 6, 7, 8 of the K2 byte for five consecutive frames.

8 - sonetLineBIP indicates a B2 byte Line BIP error.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

Path Shows the Path Status of this interface. The variable is a bit map represented as a sum, soit can represent multiple defects simultaneously. The various bit positions are as follows:

1 - sonetPathNoDefect

2 - sonetPathLOP - Path Loss Of Pointer was detected. Path LOP is declared when a“normal pointer value” is not found for eight consecutive frames.

4 - sonetPathAIS - Path Alarm Indication Signal was detected. Path AIS is asserted whenan all ones pattern is detected in the pointer bytes (H1 and H2) for three consecutiveframes.

8 - sonetPathRDI - Path RDI alarm has been detected. RDI alarm is declared when bit 5 ofthe path status byte is high for ten consecutive frames.

16 - sonetPathUnequiped - Path is not provisioned (idle). PathSignalLabel = hex 00.

32 - sonetPathSignalLabelMismatch - A received Path Signal Label mismatch. A receivedSignal Label is considered mismatched if it does not equal either the standard value for anATM payload (hex13) or the value for an “equipped non-specific” payload (1 hex).

Atm The ATM Status of the interface. The variable is a bit map represented as a sum, so it canrepresent multiple defects simultaneously. The various bit positions areas follows:

1 - sonetAtmNoDefect

2 - sonetAtmLCD - Loss of Cell Delineation was detected. LCD is declared when a“normal pointer value” is not found for eight consecutive frames.

Field Description


Hardware Commands

5.8.9.4 hardware port sonet statisticsYou can display statistics about all of the SONET network modules on an individual switchfabric by entering statistics at the sonet level. This command is available only when atleast one SONET (OC-3c, OC-12c, OC-48c, or UTP) network module is installed.

myswitch:hardware port sonet-> statistics

Sonet port 4B1 counter Value Delta

----------------------------------- ---------- -----------

sonetSectionBIPs 34320 (34320)

sonetSectionLOSs 1 (1)

sonetSectionLOFs 0 (0)

sonetLineBIPs 165 (165)

sonetLineFEBEs 840 (840)

sonetLineAISs 0 (0)

sonetLineRDIs 0 (0)

sonetPathBIPs 75 (75)

sonetPathFEBEs 316 (316)

sonetPathLOPs 0 (0)

sonetPathAISs 0 (0)

sonetPathRDIs 0 (0)

sonetPathUNEQs 0 (0)

sonetPathPLMs 0 (0)

sonetAtmCorrectableHCSs 0 (0)

sonetAtmUncorrectableHCSs 21 (21)

sonetAtmLCDs 0 (0)



Field Description


sonetSectionBIPs The number of Section BIP-8 (Bit Interleaved Parity) errors that have been detected. Thecalculated BIP-8 code is compared with the BIP-8 code extracted from the B1 byte of thefollowing frame. Differences indicate that a section level bit error has occurred.

sonetSectionLOSs The number of seconds in which Loss Of Signal (LOS) has occurred. A LOS is declaredwhen 20 +/- 3ms of all zeros patterns is detected. LOS is cleared when two valid framingwords are detected and during the intervening time no LOS condition is detected.

sonetSectionLOFs The number of seconds in which Loss Of Frame (LOF) has occurred. A LOF is declaredwhen an out-of-frame (OOF) condition persists for 3ms. It is cleared when an in-framecondition persists for 3ms. While in-frame, the framing bytes (A1, A2) in each frame arecompared against the expected pattern. OOF is declared when four consecutive framescontaining one or more framing pattern errors have been received.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

sonetLineBIPs The number of Line BIP-24 (Bit Interleaved Parity) errors that have been detected. Thecalculated BIP-24 code is based on the line overhead and synchronous payload envelope(SPE) of the STS-3c stream. The line BIP-24 code is a bit interleaved parity calculationusing even parity. The calculated code is compared with the BIP-24 code extracted fromthe B2 bytes of the following frame. Differences indicate that a line layer bit error hasoccurred.

sonetLineFEBEs The number of line Far End Block Errors (FEBE) that have been detected.

sonetLineAISs The number of seconds in which line Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) has occurred. A lineAIS is asserted when a 111 binary pattern is detected in bits 6, 7, 8 of the K2 byte for fiveconsecutive frames. It is removed when any pattern other than 111 is detected in these bitsfor five consecutive frames.

sonetLineRDIs The number of seconds in which a line Remote Defect Indication (RDI) has occurred. Aline RDI is asserted when a 110 binary pattern is detected in bits 6, 7, 8 of the K2 byte forfive consecutive frames. It is removed when any pattern other than 110 is detected in thesebits for five consecutive frames.

sonetPathBIPs The number of Path BIP-8 (Bit Interleaved Parity) errors that have been detected. A pathBIP-8 error is detected by comparing the path BIP-8 byte (B3) extracted from the currentframe, to the path BIP-8 computed for the previous frame.

sonetPathFEBEs The number of path Far End Block Errors (FEBE) that have been detected. FEBEs aredetected by extracting the 4-bit FEBE field from the path status byte (G1). The valid rangefor the 4-bit field is between 0000 and 1000, representing zero to eight errors. Other valuesare interpreted as zero errors.

sonetPathLOPs The number of seconds in which path Loss Of Pointer (LOP) has occurred. A path LOP isdetected when a “normal pointer value” is not found in eight consecutive frames. It iscleared when a “normal pointer value” is found for three consecutive frames.

sonetPathAISs The number of seconds in which a path Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) has occurred. Apath AIS is asserted when an all-ones pattern is detected in the pointer bytes (H1 and H2)for three consecutive frames and is cleared when a valid pointer is found for threeconsecutive frames. AIS means an upstream failure has been detected.

sonetPathRDIs The number of seconds in which a path Remote Defect Indication (RDI) alarm hasoccurred. A path RDI is detected by extracting bit 5 of the path status byte. If bit 5 is highfor 10 consecutive frames, then an RDI alarm is declared. An RDI alarm is cleared when

Field Description


bit 5 is low for 10 consecutive frames. RDI signals are used to alert upstream terminals of adownstream failure in order to initiate trunk conditioning on the failure circuit.

sonetPathUNEQs The number of seconds in which a path UNEQ defect has occurred. A path UNEQ defectis detected when the STS Signal label (C2 byte) == 0x00.

sonetPathPLMs The number of seconds in which a Path Label Mismatch (PLM) defect has occurred. APLM defect is detected when the STS Signal label (C2 bytes) != 0x00, 0x01, 0x13, 0xFC, or0xFF.

sonetAtmCorrectableHCSs The number of correctable Header Check Sequence (HCS) error events that occurred. TheHCS is a CRC-8 calculation over the first 4 octets of the ATM cell header. Because all HECerrors are now counted as uncorrectable, this counter no longer increments.

Hardware Commands


sonetAtmUncorrectable-HCSs

The number of uncorrectable Header Check Sequence (HCS) error events that occurred.The HCS is a CRC-8 calculation over the first 4 octets of the ATM cell header.

sonetAtmLCDs The number of seconds in which a Loss of Cell Delineation (LCD) has occurred. An LCDdefect is detected when an out of cell delineation state has persisted for 4ms. An LCDdefect is cleared when the sync state has been maintained for 4ms.

Field Description


Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.8.10 hardware port taxiThese commands let you modify the configuration of the ports on a TAXI network module.The following commands are available only when a TAXI network module is installed in theswitch fabric. To list the available subcommands, type ? at the taxi level.

myswitch:hardware port taxi-> ?

modify Modify TAXI port configuration parameters

show Display TAXI port configuration

5.8.10.1 hardware port taxi modifyThis command allows you to designate the type of loopback on a port on a TAXI networkmodule. Enter the following parameters:

myswitch:hardware port taxi-> modify

Usage:

[-port] <BNP> Port

[[-taxiloopback] (diag|none)] Loopback Config



-port <BNP> The TAXI port on which the loopback mode is to be changed.

-taxiloopback (diag|none) The type of loopback:

• diagnostic loopback connects the receiver to the transmitter. The TAXI streamtransmitted by the switch to a port is looped back to the switch. The TAXI stream isstill transmitted to the network, but the incoming TAXI stream is ignored.



Hardware Commands

5.8.10.2 hardware port taxi showThis command enables you to display current information about all of the ports on a TAXInetwork module. Enter the following parameters:

myswitch:hardware port taxi-> show

Port Carrier State Loopback

1A1 no down none

1A2 no down none

1A3 no down none

1A4 yes up none

1A5 no down none

1A6 no down none


Field Description

Port The port numbers of each network module currently installed in the switch fabric.

Carrier1


yes means a carrier has been detected on this port.

no means a carrier has not been detected.

State The current state of this port. Can be up (on-line) or down (off-line).

Loopback The loopback mode of this port. Can be either none or diagnostic.


Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.8.11 hardware port tp25These commands allow you to modify various aspects of the configuration of the ports on aTP25 network module. The following tp25 commands are available only when a TP25network module is installed in the switch fabric. You can display the list of availablesubcommands by typing ? at the tp25 level.

myswitch:hardware port tp25-> ?

modify Modify TP25 port configuration parameters

show Display TP25 port configuration

statistics Display tp25 statistics

5.8.11.1 hardware port tp25 modifyThis command allows you to designate the type of loopback on a port on a TP25 networkmodule. Enter the following parameters:

myswitch:hardware port tp25-> modify

Usage:

[-port] <BNP> Port




-port <BNP> The TP25 port on which the loopback mode is to be changed.


• line loopback, also known as remote loopback, causes received data to be transferredto the upstream system as well as to be looped back to the transmitter on this port.

• diagnostic loopback connects the receiver to the transmitter. The stream


transmitted by the switch to a port is looped back to the switch. The stream is stilltransmitted to the network, but the incoming stream is ignored.


Hardware Commands

5.8.11.2 hardware port tp25 showThis command allows you to display current information about a TP25 network module.Enter the following parameters:

myswitch:hardware port tp25-> show

Port Carrier Media Loopback RxTiming

1A1 no UTP none N/A

1A2 no UTP none N/A

1A3 no UTP none N/A

1A4 no UTP none N/A

1A5 no UTP none N/A

1A6 no UTP none N/A


Field Description

Port The TP25 port number of the network module(s) currently installed in the switch.

Carrier1


yes means a carrier has been detected on this port.

no means a carrier has not been detected on this port.

Media The kind of physical medium connected to the TP25 interface. UTP means that it isUnshielded Twisted Pair.

Loopback The loopback mode on the port. Can be either line or none.

RxTiming Indicates whether or not the port is receiving an 8kHz timing sync marker. These markerscan be used to derive an 8kHz signal that can be transmitted from all ports on the networkmodule and back to the switch fabric (on switches that support timing features).

• No means the port is not receiving sync pulses.

• Yes means the port is receiving sync pulses.


Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.8.11.3 hardware port tp25 statisticsYou can display statistics about all of the TP25 network modules in an individual switch fabricby entering statistics at the tp25 level. The following TP25 command is available onlywhen at least one TP25 network module is installed in the switch fabric.

myswitch:hardware port tp25-> statistics

TP25 port 1A1 counter Value Delta

----------------------------------- ---------- -----------

tp25AtmHCSs 0 (0)

tp25AtmRxCells N/A

tp25AtmTxCells 3065852 (3065852)

tp25ErrorSymbol 0 (0)

TP25 port 1A2 counter Value Delta

----------------------------------- ---------- -----------

tp25AtmHCSs 0 (0)

tp25AtmRxCells N/A

tp25AtmTxCells 3065852 (3065852)

tp25ErrorSymbol 0 (0)



Field Description

tp25AtmHCSs The number of header check sequence (HCS) error events. The HCS is a CRC-8 calculationover the first 4 octets of the ATM cell header.

tp25AtmRxCells The number of ATM cells that were received.

tp25AtmTxCells The number of ATM cells that were transmitted.

tp25ErrorSymbol The number of undefined symbols received.



Hardware Commands

5.8.12 hardware port trafficThese commands enable you to configure various traffic management features on anindividual port on a network module on the switch. You can display the list of availablesubcommands by typing ? at the traffic level.

myswitch:hardware port traffic-> ?

c> The c directory

d> The d directory

e> The e directory

lc> The lc directory




le> The le directory



c> The c directory

d> The d directory




5.8.12.1 hardware port traffic cThese commands enable you to configure various traffic management features on an


individual port on a Series C network module on the switch. You can display the list ofavailable subcommands by typing ? at the c level.

myswitch:hardware port traffic c-> ?

modify Modify port traffic configuration

show Display port traffic configuration

statistics Display port traffic statistics

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.8.12.1.1 hardware port traffic c modify

This command lets you configure traffic on Series C network modules as follows:

myswitch:hardware port traffic c-> modify

Usage:

[-atmif] <AtmIf> Atm Interface

[[-clpthreshcbr] <integer>] CLP Threshold For CBR and rtVBR

[[-clpthreshnrtvbr] <integer>] CLP Threshold For nrtVBR

[[-clpthreshabr] <integer>] CLP Threshold For ABR

[[-efcionabr] <integer>] EFCI On For ABR

[[-efcioffabr] <integer>] EFCI Off For ABR

[[-qsizecbr] <integer>] Qsize For CBR and rtVBR

[[-qsizenrtvbr] <integer>] Qsize For nrtVBR

[[-qsizeabr] <integer>] Qsize For ABR

[[-maxcdvcbr] <integer>] Max CDV For CBR and rtVBR

[[-maxcdvnrtvbr] <integer>] Max CDV For nrtVBR



-atmif <AtmIf> The Series C port to be configured.

-clpthreshcbr <integer> The number of cells in the buffer at which CBR and rtVBR traffic drops CLP=1 cells. Thedefault is 256.

-clpthreshnrtvbr <integer> The number of cells in the buffer at which nrtVBR traffic drops CLP=1 cells. The default is 256.

-clpthreshabr <integer> The number of cells in the buffer at which ABR and UBR traffic drops CLP=1 cells. Thedefault is 256 cells. The Series C network modules offer an ABR-ready ATM interface. Afuture ForeThought release will support ABR QoS operation on these interfaces. ABRoptions in the current release will apply in that ForeThought release.

-efcionabr <integer> The threshold number of cells over which UBR and ABR cells will have their EFCI bit set,signalling congestion. The default is 64 cells.

-efcioffabr <integer> The threshold number of cells over which UBR and ABR cells will have their EFCI bitcleared, indicating no congestion. The default is 64 cells.


-qsizecbr <integer> The minimum queue size to be assigned to CBR and rtVBR traffic. The default is 256 cells.

-qsizenrtvbr <integer> The minimum queue size to be assigned to nrtVBR traffic. The default is 256 cells.

-qsizeabr <integer> The minimum queue size to be assigned to ABR and UBR traffic. The default is 256 cells.The Series C network modules offer an ABR-ready ATM interface. A future ForeThoughtrelease will support ABR QoS operation on these interfaces. ABR options in the currentrelease will apply in that ForeThought release.

-maxcdvcbr <integer> In microseconds, the cell delay variation that an output cell experiences under the worstconditions for output CBR and rtVBR traffic. The network module must be reset.

-maxcdvnrtvbr <integer> In microseconds, the cell delay variation that an output cell experiences under the worstconditions for output nrtVBR traffic. The network module must be reset.

Hardware Commands

5.8.12.1.2 hardware port traffic c show

This command lets you display port and priority traffic information for all of the ports on allof the Series C network modules. Enter the following:

myswitch:hardware port traffic c-> show

CLP EFCI EFCI

Threshold Qsize On Off CDV

AtmIf CBR- nrtVBR ABR-UBR CBR- nrtVBR ABR-UBR ABR ABR CBR- nrtVBR

rtVBR rtVBR rtVBR

1A1 256 256 256 256 256 256 33 1 1126 2252

1A2 256 256 256 256 256 256 33 1 1126 2252

1A3 256 256 256 256 256 256 33 1 1126 2252

1A4 256 256 256 256 256 256 33 1 1126 2252

1A5 256 256 256 256 256 256 33 1 1126 2252

1A6 256 256 256 256 256 256 33 1 1126 2252


Field Description

AtmIf The port numbers of each Series C network module installed in the switch fabric.

CLP Threshold CBR-rtVBR The value at which cells that have been tagged as non-conforming (CLP=1) are droppedfor CBR and rtVBR traffic on this port.

CLP Threshold nrtVBR The value at which cells that have been tagged as non-conforming (CLP=1) are droppedfor nrtVBR traffic on this port.

CLP Threshold ABR-UBR The value at which cells that have been tagged as non-conforming (CLP=1) are droppedfor ABR and UBR traffic on this port.

Qsize CBR-rtVBR The reserved queue size for CBR and rtVBR traffic on this port.

Qsize nrtVBR The reserved queue size for nrtVBR traffic on this port.

Qsize ABR-UBR The reserved queue size for ABR and UBR traffic on this port.


EFCI On ABR The value at which the EFCI bit is set (turned on) when the threshold number is reached,signalling congestion, for ABR traffic on this port.

EFCI Off ABR The value at which the EFCI bit is cleared (turned off) when the threshold number isreached, indicating no congestion, for ABR traffic on this port.

CDV CBR-rtVBR The maximum cell delay variation for CBR and rtVBR traffic on this port, specified inmicroseconds.

CDV nrtVBR The maximum cell delay variation for nrtVBR traffic on this port, specified inmicroseconds.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.8.12.1.3 hardware port traffic c statistics

You can display traffic statistics for all of the ports on the Series C network modules in aswitch fabric as follows:

myswitch:hardware port traffic c-> statistics

Current Txed Lost

AtmIf Priority Cells Cells Cells

1A1 UBR-ABR 0 0 0

1A1 nrtVBR 0 29759 0

1A1 CBR-rtVBR 0 0 0

1A2 UBR-ABR 0 0 0

1A2 nrtVBR 0 29760 0

1A2 CBR-rtVBR 0 0 0



5.8.12.2 hardware port traffic dThese commands enable you to configure various traffic management features on anindividual port on a Series D or IMA network module on the switch. You can display the listof available subcommands by typing ? at the d level.

Field Description


Priority The traffic type for this ATM interface.

Current Cells The number of cells currently in shared memory for this ATM interface and priority.

Txed Cells The number of cells transmitted out this ATM interface for this priority.

Lost Cells The number of cells for this ATM interface and priority dropped by the output networkmodule.


myswitch:hardware port traffic d-> ?




Hardware Commands

5.8.12.2.1 hardware port traffic d modify

This command lets you configure traffic on Series D or IMA network modules as follows:

myswitch:hardware port traffic d-> modify

Usage:


[[-qsizecbr] <integer>] Qsize For CBR-rtVBR

[[-qsizenrtvbr] <integer>] Qsize For nrtVBR

[[-qsizeabr] <integer>] Qsize For ABR

[[-qsizeubr] <integer>] Qsize For UBR

[[-clp01cbr] <integer>] CLP01 Threshold For CBR-rtVBR

[[-clp01nrtvbr] <integer>] CLP01 Threshold For nrtVBR

[[-clp01abr] <integer>] CLP01 Threshold For ABR

[[-clp01ubr] <integer>] CLP01 Threshold For UBR

[[-clp1cbr] <integer>] CLP1 Threshold For CBR-rtVBR

[[-clp1nrtvbr] <integer>] CLP1 Threshold For nrtVBR

[[-clp1abr] <integer>] CLP1 Threshold For ABR

[[-clp1ubr] <integer>] CLP1 Threshold For UBR

[[-altclpcbr] (allOn|allOff|svcOn|svcOff)] Alt CLP CBR-rtVBR

[[-altclpnrtvbr] (allOn|allOff|svcOn|svcOff)] Alt CLP nrtVBR

[[-altclpubr] (allOn|allOff|svcOn|svcOff)] Alt CLP UBR

[[-ratelimit] <integer>] Rate Limit



-atmif <AtmIf> The Series D port or interface that is being configured.

-qsizecbr <integer> The minimum dedicated queue size to be assigned to CBR and rtVBR traffic. The defaultis 256.

-qsizenrtvbr <integer> The minimum dedicated queue size to be assigned to nrtVBR traffic. The default is 256cells.


-qsizeabr <integer> The minimum dedicated queue size to be assigned to ABR traffic. The default is 256 cells.

-qsizeubr <integer> The minimum dedicated queue size to be assigned to UBR traffic. The default is 256 cells.

-clp01cbr <integer> The number of cells in the buffer at which CBR and rtVBR traffic drops CLP=0+1 cells.Applying a CLP=0+1 threshold means that when the current cell count for this port andclass is greater than this threshold, cells are dropped, regardless of their CLP bit. Thisthreshold must be greater than the -clp1cbr threshold. This number must be entered inmultiples of 8. The maximum value is the size of cell memory. The default is the size ofcell memory for CLP=0+1 cells.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

-clp01nrtvbr <integer> The number of cells in the buffer at which nrtVBR traffic drops CLP=0+1 cells. Applyinga CLP=0+1 threshold means that when the current cell count for this port and class isgreater than this threshold, cells are dropped, regardless of their CLP bit. This thresholdmust be greater than the -clp1nrtvbr threshold. This number must be entered in mul-tiples of 8. The maximum value is the size of cell memory. The default is the size of cellmemory for CLP=0+1 cells.

-clp01abr <integer> The number of cells in the buffer at which ABR traffic drops CLP=0+1 cells. Applying aCLP=0+1 threshold means that when the current cell count for this port and class isgreater than this threshold, cells are dropped, regardless of their CLP bit. This thresholdmust be greater than the clp1abr threshold. This number must be entered in multiples of8. The maximum value is the size of cell memory. The default is the size of cell memoryfor CLP=0+1 cells.

-clp01ubr <integer> The number of cells in the buffer at which UBR traffic drops CLP=0+1 cells. Applying aCLP=0+1 threshold means that when the current cell count for this port and class isgreater than this threshold, cells are dropped, regardless of their CLP bit. This thresholdmust be greater than the clp1ubr threshold. This number must be entered in multiples of8. The maximum value is the size of cell memory. The default is the size of cell memoryfor CLP=0+1 cells.

-clp1cbr <integer> The number of cells in the buffer at which CBR and rtVBR traffic type drops CLP=1 cells.Applying a CLP=1 threshold means that when the current cell count for this port andclass is greater than this threshold, cells that have a CLP=1 are dropped. This thresholdmust be less than the -clp01cbr threshold. This number must be entered in multiples of8. The maximum value is the size of cell memory. The default is 256 cells for CLP=1 cells.

-clp1nrtvbr <integer> The number of cells in the buffer at which nrtVBR traffic type drops CLP=1 cells.Applying a CLP=1 threshold means that when the current cell count for this port andclass is greater than this threshold, cells that have a CLP=1 are dropped. This thresholdmust be less than the -clp01nrtvbr threshold. This number must be entered inmultiples of 8. The maximum value is the size of cell memory. The default is 256 cells forCLP=1 cells.

-clp1abr <integer> The number of cells in the buffer at which ABR traffic type drops CLP=1 cells. Applying aCLP=1 threshold means that when the current cell count for this port and class is greaterthan this threshold, cells that have a CLP=1 are dropped. This threshold must be less thanthe clp01abr threshold. This number must be entered in multiples of 8. The maximum



value is the size of cell memory. The default is 256 cells for CLP=1 cells.

-clp1ubr <integer> The number of cells in the buffer at which UBR traffic type drops CLP=1 cells. Applying aCLP=1 threshold means that when the current cell count for this port and class is greaterthan this threshold, cells that have a CLP=1 are dropped. This threshold must be less thanthe clp01ubr threshold. This number must be entered in multiples of 8. The maximumvalue is the size of cell memory. The default is 256 cells for CLP=1 cells.

Hardware Commands

-altclpcbr(allOn|allOff|svcOn|svcOff)

Specifies alternate CLP=1 and CLP=0+1 thresholds for CBR and rtVBR traffic as follows:

• allOn means all CBR and rtVBR connections (SVCs and PVCs) arriving on this portwill use the alternate CLP thresholds.

• allOff means no CBR and rtVBR connections (SVCs and PVCs) arriving on this portwill use the alternate CLP thresholds.

• svcOn means all CBR and rtVBR SVCs arriving on this port will use the alternateCLP thresholds. CBR PVCs are based on their UPC contract flags.

• svcOff means no CBR and rtVBR SVCs arriving on this port will use the alternateCLP thresholds. CBR and rtVBR PVCs are based on their UPC contract flags. This isthe default.

-altclpnrtvbr(allOn|allOff|svcOn|svcOff)

Specifies alternate CLP=1 and CLP=0+1 thresholds for nrtVBR traffic as follows:

• allOn means all nrtVBR connections (SVCs and PVCs) arriving on this port will usethe alternate CLP thresholds.

• allOff means no nrtVBR connections (SVCs and PVCs) arriving on this port will usethe alternate CLP thresholds.

• svcOn means all nrtVBR SVCs arriving on this port will use the alternate CLPthresholds. VBR PVCs are based on their UPC contract flags.

• svcOff means no nrtVBR SVCs arriving on this port will use the alternate CLPthresholds. nrtVBR PVCs are based on their UPC contract flags. This is the default.

-altclpubr(allOn|allOff|svcOn|svcOff)

Specifies alternate CLP=1 and CLP=0+1 thresholds for UBR traffic as follows:

• allOn means all UBR connections (SVCs and PVCs) arriving on this port will use thealternate CLP thresholds.

• allOff means no UBR connections (SVCs and PVCs) arriving on this port will usethe alternate CLP thresholds.

• svcOn means all UBR SVCs arriving on this port will use the alternate CLPthresholds. UBR PVCs are based on their UPC contract flags.

• svcOff means no UBR SVCs arriving on this port will use the alternate CLPthresholds. UBR PVCs are based on their UPC contract flags. This is the default.

-ratelimit <integer>1 The new cell rate for the port, in cells per second. This, in effect, sets a new logical linerate for this network module. If set to 0, rate-limiting is disabled (i.e., full bandwidth isreturned to the port).

1.



You should not modify the rate limit to a value lower than the following values: for OC-12c network modules - 15,183cells/sec per port; for OC-3c network modules - 3,796 cells/sec per port; and for DS3, E3, DS1, and E1 network mod-ules - 1,898 cells/sec per port.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.8.12.2.2 hardware port traffic d show

This command lets you display port and priority traffic information for all of the ports on allof the Series D or IMA network modules. Enter the following:

myswitch:hardware port traffic d-> show

Queue Size Thresholds CLP0+1 Thresholds CLP1

AtmIf CBR- nrt ABR UBR CBR- nrt ABR UBR CBR- nrt ABR UBR

rtVBR VBR rtVBR VBR rtVBR VBR

4B1 256 256 256 256 28896 28896 28896 28896 256 256 256 256

4B2 256 256 256 256 28896 28896 28896 28896 256 256 256 256

4B3 256 256 256 256 28896 28896 28896 28896 256 256 256 256

4B4 256 256 256 256 28896 28896 28896 28896 256 256 256 256


Field Description

AtmIf The port (ATM interface) numbers of each Series D network module installed in theswitch fabric.

Queue Size CBR-rtVBR The reserved queue size for CBR and rtVBR traffic on this port, in cells.

Queue Size nrtVBR The reserved queue size for nrtVBR traffic on this port, in cells.

Queue Size ABR The reserved queue size for ABR traffic on this port, in cells.

Queue Size UBR The reserved queue size for UBR traffic on this port, in cells.

Thresholds CLP0+1CBR-rtVBR

The value at which CBR and rtVBR cells are dropped on this port, regardless of their CLPbit.

Thresholds CLP0+1 nrtVBR The value at which nrtVBR cells are dropped on this port, regardless of their CLP bit.

Thresholds CLP0+1 ABR The value at which ABR cells are dropped on this port, regardless of their CLP bit.

Thresholds CLP0+1 UBR The value at which UBR cells are dropped on this port, regardless of their CLP bit.

Thresholds CLP1 The value at which CBR and rtVBR cells that have been tagged as non-conforming


CBR-rtVBR (CLP=1) are dropped on this port.

Thresholds CLP1 nrtVBR The value at which nrtVBR cells that have been tagged as non-conforming (CLP=1) aredropped on this port.

Thresholds CLP1 ABR The value at which ABR cells that have been tagged as non-conforming (CLP=1) aredropped on this port.

Thresholds CLP1 UBR The value at which UBR cells that have been tagged as non-conforming (CLP=1) aredropped on this port.

Hardware Commands

5.8.12.2.2.1 hardware port traffic d show -advanced

This command lets you show advanced traffic information for Series D or IMA networkmodules. Enter the following:

myswitch:hardware port traffic d-> show -advanced

Alt. CLP Thresholds

AtmIf CBR- nrtVBR UBR RateLimit

rtVBR

4B1 svcOff svcOff svcOff 0





Field Description

AtmIf The port (ATM interface) numbers of each Series D network module installed in theswitch fabric.

Alt. CLP ThresholdsCBR-rtVBR

allOn means all CBR and rtVBR connections (SVCs and PVCs) arriving on this port willuse the alternate CLP threshold.

allOff means no CBR and rtVBR connections (SVCs and PVCs) arriving on this port willuse the alternate CLP threshold.

svcOn means all CBR and rtVBR SVCs arriving on this port will use the alternate CLPthreshold. All CBR and rtVBR PVCs arriving on this port have the alternate thresholdapplied if their UPC contract specifies to do so. This is the default.

svcOff means no CBR and rtVBR SVCs of the specified class of service arriving on thisport will use the alternate CLP threshold. All CBR and rtVBR PVCs arriving on this porthave the alternate threshold applied if their UPC contract specifies to do so.

Alt. CLP Thresholds nrtVBR allOn means all nrtVBR connections (SVCs and PVCs) arriving on this port will use thealternate CLP threshold.

allOff means no nrtVBR connections (SVCs and PVCs) arriving on this port will use thealternate CLP threshold.


svcOn means all nrtVBR SVCs arriving on this port will use the alternate CLP threshold.All nrtVBR PVCs arriving on this port have the alternate threshold applied if their UPCcontract specifies to do so. This is the default.

svcOff means no nrtVBR SVCs of the specified class of service arriving on this port willuse the alternate CLP threshold. All nrtVBR PVCs arriving on this port have the alternatethreshold applied if their UPC contract specifies to do so.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.8.12.2.3 hardware port traffic d statistics

You can display traffic statistics about all of the ports in a switch fabric by entering ? at thestatistics level. The following is displayed for Series D or IMA network modules:

myswitch:hardware port traffic d-> statistics

Cells

AtmIf Class Current Txed

4B1 ABR 0 0

4B1 nrtVBR 0 528287

4B1 CBR-rtVBR 0 0

4B1 UBR 0 0

4B2 ABR 0 0

4B2 nrtVBR 0 453877

4B2 CBR-rtVBR 0 0

4B2 UBR 0 0

Alt. CLP Thresholds UBR allOn means all UBR connections (SVCs and PVCs) arriving on this port will use thealternate CLP threshold.

allOff means no UBR connections (SVCs and PVCs) arriving on this port will use thealternate CLP threshold.

svcOn means all UBR SVCs arriving on this port will use the alternate CLP threshold. AllUBR PVCs arriving on this port have the alternate threshold applied if their UPC contractspecifies to do so. This is the default.

svcOff means no UBR SVCs of the specified class of service arriving on this port will usethe alternate CLP threshold. All UBR PVCs arriving on this port have the alternatethreshold applied if their UPC contract specifies to do so.

RateLimit Rate limit lets you limit a given port to a specified amount of bandwidth, effectivelysetting a new logical line rate for the port. If a non-zero number is displayed, this is thenew cell rate for the port, in cells per second. If 0 is displayed, it means rate limiting isdisabled on this port.

Field Description



Field Description

AtmIf The port (ATM interface) number.

Class The traffic type for this port.

Cells Current The number of cells currently in shared memory for this port and class.

Cells Txed1

1. This number may be less than the total cells transmitted by all VCs on this port. This is because on a multicast connectionwith multiple outputs to the same port, each cell is counted only once at the port level for all legs of the connection.

The number of cells transmitted out this port for this class for CLP0+1 and CLP1 cells.

Hardware Commands

5.8.12.2.3.1 hardware port traffic d statistics -cellslost

You can display traffic statistics about losses on the ports by entering ? at the statisticslevel. The following is displayed for Series D or IMA network modules:

myswitch:hardware port traffic d-> statistics -cellslost

Cells Lost

AtmIf Class EPD CLP0+1 CLP1 VCCLP Overflow PPD

4B1 ABR 0 0 0 0 0 0

4B1 nrtVBR 0 0 0 0 0 0

4B1 CBR-rtVBR 0 0 0 0 0 0

4B1 UBR 0 0 0 0 0 0

4B2 ABR 0 0 0 0 0 0

4B2 nrtVBR 0 0 0 0 0 0

4B2 CBR-rtVBR 0 0 0 0 0 0

4B2 UBR 0 0 0 0 0 0


Field Description

AtmIf The port (ATM interface) number.

Class The traffic type for this port.

Cells Lost EPD The first cell of each packet lost on this port for this class because of EPD.

Cells Lost CLP0+1 The first cell of each packet lost on this port for this class because the per-port, per-classCLP=0+1 threshold was exceeded.

Cells Lost CLP1 The first cell of each packet lost on this port for this class because the per-port, per-classCLP=1 threshold was exceeded.

Cells Lost VCCLP The first cell lost on this port for this class because the per-VC CLP=1 and CLP=0+1thresholds were exceeded.

Cells Lost Overflow The first cell of each packet lost on this port for this class because shared memory was full.


Cells Lost PPD The total number of cells (except the first cell of each packet) lost because of EPD, becausethe per-port, per-class CLP=0+1 threshold was exceeded, because the per-port, per-classCLP=1 threshold was exceeded, because the per-VC CLP=1 and CLP=0+1 thresholds wereexceeded, or because shared memory was full.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.8.12.3 hardware port traffic eThese commands enable you to configure various traffic management features on anindividual port on a Series E network module on the switch. You can display the list ofavailable subcommands by typing ? at the e level.

myswitch:hardware port traffic e-> ?

modify Modify Series E Port Traffic Configuration

show Display Series E Port Traffic Configuration

5.8.12.3.1 hardware port traffic e modify

This command lets you configure traffic on Series E network modules as follows:

myswitch:hardware port traffic e-> modify

Usage:

[-shmemIf] <Interface> Netmod Interface


[[-qsize] <integer>] Dedicated Queue Size

[[-clp01Thresh] <integer>] CLP01 Threshold

[[-clp1Thresh] <integer>] CLP1 Threshold



-shmemIf <Interface> The Series E port or interface that is being configured.

-buffer <text> The buffer class or type of traffic (CBR, rtVBR, nrtVBR, ABR, and UBR) to which the CLPthreshold and queue size applies.

-qsize <integer> The reserved queue size for this port.

-clp01Thresh <integer> The threshold set for CLP=0+1 cells. Applying a CLP=0+1 threshold means that when thecurrent cell count for this port and class is greater than this threshold, cells that have a


CLP=0+1 are dropped, regardless of their CLP bit. This threshold must be greater thanthe CLP=1 threshold and must also be entered in multiples of 8. The default is the size ofcell memory.

-clp1Thresh <integer> The threshold set for CLP=1 cells. Applying a CLP=1 threshold means that when thecurrent cell count for this port and class is greater than this threshold, cells that have aCLP=1 are dropped. This threshold must be less than the CLP=0+1 threshold and mustalso be entered in multiples of 8. The default is 256 cells.

Hardware Commands

5.8.12.3.2 hardware port traffic e show

This command lets you display port and priority traffic information for all of the ports on allof the Series E network modules. Enter the following:

myswitch:hardware port traffic e-> show

Buffer Dedicated CLP1 CLP01

ShmemIf Class Queue Size Threshold Threshold

1B1 ABR 256 256 131040

1B1 CBR 256 256 131040

1B1 UBR 256 256 131040

1B1 nrtVBR 256 256 131040

1B1 rtVBR 256 256 131040


Field Description

ShmemIf The Series E port or interface.

Buffer Class The traffic type for this port.

Dedicated Queue Size The reserved queue size for this port, in cells.

CLP1 Threshold The values at which cells that have been tagged as non-conforming (CLP=1) are droppedfor this port.

CLP01 Threshold The value at which cells are dropped for this port, regardless of their CLP bit.


Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.8.12.3.2.1 hardware port traffic e show -queues

You can display queue information for all of the Series E network module ports as follows:

myswitch:hardware port traffic e-> show -queues

Buffer Current Max

ShmemIf Class Overflows Queue Size Queue Size

1B1 ABR 0 0 0

1B1 CBR 0 0 0

1B1 UBR 0 0 0

1B1 nrtVBR 0 0 0

1B1 rtVBR 0 0 0


Field Description



Overflows The number of cells (AAL5) lost on this port for this class because shared memory wasfull.

Current Queue Size The number of cells currently in shared memory for this port and class.

Max Queue Size The maximum queue size since since the last time it was checked.


Hardware Commands

5.8.12.3.2.2 hardware port traffic e show -stats

You can display traffic statistics about all of the Series E network module ports as follows:

myswitch:hardware port traffic e-> show -stats

Buffer Cells C e l l s L o s t

ShmemIf Class Transmitted CLP1 CLP01 EPD PPD

1B1 ABR 0 0 0 0 0

1B1 CBR 0 0 0 0 0

1B1 UBR 0 0 0 0 0

1B1 nrtVBR 182 0 0 0 0

1B1 rtVBR 0 0 0 0 0


Field Description



Cells Transmitted1

1. This number may be less than the total cells transmitted by all VCs on this port. This is because on a multicast

The number of cells transmitted out of this port for this class for both CLP01 and CLP1cells.

Cells Lost CLP1 The number of cells lost on this port for this class because the per-port, per-class CLP1threshold was exceeded.

Cells Lost CLP01 The number of cells lost on this port for this class because the per-port, per-class CLP01threshold was exceeded.

Cells Lost EPD The number of cells lost on this port for this class because of early packet discard (EPD).

Cells Lost PPD The total number of cells (except the first cell of each packet) lost because of PPD, becausethe per-port, per-class CLP=0+1 threshold was exceeded, because the per-port, per-classCLP=1 threshold was exceeded, because the per-VC CLP=1 and CLP=0+1 thresholds wereexceeded, or because shared memory was full.


connection with multiple outputs to the same port, each cell is counted only once at the port level for all legs of theconnection.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.8.12.4 hardware port traffic lcThese commands enable you to configure various traffic management features on anindividual port on a Series LC network module on the switch. You can display the list ofavailable subcommands by typing ? at the lc level.

myswitch:hardware port traffic lc-> ?




5.8.12.4.1 hardware port traffic lc modify

This command lets you configure traffic on Series LC network modules as follows:

myswitch:hardware port traffic lc-> modify

Usage:

[-port] <BNP> Port

[-priority] <Priority> Priority

[[-qsize] <integer>] Queue size

[[-clpthreshold] <integer>] CLP Threshold



-port <BNP> The Series LC port to be configured.

-priority <Priority> The priority for which the queue size or CLP threshold is being changed. Can be ABR,nrtVBR, CBR-rtVBR, or UBR.

-qsize <integer> The number of cells in the buffer at which the CLP=1 cells are dropped for the interfaceand priority. The default is 256 cells.

-clpthreshold <integer>1 The minimum CBR-rtVBR queue size for the interface and priority. The default is 256 cells.



Hardware Commands

5.8.12.4.2 hardware port traffic lc show

This command lets you display port and priority traffic information for all of the ports on allof the Series LC network modules. Enter the following:

myswitch:hardware port traffic lc-> show

Port Series Priority Queue size CLP Thresholds

4D1 LC ABR 256 256

4D1 LC nrtVBR 256 256

4D1 LC CBR-rtVBR 256 256

4D1 LC UBR 256 256

4D2 LC ABR 256 256



4D2 LC UBR 256 256

4D3 LC ABR 256 256



4D3 LC UBR 256 256

4D4 LC ABR 256 256



4D4 LC UBR 256 256


Field Description

Port The ATM interface numbers of each Series LC network module installed in the switchfabric.

Series Shows what series of network module this is.

Priority The priority for which the queue size and CLP threshold is being displayed.


Queue size1

1. The Series LC network modules offer an ABR-ready ATM interface. A future ForeThought release will support ABR QoSoperation on these interfaces. ABR options in the current release will apply in that ForeThought release.

The reserved queue size for this interface and priority, in cells.

CLP Thresholds The value at which cells that have been tagged as non-conforming (CLP=1) are droppedfor this interface and priority.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.8.12.4.3 hardware port traffic lc statistics

You can display traffic statistics about all of the ports in a switch fabric by entering ? at thestatistics level. The following is displayed for Series LC network modules:

myswitch:hardware port traffic lc statistics-> ?

Current Txed Lost Inten Lost Uinten Lost

AtmIf Priority Cells Cells Cells Cells Cells

4D1 ABR 0 0 0 0 0

4D1 nrtVBR 0 528848 0 0 0

4D1 CBR-rtVBR 0 0 0 0 0

4D1 UBR 0 0 0 0 0

4D2 ABR 0 0 0 0 0

4D2 nrtVBR 0 528848 0 0 0

4D2 CBR-rtVBR 0 0 0 0 0

4D2 UBR 0 0 0 0 0

4D3 ABR 0 0 0 0 0

4D3 nrtVBR 0 528848 0 0 0

4D3 CBR-rtVBR 0 0 0 0 0

4D3 UBR 0 0 0 0 0

4D4 ABR 0 0 0 0 0

4D4 nrtVBR 0 528848 0 0 0

4D4 CBR-rtVBR 0 0 0 0 0

4D4 UBR 0 0 0 0 0


Field Description


Priority The traffic type for this interface.

Current Cells The number of cells currently in shared memory for this interface and priority.


Txed Cells The number of cells transmitted out this interface for this priority.

Lost Cells The number of cells for this interface and priority dropped by the output networkmodule.

Inten Lost Cells The number of cells that were dropped for this interface and priority queue due to EPD(Early Packet Discard) or PPD (Partial Packet Discard).

Uinten Lost Cells The number of cells that were dropped for this interface and priority queue due to outputmemory shortages or the CLP (Cell Loss Priority) threshold.

Hardware Commands

5.8.12.5 hardware port traffic sf1These commands enable you to configure various traffic management features on anindividual port on a Series SF1 network module on the switch. You can display the list ofavailable subcommands by typing ? at the sf1 level.

myswitch:hardware port traffic sf1-> ?

modify Modify Series SF1 Port Traffic Configuration

show Display Series SF1 Port Traffic Configuration

statistics Display Series SF1 Port Traffic Statistics

5.8.12.5.1 hardware port traffic sf1 modify

This command lets you configure traffic on Series SF1 network modules as follows:

myswitch:hardware port traffic sf1-> modify

Usage:


[-prioindex] (abr|nrtvbr|cbr-rtvbr|ubr) Priority

[[-qsize] <integer>] Dedicated QSize

[[-clp1thrsh] <integer>] CLP=1 Threshold

[[-clp01thrsh] <integer>] CLP=0+1 Threshold



-atmif <AtmIf> The ATM interface on which the queue size or a CLP threshold is to be set.

-prioindex(abr|nrtvbr|cbr-rtvbr|ubr)

The traffic type for which the queue size or a CLP threshold is being set. Can be ABR,nrtVBR, CBR-rtVBR, or UBR.

-qsize <integer> The minimum queue size to be assigned to the traffic type designated by the -prioindexoption. The default is 256 cells.


NOTEChanging the -qsize parameter requires areboot of the entire switch fabric.

-clp1thrsh <integer> The number of cells in the buffer at which the CLP=1 cells are dropped for the port andpriority. The default is 256 cells.

-clp01thrsh <integer> The number of cells in the buffer at which the CLP=0+1 cells are dropped for the port andpriority. The default is 256 cells.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.8.12.5.2 hardware port traffic sf1 show

This command lets you display port and priority traffic information for all of the ports on allof the Series SF1 network modules. Enter the following:

myswitch:hardware port traffic sf1-> show

Queue Thresholds

AtmIf Priority Size CLP1 CLP0+1

4A1 ABR 256 256 131071

4A1 nrtVBR 256 256 131071

4A1 CBR-rtVBR 256 256 131071

4A1 UBR 256 256 131071

The fields in this display is defined as follows:

Field Description

AtmIf The ATM interface numbers of each SF1 network module installed in the switch fabric.

Priority The traffic type for this port.

Queue Size The reserved queue size for this port and priority, in cells.

CLP1 Threshold The value at which cells that have been tagged as non-conforming (CLP=1) are droppedfor this port and priority.

CLP0+1 Threshold The value at which cells that have been tagged as non-conforming (CLP0+1) are droppedfor this port and priority.


Hardware Commands

5.8.12.5.3 hardware port traffic sf1 statistics

You can display traffic statistics about all of the ports in a switch fabric by entering ? at thestatistics level. The following is displayed for Series SF1 network modules:

myswitch:hardware port traffic sf1-> statistics

C e l l L o s s

AtmIf Priority CLP0+1 CLP1 EPD/PPD

4A1 ABR 0 0 0

4A1 nrtVBR 0 0 0

4A1 CBR-rtVBR 0 0 0

4A1 UBR 0 0 0


Field Description

AtmIf The port (ATM interface) numbers of each SF1 network module installed in the switchfabric.


Cell Loss CLP0+1 The number of non-conforming (CLP0+1) cells that were dropped for this port andpriority.

Cell Loss CLP1 The number of non-conforming (CLP=1) cells that were dropped for this port and priority.

Cell Loss EPD/PPD The number of cells that were dropped for this port and priority due to EPD/PPD.


Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.8.12.6 hardware port traffic leThese commands enable you to configure various traffic management features on anindividual port on a Series LE network module on the switch. You can display the list ofavailable subcommands by typing ? at the le level.

myswitch:hardware port traffic le-> ?




5.8.12.6.1 hardware port traffic le modify

This command lets you configure traffic on Series LE network modules as follows:

myswitch:hardware port traffic le-> modify

Usage:

[-hwportname] <BNP> Atm Interface






-hwportname <BNP> The Series LE port to be configured.

-priority <Priority> The priority for which the queue size or CLP threshold is being changed. Can be ABR,nrtVBR, CBR-rtVBR, or UBR.

-qsize <integer> The number of cells in the buffer at which the CLP=1 cells are dropped for the interfaceand priority. The default is 256 cells.

-clpthreshold <integer>1 The minimum CBR-rtVBR queue size for the interface and priority. The default is 256 cells.



Hardware Commands

5.8.12.6.2 hardware port traffic le show

This command lets you display port and priority traffic information for all of the ports on allof the Series LE network modules. Enter the following:

myswitch:hardware port traffic le-> show

Port Series Priority Queue size CLP Thresholds

7A1 LE ABR 256 256

7A1 LE nrtVBR 256 256

7A1 LE CBR-rtVBR 256 256

7A1 LE UBR 256 256

7A2 LE ABR 256 256



7A2 LE UBR 256 256

7A3 LE ABR 256 256



7A3 LE UBR 256 256

7A4 LE ABR 256 256



7A4 LE UBR 256 256

7B1 LE ABR 256 256

7B1 LE nrtVBR 256 256

7B1 LE CBR-rtVBR 256 256

7B1 LE UBR 256 256



Field Description


Port The ATM interface numbers of each Series LE network module.

Series Shows what series of network module this is.

Priority The priority for which the queue size and CLP threshold is being displayed.

Queue size1

1. The Series LE network modules offer an ABR-ready ATM interface. A future ForeThought release will support ABR QoSoperation on these interfaces. ABR options in the current release will apply in that ForeThought release.

The reserved queue size for this interface and priority, in cells.

CLP Thresholds The value at which cells that have been tagged as non-conforming (CLP=1) are droppedfor this interface and priority.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.8.12.6.3 hardware port traffic le statistics

You can display traffic statistics about all of the ports in a switch fabric by entering ? at thestatistics level. The following is displayed for Series LE network modules:

myswitch:hardware port traffic le-> statistics

Current Txed Lost Inten Lost Uninten Lost

Port Priority Cells Cells Cells Cells Cells

7A1 ABR 0 0 0 0 0

7A1 nrtVBR 0 779936 0 0 0

7A1 CBR-rtVBR 0 0 0 0 0

7A1 UBR 0 3307083565 0 0 0

7A2 ABR 0 0 0 0 0

7A2 nrtVBR 0 139806 0 0 0

7A2 CBR-rtVBR 0 0 0 0 0

7A2 UBR 0 0 0 0 0

7A3 ABR 0 0 0 0 0

7A3 nrtVBR 0 139806 0 0 0

7A3 CBR-rtVBR 0 0 0 0 0

7A3 UBR 0 0 0 0 0

7A4 ABR 0 0 0 0 0

7A4 nrtVBR 0 139806 0 0 0

7A4 CBR-rtVBR 0 0 0 0 0

7A4 UBR 0 0 0 0 0



Field Description


Priority The traffic type for this interface.


Current Cells The number of cells currently in shared memory for this interface and priority.

Txed Cells The number of cells transmitted out this interface for this priority.

Lost Cells The number of cells for this interface and priority dropped by the output networkmodule.

Inten Lost Cells The number of cells that were dropped for this interface and priority queue due to EPD(Early Packet Discard) or PPD (Partial Packet Discard).

Uinten Lost Cells The number of cells that were dropped for this interface and priority queue due to outputmemory shortages or the CLP (Cell Loss Priority) threshold.

Hardware Commands

5.8.12.7 hardware port traffic pc1These commands enable you to configure various traffic management features on anindividual port on a Series 1 port card on an ASX-4000 switch. You can display the list ofavailable subcommands by typing ? at the pc1 level.

myswitch:hardware port traffic pc1-> ?

modify Modify Series PC1 Port Traffic Configuration

show Display Series PC1 Port Traffic Configuration

statistics Display Series PC1 Port Traffic Statistics

5.8.12.7.1 hardware port traffic pc1 modify

This command lets you configure traffic on Series 1 port cards as follows:

myswitch:hardware port traffic pc1-> modify

Usage:







-atmif <AtmIf> The port on which the queue size or CLP threshold is to be set.

-priority <Priority>1 The traffic type for which the queue size or CLP threshold is being set. Can be ABR,nrtVBR, CBR-rtVBR, or UBR.

-qsize <integer>2 The minimum queue size to be assigned to the traffic type designated by the -priorityoption. The default is 256 cells.

-clpthreshold <integer> The number of cells in the buffer at which the CLP=1 cells are dropped for the port and


NOTEThis command is not available on the Series 1OC-48 port cards.


2. The port card must be reset for this command to take effect.

priority. The default is 256 cells.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.8.12.7.2 hardware port traffic pc1 show

This command lets you display port and priority traffic information for all of the ports on allof the Series 1 port cards. Enter the following:

myswitch:hardware port traffic pc1-> show

AtmIf Series Priority Queue size CLP Thresholds

2A1 PC1 ABR 256 256

2A1 PC1 nrtVBR 256 256

2A1 PC1 CBR-rtVBR 256 256

2A1 PC1 UBR 256 256

2A2 PC1 ABR 256 256



2A2 PC1 UBR 256 256

2A3 PC1 ABR 256 256



2A3 PC1 UBR 256 256

2A4 PC1 ABR 256 256



2A4 PC1 UBR 256 256



Field Description

AtmIf The port (ATM interface) numbers of each Series 1 port card installed in the switch fabric.

Series The series of port card that this is.

Priority1 The traffic type for this port.



Queue size The reserved queue size for this port and priority, in cells.

CLP Thresholds The value at which cells that have been tagged as non-conforming (CLP=1) are droppedfor this port and priority.

Hardware Commands

5.8.12.7.3 hardware port traffic pc1 statistics

You can display traffic statistics about all of the ports in a Series 1 port cards as follows:

myswitch:hardware port traffic pc1-> statistics

AtmIf Priority Current Txed Lost Inten Lost Uinten Lost

Cells Cells Cells Cells Cells

2A1 ABR 0 0 0 0 0

2A1 nrtVBR 0 259694 0 0 0

2A1 CBR-rtVBR 0 0 0 0 0

2A1 UBR 0 0 0 0 0

2A2 ABR 0 0 0 0 0

2A2 nrtVBR 0 259692 0 0 0

2A2 CBR-rtVBR 0 0 0 0 0

2A2 UBR 0 0 0 0 0

2A3 ABR 0 0 0 0 0

2A3 nrtVBR 0 259694 0 0 0

2A3 CBR-rtVBR 0 0 0 0 0

2A3 UBR 0 0 0 0 0

2A4 ABR 0 0 0 0 0

2A4 nrtVBR 0 259692 0 0 0

2A4 CBR-rtVBR 0 0 0 0 0

2A4 UBR 0 0 0 0 0



Field Description

AtmIf The outgoing port (ATM interface) number.


Current Cells The number of cells currently in shared memory for this port and priority.


Txed Cells The number of cells transmitted out this port.

Lost Cells The number of cells on this port that were dropped by the output logical network module.

Inten Lost Cells The number of cells dropped on this port due to EPD (Early Packet Discard) or PPD(Partial Packet Discard). This field does not apply to Series 1 OC-48c port cards.

Uinten Lost Cells The number of cells dropped on this port due to output memory shortages or the CLP(Cell Loss Priority) threshold. This field does not apply to Series 1 OC-48c port cards.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.8.12.8 hardware port traffic pc2These commands enable you to configure various traffic management features on anindividual port on a Series 2 port card on an ASX-4000 switch. You can display the list ofavailable subcommands by typing ? at the pc2 level.

myswitch:hardware port traffic pc2-> ?

modify Modify Series PC2 Port Traffic Configuration

show Display Series PC2 Port Traffic Configuration

5.8.12.8.1 hardware port traffic pc2 modify

This command lets you configure the buffer class, dedicated queue size, and CLP thresholdson Series 2 port cards.

myswitch:hardware port traffic pc2-> modify

Usage:

[-shmemIf] <Interface> Netmod Interface


[[-qsize] <unsigned>] Dedicated Queue Size

[[-clp01Thresh] <unsigned>] CLP01 Threshold

[[-clp1Thresh] <unsigned>] CLP1 Threshold



-shmemIf <Interface> The interface (port) for which the buffer class, queue size, and CLP threshold is to be set.

-buffer <text> The buffer class or type of traffic (CBR, rtVBR, nrtVBR, ABR, and UBR) to which the CLPthreshold and queue size applies.

-qsize <unsigned> The reserved queue size for this port.


-clp01Thresh <unsigned> The threshold set for CLP=0+1 cells. Applying a CLP=0+1 threshold means that when thecurrent cell count for this port and class is greater than this threshold, cells that have aCLP=0+1 are dropped, regardless of their CLP bit. This threshold must be greater than theCLP=1 threshold and must also be entered in multiples of 8. The default is the size of cellmemory.

-clp1Thresh <unsigned> The threshold set for CLP=1 cells. Applying a CLP=1 threshold means that when thecurrent cell count for this port and class is greater than this threshold, cells that have aCLP=1 are dropped. This threshold must be less than the CLP=0+1 threshold and mustalso be entered in multiples of 8. The default is 256 cells.

Hardware Commands

5.8.12.8.2 hardware port traffic pc2 show

This command lets you display port and priority traffic information for all of the ports on allof the Series 2 port cards. Enter the following:


Buffer Dedicated CLP1 CLP01

ShmemIf Class Queue Size Threshold Threshold

2A1 ABR 256 256 131040

2A1 CBR 256 256 131040

2A1 UBR 256 256 131040

2A1 nrtVBR 256 256 131040

2A1 rtVBR 256 256 131040

2A2 ABR 256 256 131040

2A2 CBR 256 256 131040

2A2 UBR 256 256 131040

2A2 nrtVBR 256 256 131040

2A2 rtVBR 256 256 131040

2A3 ABR 256 256 131040

2A3 CBR 256 256 131040

2A3 UBR 256 256 131040

2A3 nrtVBR 256 256 131040

2A3 rtVBR 256 256 131040

2A4 ABR 256 256 131040

If Series 2 ports cards have not been configured in the switch, the following displays:





Field Description

ShmemIf The interface (port) numbers of each Series 2 port card installed in the switch fabric.


Dedicated Queue Size The reserved queue size for this port, in cells.

CLP1 Threshold The values at which cells that have been tagged as non-conforming (CLP=1) are droppedfor this port.

CLP01 Threshold The value at which cells are dropped for this port, regardless of their CLP bit.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.8.12.8.2.1 hardware port traffic pc2 show -queues

This command lets you display information about the queues on the Series 2 port cards. Enterthe following:

myswitch:hardware port traffic pc2-> show -queues

Buffer Current Max

ShmemIf Class Overflows Queue Size Queue Size

2A1 ABR 0 0 0

2A1 CBR 0 0 0

2A1 UBR 0 0 0

2A1 nrtVBR 0 0 1

2A1 rtVBR 0 0 0

2A2 ABR 0 0 0

2A2 CBR 0 0 0

2A2 UBR 0 0 0

2A2 nrtVBR 0 0 1

2A2 rtVBR 0 0 0

2A3 ABR 0 0 0

2A3 CBR 0 0 0

2A3 UBR 0 0 0

2A3 nrtVBR 0 0 1

2A3 rtVBR 0 0 0

2A4 ABR 0 0 0

2A4 CBR 0 0 0


myswitch:hardware port traffic pc2-> show -queues




Field Description



Overflows The number of cells (AAL5) lost on this port for this class because shared memory wasfull.

Current Queue Size The number of cells currently in shared memory for this port and class.

Max Queue Size The maximum queue size since since the last time it was checked.

Hardware Commands

5.8.12.8.2.2 hardware port traffic pc2 show -stats

You can display traffic statistics about all of the ports in a Series 1 port cards as follows:

myswitch:hardware port traffic pc2-> show -stats

Buffer Cells C e l l s L o s t

ShmemIf Class Transmitted CLP1 CLP01 EPD PPD

2A1 ABR 0 0 0 0 0

2A1 CBR 0 0 0 0 0

2A1 UBR 0 0 0 0 0

2A1 nrtVBR 19840 0 0 0 0

2A1 rtVBR 0 0 0 0 0

2A2 ABR 0 0 0 0 0

2A2 CBR 0 0 0 0 0

2A2 UBR 0 0 0 0 0

2A2 nrtVBR 19842 0 0 0 0

2A2 rtVBR 0 0 0 0 0


myswitch:hardware port traffic pc2-> show -stats



Field Description



Cells Transmitted1 The number of cells transmitted out of this port for this class for both CLP01 and CLP1 cells.

Cells Lost CLP1 The number of cells lost on this port for this class because the per-port, per-class CLP1 thresholdwas exceeded.


1. This number may be less than the total cells transmitted by all VCs on this port. This is because on a multicastconnection with multiple outputs to the same port, each cell is counted only once at the port level for all legs of theconnection.

Cells Lost CLP01 The number of cells lost on this port for this class because the per-port, per-class CLP01 thresholdwas exceeded.

Cells Lost EPD The number of cells lost on this port for this class because of early packet discard (EPD).

Cells Lost PPD The total number of cells (except the first cell of each packet) lost because of PPD, because theper-port, per-class CLP=0+1 threshold was exceeded, because the per-port, per-class CLP=1threshold was exceeded, because the per-VC CLP=1 and CLP=0+1 thresholds were exceeded, orbecause shared memory was full.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.9 hardware portcard

These commands let you display information about the ATM port cards in an ESX-3000switch. You can display the available commands by typing ? at the portcard level.

myswitch:hardware portcard-> ?

reset Reset Portcard Hardware

show Display portcard information

5.9.1 hardware portcard resetThis command is the software equivalent of removing and immediately re-inserting an ATMport card in ESX-3000 switch while the switch is running. This allows you to reset theconnections on a given port card without having physical access to the switch. Enter thefollowing parameters:

myswitch:hardware portcard-> reset

[-name] <text> Portcard Name


NOTEAll SVCs associated with this port card are torndown upon a reset and attempt to reconnect asneeded. All PVCs associated with this port cardare torn down and set up again upon a reset.


-name <text> The network module you want to reset.


Depending on the number of PVCs configured, itmay take a short time for all of the PVCs to be re-established after a reset.

Hardware Commands

5.9.2 hardware portcard showThis command lets you display information about all of the ATM port cards that are installedin an ESX-3000 switch. Enter the following parameters:

myswitch:hardware portcard-> show

Port Hw Mfg

Card Ver Rev S/N Model

1 8 9 00000048 12 ports OC-3c MMF SC series-1

3 0 1 00000180 16 ports 155 Mbps UTP5 series-1

5 0 1 00000172 16 ports 155 Mbps UTP5 series-1


5.9.2.1 hardware portcard show -statsYou can also display statistics for an ESX-3000 port card as follows:

myswitch:hardware portcard-> show -stats

PortCard Uptime

1 1d:11:44

3 0d:02:21

Field Description

Port Card Shows the slot number in which the port card is installed in an ESX-3000 switch.

Hw Ver Shows the hardware configuration number of this port card.

Mfg Rev Shows the assembly revision number of this port card.

S/N Shows the serial number of this port card.

Model Describes what type of port card is installed. Shows the number of ports, the SONET rate,the fiber type, and the series number.


5 3d:24:15


Field Description

PortCard The number of each port card that is currently installed in the ESX-3000 switch.

Uptime The length of time that this port card has been in its current state.

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.10 hardware power

This command lets you display information about power supplies.

The following power information is displayed on an ASX-1000 switch with model A DCpower supplies:

myswitch:hardware-> power

PS Type InputState OutputState 5VoltState Current SerialNumber Version

1 ps48VDC normal normal N/A N/A 1011 2

2 ps48VDC normal normal N/A N/A 1085 2

The following power information is displayed on an ASX-1000 switch, ASX-1200 switch, or aTNX-1100 switch with model B DC power supplies:



1 ps30ADC normal normal normal normal 198 2

2 ps30ADC normal normal normal normal 205 2

The following power information is displayed on an ASX-1000 switch with model A ACpower supplies:



1 psAutoRangeAC normal normal N/A N/A 268 2



Hardware Commands

The following power information is displayed on an ASX-1000 switch, ASX-1200 switch, orTNX-1100 switch with model B AC power supplies:



1 psRM1000HA normal normal N/A N/A 2169 2

2 psRM1000HA normal normal N/A N/A 2133 2

The following power information is displayed on an ASX-200BX switch or TNX-210 switch:



1 psAutoRangeAC normal normal N/A N/A N/A N/A

2 psAutoRangeAC normal normal N/A N/A N/A N/A

The following power information is displayed on an AC-powered ASX-4000 switch:







The following power information is displayed on a DC-powered ASX-4000 switch:



1 psAutoRangeAC normal normal normal normal 97050001 0






The following power information is displayed on an ESX-3000 switch:



3 N/A normal normal N/A N/A N/A N/A

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands


Field Description

PS The slot in which the power supply resides:

• On an ASX-200BX switch or TNX-210 switch, 1 indicates the left power supply and 2indicates the right power supply.

• On an ASX-1000 switch, ASX-1200 switch, or TNX-1100 switch, 1 indicates the powersupply in slot 1 in the chassis and 2 indicates the power supply in slot 2 in the chassis.

• On an ASX-4000 switch, 1 indicates the power supply in slot 1 in the chassis (the left-most slot), 2 indicates the power supply in slot 2 in the chassis, etc.

• On a ESX-3000 switch, 1 indicates the power supply in slot 1 in the chassis (the left-most slot), 2 indicates the power supply in slot 2 in the chassis, and 3 indicates thepower supply in slot 3 in the chassis (the rightmost slot).

Type Shows whether it is an AC or a DC power supply.

InputState Shows if the voltage coming into the power supply is normal or not.

OutputState Shows if the voltage going out of the power supply is normal or not.

5VoltState Shows the state of the +5V output of this power supply.

Current Shows the state of the current on the input return path of this power supply.

SerialNumber Shows the serial number of the power supply.

Version Shows the power supply’s hardware version number.


Hardware Commands

5.11 hardware scp

These commands let you display information about the SCP(s). Type ? at the scp level todisplay the available subcommands.

myswitch:hardware scp-> ?

show Display CPU information

statistics Display processor statistics

5.11.1 hardware scp showThis command lets you display information about the SCP(s). Information similar to thefollowing is displayed for an SCP in an ASX-4000 switch:

myswitch:hardware scp-> show

CPU DRAM Flash IDE Board Prom

CPU Type Rev State Size Size Size Rev Rev MAC Address S/N

1X p6 82 normal 512.0M 8.0M 77.0M C 2.0 008050016a4e N/A

1Y p6 82 standby 512.0M 8.0M 77.0M C 2.0 008050013a6a N/A

Information similar to the following is displayed for an SCP in an ESX-3000 switch:




1X p55 67 normal 128.0M N/A 20.0M N/A I 08003e283819 N/A

Information similar to the following is displayed for an SCP in an ASX-200BX switch,


ASX-1000 switch, ASX-1200 switch, TNX-210 switch, or a TNX-1100 switch:




1X p55 67 normal 64.0M 8.0M N/A c 3.0 0020482b6389 25481

Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands


Field Description

CPU The slot in which the SCP resides.

• The number indicates in which switch fabric it resides (1 in an ASX-200BX switch,TNX-210 switch, ESX-3000 switch, or ASX-4000 switch; or 1, 2, 3, or 4 in an ASX-1000switch, ASX-1200 switch, or TNX-1100 switch).

• The letter indicates in which of the two slots it resides. In an ASX-1000 switch,ASX-1200 switch, or TNX-1100 switch, X is the top slot of the switch fabric and Y is thebottom slot of the switch fabric. In an ASX-200BX switch, X is the left slot of the switchfabric and Y is the right slot of the switch fabric. In an ASX-4000 switch, X is the leftSCP slot and Y is the right SCP slot.

Type The type of processor.

Cpu Rev The revision level of the CPU chip.

State The current condition of the SCP.

• normal means this SCP is functioning properly, and this SCP is the primary(controlling) SCP if more than one is installed.

• standby means this is the secondary (standby) SCP if more than one is installed.

• fail means something is wrong with this SCP.

DRAM Size The amount of DRAM, in Megabytes, installed on the SCP board.

Flash Size1 The size of the FLASH chip, in Megabytes.

IDE Size The size of the IDE disk, in Megabytes.

Board Rev The hardware revision level of the processor’s board. N/A means the revision cannot beobtained; e.g., the other SCP is running a software version that does not support this field.

Prom Rev The hardware revision level of the SCP PROM. This field is not available for earlier ver-sions of SCPs. N/A means the revision cannot be obtained; e.g., the SCP is an earlier ver-sion or the other SCP is running a software version that does not support this field.

MAC Address This is the Ethernet MAC address of your SCP that is used during bootp. If you connect aterminal device to the SCP’s serial port, you see the Ethernet MAC address displayedduring the EPROM boot sequence. See Chapter 4 in the Multiservice Broadband SwitchInstallation and Maintenance Manual for more information about bootp. The Ethernet MAC


1. On an SCP-4000-PPRO-256, the OS is stored on the FLASH chip and the CDB is stored on the IDE disk. On anSCP-4000-P2-512-DS1, SCP-4000-P3-512-DS1, SCP-4000-P2-512-E1, SCP-4000-P3-512-E1, SCP-4000-P2-512-T and SCP-4000-P3-512-T, both the OS and CDB are stored on the IDE disk. For SCP-4000-P3-512-DS1, -E1, and -T, the OS is alsostored on the FLASH. On an ESX-3000 SCP, there is no FLASH chip, so both the OS and the CDB are stored on the IDEdisk. On all other SCPs, there is no IDE disk, so both the OS and the CDB are stored on the FLASH chip.

address also scrolls across the display LED on the SCP’s front panel. See Chapter 4 in theMultiservice Broadband Switch Installation and Maintenance Manual for more informationabout the display LED.

S/N The serial number of the SCP. This field only applies to an ASX-4000 switch.

Hardware Commands

5.11.1.1 hardware scp show -prodnumThis command lets you display the product, part number, and CLEI code for SCPs in anASX-4000 switch. Enter the following:

myswitch:hardware scp-> show -prodnum

CPU Product Part Number CLEI Code

1X SCP-4000-P2-512-DS1 BAA4ZVWBAA


Field Description

CPU The slot in which the SCP resides. See the description in Section 5.11.1.

Product Part Number The product number for this SCP in an ASX-4000 switch.

• The product number for an SCP with a DS1 TCM is SCP-4000-P2-512-DS1.

• The product number for an SCP with an E1 TCM is SCP-4000-P2-512-E1.

• The product number for an SCP with no TCM timing functionality is SCP-4000-P2-512-T.

• The product numbers for older SCPs are SCP-4000-P2-512 and SCP-4000-PPRO-256.

• The product number for an SCP with a DS1 TCM is SCP-4000-P3-512-DS1.

• The product number for an SCP with an E1 TCM is SCP-4000-P3-512-E1.

• The product number for an SCP with no TCM timing functionality is SCP-4000-P3-512-T.

CLEI Code The Common Language Equipment Identification (CLEI) for this SCP. This field maydisplay N/A for older processors.


Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.11.2 hardware scp statisticsThis command lets you display statistical information about the SCP(s). Information similar tothe following is displayed:

myswitch:hardware scp-> statistics

Current Processor Utilization : 11%

Minimum Processor Utilization : 10%

Maximum Processor Utilization : 100%

Update Interval (in 100ths of secs) : 100


This command also lets you change the update interval in hundredths of a second, or reset thevalues for the fields in this display as follows:

myswitch:hardware scp-> statistics ?

[[-moninterval] <integer>] Update Interval (in 100ths of secs)

[[-historyreset] <integer>] History Reset

Field Description

Current ProcessorUtilization

The current amount of processor utilization.

Minimum ProcessorUtilization

The minimum amount of processor utilization for this update interval.

Maximum ProcessorUtilization

The maximum amount of processor utilization for this update interval.

Update Interval (in 100ths ofsecs)

The update interval shown in hundredths of a second.




-moninterval <integer> The amount of time between calculations of the statistics in this display, in hundredths ofa second. This value can range from 1 to 6000 ticks (hundredths of a second), or 0.01 to60.00 seconds. The default is 1500 hundredths of a second, or 15 seconds.

-historyreset <integer> This field can be set to any integer. Setting this field resets the Current ProcessorUtilization, Minimum Processor Utilization, and Maximum ProcessorUtilization fields.

Hardware Commands

5.12 hardware tcm

These commands let you configure and display information about the Timing Control Module(TCM) in an ASX-4000 switch. Type ? at the tcm level to display the available subcommands.

myswitch:hardware tcm-> ?

modify Modify TCM timing configuration

references> The references directory

show Display TCM timing configuration

txbits> The txbits directory

5.12.1 hardware tcm modifyThis command lets you configure timing on a TCM in an ASX-4000 switch.

myswitch:hardware tcm-> modify

Usage:

[[-mode] (freerun|external|line)] Requested Timing Mode

[[-framing] <tcmbitsframing>] Bits Framing Format

[[-coding] (ami|b8zs|hdb3)] Bits Coding Format

[[-level] (0.6|1.2|1.8|2.4|3.0)] Bits Output Level

[[-revertiveswitching] (enabled|disabled)] Revertive Switching

[[-revertivedelay] <integer>] Revertive Delay (Secs)

[[-failoverdelay] <integer>] Failover Delay (Secs)


Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands



-mode(freerun|external|line)

Indicates the timing mode to be used on the TCM:

• freerun indicates that the TCM must use its local oscillator as the timing source. It isrecommended that the freerun mode only be used during diagnostics andmaintenance because the TCM will not fail over to another source when it is in thismode. CAUTION: If the timing mode is changed to freerun from either external orline mode, a phase hit will occur (the switching will not be hitless), or if the switch isoperating in freerun mode and a dual SCP switchover takes place, a phase hit willoccur.

• external indicates that the TCM may use one of the two external BITS clock timingreferences. This is the default mode when a TCM is installed, in accordance with theBellcore GR-253 specification. See the ASX-4000 Installation and Maintenance Manual fora description of how this mode works.

• line indicates that the TCM may use one of the ports configured as primary and sec-ondary under system timing modify as a timing reference. See the ASX-4000Installation and Maintenance Manual for a description of how this mode works.

-framing <tcmbitsframing> The type of framing format to be used for the BITS interface. The following formats aresupported for a DS1 BITS interface:

• d4 indicates that D4 (also known as Superframe (SF)) framing should be used for theBITS interface on the TCM. SF consists of 12 frames of 192 bits each, with the 193rd bitproviding error checking and other functions. This framing format does not supportSSM.

• esf indicates that Extended Superframe (ESF) framing should be used for the BITSinterface on the TCM. ESF provides frame synchronization, cyclic redundancy, anddata link bits. This framing format supports SSM.

The following formats are supported for an E1 BITS interface:

• fas indicates E1 framing that makes use of the Frame Alignment Signal. This framingformat does not support SSM.

• fascrc4 indicates E1 framing that makes use of the Frame Alignment Signal andCRC-4 checksums. This framing format supports SSM.

• mfas indicates E1 framing that makes use of the Multi-Frame Alignment Signal(sometimes referred to as TS16). This framing format does not support SSM.

• mfascrc4 indicates E1 framing that makes use of the Multi-Frame Alignment Signal


and CRC-4 checksums. This framing format does not support SSM.

Hardware Commands

-coding (ami|b8zs|hdb3) The type of coding to be used for the BITS interface. The following formats are supportedfor a DS1 BITS interface:

• ami indicates that Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI) coding should be used for the BITSinterface on the TCM. This means zeros are represented by 01 during each bit cell, andones are represented by 11 or 00, alternately, during each bit cell. This techniquerequires that the sending device maintain ones density. Ones density is not maintainedindependent of the data stream.

• b8zs indicates that Binary 8-Zero Substitution (B8ZS) coding should be used for theTCM. This means a special code is substituted whenever eight consecutive zeros aresent through the link. This code is then interpreted at the remote end of the connection.This technique guarantees ones density independent of the data stream. B8ZS is thedefault coding format for DS1.

The following format is supported for an E1 BITS interface:

• hdb3 indicates that High Density Bipolar (HDB3) coding should be used for the TCM.HDB3 is a bipolar coding method that does not allow more than 3 consecutive zeroes.HDB3 is only supported for an E1 interface and is the default coding format for E1.

-level (0.6|1.2|1.8|2.4|3.0) The output level (dB) of the DS1 BITS interface. This parameter is not valid when using anE1 source.






-revertiveswitching(enabled|disabled)

enabled indicates the TCM will revert from the secondary to the primary referencesource when it becomes available and the revertive delay timer has expired.

disabled indicates the TCM will not revert from the secondary to the primary reference.

-revertivedelay <integer> The amount of time after the restoration of the primary timing reference before the TCM isinstructed to return to the primary timing reference. The default is 12 seconds.

-failoverdelay <integer> The amount of time after the failure of the primary reference before the TCM is instructedto switch to the secondary reference. The default is 12 seconds. It is recommended thatthis value be set to at least 10 seconds to allow the primary reference to have a chance torecover before a failover is initiated.



Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.12.2 hardware tcm referencesThese commands let you configure or display the timing reference sources and their status.Type ? at the references level to display the list of available subcommands.

myswitch:hardware tcm references-> ?

modify Modify reference sources quality/admin status

show Display all reference sources and their status

5.12.2.1 hardware tcm references modifyThis command lets you modify a timing reference for the switch. Enter the following:

myswitch:hardware tcm references-> modify

Usage:

[-reference] <tcmrefsource> Reference

[[-admin] (up|down)] Admin



-reference <tcmrefsource> Indicates for which timing source you are changing the administrative status. Can be oneof the following: bits1, bits2, switchPrimary, or switchSecondary.

-admin (up|down) up means you are enabling this timing source. This is the default setting.

down means you are disabling this timing source. The freerun source cannot beadministered down.


Hardware Commands

5.12.2.2 hardware tcm references showThis command lets you display all of the possible timing references for the switch. Enter thefollowing parameters:

myswitch:hardware tcm references-> show

Reference Source Status Admin RefQual

freerun freerun available up ok

bits1 BITS1 available down ok

bits2 BITS2 available up ok

switchPrimary 4B4 available up ok

switchSecondary 3B4 unavailable up fail


Fields Description

Reference Shows the name of the timing reference.

Source Shows from which port card or BITS clock the timing is being derived for the associatedreference. If the port is listed in BNP notation (e.g., 3B2), this indicates the importedtiming source from this port card. freerun indicates that the timing source is the localoscillator on the TCM.

Status Shows if the timing source’s input signal is available or unavailable.

Admin Shows the administrative status of the timing reference:

• up means it is enabled.

• down means it is disabled and will not be used.

RefQual Shows the reference quality (RefQual) status of the timing reference:

• ok means the source is valid.

• fail means the source has gone out of specification and will not be used.


Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.12.2.3 hardware tcm showThis command lets you display the TCM timing information that has been configured. Enterthe following parameters:

myswitch:hardware tcm-> show

Operational Status: enabled

Card Type: DS1_Stratum_3E

Card Version: 0

Card PLL Status: locked

Requested Timing Mode: external

Operational Timing Mode: external

Primary Timing Reference: bits1

Secondary Timing Reference: bits2

Current Timing Reference: secondary

BITS Framing Format: esf

BITS Coding: b8zs

BITS Output Level: 0.6dB

Revertive Switching: enabled

Revertive Switching Delay: 12

Reference Failover Delay: 12


Field Description

Operational Status Shows whether the TCM is in use or not.


enabled means the TCM is operational. The timing mode under system timing is tcm.

disabled means the TCM is not operational. This state can be occur because the timingmode under system timing has been configured as switch, or because a critical failurehas occurred on the TCM.

Card Type Shows the card type for this TCM (either DS1 or E1).

Card Version Shows the card version number for this TCM.

Hardware Commands

Card PLL Status Shows the phase-locked loop (PLL) status for this TCM. Can be one of the following:

• freerun means the local oscillator on the TCM is being used.

• locked means the current clock is good and is being distributed as the current timingsource for the entire switch.

• holdover means the TCM has detected a clock source error and is using the last validclock source.

• acquiring means the TCM is trying to lock on to the current timing reference (thisprocess takes between five and six minutes).

Requested Timing Mode Shows the timing mode that was configured. If this source fails, it will not match what iscurrently being used. Can be freerun, line, or external.

Operational Timing Mode Shows the actual timing mode currently being used. Can be freerun, line, or external.

Primary Timing Reference Shows the timing source configured as the primary source. Can be the primary clockexported from one of the port cards or the BITS1 input.

Secondary Timing Reference Shows the timing source configured as the secondary source. Can be the secondary clockexported from one of the port cards or the BITS2 input.

Current Timing Reference Shows which reference is currently being used as the timing source.

BITS Framing Format Shows the framing format of the BITS interface for this TCM. For DS1, can be d4 or esf,and for E1, can be fas, fascrc4, mfas, or mfascrc4.

BITS Coding Shows the coding format of the BITS interface for this TCM. For DS1, can be ami or b8zs,and for E1, can be hdb3.

BITS Output Level Shows the output level, in dB, of the DS1 BITS interface for this TCM. Can be 0.6, 1.2, 1.8,2.4, or 3.0.

Revertive Switching enabled indicates the TCM will revert from the secondary to the primary referencesource when it becomes available and the revertive delay timer has expired.

disabled indicates the TCM will not revert from the secondary to the primary reference.

Revertive Switching Delay Shows the amount of time, in seconds, between the time that the primary clock is restoredand the time that the TCM reverts back to the primary clock again.

Reference Failover Delay Shows the amount of time, in seconds, after the failure of the primary clock source beforethe TCM switches to the secondary clock source.

Field Description


Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.12.3 hardware tcm txbitsThese commands let you configure or display the transmit BITS configuration. Type ? at thetxbits level to display the list of available subcommands.

myswitch:hardware tcm txbits-> ?

modify Modify Transmit BITS Configuration

show Transmit BITS Configuration

5.12.3.1 hardware tcm txbits modifyThis command lets you modify the source of the transmit BITS1 and BITS2 interfaces:

myswitch:hardware tcm txbits-> modify

Usage:

[[-bits1src] (switchPrimary|switchSecondary)] BITS1 Tx Ref Src

[[-bits2src] (switchPrimary|switchSecondary)] BITS2 Tx Ref Src

[[-mode] (automatic|thresholdAIS)] Tx BITS Oper Mode



-bits1src(switchPrimary|switchSecondary)

switchPrimary means the BITS1 interface should transmit the received signal from theport configured as the primary clock source under system timing modify. This is thedefault value.

switchSecondary means the BITS1 interface should transmit the received signal fromthe port configured as the secondary clock source under system timing modify.

-bits2src(switchPrimary|switchSecondary)

switchPrimary means the BITS2 interface should transmit the received signal from theport configured as the primary clock source under system timing modify.

switchSecondary means the BITS2 interface should transmit the received signal fromthe port configured as the secondary clock source under system timing modify. This is


the default value.

Hardware Commands

5.12.3.2 hardware tcm txbits showThis command lets you display the source of the transmit BITS1 or BITS2 clock as follows:

myswitch:hardware tcm txbits-> show

BITS1 Transmit Reference Source: switchPrimary

BITS2 Transmit Reference Source: switchSecondary

Transmit BITS Operational Mode: automatic

The fields in this display are defined in Section 5.12.3.1.

-mode(automatic|thresholdAIS)

automatic indicates the following:

• If Synchronization Status Messaging (SSM) is disabled (using system timing ssmmodify -autorefswitch disabled), the BITS clocks transmit an Alarm IndicationSignal (AIS) upon a loss of the transmit reference source.

• If SSM is enabled (using system timing ssm modify -autorefswitch enabled),and if the framing format of the receiving device supports SSM (for DS1 this is ESFand for E1 this is fascrc4), the BITS clocks operate in message pass through mode (theBITS1 source is transmitted out the BITS1 interface and the BITS2 source is transmittedout the BITS2 interface.

• If SSM is enabled, and if the framing format of the receiving device does not supportSSM, the BITS clocks transmit an Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) upon a loss of thetransmit reference source.

thresholdAIS indicates the following:

• If SSM is disabled, the BITS clocks transmit an Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) upon aloss of the transmit reference source.

• If SSM is enabled, then the BITS clocks operate in message pass through mode if thethe quality of the clock remains above SMC (SONET minimum clock). If the quality ofthe clock drops to or below SMC, an AIS is transmitted out the BITS interface.



Hardw

areC

om

man

ds

Hardware Commands

5.13 hardware temperature

This command enables you to display information gathered by the temperature sensors.

NOTEThis command is not available on an ESX-3000switch.

The following temperature information is displayed on an ASX-1000 switch, ASX-1200 switch,or TNX-1100 switch:

myswitch:hardware-> temperature

TemperatureSensor State

enclosure normal

power-supply-1 normal


The following temperature information is displayed on an ASX-200BX switch, or a TNX-210switch:



enclosure normal

The following temperature information is displayed on an ASX-4000 switch:



enclosure normal







Field Description

TemperatureSensor1

1. Power supply temperature sensor information is only shown on an ASX-1000 switch, ASX-1200 switch, ASX-4000switch, or TNX-1100 switch. If this command is issued on an ASX-200BX switch or TNX-210 switch, switch informationis shown only for the enclosure temperature sensor. No power supply temperature sensor information is displayed forthese types of switches.

Indicates where the temperature sensor is located on the unit.

State Shows if the temperature at the specified location is normal or not.

Hardware Commands


Aadministrative status

changing for a timingreference . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 28, 5 - 247

AIS (Alarm Indication Signal) . . . . . . . . . 3 - 20Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) . . . . . . . . . 3 - 20alarm relay

configuring on the CEC-Plus . . . . . . . . 5 - 3displaying on the CEC-Plus . . . . . . . . 5 - 4setting on the CEC-Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 3

alarmsdisabling on the CEC-Plus . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 3displaying configuration on the

CEC-Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 5displaying for network modules . . . 5 - 56displaying major/minor status

on the CEC-Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6enabling on the CEC-Plus . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 3setting for network modules . . . . . . . 5 - 55

Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI)coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 27, 5 - 246

AMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1canceling a command . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 12

AMI directorytraversing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 4

AMI features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 4ASIC test information

Series D network modules . . . . . . . . . 5 - 80Series E network modules . . . . . . . . . 5 - 80

ASIC testsSeries D network modules . . . . . . . . . 5 - 78

aborting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 79Series E network modules . . . . . . . . . 5 - 78

aborting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 79asterisk (out-of-service ports) . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 39ATM Management Interface (AMI) . . . . . . 1 - 1ATM port card

resetting via AMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 235ATM port cards

displaying information for anESX-3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 235

automatically-created LANE clients . . . . 4 - 21auto-negotiation

ASX and TNX platforms . . . . . . . . . 5 - 179ESX-3000 platforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 178

Index

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual • Part 1 Index - 1

command completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 6command confirmations . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 12context-sensitive help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 5generic query mechanism . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 7list types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 10lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 9partial commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 6querying on a range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 8wild cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 8

AMI command line editing . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 11

BB8ZS coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 27, 5 - 246back-off mechanism

enabling/disabling for PNNI SPVCs 3 - 75enabling/disabling for PNNI SPVPs 3 - 93

backplanedisplaying information for an

ASX-4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 32bandwidth overbooking on an originating path

configuring for nrtVBR . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 27

Index

configuring for rtVBR . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 27BNP notation

displaying for a port identifier . . . . . . 3 - 2boardstats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 46buffer overbooking on an originating path

configuring for nrtVBR . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 27configuring for rtVBR . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 28

Ccanceling an AMI command . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 12carrier detection

displaying for a port . . . . . . .5 - 186, 5 - 200CDV

configuring on a Series C networkmodule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 205

CECdisplaying information for a

TNX-1100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 32displaying information for an

ASX-1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 32displaying information for an

ASX-1200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 32CEC-Plus

configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2channel

creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3

channel indices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 7CLEI code

Common Language EquipmentIdentification (CLEI) . . . . . . . .5 - 77, 5 - 242

configuration commands in AMI . . . . . . . 2 - 4connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 44context-sensitive help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 5current state

displaying for this TCM . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 13

DD4 framing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 26, 5 - 245date

setting on the TCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 10debug commands in AMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 4deleting SVPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 36DRAM

displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 241DS1 BITS interface

configuring coding . . . . . . . . .5 - 27, 5 - 246configuring framing . . . . . . . .5 - 26, 5 - 245configuring output level . . . .5 - 27, 5 - 246

DS1 network modulesconfiguring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 155displaying configuration of . . . . . . . 5 - 157error counter descriptions . . . . . . . . 5 - 159statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 158

DS3 network modulesconfiguring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 163displaying configuration of . . . . . . . 5 - 164

Index - 2 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual • Part 1

displaying for network modulesor port cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 77

SCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 242CLP threshold

setting on a Series C networkmodule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 205

command completion in AMI . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 6command confirmations in AMI . . . . . . . 1 - 12command line editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 11

error counter descriptions . . . . . . . . 5 - 166statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 165

dual SCPsconfiguring the controlling SCP . . . . 5 - 34displaying settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 36

EE1 BITS interface

configuring coding . . . . . . . . .5 - 27, 5 - 246configuring framing . . . . . . . .5 - 26, 5 - 245

Index

E1 network modulesconfiguring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 168displaying configuration of . . . . . . . 5 - 170error counter descriptions . . . . . . . . 5 - 172statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 171

E3 network modulesconfiguring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 174displaying configuration of . . . . . . . 5 - 175error counter descriptions . . . . . . . . 5 - 177statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 176

EFCIconfiguring on Series C network

modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 205setting on Series 1 port cards . . . . . . 5 - 132

EPDsetting on Series 1 port cards . . . . . . 5 - 132

ESF framing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 26, 5 - 245ESI card

displaying the status of . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 14ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 14, 4 - 26ethernet bridge

ethernet bridge fdb . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 2, 4 - 11ethernet bridge fdb dest . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11ethernet bridge fdb dest mcast . . . . . 4 - 11ethernet bridge fdb dest mcast show 4 - 12ethernet bridge fdb dest show . . . . . 4 - 12ethernet bridge fdb flush . . . . . 4 - 2, 4 - 13ethernet bridge fdb show . . . . . 4 - 3, 4 - 14

ethernet bridge stp configurationmodify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 5

ethernet bridge stp configurationshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 6

ethernet bridge stp port . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 7ethernet bridge stp port configuration 4 - 7ethernet bridge stp port

configuration modify . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 7ethernet bridge stp port

configuration show . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 8ethernet bridge stp port status . . . . . . 4 - 9ethernet bridge stp status . . . . . . . . . 4 - 10

ethernet bridge-ASX and TNX platforms 4 - 11ethernet bridge-ESX-3000 platform . . . . . . 4 - 2Ethernet channels

creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 5creating VC pairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 6deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 4displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 7displaying channel indices and

pairing partners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 7undoing VC pairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 8

Ethernet commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1ethernet bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 2, 4 - 11ethernet igmp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 19ethernet lec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 21ethernet mpc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 26ethernet system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 33


ethernet bridge modify . . . . . . 4 - 4, 4 - 15ethernet bridge show . . . . . . . . 4 - 4, 4 - 15ethernet bridge static . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 16ethernet bridge static delete . . . . . . . 4 - 16ethernet bridge static modify . . . . . . 4 - 17ethernet bridge static new . . . . . . . . . 4 - 17ethernet bridge static show . . . . . . . . 4 - 18ethernet bridge stp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 5ethernet bridge stp configuration . . . . 4 - 5

ethernet vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 36ethernet igmp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 19

ethernet igmp routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 19ethernet igmp show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 20

ethernet lecethernet lec arp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 21ethernet lec arp flush . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 21ethernet lec arp show . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 22ethernet lec show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 23ethernet lec show -errors . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 24

Index

ethernet lec show -vcc . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 24ethernet lec statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 25

ethernet mpc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 26ethernet mpc ec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 26ethernet mpc ec flush . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 26ethernet mpc ec show . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 27ethernet mpc ic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 27ethernet mpc ic flush . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 27ethernet mpc ic show . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 28ethernet mpc show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 28ethernet mpc statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 30ethernet mpc statistics -errors . . . . . . 4 - 31ethernet mpc statistics -purge . . . . . . 4 - 32

Ethernet network modulesauto-negotiation feature . . . . . . . . . 5 - 178

ethernet systemethernet system memory . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 33ethernet system memory show . . . . . 4 - 33ethernet system panic . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 34ethernet system panic clear . . . . . . . . 4 - 34ethernet system panic show . . . . . . . 4 - 35

ethernet vlanethernet vlan addports . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 36ethernet vlan delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 37ethernet vlan new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 37ethernet vlan removeports . . . . . . . . 4 - 38ethernet vlan rename . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 38ethernet vlan show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 39

displaying information for anASX-4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 52

displaying information for anESX-3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 52

FAST/POS port carddisplaying application software

information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 59upgrading the software . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 62

FLASHdisplaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 241

flushingLE ARP table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 21MAC address table . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 2, 4 - 13

FramePlus network moduledisplaying advanced configuration . 5 - 68displaying application software

information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 59displaying application version . . . . . 5 - 60displaying boot version . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 60displaying configuration of . . . . . . . . 5 - 68upgrading the software . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 62

Ggeneric query mechanism in AMI . . . . . . . 1 - 7

Hhardware model

displaying for a fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 45HDB3 coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 27, 5 - 246


exiting AMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2

Ffans

displaying information for aTNX-1100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 52



HDCOMPdisplaying version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 53

help messages in AMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 5

IIDE disk area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 241IGMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 19IMA network module

configuring panic action . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 58displaying application software

information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 59

Index

displaying application version . . . . . 5 - 60displaying boot version . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 60displaying panic action . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 61upgrading the software . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 62

IMA network modulestraffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 86

implicit command path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 4Internet Group Management Protocol

(IGMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 19IP interfaces

displaying for TCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 9IP route

adding for TCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 8deleting for TCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 7displaying for TCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 9

JJ2 network modules

configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 181displaying configuration of . . . . . . . 5 - 182error counter descriptions . . . . . . . . 5 - 183statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 183

LLANE clients automatically-created . . . . 4 - 21LE ARP table

flushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 21LEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 21LED model

telnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 16Kerberos authentication . . . . . . . 1 - 17password authentication . . . . . . 1 - 16SecurID authentication . . . . . . . . 1 - 19

login authenticationSecurID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 15, 1 - 19

Mmanufacturing revision number

displaying for a fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 45MPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 26MPOA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 26multicast space

configuring on a switch fabric . . . . . . 5 - 41displaying for a switch fabric . . . . . . 5 - 45

multiple port names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 36Multiple Protocol Clients (MPC)s . . . . . . 4 - 26Multiprotocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 26Multiprotocol Over ATM (MPOA) . . . . . 4 - 26

Nname

setting on the TCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 10network modules

configuring alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 55configuring up or down . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 70displaying alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 56displaying CLEI code . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 77displaying information . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 76


setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 185list types in AMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 10lists in AMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 9login

serial port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 14SecurID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 15userid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 14

displaying revision level . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 76displaying serial number . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 76displaying series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 76displaying the number installed . . . . 5 - 45displaying the number of ports . . . . 5 - 76displaying uptime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 77Series C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 81, 5 - 83Series D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 86, 5 - 90

Index

Series E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 97configuring buffer assignments 5 - 97configuring buffers . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 97configuring custom UBR BCS . 5 - 101

Series LC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 110, 5 - 112Series LE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 117, 5 - 119Series SF1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 123timing support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 76

OOC-48 port cards

traffic statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 116originating paths

adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 26displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 30, 3 - 31

out-of-service ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 39output buffer statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 42overbooking

nrtVBR bandwidth on an originatingpath . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 27

nrtVBR buffer on an originating path 3 - 27rtVBR bandwidth on an originating

path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 27rtVBR buffer on an originating path 3 - 28

Ppairing partners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 7panic condition on a FAST/POS port

card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 71

modifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 64PNNI SPVC

creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 73deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 69, 3 - 71, 3 - 72obtaining a destination NSAP . . . . . 3 - 19

PNNI SPVCsdisabling rerouting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 75displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 77displaying advanced information . . 3 - 78enabling rerouting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 75enabling/disabling back-off

mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 75PNNI SPVPs

disabling rerouting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 93enabling rerouting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 93enabling/disabling back-off

mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 93port

displaying admin status . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 76displaying speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 76out of service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 39

port and priority traffic informationdisplaying on a Series 1 port card . 5 - 229displaying on a Series 2 port card . 5 - 232displaying on a Series C network

module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 206displaying on a Series D network

module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 211


panic dump filedisplaying on a FAST/POS port card 5 - 73saving on a FAST/POS port card . . . 5 - 73

panic flagclearing on a FAST/POS port card . 5 - 72

partial commands in AMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 6paths

Series D traffic statistics . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 93PMP PNNI SPVC

creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 64

displaying on a Series E networkmodule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 216

displaying on a Series LC networkmodule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 220

displaying on a Series LE networkmodule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 226

displaying on a Series SF1 networkmodule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 223

port cardsdisplaying CLEI code . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 77

Index

displaying information . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 76displaying revision level . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 76displaying serial number . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 76displaying series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 76displaying the number of ports . . . . 5 - 76displaying uptime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 77Series 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 125

configuring custom UBR BCS . 5 - 127Series 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 136

configuring custom UBR BCS . 5 - 142timing support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 76

port namesseparating multiples with quotes . . . 4 - 36

port queue sizeconfiguring on a Series C network

module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 205port state

configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 185port traffic

statistics for Series 1 port cards . . . . 5 - 230statistics for Series 2 port cards . . . . 5 - 234statistics for Series C . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 207statistics for Series D . . . . . . 5 - 213, 5 - 214statistics for Series E . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 218statistics for Series LC . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 221statistics for Series LE . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 227statistics for Series SF1 . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 224

primary clock source

QQOS

displaying VC information . . . . . . . . 3 - 14QOS expansion table

creating an entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 45deleting an entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 44displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 46

QOS extension tablecreating an entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 48deleting an entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 47displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 48modifying an entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 47

querying on a range in AMI . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 8queue length

Series D network modules . . . .5 - 88, 5 - 94

RRDI (Remote Defect Indication) . . . . . . . . 3 - 20RefQual failure

clearing for a timing source . . . . . . . . 5 - 28Remote Defect Indication (RDI) . . . . . . . . 3 - 20revertive switching

enabling/disabling on a TCM . . . . . 5 - 246revertive timing delay

configuring for TCM . . . . . . . .5 - 26, 5 - 246disabling for TCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 26enabling for TCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 26

S


TCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 26PVC

creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3

PVCsdisplaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 15displaying advanced information . . 3 - 16

SCPdisplaying information . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 240displaying PROM level . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 241displaying revision level . . . . . . . . . 5 - 241displaying slot location . . . .5 - 241, 5 - 242displaying statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 243

secondary clock sourceTCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 26

Index

SecurIDpersonal identification number

(PIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 15, 1 - 19SecurID authentication . . . . . . . . . .1 - 15, 1 - 19self-test information

Series D network modules . . . . . . . . 5 - 80Series E network modules . . . . . . . . . 5 - 80

self-testsSeries D network modules . . . . . . . . 5 - 78

aborting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 79starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 78

Series E network modules . . . . . . . . . 5 - 78aborting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 79starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 78

serial numberdisplaying for a fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 45displaying for a TCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 13

Series 1 port cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 125channel traffic statistics . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 126configuring custom UBR BCS . . . . . 5 - 127configuring EFCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 132configuring EPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 132configuring traffic . . . . . . . . .5 - 132, 5 - 228displaying port and priority traffic

information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 229displaying traffic memory models . 5 - 131displaying traffic model

information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 134

configuring port queue size . . . . . . 5 - 205configuring traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 204displaying port and priority traffic

information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 206displaying statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 85displaying traffic memory models . . 5 - 82displaying traffic model information 5 - 84setting the CLP threshold . . . . . . . . 5 - 205

Series D network modules . . . . . . . 5 - 86, 5 - 90channel traffic statistics . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 86configuring traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 208displaying port and priority traffic

information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 211displaying traffic memory models . . 5 - 89displaying traffic model information 5 - 95path traffic statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 93queue length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 88, 5 - 94self-test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 78self-test information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 80traffic statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 87, 5 - 96

Series E network modules . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 97configuring buffer assignments . . . . 5 - 97configuring buffers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 97configuring custom UBR BCS . . . . . 5 - 101configuring traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 215displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 106displaying port and priority traffic

information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 216


setting traffic memory models . . . . 5 - 132Series 2 port cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 136

configuring custom UBR BCS . . . . . 5 - 142configuring traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 231displaying port and priority traffic

information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 232displaying queue information . . . . 5 - 233

Series C network modules . . . . . . .5 - 81, 5 - 83configuring CDV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 205configuring EFCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 205

displaying queue information . . . . 5 - 217modifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 105self-test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 78self-test information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 80

Series LC network modules . . . . 5 - 110, 5 - 112channel traffic statistics . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 110configuring traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 219displaying port and priority traffic

information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 220displaying traffic memory models . 5 - 111

Index

displaying traffic modelinformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 114

path traffic statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 113traffic statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 115

Series LE network modules . . . 5 - 117, 5 - 119channel traffic statistics . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 117configuring traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 225displaying port and priority traffic

information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 226displaying traffic memory models . 5 - 118displaying traffic model information

on an ESX-3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 121path traffic statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 120traffic statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 122

Series PC1port cardsOC-48 traffic statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 116

Series SF1 network modules . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 123configuring traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 222displaying port and priority traffic

information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 223displaying traffic information . . . . . 5 - 124

Series1 port cardspath traffic statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 133

Smart Permanent Virtual Circuit . . . . . . . 3 - 49Smart Permanent Virtual Path . . . . . . . . . 3 - 88SNMP traps

adding for TCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 15deleting for TCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 14

SPVC trapsconfiguring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 51, 3 - 96

SPVCsSPANS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 82

SPVP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 88SPVPC (Smart Permanent Virtual Path

Connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 88statistics

disabling for Frame Relay (modulelevel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 66

disabling for FUNI (module level) . . 5 - 66displaying on Series C network

modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 85DS1 network module . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 158DS3 network module . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 165E1 network module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 171E3 network module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 176enabling for Frame Relay (module

level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 66enabling for FUNI (module level) . . 5 - 66F5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 21J2 network module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 183port traffic for Series 1 port cards . . 5 - 230port traffic for Series 2 port cards . . 5 - 234port traffic for Series C . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 207port traffic for Series D . . . . .5 - 213, 5 - 214port traffic for Series E . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 218port traffic for Series LC . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 221


displaying for TCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 15SONET network modules

configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 191displaying configuration of . . . . . . . 5 - 193displaying status of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 194error counter descriptions . . . . . . . . 5 - 196statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 196

speeddisplaying for a port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 76

SPVC (Smart Permanent Virtual Circuit) 3 - 49

port traffic for Series LE . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 227port traffic for Series SF1 . . . . . . . . . 5 - 224SONET network module . . . . . . . . . 5 - 196TCM ICMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 17TCM interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 19TCM IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 21TCM TCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 23TCM UDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 24TP25 network module . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 203virtual channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 18

Index

virtual path terminators . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 34virtual paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 43

statistics commands for TCM . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 16SVP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 88SVx/SPVx Call Preservation

SVx/SPVx dropped calls . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 37SVx/SPVx state transfer . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 37SVx/SPVx transfer status . . . . . . . . . 5 - 37

switch fabricdisplaying configuration of . . . . . . . . 5 - 45displaying manufacturing revision

number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 45displaying multicast space . . . . . . . . 5 - 45displaying serial number . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 45

switch fabric temperaturedisplaying for a TNX-1100 . . . . . . . . 5 - 47displaying for an ASX-1000 . . . . . . . . 5 - 47setting thresholds for a TNX-1100 . . 5 - 48setting thresholds for an ASX-1000 . 5 - 48setting thresholds for an ASX-1200 . 5 - 48

Switched Virtual Path (SVP) . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 88

TTAXI network modules

displaying configuration of . . . . . . . 5 - 200loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 199

TCMconfiguring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2

TCM serial portdisplaying configuration of . . . . . . . . 5 - 12

TCM slotdisplaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 13

TCM software versiondisplaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 13

TCM time zonesetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 10

TCM timing mode configuration 5 - 25, 5 - 245TCM type

displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 13TCM uptime

displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 13Technical Assistance Center (TAC)

contacting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiitemperature sensors

displaying information . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 253terminating paths

adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 26displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 30, 3 - 31

through pathadding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 36deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 36

through pathsdisplaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 41displaying advanced information . . 3 - 42

time zonedisplaying for a TCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 13


displaying the status of . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 13TCM date

setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 10TCM external inputs

displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 13TCM hardware version

displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 13TCM name

displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 13setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 10

setting on the TCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 10Timing Control Module (TCM) . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2

configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2timing information

displaying for TCM . . . . . . . .5 - 30, 5 - 249timing reference

changing the administrativestatus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 28, 5 - 247

Index

timing referencesdisplaying for TCM . . . . . . . . 5 - 29, 5 - 248modifying for TCM . . . . . . . . 5 - 28, 5 - 247

timing sourceclearing a RefQual failure . . . . . . . . . 5 - 28

TP25 network modulesdisplaying configuration of . . . . . . . 5 - 202error counter descriptions . . . . . . . . 5 - 203loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 201statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 203

trafficIMA network modules . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 86

traffic contracts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 106traffic information

displaying for SF1 networkmodules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 124

traffic memory modelsdisplaying on Series 1 port cards . . 5 - 131displaying on Series C network

modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 82displaying on Series D network

modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 89displaying on Series LC network

modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 111displaying on Series LE network

modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 118setting on Series 1 port cards . . . . . . 5 - 132

traffic model information

Series LC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 115Series LE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 122

transmit BITS1displaying the source . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 252modifying the source . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 251

transmit BITS2displaying the source . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 252modifying the source . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 251

trapsconfiguring for SPVCs . . . . . . .3 - 51, 3 - 96

Uunconfiguring ports prior to deletion . . . 4 - 37UPC contract

creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 110creating ABR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 111creating CBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 111creating Frame Relay . . . . . .3 - 107, 3 - 109creating UBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 112creating VBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 112deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 106displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 117displaying advanced information . 3 - 118displaying load-balancing . . . . . . . . 3 - 121displaying traffic management flags 3 - 120Frame Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 107

Vvirtual channels


displaying on a Series LC networkmodule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 114

displaying on an ESX-3000 . . . . . . . 5 - 121displaying on Series 1 port cards . . 5 - 134displaying on Series C network

modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 84displaying on Series D network

modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 95traffic statistics

Series D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 96

advanced traffic statistics . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 12displaying QOS information . . . . . . . 3 - 14packet statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 13Series 1 port cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 126Series D traffic statistics . . . . . .5 - 86, 5 - 87Series LC traffic statistics . . . . . . . . . 5 - 110Series LE traffic statistics . . . . . . . . . 5 - 117traffic statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11

Index

virtual pathadding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 36deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 36displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 41displaying advanced information . . 3 - 42

virtual path terminatorcreating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 26deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 24displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 30displaying advanced information . . 3 - 31displaying overbooking information 3 - 32displaying QoS extension

information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 33modifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 25

virtual path terminatorsstatistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 34

virtual pathsadvanced traffic statistics . . . . . . . . . 3 - 39packet statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 40Series 1 port card traffic statistics . . 5 - 133Series LC traffic statistics . . . . . . . . . 5 - 113Series LE traffic statistics . . . . . . . . . 5 - 120traffic statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 38

VLANsnone configured on switch . . . . . . . . 4 - 39with existing name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 37

W


wild cards in AMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 8

AMIconfRef7-1part1

Documents

Transcript of AMIconfRef7-1part1